Vip Core

VIP-CORE
Reference Manual
© 2001, 2002 Landmark Graphics Corporation
Part No. 159681 R2003.4

This publication has been provided pursuant to an agreement containing restrictions on its use. The publication is also
protected by Federal copyright law. No part of this publication may be copied or distributed, transmitted, transcribed,
stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any human or computer language, in any form or by any means,
electronic, magnetic, manual, or otherwise, or disclosed to third parties without the express written permission of:
Landmark Graphics Corporation

Building 1, Suite 200, 2101 CityWest, Houston, Texas 77042, USA
P.O. Box 42806, Houston, Texas 77242, USA
Phone: 713-839-2000
FAX: 713-839-2401
Web: www.lgc.com
Trademark Notice
Landmark, the Landmark logo, 3D Drill View, 3D Drill View KM, 3DVIEW, Active Field Surveillance, Active
Reservoir Surveillance, ARIES, Automate, BLITZ, BLITZPAK, CasingSeat, COMPASS, Contouring Assistant,
DataStar, DBPlot, Decision Suite, Decisionarium, DecisionDesktop, DecisionSpace, DepthTeam, DepthTeam
Explorer, DepthTeam Express, DepthTeam Extreme, DepthTeam Interpreter, DESKTOP-PVT, DESKTOP-VIP,
DEX, DFW, DIMS, Discovery, Drillability Suite, DrillModel, DrillVision, DSS, Dynamic Surveillance System,
EarthCube, EdgeCa$h, eLandmark, EPM, e-workspace, FastTrack, FZAP!, GeoDataLoad, GeoGraphix, GeoGraphix
Exploration System, GeoLink, GES, GESXplorer, GMAplus, GrandBasin, GRIDGENR, I2 Enterprise, iDims,
IsoMap, LandScape, LeaseMap, LMK Resources, LogEdit, LogM, LogPrep, Make Great Decisions, MathPack,
Model Builder, MyLandmark, MyWorkspace, OpenBooks, OpenExplorer, OpenJournal, OpenSGM, OpenTutor,
OpenVision, OpenWorks, OpenWorks Well File, PAL, Parallel-VIP, PetroBank, PetroWorks, PlotView, Point
Gridding Plus, Pointing Dispatcher, PostStack, PostStack ESP, PRIZM, PROFILE, ProMAX, ProMAX 2D, ProMAX
3D, ProMAX 3DPSDM, ProMAX MVA, ProMAX VSP, pStaX, QUICKDIF, RAVE, Real Freedom, Reservoir
Framework Builder, RESev, ResMap, RMS, SafeStart, SCAN, SeisCube, SeisMap, SeisModel, SeisSpace,
SeisVision, SeisWell, SeisWorks, SeisXchange, SigmaView, SpecDecomp, StrataMap, Stratamodel, StratAmp,
StrataSim, StratWorks, StressCheck, STRUCT, SynTool, SystemStart, T2B, TDQ, TERAS, Total Drilling
Performance, TOW/cs, TOW/cs The Oilfield Workstation, Trend Form Gridding, Turbo Synthetics, VIP, VIP-COMP,
VIP-CORE, VIP-DUAL, VIP-ENCORE, VIP-EXECUTIVE, VIP-Local Grid Refinement, VIP-POLYMER, VIP-
THERM, WavX, Web OpenWorks, Well Editor, Wellbase, Wellbore Planner, WELLCAT, WELLPLAN,
WellXchange, wOW, Xsection, ZAP!, Z-MAP Plus are trademarks, registered trademarks or service marks of
Landmark Graphics Corporation.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Note
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a
commitment by Landmark Graphics Corporation. Landmark Graphics Corporation assumes no responsibility for any
error that may appear in this manual. Some states or jurisdictions do not allow disclaimer of expressed or implied
warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
Chapter
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Preface
About This Manual
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
The Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
The Chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
Data Formatting Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
Related Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
Chapter 1
Data Overview
1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1.1 VIP-COMP Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1.2 VIP-ENCORE Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.1.3 VIP-DUAL Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.1.4 VIP-POLYMER Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.1.5 VIP-THERM Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.1.6 Shared Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.2 Typical Data Requirements to Initialize a Simulation Study . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.2.1 Geological Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.2.2 Reservoir Rock Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.2.3 Hydrocarbon Fluid Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.3 Data Deck Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.4 Input Data Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.5 Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.5.1 General Utility Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1.5.1.1 Comment Lines (C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1.5.1.2 Read Data from an External File (INCLUDE) . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1.5.1.3 Stop Reading Data from the Current INCLUDE File
(ENDINC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
R2003.4 - Landmark iii

VIP-CORE REFERENCE MANUAL
1.5.1.4 Read Array Data from a VDB File (VDB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

1.5.1.5 Echo Print On (LIST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1.5.1.6 Echo Print Off (NOLIST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1.5.1.7 Skip Data On (SKIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1.5.1.8 Skip Data Off (NOSKIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1.5.1.9 Number of Printed Lines Per Page (NLINES) . . . . . . . . . 1-16
1.5.1.10 Columns To Be Read (NCOL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
1.5.1.11 Data Line Continuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
1.5.2 Array Input Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
1.5.2.1 Constant Array Input Option (CON) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
1.5.2.2 X (or R) Direction Array Value Variation
(XVAR/RVAR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
1.5.2.3 Y (or Theta) Direction Array Value Variation
(YVAR/THVAR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
1.5.2.4 Z Direction Array Value Variation (ZVAR) . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
1.5.2.5 Full Array Input Option (VALUE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
1.5.2.6 Automatic Generation of Values for Layers 2 - Nz
(LAYER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
1.5.2.7 Block Depths From Origin (DIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
1.5.2.8 Define New Array From Previously Defined Array
(MULT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
1.5.2.9 Directional Relative Permeability Option (dir) . . . . . . . 1-29
1.5.3 Corner Point Array Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
1.5.3.1 X Direction Variation by Layer (LNXVAR) . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
1.5.3.2 Y Direction Variation by Layer (LNYVAR) . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
1.5.3.3 Z Direction Variation by Layer (LNZVAR) . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
1.5.3.4 Values by Layer (LNVAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
1.5.3.5 Replicate Concurrent Point Arrays (COPY) . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
1.5.4 Array Modification Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
1.5.4.1 Modify by a Constant (MOD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
1.5.4.2 Modify Depth by a Constant (MODLYR) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
1.5.4.3 Replace Selected Values (VMOD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
1.5.5 Unformatted (BINARY) Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
1.6 Connection Transmissibility Modification (MULT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
1.7 Inter/Intra Region Transmissibility Multiplier (MULTIR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44
1.8 Named Fault/Region Transmissibility Multiplier (MULTFL) . . . . . . . . . . 1-45
Chapter 2
Initialization Data
2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
2.2 Initialization Utility Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
2.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
2.2.1.1 Initialization (INIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
2.2.1.2 Change Default Dimensions (DIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
iv Landmark - R2003.4
2.2.1.3 Descriptive Run Information (TITLEn) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52

2.2.1.4 Date (DATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
2.2.1.5 End-of-File Marker (END) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
2.2.2 Results File Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
2.2.2.1 Grid Data Written for Post-Processing (MAP) . . . . . . . . 2-53
2.2.2.2 Mole Fraction Data Written for Post-Processing
(MAPX, MAPY, MAPZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
2.2.2.3 Full Size Arrays to VDB File (NOVDBPACK) . . . . . . . . . 2-60
2.2.2.4 Map File Instead of VDB File (NOVDB)
VIP-COMP and VIP-ENCORE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
2.2.2.5 Grid Data Written for Post-Processing to SIMOUT
Map File (MAPOLD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
2.2.3 Grid System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
2.2.3.1 Rectangular (Cartesian) Grid System
(NX, NY, NZ, NCOMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
2.2.3.2 Radial (Cylindrical) Grid System
(NR, NTHETA, NZ, RI, NCOMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
2.2.3.3 Single-Well Gridded Wellbore Simulation (WBSIM) . . . . . . . .2-67
2.2.3.4 Automatic Grid Setup for Pattern Elements
(VIP-THERM Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
2.2.4 Physical Property Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
2.2.4.1 VIP-COMP or VIP-ENCORE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
2.2.4.2 VIP-THERM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
2.2.4.3 Pore Volume Representation (PVEXP, PVLINEAR)
(Therm only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
2.2.5 Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
2.2.5.1 Metric Units for Input and Output (METRIC) . . . . . . . . . 2-81
2.2.5.2 Laboratory Units for Input and Output (LAB) . . . . . . . . 2-82
2.2.5.3 Print by Cross-Sections (CROSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82
2.2.5.4 Layer Output in Initialization Region Summary
(REGNZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82
2.2.5.5 Hydrocarbon Pore Volume and Bulk Volume Tables
(HCPVTAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82
2.2.6 Formulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83
2.2.6.1 Gas-Water Option for VIP-ENCORE (GASWATER) . . . 2-83
2.2.6.2 Water-Oil Option for VIP-ENCORE (WATEROIL) . . . . 2-83
2.2.6.3 Black-Oil Option (BLACKOIL) (VIP-ENCORE) . . . . . . . 2-84
2.2.6.4 Two-Point Upstream Weighting (TWOPT) . . . . . . . . . . 2-84
2.2.6.5 Nine-Point Finite Difference Approximations (NINEPT) 2-85
2.2.6.6 SEBOUND option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85
2.2.6.7 Compositional SORM Option (CSORM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-86
2.2.7 Saturation Tables and Hysteresis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87
2.2.7.1 Two-Point Scaling of Relative Permeabilities (END2P) . 2-87
2.2.7.2 Stone’s Three-Phase kro (STONE1, STONE2) . . . . . . . . . 2-87
2.2.7.3 Saturation Weighted Three-Phase kro (KROINT) . . . . . 2-89
2.2.7.4 Water-oil Capillary Pressure Hysteresis (PCHYSW) . . . 2-89
R2003.4 - Landmark v
2.2.7.5
Gas-Oil Capillary Pressure Hysteresis (PCHYSG) . . . . . 2-90
2.2.7.6
Oil Relative Permeability Hysteresis (RPHYSO) . . . . . . 2-91
2.2.7.7
Gas Relative Permeability Hysteresis (RPHYSG) . . . . . 2-91
2.2.7.8
Relative Permeability Hysteresis Tolerances
(RPHYST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92
2.2.7.9 Leverett J-Function (JFUNC) (Not available with
SDFUNC option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92
2.2.7.10 Rock Compaction (COMPACT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-93
2.2.7.11 Freeze Pcwo at Initial Value (FRZPCW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-93
2.2.7.12 Freeze Pcgo at Initial Value (FRZPCG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94
2.2.8 Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94
2.2.8.1 Nonequilibrium Initialization (NONEQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94
2.2.8.2 Gridblock Center Initialization (GBC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94
2.2.8.3 Integrated Saturation Initialization (INTSAT) . . . . . . . . . 2-94
2.2.8.4 Integrated Saturation Initialization (VAITS) . . . . . . . . . . 2-95
2.2.8.5 Thickness Center (THCNTR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96
2.2.8.6 Do Not Initialize (NOINIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96
2.2.8.7 Totally Refined ROOT Grid (NOROOT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96
2.2.8.8 Grid Deactivation (DEACTIVATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97
2.2.9 Off-Band Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97
2.2.9.1 Pinchout Gridblock Connections (PINCHOUT) . . . . . . . 2-97
2.2.9.2 Fault Modeling (FAULTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98
2.2.9.3 Completing the Circle in Radial Grids (FLOW360) . . . . 2-98
2.2.10 Vertical Equilibrium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-99
2.2.10.1 Water-Oil Vertical Equilibrium (VEWO) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-99
2.2.10.2 Gas-Oil Vertical Equilibrium (VEGO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-100
2.2.10.3 Vertical Equilibrium Directional Relative
Permeability (DRELPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-100
2.2.10.4 Capillary Gravity Equilibrium (VEITS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-101
2.2.11 Fluid Property Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102
2.2.11.1 Energy Minimization Phase Equilibrium (GIBBS)
(VIP-COMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102
2.2.11.2 Near Critical Fluid Property Adjustment (IFT)
(VIP-COMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102
2.2.11.3 Suppresses Table Data Checking (NOCHK) . . . . . . . . 2-103
2.2.11.4 PVT Interpolation for VIP-ENCORE (BOTINT) . . . . . 2-103
2.2.11.5 Flash Calculation Method (FLASH) (VIP-COMP) . . . 2-104
2.2.11.6 Super-Critical Equilibration (CRINIT) (VIP-COMP) . 2-105
2.2.11.7 Dry Gas Simulation (DRYGAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-106
2.2.11.8 Limit on Rate of Increase of Solution GOR (DRSDT) . 2-106
2.2.12 Corner-Point Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-107
2.2.12.1 Corner-Point Simulation Grid (CORNER) . . . . . . . . . 2-107
2.2.12.2 Fault Connections from Corner-Point Data
(CORTOL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108
2.2.12.3 Data Checking Corner-Point Grid Data (CORCHK) . 2-109
2.2.13 Dual Porosity with Optional Dual Permeability (VIP-DUAL) . 2-110
vi Landmark - R2003.4
2.2.13.1 Dual-Porosity/Permeability Option (DUAL) . . . . . . . 2-110

2.2.13.2 Matrix Pseudo Capillary Pressure (PSEUDO) . . . . . . . 2-111
2.2.13.3 Oil-Gas Phase Diffusivities (DIFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-112
2.2.14 Fluid Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-113
2.2.14.1 Hydrocarbon Tracking Option (TRACK) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-113
2.2.14.2 Names of Tracked Hydrocarbons (NAMES) . . . . . . . . 2-113
2.2.14.3 Transition Block Assignments (CONTACT) . . . . . . . . 2-114
2.2.14.4 Water Tracking Option (TRACKW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-115
2.2.14.5 Names of Tracked Water Types (NAMESW) . . . . . . . 2-115
2.2.15 Todd and Longstaff Miscible Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-116
2.2.15.1 Miscible Option Specifications (MIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-116
2.2.15.2 Miscibility Transition Zone (ALPHA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-116
2.2.16 Time-Dependent Compressibility - Creep Option . . . . . . . . . . 2-118
2.2.16.1 Reversible Creep (CREEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-118
2.2.17 Hydraulic Fracture Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-118
2.2.17.1 Fracture Blocks (HYDFRAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-118
2.2.18 Polymer Injection Option (VIP-POLYMER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-119
2.2.18.1 Initialize for Polymer Injection (POLYMER) . . . . . . . . 2-119
2.2.19 Thermal Option (VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-119
2.2.19.1 THERMAL Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-119
2.2.19.2 WATIDEAL Card (Compositional Model) . . . . . . . . . 2-119
2.2.19.3 FLOWS Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-120
2.2.20 Velocity Dependent Relative Permeability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-121
2.2.21 Change Units for Solution Gas-Oil Ratio (RSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-124
Chapter 3
Print Control
3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-125
3.2 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-125
3.2.1 Print Everything (ALL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-125
3.2.2 Print Nothing (NONE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-125
3.3 Individual Group Print Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-126
3.3.1 Input Array Printing (PRINT ARRAYS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-126
3.3.2 Coefficient Array Printing (PRINT COEFS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-127
3.3.3 Compositional Data Printing (PRINT COMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-131
3.3.4 Corner-Point Data Printing (PRINT CORNER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-131
3.3.5 Equilibrium Data Printing (PRINT EQUIL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-132
3.3.6 Fault Data Printing (PRINT FAULTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-132
3.3.7 Influx Data Printing (PRINT INFLUX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-133
3.3.8 Initialization Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-134
3.3.9 Region Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-139
3.3.10 Separation Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-139
3.3.11 Tabular Data - Saturation and PVT tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-139
3.4 Rescaled Saturation Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-141
R2003.4 - Landmark vii

3.4.1 Print Rescaled Saturation Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-141

3.4.2 Print Rescaled Fracture Saturation Tables (VIP-DUAL) . . . . . . . 3-142
Chapter 4
Tables
4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-145
4.2 Equilibrium Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-145
4.2.1 Saturation Pressure is Constant by Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
4.2.1.1 IEQUIL for Three-Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
4.2.1.2 IEQUIL for GASWATER Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-148
4.2.1.3 IEQUIL for WATEROIL Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-149
4.2.2 Saturation Pressure Varies with Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-151
4.2.3 Equilibrium for User-Specified Saturations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-151
4.2.4 Saturation Pressures for VIP-ENCORE (BPTAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-151
4.2.5 Saturation Pressure Variation with Depth for
Modified Black Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152
4.3 Saturation-Dependent Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-155
4.3.1 Saturation-Dependent Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157
4.3.1.1 Water-Oil Saturation for the Matrix (SWT) . . . . . . . . . . 4-158
4.3.1.2 Gas-Oil Saturation for the Matrix (SGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-163
4.3.1.3 Gas-Dependent Water Relative Permeability for the
Matrix (SGWT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-167
4.3.1.4 Water-Oil Saturation for the Fracture (SWTF) . . . . . . . . 4-168
4.3.1.5 Gas-Oil Saturation for the Fracture (SGTF) . . . . . . . . . . 4-169
4.3.1.6 Gas-Dependent Water Relative Permeability for the
Fracture (SGWTF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-170
4.3.1.7 Oil Phase Hysteresis Option (SOTR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-171
4.3.1.8 Gas Phase Hysteresis Option (SGTR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-173
4.3.1.9 Gas Remobilization Option (GASRM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-175
4.3.1.10 Normalized Saturation-Dependent Functions . . . . . . 4-179
4.3.1.11 Vertical Equilibrium Pseudo-Relative
Permeabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-179
4.3.2 Saturation-Dependent Functions (VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-180
4.3.3 Temperature-Dependent Endpoints (VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . 4-183
4.3.4 Water-Oil Hysteresis (Reference 32) (VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . 4-185
4.4 Equation of State PVT Property Data (VIP-COMP or VIP-THERM) . . . . 4-188
4.4.1 Reservoir Equation of State (EOS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-189
4.4.2 Component Names (COMPONENTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-191
4.4.3 Component Characteristics (PROPERTIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-192
4.4.4 Binary Interaction Coefficients (DJK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-196
4.4.5 Lohrenz-Bray-Clark Viscosity Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-198
4.4.6 HSTAR Card (VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-198
4.4.7 Separator Equation of State (EOSSEP)
(VIP-COMP or VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-199
viii Landmark - R2003.4

4.4.8 Standing-Katz Density Coefficients (STKZDN) (VIP-COMP) . . 4-201

4.4.9 Binary Interaction Coefficients for Separators (DJKSEP)
(VIP-COMP or VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-202
4.4.10 End of EOS data (ENDEOS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-205
4.4.11 Non-EOS PVT Property Data (VIP-THERM
Compositional Model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-208
4.4.11.1 Oil Phase Viscosity Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-209
4.4.11.2 Gas Phase Viscosity Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-213
4.4.11.3 Component Oil Density Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-215
4.4.11.4 Component Enthalpy Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-217
4.4.11.5 Component K-value Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-219
4.4.12 Initial Fluid Composition Data (VIP-COMP or VIP-THERM) . 4-222
4.4.12.1 Constant Equilibrium Region Oil Composition
(OILMF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-223
4.4.12.2 Constant Equilibrium Region Gas Composition
(GASMF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-223
4.4.12.3 Composition Varies with Depth (COMPOSITION) . . 4-224
4.4.12.4 Areal Composition Variation (COMPOSITION) . . . . 4-226
4.4.13 Pedersen Viscosity Correlation (VISPE) (VIP-COMP) . . . . . . . 4-228
4.4.14 Gas Plant Data Input (GASPLANT)
(VIP-COMP or VIP-ENCORE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-230
4.4.15 Carbon Dioxide Solubility in Water Option (CO2TAB)
(VIP-COMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-232
4.5 Black Oil PVT + (VIP-ENCORE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-234
4.5.1 Black Oil Laboratory Data (VIP-ENCORE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-236
4.5.2 Black Oil PVT Data (BOTAB) (VIP-ENCORE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-239
4.5.2.1 Three Phase Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-239
4.5.2.2 WATEROIL Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-246
4.5.3 Gas PVT Data for the GASWATER Option (BGTAB)
(VIP-ENCORE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-249
4.5.4 Modified Black Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-251
4.5.4.1 BOETAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-251
4.5.4.2 BOOTAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-259
4.5.4.3 BODTAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-264
4.5.4.4 BOGTAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-266
4.5.4.5 BDGTAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-270
4.5.4.6 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-272
4.6 K-value Tabular Data (VIP-ENCORE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-277
4.6.1 Start of K-Value Data Input (KVALUES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-278
4.6.2 K-Value Component Names (COMPONENTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-278
4.6.3 K-Value Component Molecular Weights (PROPERTIES) . . . . . 4-278
4.6.4 End of K-Value Components (ENDKV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-279
4.6.5 K-Value Tables (KVTAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-280
4.6.6 Initial Fluid Composition Data (VIP-ENCORE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-286
4.6.7 Example of K-Value Input Data (VIP-ENCORE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-286
R2003.4 - Landmark ix
4.7 Dead Oil PVT Property Data (VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-287

4.7.1 Dead Oil PVT Property Tables Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-287
4.7.2 Dead Oil PVT Property Correlations Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-290
4.8 Surface Separation Data (VIP-COMP or VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-294
4.8.1 EOS Separator Data (SEPARATOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-294
4.8.2 Surface Separator OMEGA Data (OMEGAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-296
4.8.3 Surface Separator Binary Interaction Coefficients (DJKSEP) . . . 4-297
4.8.4 Surface Separator Volume Shift Factor (VSHFTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-297
4.9 Surface Separation Data with BOTAB PVT Data (VIP-ENCORE) . . . . . . 4-298
4.9.1 Default Separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-299
4.9.2 Separator K-Value Input (SEPARATOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-299
4.9.3 Separator Test Data Input (SEPTEST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-303
4.9.4 Black-oil Separator Data Input (BOSEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-305
4.10 Separator Data with KVTAB PVT Data (VIP-ENCORE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-306
4.10.1 K-Values Separation Data (SEPARATOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-308
4.11 Water Property Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-310
4.11.1 Region Constants (PVTW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-310
4.11.2 Salinity-Dependent Data (PVTWSAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-311
4.12 Compaction Tables (CMT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-312
4.13 Water Induced Rock Compaction Tables (WIRCT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-313
4.14 Three and Four Component Miscible Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-315
4.14.1 Solvent PVT Properties (SLVTAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-317
4.14.2 Miscibility Pressure Table (MISPTB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-318
4.14.3 Solvent Molecular Weight (MWS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-320
4.15 Matrix-Fracture Transfer (VIP-DUAL) (Available in
VIP-COMP or VIP-ENCORE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-321
4.15.1 Surface Tension Ratio Tables (SIGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-321
4.15.2 Gas-Oil Gravity Drainage Parameter (BETAG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-322
4.16 Hydraulic Fracture Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-323
4.16.1 Beta (Turbulance) Factors (HYDBETA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-323
4.17 Equation of State Interpolation Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-324
4.17.1 EOS Interpolation Option (EOSINT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-327
4.17.2 Temperature Entries of EOS Interpolation Tables
(TEMPERATURE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-329
4.17.3 Maximum Pressure Entry of EOS Interpolation Tables
(PMAX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-329
4.17.4 Minimum Pressure Entry of EOS Interpolation Tables (PMIN) 4-330
4.17.5 Composition Entries of EOS Interpolation Tables (CMP) . . . . . 4-330
4.17.6 Coefficients of Interpolation Function (COEFFICIENTS) . . . . . 4-331
4.17.7 Maximum Number of Outer Iterations (ITNMAX) . . . . . . . . . . 4-332
4.17.8 Minimum Increment of the Interpolation Function (DELTA) . 4-333
4.17.9 Oil and Gas Composition Output (OUTPUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-334
x Landmark - R2003.4
4.17.10 Automatic Generation of Composition Entries of EOS

Interpolation Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-335
4.17.10.1 Swelling PVT Test Simulation (SWELLTEST) . . . . . . 4-335
4.17.10.2 Differential Expansion PVT Test Simulation
(DIFEXPTEST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-337
4.17.10.3 Constant Volume Depletion PVT Test Simulation
(CONVDPTEST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-340
4.17.10.4 Multiple Contact PVT Test Simulation
(MULCONTEST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-343
4.18 Fracture Modeling (VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-345
4.18.1 Porosity Deformation Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-346
4.18.2 Permeability Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-348
4.18.2.1 Method of Beattie, Boberg, and McNab . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-348
4.18.2.2 SIMTECH Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-348
4.19 Rock Heat Capacity Tables (VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-348
4.20 Chemical Reactions (REACTION Card) (VIP-THERM Compositional) 4-349
Chapter 5
Grid Data Arrays
5.1 Array Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-355
5.2 Start of Array Data (ARRAYS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-357
5.3 Grid Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-358
5.3.1 X (R) Non-Corner Point Grid Dimension (DX, DXB, DR, R) . . . 5-358
5.3.2 X Direction Corner Point Location (XCORN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-359
5.3.3 Y (THETA) Non-Corner Point Grid Dimension
(DY, DYB, DTHETA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-361
5.3.4 Y Direction Corner Point Location (YCORN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-361
5.4 Gross Thickness - Z grid dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-363
5.4.1 Gross Vertical Thickness, Non-Corner Point Grid (DZ) . . . . . . . 5-363
5.4.2 Gross Stratum Thickness, Non-Corner Point Grid (DZB) . . . . . 5-363
5.4.3 Corner Point Gross Vertical Thickness (DZCORN) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-364
5.4.4 Corner Point Gross Stratum Thickness (DZBCOR) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-364
5.4.5 Depth Corner Point Gross Stratum Thickness (DZVCOR) . . . . . 5-365
5.5 Net Thickness - Z Grid Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-365
5.5.1 Net Vertical Thickness, Non-Corner Point Grid (DZNET) . . . . . 5-365
5.5.2 Net Stratum Thickness, Non-Corner Point Grid (DZBNET) . . . 5-366
5.5.3 Ratio Net Vertical Thickness to Gross Thickness (NETGRS) . . . 5-366
5.5.4 Fracture Block Net to Gross Vertical Thickness Ratio (NETGF) 5-366
5.6 Depth - Non-Corner Point Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-368
5.6.1 Depth to Top of Gridblock (DEPTH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-368
5.6.2 Depth to Center of Gridblock (MDEPTH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-368
R2003.4 - Landmark xi
5.7 Depth - Corner Point Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-368

5.7.1 Depth to Each Corner Point (ZCORN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-369
5.7.2 Depth to NE Corner Point (ZCORNE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-369
5.7.3 Depth to NW Corner Point (ZCORNW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-370
5.7.4 Depth to SW Corner Point (ZCORSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-370
5.7.5 Depth to Bottom Corner Point (ZBOT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-371
5.7.6 Depth to NE Bottom Corner Point (ZBOTNE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-371
5.7.7 Depth to NW Bottom Corner Point (ZBOTNW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-372
5.7.8 Depth to SW Bottom Corner Point (ZBOTSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-372
5.7.9 Depth to Point on a Depth Line (ZLNCOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-373
5.8 Fracture Block Depth (DEPF, MDEPF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-373
5.9 Porosity / Pore Volume (POR, PV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-374
5.10 Fracture Porosity / Pore Volume (PORF, PVF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-374
5.11 Permeability / Transmissibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-376
5.11.1 X (R) Direction (KX, KXF, TX, KR, KRF, TR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-376
5.11.2 Y (Theta) Direction (KY, KYF, TY, KTHETA, KTF, TTHETA) . 5-377
5.11.3 Z Direction (KZ, KZF, TZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-378
5.11.4 Diagonal (XY) Directions (TXYL, TXYR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-378
5.12 Fracture Permeability / Transmissibility (VIP-DUAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-379
5.12.1 X (R) Direction (KXFEFF, TXF, KRFEFF, TRF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-379
5.12.2 Y (THETA) Direction (KYFEFF, TYF, KTFEFF, TTHETF) . . . . 5-380
5.12.3 Z Direction (KZFEFF, TZF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-381
5.12.4 Diagonal (XY) Directions (TXYLF, TXYRF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-381
5.13 Rock and Fluid Property Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-382
5.13.1 Primary Saturation Table (ISAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-382
5.13.2 Imbibition Saturation Table for Hysteresis (ISATI) . . . . . . . . . . 5-383
5.13.3 Fracture Primary Saturation Table (ISATF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-383
5.13.4 Fracture Imbibition Saturation Table for Hysteresis (ISATIF) . 5-384
5.14 Fluid Property Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-384
5.14.1 PVT Property Table (IPVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-384
5.14.2 Water Property Table (IPVTW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-385
5.15 Output Regions (IREGION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-385
5.16 Extra Regions (XREG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-386
5.17 Output Regions (IREGF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-388
5.18 Reservoir Temperature (TEMP) (VIP-COMP or VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . 5-388
5.19 Compaction Regions (ICMT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-390
5.20 Fracture Compaction Regions (ICMTF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-390
5.21 Water Induced Rock Compaction Regions (IWIRC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-390
5.22 Fracture Water Induced Rock Compaction Regions(IWIRCF) . . . . . . . . 5-391
xii Landmark - R2003.4

5.23 Rock Compressibility (CR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-392

5.24 Fracture Compressibility (CRF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-392
5.25 Transmissibility Regions (ITRAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-392
5.26 Fracture Transmissibility Regions (ITRANF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-393
5.27 Turbidite Reservoir Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-393
5.27.1 Scaling Factor (SCLFCT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-394
5.27.2 Time Constant (TCTBD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-394
5.27.3 Shale Capacity (BTBD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-395
5.28 Equilibrium Regions (IEQUIL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-396
5.29 Water Salinity (SAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-397
5.30 User-Specified Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-397
5.30.1 Pressure and Saturation Overreads (P, SW, SG) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-397
5.30.2 Gas Composition Overread (YI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-398
5.30.3 Oil Composition Overread (XI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-399
5.31 User-Specified Fracture Initialization (VIP-DUAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-399
5.31.1 Pressure and Saturation Overreads (PF, SWF, SGF) . . . . . . . . . 5-399
5.31.2 Gas Composition Overread (YIF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-400
5.31.3 Oil Composition Overread (XIF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-401
5.32 Normalized Saturation-Dependent Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-402
5.32.1 Water-Oil Normalized Saturations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-403
5.32.1.1 Connate (Minimum) Water Saturation (SWL) . . . . . . . 5-403
5.32.1.2 Residual Water Saturation (SWR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-403
5.32.1.3 Water Saturation at Residual Oil (SWRO) . . . . . . . . . . 5-403
5.32.1.4 Maximum Water Saturation (SWU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-403
5.32.1.5 Fracture Connate (Minimum) Water Saturation
(SWLF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-403
5.32.1.6 Fracture Residual Water Saturation (SWRF) . . . . . . . 5-404
5.32.1.7 Fracture Water Saturation at Residual Oil (SWROF) . 5-404
5.32.1.8 Fracture Maximum Water Saturation (SWUF) . . . . . . 5-405
5.32.2 Gas-Oil Normalized Saturations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-405
5.32.2.1 Connate (Minimum) Gas Saturation (SGL) . . . . . . . . . 5-405
5.32.2.2 Residual Gas Saturation (SGR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-405
5.32.2.3 Gas Saturation at Residual Oil (SGRO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-405
5.32.2.4 Maximum gas saturation (SGU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-406
5.32.2.5 Gas Saturation at Residual Water (SGRW) . . . . . . . . . 5-406
5.32.2.6 Fracture Connate (Minimum) Gas Saturation (SGLF) 5-406
5.32.2.7 Fracture Residual Gas Saturation (SGRF) . . . . . . . . . . 5-407
5.32.2.8 Fracture Gas Saturation at Residual Oil (SGROF) . . . 5-407
5.32.2.9 Fracture Maximum Gas Saturation (SGUF) . . . . . . . . . 5-408
5.32.2.10 Fracture Gas Saturation at Residual Water (SGRWF) 5-408
5.32.3 Normalized Relative Permeability Endpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-408
5.32.3.1 Kro at Connate Water Saturation (KROLW) . . . . . . . . 5-408
R2003.4 - Landmark xiii

5.32.3.2 Krw at Residual Oil (KRWRO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-408

5.32.3.3 Krg at Residual Oil (KRGRO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-409
5.32.3.4 Krg at Residual Water (KRGRW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-409
5.32.3.5 Fracture Kro at Connate Water (KROLWF) . . . . . . . . . 5-409
5.32.3.6 Fracture Krw at Residual Oil (KRWROF) . . . . . . . . . . 5-409
5.32.3.7 Fracture Krg at Residual Oil (KRGROF) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-410
5.32.3.8 Fracture Krg at Residual Water (KRGRWF) . . . . . . . . 5-410
5.33 Vertical Equilibrium Fraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-410
5.33.1 Water-Oil VE (FVEWO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-410
5.33.2 Gas-Oil VE (FVEGO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-411
5.34 Vertical Equilibrium Fraction (VIP-DUAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-411
5.34.1 Water-oil VE (FVEWOF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-411
5.34.2 Gas-Oil VE (FVEGOF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-412
5.35 Matrix Fracture Exchange Transmissibility (VIP-DUAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-412
5.35.1 Matrix Block Size (LX, LY, LZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-412
5.35.2 Exchange Shape Factor (SIGMA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-413
5.35.3 Exchange Transmissibility (TEX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-413
5.36 Exchange Saturation Tables for VIP-DUAL (ISATEM, ISATEF) . . . . . . 5-414
5.37 Matrix-Fracture Diffusion (VIP-DUAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-415
5.37.1 Diffusion Exchange Shape Factor (SIGMAD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-415
5.37.2 Gas Diffusion Mass Transfer Coefficient (TDIFFG) . . . . . . . . . . 5-415
5.37.3 Oil Diffusion Mass Transfer Coefficient (TDIFFO) . . . . . . . . . . 5-415
5.38 Fluid Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-416
5.38.1 Oil Tracked Fluid Number (OILTRF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-416
5.38.2 Gas Tracked Fluid Number (GASTRF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-416
5.38.3 Fractional Flow Exponent for Extraneous Water Tracking
(TKWEXP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-416
5.39 Three and Four Component Miscible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-417
5.39.1 Mixing Parameter for Effective Viscosity (OMGV) . . . . . . . . . . 5-417
5.39.2 Mixing Parameter for Effective Density (OMGD) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-417
5.40 Time-Dependent Compressibility - Creep Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-418
5.40.1 Reservoir Rock Rate Constant (CREEPB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-418
5.40.2 Equilibrium State Total Rock Compressibility (CREEPC) . . . . 5-418
5.40.3 Creep Exponent (CREEPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-419
5.41 Connection Transmissibility Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-419
5.41.1 X Direction Transmissibility Multiplier (TMX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-420
5.41.2 Y Direction Transmissibility Multiplier (TMY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-420
5.41.3 Z Direction Transmissibility Multiplier (TMZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-421
5.41.4 R Direction Transmissibility Multiplier (TMR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-421
5.41.5 Theta Direction Transmissibility Multiplier (TMTH) . . . . . . . . 5-422
5.41.6 Left Diagonal Direction Transmissibility Multiplier (TMXYL) 5-422
xiv Landmark - R2003.4

5.41.7 Right Diagonal Direction Transmissibility Multiplier

(TMXYR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-422
5.41.8 Fracture X Direction Transmissibility Multiplier (TMXF) . . . . 5-423
5.41.9 Fracture Y Direction Transmissibility Multiplier (TMYF) . . . . 5-423
5.41.10 Fracture Z Direction Transmissibility Multiplier (TMZF) . . . 5-424
5.41.11 Fracture R Direction Transmissibility Multiplier (TMRF) . . . 5-424
5.41.12 Fracture Theta Direction Tranmissibility Multiplier
(TMTHF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-424
5.41.13 Fracture Left Diagonal Direction Transmissibility Multiplier
(TMXYLF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-425
5.41.14 Fracture Right Diagonal Direction Transmissibility Multiplier
(TMXYRF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-425
5.41.15 X Direction Thermal Transmissibility Multiplier (TTMX)
(VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-426
5.41.16 Y Direction Thermal Transmissibility Multiplier (TTMY)
(VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-426
5.41.17 Z Direction Thermal Transmissibility Multiplier (TTMZ)
(VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-427
5.41.18 R Direction Thermal Transmissibility Multiplier (TTMR)
(VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-427
5.41.19 Theta Direction Thermal Transmissibility Multiplier
(TTMTH) (VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-428
5.42 Function Input Option (FUNCTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-429
5.43 Reference Rock Specific Heat Capacity (CPR0) (VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . 5-440
5.44 Reference Thermal Conductivity (VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-441
5.44.1 X(R) Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-441
5.44.2 Y(Theta) Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-441
5.44.3 Z Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-441
5.45 Water-Oil Hysteresis Arrays (VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-442
5.45.1 KWHYS Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-442
5.45.2 KOHYS Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-442
5.46 Beattie et. al Fracture Model Arrays (VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-442
5.47 Rock Heat Capacity Variations (ICPRTB) (VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-443
Chapter 6
Fault Data
6.1 Fault Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-445
6.2 Start of Fault Data (FAULTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-446
6.3 Standard Fault Data (FX, FR, FY, FTHETA, FXCORN, FYCORN) . . . . . . 6-448
6.4 Specification of Layers to Which a Shift Applies (LAYERS) . . . . . . . . . . . 6-451
6.5 Specification of a Conductive Fault (LEAKY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-452
R2003.4 - Landmark xv
6.6 Arbitrary Gridblock Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-453

6.6.1 Non-Corner-Point Connections (FLTXC, FLTRC, FLTYC,
FLTTC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-453
6.6.2 Arbitrary Gridblock Connections (FTRANS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-454
6.7 Arbitrary Gridblock Connections (VIP-DUAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-455
6.7.1 Non-Corner-Point Connections for Fracture Blocks
(FLTXCF, FLTRCF, FLTYCF, FLTTCF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-455
6.7.2 Arbitrary Gridblock Connections for Fracture Blocks in
VIP-DUAL (FTRANF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-457
6.8 Automatic Fault Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-458
6.9 Automatic Pinchout Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-458
Chapter 7
Overread Options
7.1 Transmissibility / Pore Volume Modification Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-459
7.2 Override Modification (OVER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-460
7.3 Override Modification for VIP-DUAL (OVER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-463
7.4 Value Override (VOVER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-464
7.5 Value Override for VIP-DUAL (VOVER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-467
Chapter 8
Grid Coarsening
8.1 Grid Coarsening (COARSEN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-469
Chapter 9
Region Data
9.1 Assign Output Region Names (REGION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-473
9.2 Assign Output Regions Separator Batteries (REGSEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-474
9.3 Specify Datum Depth Each Output Region (REGDTM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-475
Chapter 10
Grid Boundary Flux
10.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-477
10.2 Analytical Aquifer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-477
10.2.1 Carter-Tracy Aquifer Influx (INFLUX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-478
10.2.2 Fetkovich Aquifer Influx (INFLUX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-484
10.3 Coarse Grid, Fine Grid Boundary Flux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-488
10.3.1 Flux Across a Grid Perimeter (FLUX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-488
xvi Landmark - R2003.4

Chapter 11
Local Grid Refinement
11.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-497
11.2 Grid Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-497
11.3 Grid Refinement (LGR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-497
11.3.1 Grid Refinement Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-498
11.3.1.1 Cartesian Grid Refinement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-498
11.3.1.2 Radial Grid Refinement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-499
11.4 Array Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-509
11.5 Array Data Propagation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-509
11.6 Array Input Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-509
11.7 Saturation and Relative Permeability Endpoint Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-510
11.8 Grid Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-510
11.9 Corner Point Data (CORP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-510
11.9.1 Modify by a Constant (MODX,MODY,MODZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-511
11.10 Handedness of Coordinates (RIGHTHANDED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-513
11.11 Transmissibility Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-514
11.11.1 Harmonic Integration (HARTRAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-514
11.11.2 No Integration (NEWTRAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-514
11.11.3 Rectangular or Radial ROOT Grid (BLOCKTR) . . . . . . . . . . . 11-514
11.12 Minimum Radius of Radial Refinements (RMIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-515
11.13 Connection Transmissibility Modification (MULT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-515
11.14 Function Input Option (FUNCTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-516
11.15 Arbitrary Grid-block Connections (FTRANS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-516
11.16 Override Modification (OVER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-516
11.17 Value Override (VOVER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-517
11.18 Half-Transmissibility Override (TOVER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-517
11.19 Pinchout Gridblock Connections (PINCHGRID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-518
11.20 Pore Volume Cuttoff (TOLPV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-519
Chapter 12
Tracer Option
12.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-521
12.2 New Input Data for Initialization Module VIP-CORE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-521
12.2.1 Activate Tracer Option (TRACER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-521
12.2.2 Additional INFLUX Data (INFLUX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-522
R2003.4 - Landmark xvii

Chapter 13
Heat Loss Data (VIP-THERM)
13.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-523
13.2 Gridding of Over/Underburden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-523
13.3 Method of Vinsome and Westerveld (Reference 10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-523
13.4 Method of Coats, George, Chu, and Marcum (Reference 40) . . . . . . . . 13-524
13.5 Heat Loss Data Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-525
13.5.1 Specified Index Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-525
13.5.2 Automatic Index Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-526
Chapter 14
Parallel Computing
14.1 Automatic Grid Decomposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-529
14.1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-529
14.1.2 Domain Decomposition of Cartesian Grids (DECOMP) . . . . . 14-529
Appendix A
References
Keyword Index
Subject Index
xviii Landmark - R2003.4

Preface
000000About This Manual
Purpose
VIP-CORE® is the initialization module of the VIP-EXECUTIVE® Family
of simulators. 00
The primary purpose of this Reference Manual is to document the input

options of the VIP-CORE initialization module. It is assumed that the
reader is familiar with reservoir engineering concepts, in general, and
reservoir simulation terminology, specifically. This document is not
intended to be a cookbook for the novice simulation user. This manual is
intended to be used in conjunction with the VIP-EXECUTIVE Simulation
Modules Reference Manual. 00
The Modules
The VIP-CORE module calculates the initial reservoir conditions for the
following simulation modules: 00
VIP-ENCORE®: Multi-component Black-Oil Model
VIP-COMP®: Equation-of-State Compositional Model
VIP-DUAL®: Dual-Porosity, Dual-Permeability Model
VIP-POLYMER™: Polymer Flooding Model
VIP-THERM™ Thermal Compositional or Dead Oil Model
These modules work together to provide total flexibility in reservoir

modeling. For example, VIP-ENCORE and VIP-DUAL could be combined
to provide simulation capability for a dual-porosity, dual-permeability,
black-oil reservoir. If VIP-COMP were included in the same program, the
user could convert to a fully compositional version of the dual-porosity,
dual-permeability model simply by substituting the compositional
specific data for the black-oil specific data. 00
R2003.4 - Landmark xix

About This Manual VIP-CORE REFERENCE MANUAL
The Chapters
The VIP-CORE input data stream consists of keywords and data values
which invoke the features of the simulator. 00
■ Chapter 1 is an overview of the data required for VIP-CORE; it also

describes data cards which are used throughout the entire data stream.
■ The subsequent chapters describe the initialization data, which for the
most part, are order dependent. (Any restrictions are described in the
appropriate section.)
Data Formatting Conventions

This manual uses a consistent format to indicate the correct methods for
entering data. For example:
DATE day mo yr.
Keyword Variables
Data entry formats are always shown between horizontal gray bars, as
illustrated above. Keywords used to label the data are denoted by upper-
case letters. Variable names are shown in lower-case. For example, an
actual line of data based on the above format might look like this:
DATE 31 12 1992
More complex formats may include parentheses to indicate optional

elements, dots to indicate continuation, and bracketed columns to indicate
required mutually exclusive options. In the example below, the four
options inside the vertical brackets are mutually exclusive — you can use
only one of them. If you use the first or fourth option, you must enter at
least one array name but you can enter more, as indicated by the
parentheses and the dots.
array1 (array2 ...)
PRINT ARRAYS ALL

NONE
EXCEPT array1 (array2 ...)
xx Landmark - R2003.4
VIP-CORE REFERENCE MANUAL About This Manual
The following examples show the four different ways in which the above
format can be used:
PRINT ARRAYS KX KY KZ
PRINT ARRAYS ALL
PRINT ARRAYS NONE
PRINT ARRAYS EXCEPT KZ
For a complete discussion of data formatting, see Section 1.5.
Compatibility
This documentation is compatible with Version 1998 of the VIP-CORE
software. 00
Internal calculations are carried out in customary oil field units, but input
and output can be in either customary units or the International System of
Units (SI) metric system. Throughout this Reference Manual, units are first
listed as the customary units followed by the SI units in parentheses. The
user may choose metric pressure units of kg/cm2 instead of the default
kPa. In this case, whenever the documentation reads kPa, kg/cm2 will be
expected. 00
Related Documentation
The following manuals provide more information related to the material
in this manual. For more information, please consult the appropriate
manual listed below.
■ VIP-EXECUTIVE Reference Manual.
■ VIP-EXECUTIVE Technical Reference Manual.
00
R2003.4 - Landmark xxi

About This Manual VIP-CORE REFERENCE MANUAL
xxii Landmark - R2003.4

Chapter
1
00000Data Overview
1.1 Introduction
VIP-CORE® is the initialization module of the VIP-EXECUTIVE® family
of simulators. It is used to calculate the initial reservoir conditions to be
used by several simulation modules, including VIP-COMP®, VIP-
ENCORE®, VIP-DUAL®, VIP-POLYMER®, and VIP-THERM. For
example, VIP-ENCORE and VIP-DUAL could be combined to simulate a
dual-porosity, dual-permeability, "black-oil" reservoir. If VIP-COMP were
included in the same program, the user could convert to a fully
compositional version of the dual-porosity, dual-permeability model
simply by substituting the compositional specific data for the black-oil
specific data.
VIP-CORE will only accept data for those modules which have been
purchased. They are listed on the first page of the computer output in the
title box.
The documentation for entering the initialization data for VIP-COMP,

VIP-ENCORE, VIP-DUAL, VIP-POLYMER, and VIP-THERM is all
included in this Reference Manual. The majority of the data required for
all five of these options is identical since VIP-ENCORE is a special subset
of the more generalized VIP-COMP, and VIP-DUAL is only used in
conjunction with either VIP-ENCORE or VIP-COMP. Where the data
differs between VIP-COMP, VIP-ENCORE, and VIP-THERM or additional
data is required for VIP-DUAL, VIP-POLYMER, and VIP-THERM, the
model to which the described data applies is enclosed in parentheses after
the section heading.
1.1.1 VIP-COMP Overview

VIP-COMP is an n-component, equation-of-state, compositional
simulator. It can simulate the flow of oil, gas, and water through an
underground reservoir and predict the behavior of all associated
production/injection wells. The system takes into account the fact that
fluid properties and phase behavior can vary strongly with fluid
composition. Fluid properties and phase equilibrium are governed by a
generalized cubic equation-of-state which includes the Peng-Robinson
equation (see Reference 22) and various versions of the Redlich-Kwong
equation (see References 23 and 24). Both oil and gas are treated as
mixtures containing an arbitrary number of hydrocarbon and
R2003.4 - Landmark 1-1

Data Overview VIP-CORE REFERENCE MANUAL
nonhydrocarbon components. In addition, special techniques are

implemented in VIP-COMP to provide stability and efficiency of solution
for near-critical oil and gas fluid systems.
1.1.2 VIP-ENCORE Overview

VIP-ENCORE is a three-phase reservoir simulator which models the
immiscible flow of oil, gas, and water within the reservoir. VIP-ENCORE
is a special case of the generalized VIP-COMP simulator. Fluid properties
can be described according to the "black-oil convention" — oil at reservoir
conditions is a mixture of stock tank oil and dissolved gas. The amount of
gas dissolved in the oil is determined by a bubblepoint pressure
relationship.
VIP-ENCORE is able to treat water-oil or gas-water two-phase problems

as special cases of the more generalized three-phase fluid system. In
addition, VIP-ENCORE can process multi-component systems whose PVT
properties are adequately described by pressure-dependent K-values.
Thus, it can be used to model gas condensates and volatile oils more
rigorously than conventional black-oil simulators.
1.1.3 VIP-DUAL Overview
NOTE: VIP-DUAL is available as a separately licensed option.
The VIP-DUAL option simulates the performance of reservoirs which are

naturally fractured, heterogeneous, or highly stratified. The full dual-
porosity, dual-permeability formulation allows flow in both fractures and
matrix rock, thereby enabling correct and accurate modeling of reservoirs
which may be highly fractured in some regions while unfractured in
others.
VIP-DUAL must be used in conjunction with either VIP-ENCORE or VIP-

COMP. Within VIP-DUAL, the exchange of fluids between the fracture
and matrix rock is based on the Warren & Root theory, (see Reference 18)
and the more recent work of Thomas, Dixon, and Pierson. (see Reference
19). Mass transfer between matrix rock and fractures includes diffusion,
convection, imbibition, and gravity drainage. Imbibition and gravity
drainage effects can be modeled with pseudo-capillary pressure functions.
These functions are automatically and independently determined for the
matrix rock and fractures and account for the matrix block and gridblock
sizes. Also available is a dual porosity/single permeability option which
assumes that the fractures alone are a continuous media and the matrix
rock exists only as a source or sink for reservoir fluids.
1-2 Landmark - R2003.4

VIP-CORE REFERENCE MANUAL Data Overview
1.1.4 VIP-POLYMER Overview
NOTE: VIP-POLYMER is available as a separately licensed option.
The VIP-POLYMER option simulates the performance of polymer flooded

reservoirs. The model takes into account the major physical properties
attributed to the flow of polymer solutions through porous media. These
include a non-Newtonian (shear dependent) aqueous phase viscosity that
is also a function of polymer concentration.
Other polymer dependent properties are: polymer adsorption,

permeability reduction, and polymer inaccessible pore volume
phenomenon. The well performance calculations also include the effects of
non-Newtonian viscosity. The polymer is represented by a separate
component, present only in the aqueous phase and occupying no volume.
VIP-POLYMER must be used in conjunction with either VIP-ENCORE or
VIP-COMP.
1.1.5 VIP-THERM Overview

VIP-THERM is an extension of the fully implicit formulation of VIP-
COMP to include an energy balance, an equilibrium constraint for the
water component, heat loss models, and temperature-dependency of all
important properties. Two phase behavior models are available: 1) the n-
component compositional equation of state model which VIP-THERM
shares with VIP-COMP (Section 4.4) or 2) the dead oil model in which oil
is treated as a single non-volatile component (Section 4.7).
The VIP-THERM compositional model is a fully implicit, n-component,

equation-of-state, thermal simulator. The number of volatile components
may be specified as less than or equal to the total number of components.
Water and steam properties including density, enthalpy, and viscosity are
obtained from a tabular input file which is separate from the file
containing the data described in this manual.
The VIP-THERM dead oil model is a fully implicit three-phase reservoir

simulator which models the flow of oil, water, and steam within the
reservoir. This version is a special case of the generalized compositional
version. Oil is represented as a single non-volatile component. Oil
properties are either calculated by interpolation from input tables or are
calculated from input values of oil compressibility, oil coefficient of
thermal expansion, oil heat capacity, and oil viscosity as a function of
temperature. Water and steam properties including density, enthalpy, and
viscosity are obtained from a tabular input file which is separate from the
file containing the data described in this manual.

VIP-COMP or VIP-ENCORE initialization data may easily be converted to

VIP-THERM format:
1. Specify THERMAL card in VIP-CORE utility data (Section 2.2.19.1).
2. Specify NCV in the grid system data (Sections 2.2.3.1 or 2.2.3.2).
3. Replace Physical Property Constants table with VIP-THERM format

(Section 2.2.4.2).
4. Replace VIP-ENCORE PVT data with either EOS data (Section 4.4) or
Dead Oil PVT data (Section 4.7). If PCHOR was specified in VIP-
COMP EOS data, that column must be removed before the data will be
accepted by VIP-THERM.
5. Specify heat capacity arrays in VIP-CORE array data (Sections 5.43

and 5.44).
6. Specify heat loss data in VIP-CORE (Chapter 12).
VIP-COMP and VIP-ENCORE recurrent data may easily be converted to

VIP-THERM format:
1. Specify TINJ and QUAL for all water injectors (VIP-EXECUTIVE

Sections 3.4.2.1 and 3.4.2.2). Also specify PINJ (VIP-EXECUTIVE
Section 3.4.2.3) for all wells for which steam quality is specified as zero
or one.
2. Specify TINJ for all gas injectors (VIP-EXECUTIVE Section 3.4.2.1).
3. Modify DT cards (VIP-EXECUTIVE Section 7.1.1), ITNLIM cards (VIP-

EXECUTIVE Section 7.1.3), and TOLD cards (VIP-EXECUTIVE Section
7.1.7) to include values for maximum temperature change.
4. Modify TOLR cards (VIP-EXECUTIVE Section 7.1.8) to include an

energy balance tolerance.
1.1.6 Shared Features

VIP-COMP, VIP-ENCORE, VIP-DUAL, VIP-POLYMER, and VIP-THERM
share all the same major features in VIP-CORE. Finite difference grids may
be constructed in either rectangular (x-y-z) or radial (r-θ-z) coordinates,
using either one, two, or three dimensions. Simulations using more
general curvilinear grid systems also are possible. However, in this case
the user must employ the corner point feature in VIP-EXECUTIVE, or
input transmissibility and pore volumes directly.
The reservoir being studied may be initialized to capillary-gravity

equilibrium or to a nonequilibrium state. Under equilibrium conditions
saturation pressure can vary with depth, and multiple water-oil and gas-
oil contacts can be established. VIP-CORE will determine the initial

reservoir pressure and saturation distributions for these cases. To achieve

a nonequilibrium state both the gas and water saturations must be
specified for each gridblock.
Each block in the finite difference grid is designated as containing a

particular type of rock with each rock type corresponding to a particular
set of relative permeability and capillary pressure curves.
The reservoir description may be completely heterogeneous with regard

to the distribution of permeabilities, porosities, and net pay. Furthermore,
each gridblock can be assigned a depth that is independent of the depths
of the surrounding blocks, so there are no limits on the description of
faults or varying dip angles.
Wells are controlled by a variety of options which allow both rate and
pressure constraints. Wells can also be shut in, or recompleted,
automatically. Rates can be adjusted to meet production and injection
targets at any of the target levels. These targets levels include gathering
center, flow station, area, and field.
Separator conditions are also taken into consideration for all of the
simulator modules. In VIP-COMP (or in the VIP-THERM compositional
model), a multi-component model, separators are required to determine
surface production rates. In VIP-ENCORE, separators allow for the
additional flexibility of treating flash separation conditions at the surface
versus the differential calculations which take place in the reservoir.
Both VIP-COMP and VIP-ENCORE allow fully implicit (IMPLICIT) or

explicit (IMPES) formulations to be selected for the integration of the flow
equations. When the VIP-DUAL option or the VIP-THERM option is
activated, only the fully implicit formulation is accepted for the additional
required stability.
Internal calculations are carried out in customary oil field units, but input
and output can be in either customary units or the International System of
Units (SI) metric system. Throughout this Reference Manual, units are first
listed as the customary units followed by the SI units in parentheses. The
user may choose metric pressure units of kg/cm2 instead of the default
kPa. In this case, whenever the documentation reads kPa, kg/cm2 will be
expected.

1.2 Typical Data Requirements to Initialize a Simulation Study
1.2.1 Geological Descriptions

The following geological descriptions are required: 00
■ Reservoir maps showing the current interpretation of the structure,

gross and net sand thicknesses.
■ Reservoir maps showing the distribution of pore volume (i.e., porosity

- thickness product) or, if appropriate, an average porosity
representative of the pool.
■ Reservoir maps showing the distribution of flow capacity (i.e.

permeability - thickness product) or, if appropriate, an average
permeability representative of the pool.
■ If the reservoir can be subdivided into geological units that display

different rock quality or flow characteristics, then all previous
reference maps should be available for each reservoir unit.
■ For coning, cross-section, or three-dimensional studies, the well logs

and core analysis results should be available to help identify reservoir
layering and corresponding layer properties.
1.2.2 Reservoir Rock Characteristics

The following reservoir rock characteristics are required: 00
■ Laboratory reports detailing results from relative permeability tests

and end-point relative permeability or, if already reviewed by the
operator, a set of relative permeability curves for each rock type
(lithology related) present in the pool.
■ Laboratory reports detailing the results from capillary pressure tests

conducted on core samples or the operator’s best estimate of the
capillary pressure characteristics of each rock type (lithologically
related) present in the pool.
■ Formation water analysis including the dissolved solids content.
1.2.3 Hydrocarbon Fluid Properties

The following hydrocarbon fluid properties are required: 00
■ Laboratory results from fluid characterization tests performed on

reservoir oil and gas samples. Both oil and gas properties are required,
including composition and volume factors, viscosity, density,
compressibility, and dissolved gas-oil ratios as functions of pressure.

■ Operating conditions of field separation units to properly correct

laboratory data. The location of the metering equipment should be
identified to ensure that volumetric rate information input to the
model is consistent with field data.
1.3 Data Deck Layout

VIP-CORE is the initialization module of VIP-EXECUTIVE. It is used to
describe the reservoir and the fluids it contains, plus the initial saturation
and pressure distributions.
It is possible to write sufficient information onto disk to allow a

subsequent run to pick up where the first one left off. The information
saved this way is called a restart record. VIP-CORE automatically writes a
restart record upon completion of the initialization process. The
information on this restart record is then used by VIP-EXECUTIVE
simulation modules to begin the simulation.
In addition to the standard output and initialization restart record, VIP-

CORE can write the initialization portion of summary records for
subsequent processing by ancillary programs. The currently available
menu of these data cards, the summary records they control, and the
FORTRAN units on which the information is stored include:
PRINT Printer Output (Section 3.1), FORTRAN Unit 6.
MAP Grid Array Maps (Section 2.2.2.5), FORTRAN

Units 9 and 27.
RESTART Restart Record automatically written upon

successful initialization, FORTRAN Unit 2.
CORNER Corner-point data for post-processing (Section 3.1),

FORTRAN Unit 12.
To save any or all of these records for subsequent post-processing,

appropriate commands must be added to the job control stream for
permanent storage of the appropriate FORTRAN units.

VIP-CORE I/O is illustrated schematically in Figure 1-1 below along with

the appropriate FORTRAN (FT) Unit numbers.
RESTART FILE: FT02

PRINTER FILE: FT06
SIMOUT MAP FILE: FT09
CORNER FILE: FT12
COEFS FILE: FT13
INPUT
DECK: PROCESS ID FILE: FT15
FT05 MAP FILE: FT27
DUAL PC PSEUDO DATA
VIP-CORE FILE: FT28
FLUX DEBUG: FT55
MORES POROSITY: FT69
MORES GEOMETRY,
PERM., TRANS.: FT70
DATA FOR STATISTICAL
PROGRAM: FT72
EOSINT OPTION: FT73 -
FT77
SCRATCH FILES:
FT01 (Formatted) INPUT DATA INCLUDE
FT08 (Formatted) OPTION: FT91 - FT99
FT04 (Unformatted)
FT21, FT23
Figure 1-1: VIP-CORE I/O Files
The general data structure for VIP-CORE is shown in Figure 1-2. 00
Figure 1-2: VIP-CORE Data Organization

1.4 Input Data Template

The following printout lists the most frequently used VIP-CORE data
input options.
C
INIT
C ------------------------------------------------------------
C IDENTIFICATION DATA
C ------------------------------------------------------------
C
TITLE1
VIP-CORE BATCH DATA INPUT TEMPLATE
TITLE2
THIS LIST INCLUDES ONLY THE MOST FREQUENTLY USED OPTIONS
C
C
C
C
C ************************************************************
C INITIALIZATION DATA CHAPTER 2
C
C ***********************************************************
C
C ------------------------------------------------------------
C UTILITY DATA SECTION 2.2
C ------------------------------------------------------------
DATE DY MO YR
C
C ------------------------------------------------------------
C PRINT CONTROL CHAPTER 3
C ------------------------------------------------------------
PRINT (ALL)(EQUIL)(COMP)(TABLES)(ARRAYS)(COEFS)(INFLUX)
(INIT)(FAULTS)(CORNER)(NONE)
C NOTE: PRINT CARDS ARE NOT REQUIRED; THE DEFAULT IS PRINT ALL
C
C -----------------------------------------------------------
C GRID SYSTEM OPTIONS SECTION 2.2.3
C ------------------------------------------------------------
NX(NR) NY(NTHETA) NZ (RI) NCOMP (NCV)
C
NO.X-DIR NO.Y-DIR NO.Z-DIR (INNER RADIUS)NO. OF
INCREMENTSINCREMENTS INCREMENTS RI≠0 COMPONENTS
C THE PREVIOUS 2 CARDS ARE REPLACED BY 1 DATA CARD
C NOTE: NCV IS REQUIRED IN VIP-THERM ONLY
C
C -----------------------------------------------------------
C PHYSICAL PROPERTY CONSTANTS SECTION 2.2.4
C ------------------------------------------------------------
DWB BWI VW CW CR TRES TS PS
WATER WATER WATER WATER ROCK RES STAND. STAND.
DENSITY F.V.F. VISC COMPR COMPR TEMP TEMP PRESS
C NOTE: THE ABOVE TABLE FORMAT DIFFERES IN VIP-THERM
C
C -----------------------------------------------------------
C TABLES CHAPTER 4
C ------------------------------------------------------------
TABLES
C
C -----------------------------------------------------------
C EQUILIBRIUM INITIALIZATION TABLE(S) SECTION 4.2
C ------------------------------------------------------------
IEQUIL PINIT DEPTH PCWOC WOC PCGOC GOC PSAT
C
EQUIL INIT PRES CAP WATER CAP GAS INIT
REGION PRES REF PRES OIL PRES OIL SATR’N
NUMBER DEPTH AT WOC CONTACT AT GOC CONTACT PRES
C THE PREVIOUS 3 CARDS ARE REPLACED BY 1 DATA CARD FOR EACH

C REGION
C
C NOTE: THERE ARE TWO INPUT OPTIONS FOR THIS TABLE: (A)
C SATURATION PRESSURE CONSTANT BY REGIONS, (B)
C SATURATION PRESSURE VARIES WITH DEPTH.
C
C ------------------------------------------------------------
C WATER SATURATION TABLE(S) SECTION 4.3
C ------------------------------------------------------------
SWT 1
SW KRW KROW PCWO
SWR 0.0 KROCW PCWOCW
. . . .
SWRO KRWRO 0.0 PCWORO
. . 0. .
SWMX KRWMX 0.0 PCWOMN
C NOTE: IF ONLY PCWOCW AND PCWOMN ARE INPUT, THE MISSING
C VALUES OF PCWO WILL BE GENERATED BY LINEAR
C INTERPOLATION
C ------------------------------------------------------------
C GAS SATURATION TABLE(S) SECTION 4.3
C ------------------------------------------------------------
SGT 1
SG KRG KROG PCGO
SGMN 0.0 KROCW PCGOMN
. 0. . .
SGC 0.0 KROCG PCGOCG
. . . .
SGRO KRGRO 0.0 PCGORO
. . 0. .
SGMX KRGMX 0.0 PCGOMX
C
C NOTE: IF ONLY PCGOMN AND PCGOCW ARE INPUT, THE MISSING
C VALUES OF PCGO WILL BE GENERATED BY LINEAR
C INTERPOLATION
C
C ---------------------------------------------------------------
C PVT PROPERTY DATA SECTION 4.4
C THE FOLLOWING TABLE APPLIES ONLY TO VIP-ENCORE
C ---------------------------------------------------------------
BOTAB 1
DOS WTOS PSAT
DENSITY OF MOLECULAR WEIGHT INITIAL
SATURATED OIL OF SATURATED OIL SATURATION PRESSURE
PSAT RS BO BG(ZG) GR VO VG
SATURATIONSOLUTION OIL GAS GAS SATURATED GAS
PRESSURE GAS-OIL FORMATION FORMATION GRAVITY OIL VISCOSITY
RATIO VOLUME (GAS VISCOSITY
FACTOR COMPRESSI-
BILITY)
VOLUME
FACTOR
C THE PREVIOUS 7 CARDS ARE REPLACED BY AT LEAST 2 DATA CARDS
PSAT SATURATION PRESSURE VALUES (AT LEAST 1 VALUE)
DP BOFAC VOFAC (BOFAC VOFAC). . . (BOFAC VOFAC)
RELATIVE OIL OIL
PRESSURE FORMATION VISCOSITY
(P - PSATI) VOLUME FACTOR
C
C NOTES: THE PREVIOUS 3 CARDS ARE REPLACED BY AT LEAST 1 DATA
C CARD. A PAIR OF BOFAC, VOFAC VALUES MUST APPEAR FOR
C EACH VALUE OF PSAT ON THE PSAT CARD.
C
SEPTEST IBAT : SEPARATOR BATTERY NUMBER
PVTTABLE 1 : PVT TABLE NUMBER
PSATF BOF
SATURATION PRESSURE OIL FORMATION VOLUME FACTOR
P T GOR BOSTG GR
STAGE STAGE STAGE GAS STAGE OIL STAGE GAS
PRESSURES TEMPERATURES OIL RATIOSVOLUME FACTORS GRAVITIES
C REPLACE THE PREVIOUS 2 CARDS WITH 1 DATA CARD FOR EACH STAGE
1-10 Landmark - R2003.4

C ------------------------------------------------------------
GRID DATA ARRAYS CHAPTER 5
C ------------------------------------------------------------
ARRAYS
DX(DR) INPUT OPTION
VALUES
DY(DTHETA)INPUT OPTION
VALUES
DZ INPUT OPTION
VALUES
DEPTH INPUT OPTION
VALUES
POR INPUT OPTION
VALUES
KX(KR) INPUT OPTION
VALUES
KY(KTHETA)INPUT OPTION
VALUES
KZ INPUT OPTION
VALUES
C
C NOTE: ALTERNATIVELY, THE TRANSMISSIBILITIES TX, TY, AND
C TZ; THE MDEPTH ARRAY; AND THE PV ARRAY MAY BE
C ENTERED INSTEAD OF THE PRECEDING ARRAYS
C
C NOTE: THE INPUT OPTIONS ARE DESCRIBED IN CHAPTER 1
C
C
C ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
C THE FOLLOWING ARRAYS ARE REQUIRED FOR MULTIPLE TABLES
C ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
C
ISAT INPUT OPTION
VALUES
IEQUIL INPUT OPTION
VALUES
C
C
C ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
C FAULT OPTION DATA (NOT REQ’D) CHAPTER 6
C ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
C
C TRANSMISSIBILITY/PORE VOLUME MODIFICATION OPTION DATA (NOT
C REQ’D) CHAPTER 7
C
C ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
C REGION DATA (NOT REQ’D) CHAPTER 8
C ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
C
C
C ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
C INFLUX OPTION DATA (NOT REQ’D) SECTION 9.1
C ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
STOP
END
1.5 Data Format

Nearly all data are input in ‘free field’ format. This means that it is not
necessary to enter numbers in specific columns. Each item of data, or
"word,” must be separated by either one or more blank columns or by a
comma. Unless explicitly stated, all data need not appear on a single card -
the continuation character ‘>’ is used to extend data onto the next card.
R2003.4 - Landmark 1-11

The data stream includes both numbers and alpha keywords; the latter are
used to identify subsequent numbers or select program options. Generally,
each new type of data is introduced by an alpha keyword. Secondary
keyword items in [ ] are "required mutually exclusive" while those in ( )
are "optional". The brackets and parenthesis should not be input with the
data, they simply help describe data input options. In the data
descriptions that follow, keywords are shown in upper case letters (they
can be input in upper or lower case). The names of the variables that are
entered as numbers are shown in lower case letters. For example, one of
the utility data cards indicates the date at which the simulation is to begin.
In the data description, this is written as:
DATE day mo year
This indicates that the data card must contain the alpha label DATE
followed by three numbers that indicate the day, month, and year. An
example of a valid data card follows:
DATE 15 2 1980
This information could be anywhere on the card so long as nothing else

appears in the columns being scanned and there is at least one blank
between each of the "words".
Numbers can be represented in any of the conventional FORTRAN

formats. Note the following valid representations of the number 1000:
1000 1000. 1.E3 1E3 0.1E+4 10000E-01
None of the various forms may contain an imbedded blank, since the
simulator interprets them as two words rather than one. There is no
distinction between integer and floating point representations of numbers.
(All numbers are decoded as if they were floating point, then are stored as
either integer or floating point variables, depending on use.)
Repeated values can be written in shorthand notation to reduce data

preparation effort. For example, consider two equivalent ways of
specifying the following data card:
Method 1: 10 12.5 12.5 12.5 15. 15 16.5
Method 2: 10 3*12.5 2*15 16.5
The single "word" 3*12.5 is decoded as 12.5 12.5 12.5 and 2*15 becomes 15
15. On the other hand, 3* 12.5 could not be decoded properly because of
the blank between * and 12.5. In this case, the simulator issues an error
message. If an error occurs in the initialization data, the run stops prior to
initializing.
1-12 Landmark - R2003.4

The number of data values on a line is restricted to 20,000. This applies to

decoded repeated values, so that 1500*3 becomes 1,500 data values.
Any word beginning with a number (or a decimal point) must be a valid
numeric form, or it causes the run to terminate before the first timestep.
Any word beginning with a character other than a number (or a decimal
point) is treated as alpha data. A # sign before a number causes the
number to be interpreted as an alpha string.
Any word beginning with an exclamation point (!) indicates the beginning
of inline comments. All text after the exclamation point is ignored by the
simulator. The following is an example of the use of inline comments:
SWT 1 !Water Saturation Table 1

SW KRW KROW PCWO
0.22 0.0 1.0 7.0! Connate
0.3 0.07 0.4 4.0
0.4 0.15 0.125 3.0
0.45 0.24 0.0649 2.5
0.6 0.33 0.0048 2.0
0.8 0.65 0.0 1.0! 1-Sor
0.9 0.83 0.0 0.5
1.0 1.0 0.0 0.0
!-----------------------------------------------------
1.5.1 General Utility Data
1.5.1.1 Comment Lines (C)
C comment
Makes a “comment” of the field which follows. The alpha label C must be
the first word on the card and must be followed by a blank.
See also the use of the inline comment character “!,” which is discussed in
the introduction to this section.
1.5.1.2 Read Data from an External File (INCLUDE)
INCLUDE file-name
Definition: 00
file-name The pathname to the file from which data should be

read. The file name may be contained in double
quotes. The file name may contain blanks; in this
case, it must be contained in double quotes.
R2003.4 - Landmark 1-13

When the INCLUDE card is encountered in the input file, the named file is
opened and it becomes the current input file. A fatal error occurs if the file
cannot be opened. Reading from the include file stops when either a
physical end-of-file is encountered or an ENDINC card is encountered.
Reading then continues from the previous input file. Include files can be
nested (i.e. contain other INCLUDE cards). However, the nesting level
cannot exceed nine.
Examples: INCLUDE grid.data ! Contains DX, DY and DZ

INCLUDE perm.data ! Contains KX, KY and KZ
1.5.1.3 Stop Reading Data from the Current INCLUDE File (ENDINC)
ENDINC
The ENDINC card indicates the end of data for the current include file.
When the ENDINC card is encountered on an INCLUDE file, the file is
closed and data continues to be read from the previous input file. If
INCLUDE files are nested then the nesting level is decreased by one. The
ENDINC card is optional in that a physical end-of-file also indicates end
of data. A warning message is given when an ENDINC card is
encountered on the primary input file.
Examples: ENDINC
1.5.1.4 Read Array Data from a VDB File (VDB)
VDB file-name (case-name)
Definitions:
file-name The pathname to the VDB file from which grid data
should be read.
case-name The case name of the data being read from the VDB
file.
Array data must be of class CALC in order to be read from the VDB file. If
the case name is entered, obviously it must exist in the VDB file. If the case
name is not entered, then only one case name may exist in the VDB file.
The file name may be contained in double quotes. The name may contain
blanks; in this case, it must be contained in double quotes.
1-14 Landmark - R2003.4

1.5.1.5 Echo Print On (LIST)
LIST
LIST and NOLIST cards control printing of card images of the data read.
Until a NOLIST Card is entered, LIST is assumed.
Examples: LIST
1.5.1.6 Echo Print Off (NOLIST)
NOLIST
If NOLIST is read, printing of card images is suppressed until a LIST card

is read.
Examples: NOLIST
1.5.1.7 Skip Data On (SKIP)
SKIP
A skip card indicates that all subsequent data is ignored until a NOSKIP
card is encountered; i.e., it is as if all the cards were comment lines. The
card images are not printed.
Example: SKIP
.
.
.
NOSKIP
1.5.1.8 Skip Data Off (NOSKIP)
NOSKIP
A NOSKIP card ends the skip data option.
R2003.4 - Landmark 1-15

1.5.1.9 Number of Printed Lines Per Page (NLINES)
NLINES nlines
Definition: 00
nlines The maximum number of lines to be printed on a

page. Default is 60.
The number of lines to be printed on a page of array output can be

specified. This card facilitates printing on short paper.
Examples: NLINES 60
1.5.1.10 Columns To Be Read (NCOL)
NCOL ncol
Definition: 00
ncol Number of columns to be scanned for data; value

must be between 30 and 1000, inclusive. Default is
1000.
Only the columns 1 to ncol will be processed. Items beyond column ncol
will be ignored (e.g. comments).
Examples: In order to limit processing to the first 45 columns:

NCOL 45
1.5.1.11 Data Line Continuation
Data required to be entered in a single record may be input on multiple

lines by entering a “greater than” (>) character at the end of each data line
to be continued.
1.5.2 Array Input Options

Reservoir properties, such as porosity, absolute permeability, depths, and
gridblock locations or dimensions, can vary spatially in VIP-CORE. A
value of any one of these properties must be specified for each gridblock
in the reservoir model (Figure 1-3). The field of values required to specify
a given reservoir property is referred to as an array. In some cases,
symmetry exists in the array data, which lends itself to abbreviated data
input. Options to exploit data symmetries are given in the remainder of
this section. Array data may be modified later (Section 1.5.4). To simplify
1-16 Landmark - R2003.4

the presentation of several of the input options, NX and x or NY and y are

often used where NR and r or NTHETA and theta should be used for
radial models.
Most arrays have one entry per gridblock. However, several of the corner-
point arrays have more than this. In general, the array input options
extend to these arrays in the obvious way. In a few cases, however, input
options behave differently for corner-point data arrays; the differences are
described in this section.
The general format of array data is: 00
aname option (amin amax nl)

values
Definitions: 00
aname Array name as specified in this section.
option Array input option as described in Array Input.
amin Minimum value against which data values are

checked (optional, unless amax or nl specified).
amax Maximum value against which data values are

checked (optional, unless nl specified).
nl Number of areal planes for which data will be

specified - used only with the LNXVAR, LNYVAR,
LNZVAR and LNVAL input options.
values Data values are entered as necessary for the array

option being used.
R2003.4 - Landmark 1-17

The available array input options are discussed in this section. 00
Figure 1-3: A Typical VIP-CORE Reservoir Grid
1-18 Landmark - R2003.4

1.5.2.1 Constant Array Input Option (CON)
CON requires only one value for input. The entire array is constant for all
gridblocks.
array CON
value(s)
Definition: 00
array Any valid array name.
Example: For a system with NX = 4, NY = 3, NZ = 2, and a constant

porosity of 30%.
POR CON
0.30 00
Values of porosity assigned to the gridblocks are: 00
R2003.4 - Landmark 1-19

1.5.2.2 X (or R) Direction Array Value Variation (XVAR/RVAR)
XVAR (RVAR) requires NX (NR) data values. For certain corner-point

arrays NX+1 data values are required. XVAR (RVAR) varies the array
property in the x (or r) direction, while holding it constant in the y and z
directions. This usually is used with the DX (DR or R) array.
array XVAR
value(s)
Example: For a system where NX = 4, NY = 3, and NZ = 2.

DX XVAR
1. 1.5 2.0 2.5 00
Values of DX assigned to the gridblocks are: 00
1-20 Landmark - R2003.4

1.5.2.3 Y (or Theta) Direction Array Value Variation (YVAR/THVAR)
YVAR (THVAR) requires NY (NTHETA) data values. For certain corner-

point arrays, NY+1 data values are required. YVAR (THVAR) varies the
array property in the y (or theta) direction, while holding it constant in the
x and z directions. This usually is used with the DY (or DTHETA) array.
array YVAR
value(s)

DY YVAR
5 6 7 00
Values of DY assigned to the gridblocks are: 00
R2003.4 - Landmark 1-21

1.5.2.4 Z Direction Array Value Variation (ZVAR)
ZVAR requires NZ data values. For corner-point arrays NZ+1 data values
are required. ZVAR varies the array property in the z direction while
holding it constant in the x and y directions. This is useful for reading data
that varies by layers.
array ZVAR
value(s)

DZ ZVAR
10 15.3 00
Values of DZ assigned to the gridblocks are: 00
1-22 Landmark - R2003.4

1.5.2.5 Full Array Input Option (VALUE)
VALUE requires NX*NY*NZ data values. For corner-point arrays

(NX+1)*(NY+1)*(NZ+1) or NX*NY*(NZ+1) data values are required,
depending on the array. Each gridblock must be assigned a value. The
values are input by x-direction rows. All rows for the first xy plane are
entered in order of increasing y index, followed by the remaining planes in
order of increasing z index.
Although the number of data values on a line is essentially unrestricted,

the user should order his array data as rows or multiples of rows to make
data entries at specific locations easily referenced. This is further clarified
with the use of comment cards. The following example displays two
different ways of entering the same array.
array VALUE
value(s)
Example: POR VALUE

.10 3*.12 .15 .20 .25 2*.32 .35
2*.36 .12 .13 .14 .15 .15
2*.16 .17 .25 .22 .20 .21 00
or 00
POR VALUE
C LAYER 1
.10 3*.12
.15 .20 .25 .32
.32 .35 2*.36
C LAYER 2
.12 .13 .14 .15
.15 .16 .16 .17
.25 .22 .20 .21 00
R2003.4 - Landmark 1-23

Values of porosity assigned to the gridblocks are: 00
1-24 Landmark - R2003.4

1.5.2.6 Automatic Generation of Values for Layers 2 - Nz (LAYER)
The LAYER option may be used with any input data arrays, but it is
particularly useful for the DEPTH, MDEPTH, or ZCORN arrays. With all
but these three arrays, the LAYER option replicates the values provided
for the first layer for each of the other layers of the grid. When used with
non-corner-point arrays or with the ZCORNE, ZCORNW, or ZCORSW
arrays, the LAYER option requires NX*NY values. When used with other
corner-point arrays, the LAYER option requires (NX+1)*(NY+1) data
values.
To use the LAYER option with the DEPTH or MDEPTH arrays, it is

required that either the DZ or H arrays must have been read previously.
The depth of each gridblock in the first layer (K = 1) is read. The depths of
the remaining gridblocks are then calculated from the depths of the
gridblocks in the first layer and gridblock thicknesses.
To use the LAYER option with the ZCORN array, the XCORN and
YCORN arrays and one of the corner-point thickness arrays DZCORN,
DZVCOR, or DZBCOR must have been previously read. In this case the
LAYER option not only adjusts the values of the ZCORN array, but also it
may adjust the values of the XCORN and YCORN arrays depending on
which of the corner-point thickness arrays are read. If the DZCORN array
is read, then no adjustment is made to the XCORN or YCORN arrays; the
LAYER option works in this case as it does for DEPTH or MDEPTH.
However, if either the DZBCOR or DZVCOR arrays are read, then only the
top layer values of the XCORN and YCORN arrays are kept; the values in
the other layers are adjusted so that the dip of the top layer is mimicked in
succeeding layers and the specified thickness data is honored. The
difference between the DZBCOR and DZVCOR is the interpretation of the
thickness: for DZBCOR, thickness is the thickness perpendicular to the
bedding plane, while for DZVCOR it is the depth difference between a
corner point in one layer and the corresponding corner point in the next
layer.
When MOD cards (Section 1.5.4.1) are used with this option only the
specified locations are changed; the depths of the locations not specified
on the MOD cards are not recalculated. For example, if the depths of layer
1 are modified, then the depths of the other layers are not recalculated.
Thus,
DEPTH (layer 2) ≠ DEPTH (layer 1) + DZ (layer 1). 00
Indiscriminate use of the MOD card may therefore result in different

layers occupying the same or overlapping positions.
To avoid this problem MODLYR cards (Section 1.5.4.2) may be used.

When the depths of layer 1 are modified using MODLYR cards, the depths
of the remaining layers are recalculated.
R2003.4 - Landmark 1-25

Although the number of data values on a line is restricted to 20,000, the

user should order his array data as rows or multiples of rows to make data
entries at specific locations easily referenced.
array LAYER
value(s)
Example: DEPTH LAYER

4*2000 4*2020 4*2040 00
The depths for layer 2 are calculated using the DZ values from the ZVAR
example.
Values of DEPTH assigned to the gridblocks are: 00
1.5.2.7 Block Depths From Origin (DIP)
The DIP option can be used only to enter the ZCORN, DEPTH or
MDEPTH arrays. When used for the ZCORN array, the XCORN and
YCORN arrays and one of the corner-point thickness arrays must have
been previously read. When used with the DEPTH or MDEPTH arrays,
1-26 Landmark - R2003.4

either the DZ or the H array must have been previously read. Using the
DIP option, VIP-CORE calculates the data values for the first layer of
gridblocks based upon the DIP information, then calculates the depths for
the remaining gridblocks based upon the thicknesses using the LAYER
option.
For a rectangular coordinate system, the depth of each gridblock in the

first layer is calculated from a reference depth (dref), the dip angle in the x
direction (xdip), and the dip angle in the y direction (ydip). For a radial
coordinate system, the depth of each gridblock is calculated from a
reference depth (dref), the steepest dip angle in the radial direction (rdip),
and the angle between the radial of steepest dip angle and the 0 radial
(theta). Positive dip angles indicate increasing depth. Angles must be
entered in decimal degrees. Minutes should be converted to decimal
fractions of a degree.
If only the reference depth is given, the system is considered non-dipping

and each gridblock in the first layer is assigned the depth value dref.
After a depth value is calculated/assigned for each gridblock in the first

layer, the depths of the remaining layers are calculated from the depths of
the first layer and gridblock thicknesses.
When MOD cards (Section 1.5.4.1) are used with this option only the
specified locations are changed; the depths of the locations not specified
on the MOD cards are not recalculated. For example, if the depths of layer
1 are modified, then the depths of the other layers are not recalculated.
Thus,
DEPTH (layer 2) ≠ DEPTH (layer 1) + DZ (layer 1). 00
Indiscriminate use of the MOD card may therefore result in different

layers occupying the same or overlapping positions.
To avoid this problem, MODLYR cards (Section 1.5.4.2) may be used.

When the depths of layer 1 are modified using MODLYR cards, the depths
of the remaining layers are recalculated.
Using the DIP option for radial coordinates does NOT result in a cone.
Instead, it results in a dipping cylinder in which elevations at 180 degrees
will decrease moving outward from the well at the same slope that
elevations will increase along the 0 degree plane.
R2003.4 - Landmark 1-27

For Rectangular Coordinates 00
DEPTH DIP
dref xdip ydip
Definitions: 00
dref Depth to the top (DEPTH) or middle (MDEPTH) of

gridblock (1,1,1) or depth to corner point (1,1,1)
when used for the ZCORN array, in a cartesian grid,
ft (m).
xdip Dip in the x direction, measured between the x axis

and horizontal, decimal degrees. This can be
omitted if both xdip and ydip are equal to zero. A
positive value indicates increasing depth.
ydip Dip in the y direction, measured between the y axis

and the horizontal, decimal degrees. This can be
omitted if it is equal to zero. A positive value
indicates increasing depth.
For Radial Coordinates 00
DEPTH DIP
dref rdip theta
Definitions: 00
dref Depth to the origin of the radial grid system, ft (m).
rdip The angle measured between the radial of steepest

dip angle and the horizontal, decimal degrees. This
can be omitted if both rdip and theta are equal to
zero. A positive value indicates increasing depth.
theta The angle between the 0 radial and the radial of

steepest dip angle, decimal degrees. This can be
omitted if it is equal to zero.
Example 1 Given: dref = 1575 feet

xdip = 0 degrees
ydip = 32 degrees
Input: MDEPTH DIP

1575 0 32 00
1-28 Landmark - R2003.4

Example 2 Given: dref = 2000 feet

rdip = 15 degrees
theta = 0 degrees (This can be omitted.)
Input: DEPTH DIP

2000 15 00
1.5.2.8 Define New Array From Previously Defined Array (MULT)
The MULT option allows the user to define a new array from a previously-
defined array. Each element of the new array is a constant multiple of the
previously defined array. If the new array is the ZCORNE, ZCORNW, or
ZCORSW array, and if the previously-defined array is the ZCORN array,
then the program automatically matches up corner points in ZCORN and
the new array. In all other cases, the new array and the previously-defined
array should have the same dimensions.
array MULT
mult array
Definitions: 00
mult Multiplier to use with the specified array.
Example: KZ MULT
.1 KX 00
In this example, kzi = 0.1 * kxi for all gridblocks i. 00
1.5.2.9 Directional Relative Permeability Option (dir) (Not Available in

VIP-THERM)
The directional relative permeability option allows each gridblock to have

different relative permeability values in each flow direction. For vertical
equilibrium (VE) models, the program will internally generate the relative
permeability functions. For non-VE models, the user must assign
saturation function tables and/or relative permeability endpoints for each
flow direction for which there is variation.
array dir
value(s)
R2003.4 - Landmark 1-29

Definitions: 00
array A valid array name from the following list of arrays

allowed for the directional relative permeability
option: ISAT, ISATI, SWL, SWR, SWRO, SWU, SGL,
SGR, SGRO, SGU, SGRW, KROLW, KRWRO,
KRGRO, KRGRW.
The following are additional arrays for the DUAL

option:ISATF,ISATIF, SWLF, SWRF, SWROF, SWUF,
SGLF, SGRF, SGROF, SGUF, SGRWF, KROLWF,
KRWROF, KRGROF, KRGRWF.
dir The direction to which this array data applies, from

the following list of alpha labels:
X+ Flow from gridblock (i,j,k) to (i+1,j,k)
X- Flow from gridblock (i,j,k) to (i-1,j,k)
Y+ Flow from gridblock (i,j,k) to (i,j+1,k)
Y- Flow from gridblock (i,j,k) to (i,j-1,k)
Z+ Flow from gridblock (i,j,k) to (i,j,k+1)
Z- Flow from gridblock (i,j,k) to (i,j,k-1)
A Flow for all four areal directions.
V Flow for both vertical directions.
amin Minimum value against which data values are

checked (optional).
amax Maximum value against which data values are

checked (optional).
Data values are entered as necessary for the array option being used. 00
Several data conventions should be noted. If array data is entered for the
(+) direction and not for the (-) direction, the (-) direction array will default
to the (+) direction data. If neither (+) direction or (-) direction arrays are
entered, both arrays will default to the array of the same type without
direction specification. For example, if the ISAT X+ array is entered, the
values for ISAT X- default to the ISAT X+ values. However, if the ISAT X+
array is not entered, the default values for both the ISAT X+ and ISAT X-
arrays are the values in the ISAT array. The saturation table assignment for
well calculations defaults, as before, to the ISAT array. If a directional
array is entered for either SWR or SWRO, both arrays must be entered for
1-30 Landmark - R2003.4

that direction. The same requirement holds for the SGR and SGRO arrays.
The areal (A) and vertical (V) direction options cannot be mixed with the
(+) and (-) direction options for the same type of array data.
Examples: ISAT CON

1
ISAT A CON
2
ISAT V CON
3
SWR X+ ZVAR
.15 .2 .18 .12
SWRO X+ ZVAR
.75 .82 .79 .86 00
In the data given above, well relative permeability calculations will use
saturation Table 1, interblock flow calculations in the areal direction will
use saturation Table 2, and interblock flow calculations in the vertical
direction will use saturation Table 3. Water-oil saturation function
endpoint values in the x direction are specified, while the equivalent
values for the y direction default from saturation Table 2, and the z
direction default from saturation Table 3.
1.5.3 Corner Point Array Options

Corner point arrays display different relationships from those used to
define "conventional" grids. This includes the fact that, in some cases,
node values are required instead of block center values - each grid
dimension is increased by one for these arrays. In a stacked system, the
bottom of one grid block may have the same corner points as the block
below, leading to special requirements for array input and duplication.
Several special input options are described in the following pages. 00
1.5.3.1 X Direction Variation by Layer (LNXVAR)
array LNXVAR
value(s)
Definition: 00
The LNXVAR option requires NX * NL data values where NL is the

number of layers for which information is specified. The default value is
NL=2. For certain corner point arrays (NX+1) * NL data values are
required. LNXVAR varies the array property in the x direction in the NL
layers, while holding it constant in the y direction. The values of the array
R2003.4 - Landmark 1-31

in the NL+1, NL+2, ....,NZ layers are copied from the NL layer. This option
is usually used with the XCORN array for the LINE corner point position
option.
Examples: XCORN LNXVAR 1 3 2

1. 1.5 2.0 2.5 2.8
1.1 1.6 2.1 2.6 2.9 00
1.5.3.2 Y Direction Variation by Layer (LNYVAR)
array LNYVAR
value(s)
Definition: 00
The LNYVAR requires NY * NL data values where NL is the number of

layers for which information is input. The default value is NL=2. For
certain corner-point arrays (NY+1) * NL data values are specified.
LNYVAR varies the array property in the y direction in the NL layers,
while holding it constant in the x direction. The values of the array in the
NL+1, NL+2, ,...,NZ layers are copied from the NL layer. This option is
usually used with the YCORN array for the LINE corner point position
option.
Examples: YCORN LNYVAR 7 9 2

9. 8.5 8 7.5
8.9 8.4 7.9 7.4 00
1.5.3.3 Z Direction Variation by Layer (LNZVAR)
array LNZVAR
value(s)
Definition: 00
The LNZVAR requires NZ * NL data values where NL is the number of

layers for which information is specified. The default value is NL=2. For
certain corner-point arrays (NZ+1) * NL data values are specified.
LNZVAR varies the array property in the z direction in the NL layers,
while holding it constant in the x and y directions. The values of the array
in the NL+1, NL+2, ...., NZ layers are copied from the NL layer. This
option is usually used with the ZLNCOR array for the LINE corner point
option.
1-32 Landmark - R2003.4

Examples: ZLNCOR LNZVAR 10 15.5 2

10 15.3 00
1.5.3.4 Values by Layer (LNVAL)
array LNVAL
value(s)
Definition: 00
LNVAL requires NX*NY*NL data values. For corner-point arrays

(NX+1)*(NY+1)*NL or NX*NY*NL data values are required depending on
the array. Here NL is the number of layers for which information is
specified. The default value is NL=2. Each grid block for the NL layers
must be assigned a value. All rows for the first layer are entered in order of
increasing y index, followed by the remaining layers in order of increasing
z index. The values of the array in the NL+1, NL+2, ....,NZ layers are
copied from the NL layer. This option is usually used with the XCORN,
YCORN, ZCORN, or ZLNCOR array for the LINE corner point option.
Examples: ZLNCOR LNVAL

C The first xy-plane
4*10 11
4*10 11
4*10 11
4*10.1 11.1 00
C The second xy-plane

4*15.3 16.3
4*15.3 16.3
4*15.3 16.3
4*15.4 16.4 00
1.5.3.5 Replicate Concurrent Point Arrays (COPY)
array COPY
Definition: 00
This option can only be used with the ZBOT, ZBOTNW, ZBOTNE, or
ZBOTSW array. No data input is required. The depths of the corner points
in the bottom of the every block are set to be equal to the depths of the
R2003.4 - Landmark 1-33

corner points in the top of the next block below it. It is required that
ZCORN, or ZCORNW, ZCORNE, ZCORSW arrays must have been
previously read.
Examples: For example, such input as

ZCORN ZVAR
10 15.3 18
ZBOT COPY 00
is equivalent to 00
ZCORN ZVAR
10 15.3 18
ZBOT ZVAR
15.3 18 00
1.5.4 Array Modification Options

The array modification options in this section can be used to simplify data
input and to change data when making comparison runs. The MOD and
VMOD options can be used with any of the input arrays. With these
options, modification data must immediately follow the array being
modified or created. Any number of MOD and/or VMOD changes can
follow that array. (There are also modification methods which are used to
modify only the pore volume and/or transmissibility just before
initialization. These methods are described in Section 6.1.)
The array modification option MODLYR is used to modify the depths in

layer 1 of a model. The depths of the remaining layers are then
recalculated from the new depths of the first layer and gridblock
thicknesses. This option may only be used following the use of LAYER or
DIP for one of the depth arrays (Section 5.7) and must immediately follow
that array.
The array modification option XREG is used to designate the "extra

regions" option. That is, gridblocks may be assigned to more than one
output region. This option only applies to the IREGION array
(Section 5.15) and must immediately follow the array data, or any MOD/
VMOD cards.
A full array is first generated by assigning a value to every gridblock

according to the array input option (Section 1.5.2) chosen. Then, only the
specific gridblock locations described by the MOD/MODLYR/VMOD/
XREG modification are changed within this "full array". The modification
described by each data card is performed at the time that card is read.
Therefore, the modifications are order dependent. The result of multiple
modifications is cumulative.
1-34 Landmark - R2003.4

1.5.4.1 Modify by a Constant (MOD)
The MOD option is used to apply a constant arithmetic operation to a

portion of the grid system. It modifies the immediately preceding array
data. Only one title card containing the keyword MOD is required, but the
data cards may be repeated as necessary.
MOD
i1 i2 j1 j2 k1 k2 #v
Definitions: 00
MOD Indicates that changes are to be made to the

preceding array using the MOD option.
Gridblock locations are defined by indices i, j, k in reference to the (x,y,z)

or (r,θ,z) grid. Modifications are applied to array elements that fall in the
portion of the grid defined by:
i1 ≤ I ≤ i2
j1 ≤ J ≤ j2
k1 ≤ K ≤ k2
# An operator that describes how the array is to be

modified. Any of the following symbols may be
used:
+ add
- subtract
/ divide
* multiply
= equal
There are no spaces between the operator and the

value, #v.
v The value to be applied to the indicated portion of

the array, according to the specified operation.
Example: POR CON

0.20
MOD
2 4 2 2 1 1 *1.5
2 3 3 3 1 1 =0.22 00
R2003.4 - Landmark 1-35

The gridblock values assigned to porosity are: 00
1.5.4.2 Modify Depth by a Constant (MODLYR)
The MODLYR option is used to apply a constant arithmetic operation to

the depth values of gridblocks in layer 1 of a grid system. The depth array
must be the immediately preceding array, and the array option LAYER or
DIP must have been used. Only one title card containing the keyword
MODLYR is required, but the data cards may be repeated as necessary.
MODLYR
i1 i2 j1 j2 #v
Definitions:
MODLYR Indicates that changes are to be made to the layer 1

depths of the preceding depth array.
Gridblock locations are defined for layer 1 by indices i,j in reference to

the (x,y,z) or (r,θ,z) grid, with z=1. Modifications are applied to array
elements that fall in the portion of the grid defined by
i1 ≤ I ≤ i2
j1 ≤ J ≤ j2
K=1
1-36 Landmark - R2003.4


used:
+ add
- subtract
/ divide
* multiply
= equal

value, #v.

the array, according to the specified operation.
Example: DZ CON
10
DEPTH LAYER
3*2000 3*2020
Consider the following MOD and MODLYR cards:
MOD
1 3 1 2 1 1 +4
MODLYR
1 3 1 2 +4
R2003.4 - Landmark 1-37

Values of depth assigned to the gridblocks in layer 1 are the same

for either of the 2 methods:
2004 2004 2004
2024 2024 2024
Layer 2 depths, though, are different, depending on

whether MOD or MODLYR is used.
For MOD, the depths are:
2010 2010 2010
2030 2030 2030
For MODLYR the depths are:
2014 2014 2014
2034 2034 2034
1-38 Landmark - R2003.4

1.5.4.3 Replace Selected Values (VMOD)
VMOD modifies the array data immediately preceding the VMOD card
with an individual value for each changed gridblock. A minimum of two
cards must follow the VMOD card. The first card contains the locations
describing the gridblocks to be changed. The second card contains the
altered values for those gridblocks. A new VMOD card and its
corresponding data cards are read for each different portion of the grid
system being altered.
VMOD
i1 i2 j1 j2 k1 k2 (op)
Values as necessary
Definitions: 00
VMOD Indicates that changes are to be made to the

preceding array by replacing selected values.
Gridblock locations are defined by indices i, j, k in reference to the

(x,y,z) or (r,θ,z) grid. Modifications are applied to array elements that
fall in the portion of the grid defined by:
i1 ≤ I ≤ i2
j1 ≤ J ≤ j2
k1 ≤ K ≤ k2
op An optional keyword that defines the operation to

apply to the array. Any of the following keywords
may be used:
ADD add
SUB subtract
DIV divide
MULT multiply
EQ equal. This is the default.
Enough values must be read to replace all array elements in the

designated portion of the grid. The number of required values is:
(k2 - k1 + 1) * (j2 - j1 + 1) * (i2 - i1 + 1).
The order of replacement is by x direction (r direction) rows. All rows

for the first xy (rθ) plane are entered in order of increasing J index,
followed by the remaining planes in order of increasing K index.
Example 1: POR CON

0.20
VMOD
R2003.4 - Landmark 1-39

2 4 2 3 1 1 EQ
0.25 0.26 2*.27
0.29 0.30 00
The final array values are: 00
Example 2: POR CON

0.20
VMOD
2 4 2 2 1 1 EQ
0.25 0.26 0.27
VMOD
1 3 3 3 1 1 EQ
0.28 .29 .40 00
The final array values are: 00
1-40 Landmark - R2003.4

1.5.5 Unformatted (BINARY) Data

Unformatted data files containing only single precision real data values
(REAL*4) can be read using the INCLUDE card (Section 1.5.1.2). The data
may consist of multiple records each of any length. This feature is
intended for reading (very large) array data using the value or vmod
options.
Example:
POR VALUE
INCLUDE por.dat
CORP VALUE
INCLUDE corp.dat
1.6 Connection Transmissibility Modification (MULT)

This option modifies the transmissibility multipliers defined using arrays
TMX, TMY, TMZ, etc. This option is also used to assign group of
gridblocks to a name for use by the MULTFL option in VIP-CORE and
VIP-EXEC.
The options on the MULT card can be specified in any order. One array
name must be included on each card. Other keywords are optional. If
some option is not included the corresponding value defined in the
previous MULT card is used. For the first MULT card the following default
values are used: ALL MINUS MULT.
The cards are order-dependent. The MULT card allows the user to modify
transmissibility multipliers for standard and non-standard connections.
Connections between Block (I, J, K) and Blocks (I-1, J, K), (I+1, J, K), (I, J+1,
K), (I, J-1, K), (I, J, K-1), (I, J, K+1) are defined as standard connections. All
other connections are non-standard. The transmissibility multipliers for
left and right block faces in three coordinate directions can be specified. If
a nonstandard transmissibility multiplier for a block face is set to zero,
then faulted connections are not automatically generated for this face.A
minimum of one card must follow the MULT card.
The MULT cards must appear after all array input and before any fault
data.
 STD 
   MINUS 
MULT array  NONSTD    (operator)
   PLUS 
 ALL 
(FNAME fname)
I1 I2 J1 J2 K1 K2 (val)
(Repeat as necessary)
R2003.4 - Landmark 1-41

Definitions: 00
array One of the following: TX, TY, TZ, TR, TTHETA, TXF,
TYF, TZF, TRF or TTHETF. In VIP-THERM, TXT0,
TYT0, TZT0, TRT0, TTT0 are also allowed.
NONSTD Non-standard transmissibility multipliers are to be

modified.
STD Standard transmissibility multipliers are to be

modified.
ALL Standard and non-standard transmissibility

multipliers are to be modified.
MINUS Transmissibility multipliers for the minus (from

block center) faces are to be modified.
PLUS Transmissibility multipliers for the plus (from block

center) faces are to be modified.
operator Defines the operation to apply to the

transmissibility multipliers. Any of the following
keywords may be used:
ADD - add
SUB - subtract
DIV - divide
MULT - multiply
EQ - equal.
FNAME Alpha character keyword for assigning a name to

the group of blocks defined by the following i,j,k
range, and in a direction (X,Y, or Z) consistent with
the array specified on the MULT card. A grid block
will be assigned to a name based on the last
definition encountered. By default no identifying
name is assigned. FNAME is not allowed in
combination with the PLUS option.
fname A character string or number by which the group of

grid blocks is identified. A maximum of eight
characters or numbers is allowed, otherwise the
string is truncated to the first eight.
I1, I2 Range of grid blocks to be modified in the x (r)

direction.
J1, J2 Range of grid blocks to be modified in the y (θ)

direction.
1-42 Landmark - R2003.4

K1, K2 Range of grid blocks to be modified in the z

direction.
val The value to be applied to the indicated portion of

the multiplier array by using the specified
operation. If this value is not specified, then enough
values must be provided in the following data cards
to modify transmissibility multipliers in all blocks
of the designated portion of the grid. The number of
values required is: (k2 - k1 + 1) * (j2 -j1 + 1) * (i2 -i1 +
i).
Example: 00
C
C TRANSMISSIBILITY MULTIPLIERS FOR NON-STANDARD
C CONNECTIONS
C
MULT TX PLUS NONSTD MULT
1 1 3 3 1 1 0.5
MULT TX MINUS DIV
2 2 3 3 2 2
2
2 2 4 5 2 2 3
MULT TY
2 2 4 4 1 1 2
C
CTRANSMISSIBILITY MULTIPLIERS FOR STANDARD
CCONNECTIONS
C
MULT TZ STD PLUS MULT
1 10 2 2 2 2
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9 10
MULT TX
2 3 3 3 2 2
2 0.5
MULT TY MINUS ADD
2 2 3 3 2 2 3
MULT TZ DIV
2 2 3 3 2 3
2
4
R2003.4 - Landmark 1-43

NOTE: 1. The PLUS and MINUS options can be mixed only if LGR is on,
or if STD and the operators are MULT or DIV.
2. FNAME identifiers can also be assigned using the FAULTS,

OVER, and VOVER keywords. A gridblock will be assigned
based on the last identifier encountered.
1.7 Inter/Intra Region Transmissibility Multiplier (MULTIR)

The MULTIR keyword is used to modify the transmissibilities between
and within regions. The transmissibility regions are defined using the
ITRAN(F) array data (Section 5.26). 00
The MULTIR data are required to follow the COARSEN data. 00
MULTIR
itr1 itr2 tmul (X) (Y) (Z) (STD) (NONSTD)
Definition: 00
itr1, itr2 Positive integer values identifying

transmissibility regions. The transmissibility
regions are defined using the ITRAN and
ITRANF arrays (Section 5.26). When itr1 and itr2
are different, the transmissibilities between these
regions are multiplied by tmul wherever they are
in contact. When itr1 and itr2 are equal the
transmissibilities within the region are multiplied
by tmul.
tmul Transmissibility multiplier between regions itr1

and itr2 wherever they are in contact.
XYZ Directions for applying the multiplier. The letters

are order independent and spaces are optional.
Default XYZ. Specifying all directions also
multiplies connections that do not have a
direction associated with them. Connections
defined using FTRANS do not have a direction.
STD Apply the multiplier to the standard connections

which include grid to grid connections for local
grid refinement.
NONSTD Apply the multiplier to non-standard connections

(faults).
1-44 Landmark - R2003.4

NOTE: 1. When neither STD or NONSTD are specified then both

standard and non-standard connections are multiplied.
2. The multipliers are applied after the FTRANS, OVER, and

COARSEN data, and are cumulative
3. The matrix to fracture exchange transmissibility connections of

the dual porosity option are not effected by MULTIR.
1.8 Named Fault/Region Transmissibility Multiplier (MULTFL)

The MULTFL keyword is used to modify the transmissibilities between
grid blocks that have been assigned a name. Grid blocks can be assigned a
name using the FNAME parameter on the MULT (Section 1.6), FAULTS
(Section 2.2.9.2), OVER (Section 7.2) and VOVER (Section 7.4) options.
Both standard and non-standard transmissibility connections if any are
multiplied. 00
The MULTFL keyword is also used to modify the transmissibility

connections that are defined and named with the FTRANS option
(Section 6.6.2). Only the non-standard transmissibility connections
defined with the FTRANS data will be effected, while any corresponding
standard connections will be left unaltered. 00
The MULTFL data are required to follow the MULTIR data. 00
Note: All the transmissibility multipliers are cumulative. They are applied
on top of any previously defined using other options. 00
MULTFL fname tmul

Definition: 00
MULTFL Alpha character keyword.
fname Name or number identifying the fault or group of

grid block to be operated upon.
tmul Transmissibility multiplier.
R2003.4 - Landmark 1-45

1-46 Landmark - R2003.4

Chapter
2
00000Initialization Data
2.1 Introduction
Initialization data include all data defined at time zero in a simulation. These
include: 00
■ title cards
■ fluid initialization controls
■ initialization output controls
■ the description of the reservoir
■ the reservoir rock
■ fluid properties.
The data are input after the INIT card and are terminated by the END card. The
data are checked for consistency as they are read. If no errors occur, the data are
then processed. If no initialization errors are generated, the program initializes
and writes an initialization restart file. When the program initializes, the average
pressure, fluids in place, saturation pressure, oil, water, and gas saturation, and oil
and gas composition arrays are calculated. 00
All of the data on each card are free field, following the description given in
Section 1.5. However, the order of data cards is important. The first card in the
initialization data must be the INIT card. 00
The data groups must be arranged as shown in Figure 2-1. Some restrictions on
the order of data cards within each data group may apply. These restrictions are
described in subsequent sections of this chapter. 00
In all of the data descriptions that follow, parentheses are used to indicate optional
items of data. Parentheses are never included in the actual data stream. Items of
data that are aligned vertically in the description of a single data card indicate a
choice; these items are mutually exclusive. 00
R2003.4 - Landmark 2-47

Initialization Data VIP-CORE REFERENCE MANUAL
00
Figure 2-1: Order Of Initialization Data
2-48 Landmark - R2003.4

VIP-CORE REFERENCE MANUAL Initialization Data
2.2 Initialization Utility Data

The following cards can be used to control the program. Of these, only the DATE
card, a grid system card (NX or NR), and a physical property constants card
(DWB) are mandatory for every run. The other cards should be used when
appropriate. Within this data group the order of the utility data cards is immaterial. 00
2.2.1 General
2.2.1.1 Initialization (INIT)
INIT
The first card in the initialization data contains only the keyword INIT.
Initialization data are terminated by the appearance of an END card. 00
Example: 00
INIT
TITLE1
HISTORY MATCH NO FAULTS ZEROED OUT
TITLE2
SAG12 WITH RELICT OIL
DATE 1 6 1977 00
2.2.1.2 Change Default Dimensions (DIM)
The DIM card allows the user to change the default dimensions on any
initialization run. Multiple sets of DIM cards may be entered, one after the other. 00
DIM param1 param2 . . . paramn (card 1)

size1 size2 . . . sizen (card 2)
Definitions: 00
param Alpha labels of those dimension parameters being

defined:
NBATMX Maximum number of user-defined separator batteries.

(NBATMX ≥ NSTGMX) Default is 10.
NCBLKS Maximum number of coarse gridblock faces for all flux

regions. Default is 100.
NCDPMX Maximum number of depth values for composition vs.

depth. Default is 15.
R2003.4 - Landmark 2-49

NDHCMX Maximum number of lines in the hydrocarbon pore

volume vs. depth table. Default is 100.
NEIPMX Maximum number of pressure entries in a single EOS

interpolation table. Default is 50.
NEQLMX Maximum number of equilibrium regions. Default is 15.
NFBLKS Maximum number of fine gridblock faces for all flux

regions. Default is 200.
NFLMAX Maximum number of tracked hydrocarbon types. Default

is 10.
NFWMAX Maximum number of tracked water types. Default is 6.
NFXREG Number of distinct boundary flux regions. Default is 2.
NHLMAX Maximum number of gridblock faces for VIP-THERM

heat loss calculation. Default is 1000.
NINFBL Maximum number of gridblocks in all the influx regions

combined. Default is 600.
NINFMX Maximum number of distinct influx regions. Default is 5.
NINFTD Maximum number of table entries in Carter-Tracy TD-

PD table. Default is 100.
NLKFLT Maximum number of conductive faults. Default is 0.
NLKMAX Maximum number of faulted gridblocks in a conductive

fault. Default is 200.
NNTMAX Maximum number of total fault connections. Default is

5000.
NOBMAX Maximum number of over/underburden layers for VIP-

THERM heat loss calculations. Default is 10.
NPCMP Maximum number of interpolation points in gas plant

table lookup. Default is 20.
NPINCM Maximum number of points in each undersaturated

curve. Default is 10.
NPMAX Number of pressure entries in a single reconstructed PVT

table. Default is 50, normally do not change.
NPMXCT Number of pressure entries in a single reconstructed

compaction table. Default is 50.
2-50 Landmark - R2003.4

NWCMAX Maximum number of water-induced rock compaction

tables.
NWCDIM Number of water saturation entries in a single

reconstructed water-induced rock compaction table.
Default is 50.
NWCSWM Maximum number of initial water saturations, SWINIT,

in any water-induced rock compaction table, WIRCT.
NPSATM Maximum number of undersaturated curves (oil and gas).

Default is 6.
NOTE: If data is read for oil only or gas only, the minimum required is 2 curves. If
data is read for both oil and gas, the minimum required is 4 curves.
NREGMX Maximum number of output regions. Default is 40.
NSATMX Maximum number of unique saturatin regions.
NSATNT Maximum number of entries in each saturation table

input. Default is 30.
NSGDIM Number of SG entries in a single reconstructed gas

saturation table. Default is 51, normally do not change.
NSIGMX Maximum number of pressure values in surface tension

ratio versus pressure table (DUAL, PSEUDO option).
Default is 20.
NSMTAB Maximum number of saturation entries in the pseudo

capillary pressure tables. (DUAL, PSEUDO option.)
Default is 10.
NSTGMX Maximum number of stages per battery. (NBATMX ≥

NSTGMX) Default is 5.
NSWDIM Number of SW entries in a single reconstructed water

saturation table. Default is 51, normally do not change.
NTAB Maximum number of unique PVT regions. Default is 4.
NTABCM Maximum number of compaction regions. Default is 3.
NTMAX Maximum number of temperature entries in VIP-

THERM PVT tables. Default is 30.
NVISMX Maximum number of entries in the VIP-THERM

VISOIL or VISGAS tables. Default is 15.
R2003.4 - Landmark 2-51

NXMAX Number of composition entries in a single reconstructed

PVT table. Default is 40, normally do not change.
size The value or size of the corresponding parameter.
NOTE: NBMAX (maximum number of gridblocks) is calculated internally based

on the values entered on the grid system options card (Section 2.2.2.5).
◆ Cartesian Grid System

NBMAX = NX * NY * NZ
◆ Corner-Point Cartesian Grid System

NBMAX = (NX+1) * (NY+1) * (NZ+1).
◆ Cylindrical Grid System

NBMAX = NR * NTHETA * NZ
◆ Dual Porosity/Permeability
NBMAX = NBMAX * 2
Example: 00
To increase the number of reporting regions to 80.

INIT
DIM NREGMX
80 00
2.2.1.3 Descriptive Run Information (TITLEn)
TITLE cards contain descriptive information about the run that will be printed in
the output title blocks. A maximum of three titles can be read, each on a separate
card following its corresponding alpha label card (TITLE1, TITLE2, or TITLE3).
Title cards defined during initialization are used throughout the simulation unless
redefined in a restart run (see Section 2.1 of the Simulation Modules Manual).
Title cards are not required. Any or all of the three title cards contained on a
restart record can be overwritten by entering new title cards. 00
TITLE1
title
TITLE2
title
TITLE3
title
Definition: 00
title The descriptive information to be printed in the output

title blocks. Centering the title between columns 1 and 80
centers the title in the output.
2-52 Landmark - R2003.4

2.2.1.4 Date (DATE)
The initialization date is input using a DATE card. Time is initialized to zero at
this date. VIP-CORE accounts for leap years, and provides for proper operation
into the 21st century. 00
DATE day mo yr
Definitions: 00
day Day of the month
mo Month of the year, between 1 and 12
yr Year in full (e.g., 1989), or in 2-digit form (e.g., 89)
If the 2-digit form is used, it will be converted to the full

4-digit form using the pivot-year defined by the
LGC_Y2K_PIVOT_YEAR environment variable.
2.2.1.5 End-of-File Marker (END)
This primary keyword appears in both the Initialization and Simulation Modules 00
END
The END card is required and must be the last card in the data stream; it acts as an
end-of-file marker. 00
2.2.2 Results File Control
2.2.2.1 Grid Data Written for Post-Processing (MAP)
The MAP card causes initialization arrays to be written to the vdb file or to the
map file. 00
One of the map cards MAP, MAPX, MAPY, or MAPZ must be entered if
recurrent arrays are to be mapped from the simulation module. 00
MAP (FORM) (NONE) (ADD) (ALL) (array1 ... arrayk)
R2003.4 - Landmark 2-53

Definition: 00
FORM This parameter, applicable only when data is written to

the map file, causes formatted records to be written to
the map file. It is required for files that are going to be
disposed to another computer, when binary compatibility
cannot be guaranteed. If the FORM parameter is omitted
and the map file is used, binary records will be written.
NONE Only the pore volume and corner-point arrays are to be

mapped.
ADD Map the default arrays as well as the listed arrays.
ALL Map all appropriate arrays.
array Alpha label of those arrays to be mapped (an array will

be mapped only if it is appropriate with respect to the
options in the model):
DX X-direction gridblock length.
DY Y-direction gridblock length.
DZ Z-direction gridblock length.
DEP Depth to top of gridblock.
MDEP Depth to center of gridblock.
DR Radial-direction gridblock length.
NETG Net-to-gross ratio.
DZN Net thickness.
POR Porosity.
KX X-direction permeability.
KY Y-direction permeability.
KZ Z-direction permeability.
TXR Reference x-direction transmissibility.
TYR Reference y-direction transmissibility.
TZR Reference z-direction transmissibility.
TDLR Reference l-diagonal transmissibility.
TDRR Reference r-diagonal transmissibility.
2-54 Landmark - R2003.4

ISAT Primary saturation table.
IPVT Fluid PVT property table.
IPVTW Water property table.
IEQU Equilibrium region.
IREG Summary region.
ICMT Compaction region.
IFID Named fault identifier.
ITRAN Transmissibility region identifier.
P Initial pressure.
PSAT Initial saturation pressure.
PDAT Initial datum pressure.
SG Initial gas saturation.
SO Initial oil saturation.
SW Initial water saturation.
SOM Initial mobile oil saturation.
SWM Initial mobile water saturation.
SAL Water salinity. Available only when the

PVTWSAL tables are entered.
ENDPTS Relative permeability endpoints,
SWL, SWU, SWR, SWRO,
SGL, SGU, SGR, SGRO.
TOP Calculated depth-corner point geometry.
PV Pore volume.
PVR Reference pore volume.
TX X-direction transmissibility.
TY Y-direction transmissibility.
TZ Z-direction transmissibility.
TDL L-diagonal transmissibility.
R2003.4 - Landmark 2-55

TDR R-diagonal transmissibility.
TEXR Reference matrix/fracture

transmissibility.
TEX Matrix/fracture exchange

transmissibility.
API API gravity.
KH Permeability thickness.
GOC Depth of gas-oil contact.
WOC Depth of water-oil contact.
FVWO Water-oil vertical equilibrium.
FVGO Gas-oil vertical equilibrium.
TMX X-direction transmissibility multiplier.
TMY Y-direction transmissibility multiplier.
TMZ Z-direction transmissibility multiplier.
TMDL L-diagonal transmissibility multiplier.
TMDR R-diagonal transmissibility multiplier.
WTRACK Saturation of tracked water type.
CR Elastic rock compressibility.
CRD Dilitant rock compressibility.
CRR Recompactive rock compressibility.
PD Dilation pressure.
PR Recompaction pressure.
FR Permanent fraction of dilation.
POMX Maximum dilitant porosity.
POMN Minimum recompactive porosity.
KMLX X-direction permeability factor.
KMLY Y-direction permeability factor.
KMLZ Z-direction permeability factor.
2-56 Landmark - R2003.4

KMDL L-diagonal permeability factor.
KMDR R-diagonal permeability factor.
DXC Calculated x-direction gridblock length.
DYC Calculated y-direction gridblock length.
DZC Calculated z-direction gridblock length.
DRS Incremental gridblock radii.
MLTX X-direction transmissibility multiplier

after over/vover.
MLTY Y-direction transmissibility multiplier

after over/vover.
MLTZ Z-direction transmissibility multiplier

after over/vover.
The following only apply to VIP-THERM:
CPR0 Reference rock heat capacity.
KTX0 Reference x-direction thermal

conductivity.
KTY0 Reference y-direction thermal

conductivity.
KTZ0 Reference z-direction thermal

conductivity.
TXT0 Reference x-direction thermal

transmissibility.
TYT0 Reference y-direction thermal

transmissibility.
TZT0 Reference z-direction thermal

transmissibility.
ICPR Rock heat capacity table region.
YW Mole fraction H2O - vapor phase.
T Temperature.
TXT X-direction thermal transmissibility.
TYT Y-direction thermal transmissibility.
R2003.4 - Landmark 2-57

TZT Z-direction thermal transmissibility.
TTMX X-direction thermal transmissibility

multiplier.
TTMY Y-direction thermal transmissibility

multiplier.
TTMZ Z-direction thermal transmissibility

multiplier.
MTXT X-direction thermal transmissibility

multiplier after over/vover.
MTYT Y-direction thermal transmissibility

MTZT Z-direction thermal transmissibility

NOTE: 1. The pore volume array and the corner-point array are always mapped.
2. If no array names are entered on the MAP card (i.e, MAP or MAP
FORM is input), the three saturation arrays and the x-direction, y-
direction, and z-direction transmissibilty arrays will by default be
mapped.
3. Any other array must be entered on the MAP card in order to be

mapped. Including the keyword ADD causes the 6 default arrays to
be mapped as well as the explicitly entered arrays.
4. The FORM parameter, if included on any of the MAP, MAPX,

MAPY, or MAPZ cards will apply to the writing of all data to the map
file.
5. Writing map arrays to the vdb file is the default. The NOVDB card
(Section 2.2.2.4) must be entered to write arrays to the map file.
6. The MAP and MAPOLD keywords may not be used simultaneously.
2-58 Landmark - R2003.4

2.2.2.2 Mole Fraction Data Written for Post-Processing (MAPX, MAPY,

MAPZ)
The MAPX, MAPY, and MAPZ cards cause the appropriate initialization mole
fraction arrays to be written to the vdb file or to the map file. 00
One of the map cards MAP, MAPX, MAPY, or MAPZ must be entered if
recurrent arrays are to be mapped from the simulation module. 00
outf (FORM) (cmpid1 cmpid2 ... cmpidk)
outf can be one of the following: 00
MAPX, MAPY, MAPZ 00
Definitions: 00
MAPX Map liquid mole fractions.
MAPY Map vapor mole fractions.
MAPZ Map overall hydrocarbon mole fractions.
FORM This parameter, applicable only when data is written to

the map file, causes formatted records to be written to
the map file. If it is omitted and the map file is used,
binary records will be written.
cmpid Alpha label identifying a component whose mole

fractions will be mapped. Only those components named
will be mapped.
NOTE: 1. If the user wishes to map arrays of mole fractions, the components to
be mapped must be explicitly selected on one of the above cards.
2. The FORM parameter, if included on any of the MAP, MAPX,

MAPY, or MAPZ cards, will apply to the writing of all data to the
map file.
3. Writing map arrays to the vdb file is the default. The NOVDB card
(Section 2.2.2.4) must be entered to write arrays to the map file.
R2003.4 - Landmark 2-59

2.2.2.3 Full Size Arrays to VDB File (NOVDBPACK)
The NOVDBPACK card is used to cause full size gridblock arrays to be written to
the vdb file in both VIP-CORE and the simulator module. The default is to
write array data for only the active gridblocks. 00
NOVDBPACK
2.2.2.4 Map File Instead of VDB File (NOVDB) (VIP-COMP and VIP-
ENCORE)
The NOVDB card is used to cause, in both VIP-CORE and the simulation
module, map arrays to be written to the map file rather than the vdb file. Writing
to the vdb file is the default. 00
NOVDB
2.2.2.5 Grid Data Written for Post-Processing to SIMOUT Map File

(MAPOLD)
MAPOLD (FORM) (array1 . . .)
Arrays 00
P PSAT SG SW SO PV Xi Yi Zi DENO DENG VISO VISG IFT GOR WCUT

SOM SWM PDAT API TX TY TZ TEX TR TTHETA Wi KRO KRG KRW 00
T TXT TYT TZT TRT TTT DENW VISW YW HLOS CHLS SOR HOIL HGAS
HWAT αFβγ (VIP-THERM only) 00
TDL TDR PVML TXML TYML TZML TRML TTML (VIP-THERM executable
only) 00
Definitions: 00
FORM This parameter causes formatted records to be written to

the SIMOUT map file. It is required for files that are
going to be disposed to another computer, when binary
compatibility cannot be guaranteed. If the FORM
parameter is omitted, binary records will be written to the
map file.
P Pressure.
PSAT Saturation pressure.
SG Gas saturation.
2-60 Landmark - R2003.4

SW Water saturation.
SO Oil saturation.
PV Pore volume including compaction effects.
TX X direction transmissibility including compaction effects.
TY Y direction transmissibility including compaction effects.
TZ Z direction transmissibility including compaction effects.
TR R direction transmissibility including compaction effects.
TTHETA Angular direction transmissibility including compaction

effects.
Xi Liquid phase composition of component i; e.g., X2

indicates component 2 in the liquid phase.
Yi Vapor phase composition of component i; e.g., Y5

indicates component 5 in the vapor phase.
Zi Overall hydrocarbon phase composition of component i;

e.g., Z7 indicates the overall hydrocarbon mole fraction
of component 7.
DENO Oil density.
DENG Gas density.
VISO Oil viscosity.
VISG Gas viscosity.
IFT Interfacial tension (only if the IFT option is in use).
GOR Gas-oil ratio.
WCUT Water-cut.
SOM Normalized mobile oil saturation.
SWM Normalized mobile water saturation.
PDAT Datum pressure.
KRO Relative permeability of the oil phase. Keywords KOX+,

KOX-, KOY+, KOY-, KOZ+, and KOZ- can be used to
map directional relative permeabilities in X+, X-, Y+, Y-,
Z+, and Z- directions, respectively.
R2003.4 - Landmark 2-61

KRG Relative permeability of the gas phase. Keywords KGX+,

KGX-, KGY+, KGY-, KGZ+, and KGZ- can be used to
map directional relative permeabilities in X+, X-, Y+, Y-,
Z+, and Z- directions, respectively.
KRW Relative permeability of the water phase. Keywords

KWX+, KWX-, KWY+, KWY-, KWZ+, and KWZ- can
be used to map directional relative permeabilities in X+,
X-, Y+, Y-, Z+, and Z- directions, respectively.
API API gravity of the liquid phase, available only if the PVT
interpolation option is in use.
TEX Matrix-fracture exchange transmissibility, available only

if the DUAL option is in use.
Wi Saturation of tracked water type i, available only if the

water tracking option is in use.
The following arrays are available only for the polymer injection option (VIP-
POLYMER): 00
CPW Aqueous phase polymer concentration.
RK Permeability reduction factor.
VW0 Aqueous phase viscosity (at GAMMA = 0).
CPT Total polymer concentration.
CPAD Absorbed polymer concentration.
GAMX X direction shear rate.
GAMY Y direction shear rate.
GAMZ Z direction shear rate.
VWX Aqueous phase viscosity (at GAMMA = GAMX).
VWY Aqueous phase viscosity (at GAMMA = GAMY).
VWZ Aqueous phase viscosity (at GAMMA = GAMZ).
NAT Total sodium concentration.
CAT Total calcium concentration.
CLT Total chlorine concentration.
NAW Aqueous phase sodium concentration.
CAW Aqueous phase calcium concentration.
2-62 Landmark - R2003.4

CLW Aqueous phase chlorine concentration.
NAAD Absorbed sodium concentration.
CAAD Absorbed calcium concentration.
TDL Diagonal -x, +y direction transmissibility including

compaction effects, available only with NINEPT option.
TDR Diagonal +x, +y direction transmissibility including

compaction effects, available only with NINEPT options.
PVML Ratio of pore volume to reference value.
TXML Ratio of x-direction transmissibility, including

compaction, to reference value.
TYML Ratio of y-direction transmissibility, including

TZML Ratio of z-direction transmissibility,including

TRML Ratio of r-direction transmissibility,including

TTML Ratio of theta-direction transmissibility,including

The following arrays are available only in the thermal option (VIP-THERM): 00
T Temperature.
TXT X-direction thermal transmissibility.
TYT Y-direction thermal transmissibility.
TZT Z-direction thermal transmissibility.
TRT R-direction thermal transmissibility.
TTT Theta-direction thermal transmissibility.
DENW Liquid water phase density.
VISW Liquid water phase viscosity.
YW Mole Fraction water in vapor phase.
HLOS Heat loss rate.
CHLS Cumulative heat loss.
R2003.4 - Landmark 2-63

SOR Steam-oil ratio.
HOIL Oil phase enthalpy.
HGAS Vapor phase enthalpy.
HWAT Liquid water phase enthalpy.
αFβγ Flow rate arrays. These arrays can be mapped only if a

FLOWS card (Section 2.2.19.3) is input. α, β, and γ
are unit, phase, and direction symbols which are speci-
fied as follows:
α =V, N, or M for volumetric, molar or mass flow
rates.
β = O, G, or for oil, gas, or water phase.
W
γ = X(R) flow in from i-1 for cartesian (radial)
grid.
γ = Y(T) flow in from j-1 for cartesian (radial)
grid.
γ=Z flow in from k-1.
γ=E flow in from i+1, j-1 for cartesian
grids with 9-point.
γ=W flow in from i-1, j-1, for cartesian
grids with 9-point.
NOTE: The MAPOLD card is needed if records of grid data, in the SIMOUT
form, are to be written during the simulation for subsequent post-
processing. There are two formats. If none of the array names are
specified, all recurrent output arrays are written to the map file at
WMAPOLD frequency (see Simulation Module). If the array names are
specified, only those arrays are written to the map file.
This data is written to FORTRAN Unit 9.
The MAP and MAPOLD keywords may not be used simultaneously.
For additional information, see the SIMOUT Map file format description
in the SIMULATION MODULE, OUTPUT CONTROL section.
Example: 00
MAPOLD FORM P SG SW SO 00
2-64 Landmark - R2003.4

2.2.3 Grid System Options

VIP-CORE offers two choices of reservoir geometry: Cartesian and cylindrical.
The Cartesian (rectangular) option is not limited to uniform, orthogonal grids; it is
general enough to approximate curvilinear grids (Reference 4). Trapezoidal
gridblock shapes also are feasible. The corner-point option facilitates the use of
such grids. The cylindrical grid commonly is referred to as "radial." It is most
often used for single-well studies. A special variation of the radial grid system,
WBSIM, is available for single-well gridded wellbore simulation. 00
2.2.3.1 Rectangular (Cartesian) Grid System (NX, NY, NZ, NCOMP)
For VIP-COMP or VIP-ENCORE, 00
NX NY NZ NCOMP
nx ny nz nc
For VIP-THERM, 00
NX NY NZ NCOMP NCV
nx ny nz nc ncv
Definitions: 00
The values on both cards must appear in the order shown. 00
nx Number of gridblocks in the x direction.
ny Number of gridblocks in the y direction. If nx = 1, then

ny cannot be > 1.
nz Number of gridblocks in the z direction.
nc Number of components in the hydrocarbon system.
ncv Number of volatile or distillable components in the

hydrocarbon system. The first ncv components are
volatile (VIP-THERM only).
NOTE: For the PVT interpolation option (Section 2.2.11.4) the number of
components must be set equal to 3.
Example: 00
NX NY NZ NCOMP
100 1 25 2 00
R2003.4 - Landmark 2-65

2.2.3.2 Radial (Cylindrical) Grid System (NR, NTHETA, NZ, RI, NCOMP)
For VIP-COMP or VIP-ENCORE, 00
NR NTHETA NZ RI NCOMP
nr ntheta nz ri nc
For VIP-THERM, 00
NR NTHETA NZ RI NCOMP NCV

nr ntheta nz ri nc ncv
Definitions: 00
The values on both cards must appear in the order shown. 00
nr Number of gridblocks in the r direction.
ntheta Number of gridblocks in the theta direction. If nr = 1,

then ntheta cannot be > 1.
nz Number of gridblocks in the z direction.
ri Inner radius, ft (m). This is the distance from the origin to

the inner edge of the first gridblock. For a single well
study, ri is usually the wellbore radius, where ri must be
greater than zero, except for the special WBSIM option
discussed below.
nc Number of components in the hydrocarbon system.
ncv Number of volatile or distallable, components in the

hydrocarbon sytem. The first ncv components are
volatile (VIP-THERM only).
NOTE: 1. For the PVT interpolation option (Section 2.2.11.4) the number of
components must be set equal to 3.
2. For the VIP-THERM dead oil option, nc must be set to 1 and ncv
must be set to 0.
Example: 00
NR NTHETA NZ RI NCOMP
37 4 3 .5 2 00
2-66 Landmark - R2003.4

2.2.3.3 Single-Well Gridded Wellbore Simulation (WBSIM) (Not available in

VIP-THERM)
WBSIM
This option is used to invoke a special radial initialization for gridded wellbore
simulation in which the first ring of gridblocks is used to model the wellbore. The
equations for wellbore flow are transformed into a form similar to Darcy flow, and
then applied to the vertical flow within the first ring of the grid system. Numerous
correlations are available for vertical or inclined pipe flow, including Hagedorn
and Brown, Dunns and Ross, Beggs and Brill, Aziz and Govier, Orkiszewski, and
Griffith, Lau, Hon, and Pearson. In these correlations, flow conditions are divided
into patterns or flow regimes. Using the user-specified flow correlation and the
computed flow regime at each interval, the simulator transforms the wellbore flow
equations into Darcy-type vertical flow coefficients for each interval at the start of
each timestep.
When the key word WBSIM is specified, the first column of gridblocks is
initialized to a porosity of 1.0 and the connate water saturation is set to 0.0, and it
is sealed off from the reservoir. All other input data for this first column
(wellbore) except for depth and gross thickness will not be used, except if a zero
vertical permeability is specified for any gridblock in the first column, the
wellbore will be sealed at that point.
The RI input variable, which is normally the wellbore radius, should be set to 0.0
for the case of simulating the wellbore as the first column of gridblocks. If the first
column of gridblocks is to be used for the annulus, then RI should be the outside
diameter of the tubing, and the first radius should be the inside diameter of the
casing.
The first radius specified will be the radius of the wellbore, followed by the
normal progression of radii to define the areal extent of the drainage area for the
well.
The non-productive zones between producing horizons must be defined as several

additional layers with zero porosities in order to define a continuous wellbore. At
least one additional layer above the top producing horizon should be specified in
order to generate a velocity calculation including the flow from the top horizon. It
is recommended at this time to grid the wellbore all the way to the surface [define
additional zero porosity layers all the way up to the surface] in order to avoid
problems encountered with the use of BHPTAB tables when the required
bottomhole pressure increases as rate declines. [The normal concept of finding the
intersection of the inflow performance curve and the interpolated BHPTAB curve
is no longer valid, since the inflow performance curve starts at BHP rather than
gridblock reservoir pressure.]
R2003.4 - Landmark 2-67

A separate equilibrium region should be defined for the wellbore [first column of
gridblocks] using the PVT data from the initially producing horizon with the
highest common datum pressure, but lowering the water level to below the deepest
productive horizon. This ensures that the wellbore is in pressure equilibrium with
and contains the fluid from the initial producing horizon.
2.2.3.4 Automatic Grid Setup for Pattern Elements (VIP-THERM Only)
NOTE: This option is compatible only with non-corner point rectangular grids.
Data given in this section must immediately follow that given in Sections
2.2.3.1 or 2.2.3.2.
Automatic grid setup is available for 1/8 and 1/4 elements of symmetry of 5- and
9-spot patterns and 1/12 and 1/6 elements of symmetry of 7-spot patterns. Both
diagonal and parallel grids are available for the 5- and 9-spot patterns. Use of the
nine-point finite difference option (NINEPT card, Section 2.2.6.5) is
recommended to reduce grid orientation effects. Patterns are allowed to be non-
square (rectangular) only for 1/8 or 1/4 elements of 5- or 9-spot patterns with
parallel grids. 00
Adjustments to transmissibilities, pore volumes, etc., to account for partial grid

blocks and to well permeabilities to account for partial wells are made
automatically. Extensive well data (such as maximum rates) are specified on a full
well basis. All total field and regional extensive output data (production, injection,
fluids in place, etc.) are scaled to (an optional multiple of) the full pattern value.
All extensive output data for individual wells are scaled to the full well value. See
“1/8 of 5- or 9-Spot Pattern” on page 2-71 through “1/6 of 7-Spot Pattern” on
page 2-76 describe the grid and required data for each pattern element option. 00
For homogeneous reservoirs, simulation of elements of symmetry in pattern

recovery options is an effective means of significantly reducing computer time
and storage requirements for predicting field performance (over full field
simulation). Differences between scaled-up pattern element simulation results and
full field simulation results will exist due to differences in boundary conditions
(The pattern element results are valid for wells in interior patterns since all lateral
2-68 Landmark - R2003.4

boundaries are assumed to be planes of symmetry.) This option is not compatible

with Faults. 00
Figure 2-2: Nine Spot Pattern
A single nine-spot pattern is shown in Figure 2-2. Points B and D represent

standard locations of production wells and Point A is the standard injection well
location. Wells may be defined in any gridblock in the pattern element grid. In this
case, points A, B, and D serve only to define the pattern. The triangle drawn
between points A, B, and D is a one eighth element of symmetry of the nine-spot
pattern. 00
00
Figure 2-3: Diagonal Grid for 1/8 Nine-Spot
A diagonal grid for the 1/8 element of symmetry is shown in Figure 2-3. This grid
is called diagonal because the flow from the injector to the corner producer is in
R2003.4 - Landmark 2-69

the diagonal grid direction. The grid is drawn such that the standard well locations
are in the center of their respective gridblocks and such that the lines of symmetry
(lines, AB, AD and BD) cut the gridblocks on the boundary by exactly half. This
introduces restrictions upon the grid dimensions. In this case NX must equal NY,
and for all types of pattern elements DX and DY must be constant. 00
In order to properly set up the simulation grid for the pattern element shown in
Figure 2-3, the following must be provided for and are accomplished
automatically with this option: 00
■ scaling of thermal and convective transmissibilities, pore volumes, total heat

capacities, and heat loss data for partial gridblocks
■ scaling of well permeabilities for partial wells
■ specification of inactive cells
■ calculation of DX, DY arrays
In addition, all total field, well management level, and regional extensive output
data (production, injection, fluids in place, etc.) are scaled to (an optional multiple
of) the full pattern value. All extensive output data for individual wells are scaled
to the full well value. 00
The following sections describe the generated grid, required data, and restrictions
for each pattern element option. 00
2-70 Landmark - R2003.4

1/8 of 5- or 9-Spot Pattern 00
A 5-spot pattern is the same as the 9-spot pattern shown in Figure 2-2 except that
no wells exist at points B. For the diagonal grid only, the well spacing is allowed
to differ in the xp and yp pattern coordinate directions. A well spacing ratio (wsr)
is defined as L/W in Figure 2-2. 00
Figure 2-4: Parallel Grid for 1/8 of 5- or 9-Spot
The diagonal grid for 1/8 of a 5- or 9-spot pattern is shown in Figure 2-3. The
parallel grid is shown in Figure 2-4. The following data must immediately follow
the grid dimension data in Section 2.2.3.1 or 2.2.3.2. 00
5
PATTERN (np) EIGHTH (DIAGONAL) area (wsr)
9
Definitions: 00
np Number of cell patterns contained in the reservoir.

Optional, default is 1.
5,9 Designates 5-spot or 9-spot.
DIAGONAL Alpha label indicating the diagonal grid is to be used.

Optional, default is parallel.
area Single full pattern area, acres (m2).
wsr Well spacing ratio, equal to L/W in Figure 2-2. Optional

for parallel grid only. Default is 1.
R2003.4 - Landmark 2-71

Restrictions: 00
Diagonal Grid
NX = NY ≥ 2
Parallel Grid
NX = 2 * NY - 1 ≥ 3
wsr may not be specified
NOTE: 1. All field and regional extensive output data are scaled to values for np
full patterns.
2. All extensive well data, such as maximum rates, are input on a full-
well basis.
3. All extensive output data for individual wells are scaled to full well
values.
4. DX and DY arrays are calculated automatically and cannot be

specified in the ARRAY data.
1/4 of 5- or 9-Spot Pattern

00
Figure 2-5: Diagonal Grid for 1/4 of 5- or 9-Spot
2-72 Landmark - R2003.4

00
Figure 2-6: Parallel Grid for 1/4 of 5- or 9-Spot
The diagonal grid for 1/4 of a 5- or 9-spot pattern is shown in Figure 2-5. The
parallel grid is shown in Figure 2-6. For the diagonal grid only, well spacing is
allowed to differ in the xp and yp pattern coordinate directions. The following data
must immediately follow the grid dimension data given in Section 2.2.3.1 or
2.2.3.2. 00
5
PATTERN (np) FOURTH (DIAGONAL) area (wsr)
9
Definitions: 00
np Number of full patterns contained in the reservoir.

5,9 Designates 5-spot or 9-spot.
DIAGONAL Alpha label indicating the diagonal grid is to be used.

Optional, default is parallel.
wsr Well spacing ratio, equal to L/W in Figure 2-2. Optional

for parallel grid only. Default is 1.
R2003.4 - Landmark 2-73

Restrictions: 00
Diagonal Grid
NX = NY ≥ 2
Parallel Grid
NX = NY = odd number ≥ 3
wsr may not be specified
full patterns.
well basis.
values.

1/12 of 7-Spot Pattern 00
The 7-spot pattern is in the shape of a regular hexagon and is shown in Figure 2-7.
Only one type of grid is available for 1/12 of a 7-spot pattern. This grid is parallel
with respect to the pattern coordinate directions but diagonal with respect to inter-
well flow, and is shown in Figure 2-8. 00
Figure 2-7: 7-Spot Pattern
2-74 Landmark - R2003.4

00
Figure 2-8: Grid for 1/12 of 7-spot
The following data must immediately follow the grid dimension data given in
Section 2.2.3.1 or 2.2.3.2. 00
PATTERN (np) TWELFTH 7 area
Definitions: 00

7 Designates 7-spot.
Restrictions:
NX = NY ≥ 2 00
R2003.4 - Landmark 2-75

full patterns.
well basis.
values.

1/6 of 7-Spot Pattern 00
For 1/6 of a 7-spot pattern, the parallel and diagonal grids are identical since the
wells at points B and C in Figure 2-7 are identical. The grid is shown in Figure 2-
9. 00
Figure 2-9: Grid for 1/6 of 7-Spot
The following data must immediately follow the grid dimension data given in
Section 2.2.3.1 or 2.2.3.2. 00
PATTERN (np) SIXTH 7 area
Definitions: 00

7 Designates 7-spot.
2-76 Landmark - R2003.4

Restrictions:
NX = 2 * NY -1 ≥ 3 00
NOTE: 1. All field, regional, and well management level extensive output data
are scaled to values for np full patterns.
well basis.
values.

2.2.4 Physical Property Constants

Initial reservoir temperature may be specified in one or more of the following
ways for compositional or thermal models (temperature variation is not allowed in
black oil models, but a constant value is required in the constant data): 00
1. Specified as a constant (Required, Section 2.2.4).
2. Specified by equilibrium region in the IEQUIL table (Section 4.2.1.1, 4.2.1.2,

4.2.1.3, or 4.2.2), overriding the constant value in option 1.
3. Specified by equilibrium region, as a function of depth or as a function of

depth and areal location, overriding values in options 1 and 2:
a. For isothermal and thermal compositional models, Section 4.4.11.3 or

4.4.11.4.
b. For thermal dead oil models, Section 4.7.1 or 4.7.2.
Entering temperature as a function of depth and areal location (4.4.11.4)

is discouraged, since the areal temperature variation is not accounted for
in the calculation of equilibrium phase pressures versus depth. See option
4 below for further discussion of this problem.
R2003.4 - Landmark 2-77

4. Specified as a gridblock array in Section 5.25.1, overriding all other input

values. This method is discouraged, since the calculation of the phase
pressure versus depth curves by equilibrium region, from which initial
gridblock pressures and saturations are computed, does not account for
variation of temperature by gridblock (or for areal variation of temperature by
equilibrium region). This results in errors in the computed initial gridblock
fluid properties of pressure, saturation pressure, phase saturations, and
possibly compositions. These errors may be avoided only by specifying all of
these initial gridblock fluid properties (only the pressure array in the thermal
dead-oil case) as gridblock array data.
2.2.4.1 VIP-COMP or VIP-ENCORE
The constant properties of the reservoir and its fluids are input in one of the
following forms: 00
a. This form also includes constant water properties.
DWB BWI VW CW CR TRES (TS PS)

dwb bwi vw cw cr tres (ts ps)
b. This form assumes that water properties will be specified with either
PVTW (Section 4.11.1) or PVTWSAL (Section 4.11.2).
CONSTANTS CR PBASE TRES (TS PS)

cr pbase tres (ts ps)
Definitions: 00
The titles on these cards must appear in the order shown. 00
dwb Density of the stock tank water, gm/cc (gm/cc).
bwi Water formation volume factor at pbase, rb/STB (cm/

STCM).
vw Water viscosity, cp (cp).
cw Water compressibility, psi-1 (kPa-1).
cr Rock compressibility, psi-1 (Kpa-1). This will generally

be bulk compressibility/porosity.
tres Reservoir temperature, ˚F (˚C).
ts Standard temperature, ˚F (˚C). Default is 60˚F (15˚C).
ps Standard pressure, psia (kPa). Default is 14.65 psia

(101.325 Kpa or 1.03353 kg/cm2).
2-78 Landmark - R2003.4

pbase Reference pressure for rock compressibility calculations,

psia (kPa). If not entered on a CONSTANTS card, pbase
is set to the pinit value of the first equilibrium region
(See Section 4.2.1 or Section 4.2.2).
2.2.4.2 VIP-THERM
Three options are available for specification of initial reservoir temperature:
1. Specified here as a constant value.
2. Specified as a function of depth in the composition data (in Section 4.4.12.3

(Composition Model) or Section 4.7 (Dead Oil Model)), overriding option 1.
3. Specified by gridblock using the TEMP array (Section 5.18), overriding options 1 and
2.
If the second or third option is used, some value for TRES must be input in the
physical property constant data, although it will not be used.
DWB CR DCPRDT DKTDSG TRES (TS PS)

dwb cr dcprdt dktdsg tres (ts ps)
Definitions:
The titles in this card must appear in the order shown.
dwb Density of the stock tank water, gm/cc (gm/cc).
cr Rock compressibility, psi-1 (KPa-1).
dcprdt Derivative term in rock heat capacity equation (see

below), ˚R-1 (˚K-1).
dktdsg Derivative term in rock thermal conductivity equation

(see below), dimensionless.
tres Initial reservoir temperature. If temperature versus depth

tables or values by gridblock are to be input, enter any
arbitrary value, ˚F (˚C).
ts Standard temperature, ˚F (˚C). Default is 60˚F (15˚C).
ps Standard pressure, psia (kPa). Default is 14.65 psia

(101.325 Kpa or 1.03353 kg/cm2).
NOTE: If either TS or PS is specified, then both must be specified.
The rock heat capacity equation is
R2003.4 - Landmark 2-79

CPR = CPR0 (1 + DCPRDT (T - TS))
where CPR0 is the reference rock thermal conductivity at standard temperature.

The derivative term, DCPRDT, is therefore defined as
δCPR 1
DCPRDT = --------------- ---------------
δT CPR0
The thermal conductivity equation is
KT = KT0 (1 - DKTDSG*SG)
where KT0 is the reference liquid filled thermal conductivity. The derivative term,
DKTDSG, is therefore defined as
– δ KT 1
DKTDSG = -------------- -----------
δSG KT 0
The partial derivatives appearing in the above equations are assumed to be
constants.
NOTE: If either TS or PS is specified, then both must be specified.
Service companies usually measure and report compressibility as relative

change in bulk volume per unit pressure change, or Cbulk = ∆Vbulk/
Vbulk/∆P. VIP requires rock compressibility measured as relative change
in pore volume per unit pressure change, Cr, where Cr = ∆Vpore/Vpore/
∆P. Since porosity is Vpore/Vbulk, and assuming incompressible rock
matrix, i.e. ∆Vbulk =∆Vpore, we have Cr = Cbulk/φ. Pore compressibility
can be input as array data using the CR card. In such a case the value
specified on the DWB card will be ignored.
Example:
DWB BWI VW CW CR TRES TS PS

1.0 1.0 0.3 3.E-6 3.E-6 181.0 60.0 14.7
2.2.4.3 Pore Volume Representation (PVEXP, PVLINEAR) (Therm only)
In VIP-COMP or in VIP-ENCORE, pore volume may be represented in only in

linear (without respect to PVMUL) form, which is: 00
PV = PVMUL * PVREF * (1.0 + CR * (P - PREF)) 00
In VIP-THERM, pore volume may also be represented in exponential form: 00
PV = PVMUL * PVREF * EXP(CR * (P - PREF)) 00
where:
PVMUL = Optional pore volume multiplier given as a function of
pressure (Compaction Option, Section 4.12),
PVREF = input pore volume, or input porosity times total (constant)
block volume,
CR = input rock compressibility,
2-80 Landmark - R2003.4

P = gridblock pressure, and

PREF = reference pressure, taken as PINIT(1) from EQUIL table
(Section 4.2). 00
In general, the linearized form is accurate for small (normal) values of

compressibility. 00
Porosity is given by the same expressions, with PHI (true porosity) and POR
(input, or reference, value of porosity) replacing PV and PVREF. Note that this
value of porosity is not the true rock porosity, but the ‘simulator’ porosity
corresponding to the assumption of constant total block volume, such that the pore
volume expression predicts the true pore volume behavior as a function of
pressure. 00
One of the following keywords may be optionally entered in VIP-THERM: 00
PVEXP
PVLINEAR
Definitions: 00
PVEXP Use exponential form of pore volume expression. This is

the default in VIP-THERM and is required if the
PORDEF Option (Section 4.16.1) is selected (in this
case, PVREF, PREF, and CR are all functions of
pressure)
PVLINEAR Use linear form of pore volume expression. This is the

default and only option in VIP-COMP and VIP-
ENCORE.
2.2.5 Output
2.2.5.1 Metric Units for Input and Output (METRIC)
The METRIC card indicates that all data being read and all printed output are in
metric units.
 KPA 
 
METRIC
 KG ⁄ CM2 
 BAR 
The pressure units for the metric option may be kPa, bar or kg/cm2; if neither KG/
CM2 nor BAR is specified, the default is kPa.
R2003.4 - Landmark 2-81

Example:
METRIC KG/CM2
2.2.5.2 Laboratory Units for Input and Output (LAB)
The LAB card indicates that all data being read and all printed output are in
laboratory units. Please refer to VIP-EXECUTIVE Technical Reference, Chapter
31.
LAB
When laboratory units are used, the program automatically adjusts some of the
internal tolerances used by the well calculations for testing of shut-in wells.
2.2.5.3 Print by Cross-Sections (CROSS)
The CROSS card causes arrays to be printed by cross-sections (vertical planes),

instead of by areal planes. 00
CROSS
2.2.5.4 Layer Output in Initialization Region Summary (REGNZ)
REGNZ
Initialization region reports usually provide totals for each region, but REGNZ
causes layer values to be output, as well. 00
2.2.5.5 Hydrocarbon Pore Volume and Bulk Volume Tables (HCPVTAB)
The HCPVTAB card causes three additional tables to be printed as functions of

depth: the first containing hydrocarbon pore volume, the second containing bulk
volume, and the third containing cumulative bulk volume. The tables are
generated by rock type, by region, and by totals. 00
HCPVTAB hpvinc (hpvtop)
Definitions: 00
hpvinc Depth increment, ft (m). This controls the spacing of the

depths in each of the tables.
2-82 Landmark - R2003.4

hpvtop Optional specification of the top depth, ft (m) subsea, for

use in both of the tables. Default is the minimum top
depth of any gridblock in the system.
2.2.6 Formulation
2.2.6.1 Gas-Water Option for VIP-ENCORE (GASWATER)
This option is not applicable with the DUAL module. 00
GASWATER
This option is used to invoke the two phase gas-water option. This option is useful
for cases with no oil or condensate in the reservoir (dry gas). The gas phase has
constant composition and hence only one hydrocarbon equation is solved in
IMPLICIT cases - coefficient generation is unaffected. This option provides
reduced data input of the saturation and PVT tables, where only the gas properties
are required. 00
NOTE: 1. Simplified equilibrium data for this option is possible (see Section
4.2.1.2).
2. The saturation tables are specified using a modified SGT card, and
SWT data is not required (as described in Section 4.3.1.2).
3. The PVT data is specified by the BGTAB card, rather than the
BOTAB card (as described in Section 4.5.3).
2.2.6.2 Water-Oil Option for VIP-ENCORE (WATEROIL)
This option is not applicable with the DUAL module. 00
WATEROIL
This option is used to invoke the two phase water-oil option. This option is useful
for cases with no gas in the reservoir. The oil phase has constant composition and
hence only one hydrocarbon equation is solved in IMPLICIT cases - coefficient
generation is unaffected. This option provides reduced data input of the saturation
and PVT tables, where only the oil properties are required. 00
NOTE: 1. Simplified equilibrium data for this option is possible (see Section
4.2.1.3).
2. The saturation tables are specified by the SWT card described in

Section 4.3.1.1. Gas saturation table data (SGT card) is not required.
R2003.4 - Landmark 2-83

3. The PVT data is specified by the BOTAB card, but gas parameters
may be omitted (as described in Section 4.5.2.2).
2.2.6.3 Black-Oil Option (BLACKOIL) (VIP-ENCORE)
BLACKOIL
The black-oil option allows the simulation of a true black-oil system in which the
K-value of the oil component is near zero (on the order of 10-10). The option will
prevent the residual oil (or the relict oil in a gas cap) from vaporizing during gas
injection. In the standard black-oil model, the K-value of the oil component is on
the order of 10-3 to 10-2 even if the oil is specified as non-volatile, i.e., input of a
constant GR (gas gravity) in the BOTAB table. In addition to this keyword, the
other data requirements are noted below. 00
NOTE: 1. All input GR values in the BOTAB table must be the same.
2. If multiple PVT tables are specified, the WTRO (molecular weight of

residual oil) values in all BOTAB tables must be the same, and the GR
values in all BOTAB tables must also be the same.
3. Default separators must be used and no additional separator data may

be specified.
2.2.6.4 Two-Point Upstream Weighting (TWOPT) (Not available in

VIP-THERM)
TWOPT
This option causes two-point upstream mobility weighting and two-point

upstream component mole fraction weighting to be used in generating flow
coefficients. It should be noted that two-point upstream weighting cannot be used
with the IMPLICIT formulation. 00
Two point upstream has a stability limit only two-thirds the size of the limit of the
default single-point upstream method. Care must be taken when timestep size is
determined. When using the IMPSTAB option to control timestep size,
parameters "ststar" and "stslim" must be explicitly defined (on IMPSTAB card)
as 0.6 and 0.66 respectively. 00
2-84 Landmark - R2003.4

2.2.6.5 Nine-Point Finite Difference Approximations (NINEPT)
NINEPT
The use of the nine-point option is subject to the following conditions:
1. Cartesian grid system or LGR model with Cartesian root grid and Cartesian
refinements only.
2. NX > 1, NY > 1.
The NINEPT card causes the program to utilize nine-point finite difference
approximations on the X-Y plane, while the Z-direction (if present) is discretized
using the usual three-point approximation. Unless input, diagonal
transmissibilities are internally calculated using the method of Coats and Modine
(Reference 3). For models with local grid refinements, the diagonal
transmissibilities are computed only inside each grid but not across grid
boundaries. 00
2.2.6.6 SEBOUND option
When using the NINEPT option in cartesian or corner point grids, the areal outer
reservoir boundary may be specified as passing through the outer gridblock
centers rather than along the outer edges of the outer gridblocks. This option is
particularly useful when manually setting up pattern elements of symmetry. The
areal transmissibilities parallel to these boundaries are then automatically
computed using the corrrect boundary conditions (for non-homogenous and/or
non-isotropic grids, the correct transmissibilities cannot be obtained by manual
scaling when using the NINEPT option). The SEBOUND option affects only the
areal flow trans-missibility calculations - scaling of pore volumes, bulk volumes,
vertical transmissibilities, thermal transmissibilities, etc., to account for partial
gridblocks must be performed manually. 00
SEBOUND dir
Definitions: 00
dir = any combination of the labels: 00
XM (areal boundary passes through block centers at i = 1) 00
XP (areal boundary passes through block centers at i = nx) 00
YM (areal boundary passes through block centers at j = 1) 00
YP (areal boundary passes through block centers at j = ny) 00
R2003.4 - Landmark 2-85

2.2.6.7 Compositional SORM Option (CSORM)
The purpose of this option is to specify a residual oil saturation to miscible

displacement in compositional processes. With this option, a portion of the initial
oil will be assumed to be isolated and will not participate in any mass transfer
calculations during a simulation run. Consequently, this oil will not be recovered
through displacement or vaporization during miscible injection. The option is
designed to correct errors introduced by the assumption of a stirred tank
(complete mixing) in a gridblock. 00
In this option, the residual hydrocarbons will expand (or flash into two phases) or
contract with the pressure change. If the pressure drops below the bubblepoint, the
total molar density of the residual hydrocarbons will be calculated using internally
generated tables. Alternatively, the user may elect to approximate the total molar
density using direct extrapolation of the oil phase molar density at the
bubblepoint. When using internally generated tables, fine grids in LGR models
may not be deactivated and/or activated during the run. 00
The option is not compatible with IMPLICIT or DUAL or THERM. 00
CSORM csorm (prange np)
Definitions: 00
csorm Compositional residual oil saturation to miscible

displacement.
prange Pressure range of internally generated molar density

tables for pressures below the residual hydrocarbons’
bubblepoint pressure, psia (kPa). If not entered, the molar
density tables will not be generated and the residual
hydrocarbons’ molar densities at pressures below the
bubblepoint will be calculated from extrapolation of the
density at the bubblepoint. If entered, the value may not
be less than 500 psi.
np Number of pressure intervals for the molar density tables.

May be entered only if prange is entered. Default is 20.
If entered, the value may not be less than 5.
Example: 00
CSORM 0.03 2000. 50 00
2-86 Landmark - R2003.4

2.2.7 Saturation Tables and Hysteresis
2.2.7.1 Two-Point Scaling of Relative Permeabilities (END2P)
END2P
This option causes two-point scaling of relative permeability table endpoints to be

performed, in place of the default three-point scaling (four-point for capillary
pressures). The two-point scaling approach was the only method available in VIP-
EXECUTIVE Version 1.6R, and earlier versions.
In the two-point case, each curve is scaled over its entire length (from residual/
irreducible saturation to the saturation at which it attains a maximum). In the
three-point case, all curves in a table are scaled together (retaining the relative kr
and Pc characteristics of the curves). In this case, which is the default scaling
method, all endpoints serve to break the table up into partitions, with scaling
being done in each partition independently. As an example, the water-oil table
would be scaled in two sections; from water saturations of Swir to Swor and from
Swor to 1.
2.2.7.2 Stone’s Three-Phase kro (STONE1, STONE2)
The first keyword defines the calculation method for 3-phase oil relative
permeability. The second keyword defines the calculation method for 3-phase
water relative permeability when the two-curve water relative permeability option
is selected. The default method for the two-curve water relative permeability
option is the same as the calculation method for oil relative permeability.
 STONEm
STONE1 (st1exp (st1eps (st1nu)))
 KROINT
 STONEm
STONE2
 KROINT
Definition:
m Can be 1 or 2, giving STONE1 or STONE2 respectively.
KROINT Saturated weighted interpolation method will be used to

calculate 3-phase water relative permeability for the two-
curve water relative permeability option. Not allowed in
VIP-THERM.
st1exp Exponent term A in the expanded definition of Sorm (see

Section 4.3). Default is 1.
R2003.4 - Landmark 2-87

st1eps Coefficient term ε in the expanded definition of Sorm (see

st1nu Coefficient term ν in the expanded definition of Sorm (see

If not one of the STONE1, STONE2, or KROINT cards is input, the default
method is STONE2.
Enter appropriate data card in Utility Data:
Select Stone Method 1. (Reference 1)
STONE1
Select Stone Method 2. (Reference 2)
STONE2
Examples: STONE1
2-88 Landmark - R2003.4

2.2.7.3 Saturation Weighted Three-Phase kro (KROINT) (Not available in

VIP-THERM)
This option will cause three phase oil relative permeability to be calculated using
a saturation weighted interpolation method. (see Reference 25).
The calculation model for 3-phase water relative permeability when the two-curve
water relative permeability option is selected is defined in the second keyword.
The default is the same as the calculation method for oil relative permeability. 00
 STONEm
KROINT
 KROINT
Definitions: 00
m Can be 1 or 2, giving STONE1 or STONE2 respectively
KROINT Saturation weighted interpolation method will be used to

calculate 3-phase relative permeability.
2.2.7.4 Water-oil Capillary Pressure Hysteresis (PCHYSW) (Not available in

VIP-THERM)
The PCHYSW card is used to invoke the water-oil capillary pressure hysteresis
option and to define certain control parameters for use in the simulation modules. 00
PCHYSW (eta) (nlevel) (tols) (maxsw) (IMB)
Definitions: 00
eta Parameter defining the shape of scanning curves.

Recommended value is in the .05 to .1 range. Default is
.1.
nlevel The maximum number of levels of scanning curves for

water-oil capillary pressure hysteresis. Default is 2.
tols The minimum required change in water saturation to

allow saturation reversals to be accepted. Default is
.0001.
maxsw The maximum water saturation value for which the

program will calculate hysteresis. Default is 1.
IMB A keyword indicating that initialization is from an

imbibition curve. Default is to use a drainage curve.
R2003.4 - Landmark 2-89

Examples: 00
PCHYSW .05 5 .0001 1. IMB 00
2.2.7.5 Gas-Oil Capillary Pressure Hysteresis (PCHYSG) (Not available in

VIP-THERM)
The PCHYSG card is used to invoke the gas-oil capillary pressure hysteresis
option and to define certain control parameters for use in the simulation modules. 00
PCHYSG (eta) (nlevel) (tols) (minsg) (IMB)
Definitions: 00
eta Parameter defining the shape of scanning curves.

Recommended value is in the .05 to .1 range. Default is
.1.
nlevel The maximum number of levels of scanning curves for

gas-oil capillary pressure hysteresis. Default is 2.
tols The minimum required change in gas saturation to allow

saturation reversals to be accepted. Default is .0001.
minsg The minimum gas saturation value for which the program
will calculate hysteresis. Default is 0.
IMB A keyword indicating that initialization is from an

imbibition curve. Default is to use a drainage curve.
Examples: 00
PCHYSG .07 3 .001 0. 00
2-90 Landmark - R2003.4

2.2.7.6 Oil Relative Permeability Hysteresis (RPHYSO) (Not available in VIP-

THERM)
The RPHYSO card is used to invoke the oil phase relative permeability hysteresis
option for use in the simulation modules. 00
RPHYSO (meth)
Definitions: 00
meth Keyword indicating the method of oil phase relative

permeability hysteresis to be used from the following:
CARLSON Carlson’s method
LINEAR Linearized version of Carlson’s method
DRAINAGE Drainage curve is scaled onto the range

of saturation needed for imbibition,
using the trapped hydrocarbon saturation
from Carlson’s method and the historical
maximum hydrocarbon saturation as the
endpoints.
USER User-specified imbibition curve assigned

using ISATI.
The default method is LINEAR.
2.2.7.7 Gas Relative Permeability Hysteresis (RPHYSG) (Not available in

VIP-THERM)
The RPHYSG card is used to invoke the gas phase relative permeability hysteresis
option for use in the simulation modules. 00
RPHYSG (meth)
Definitions:
meth Keyword indicating the method of gas phase relative

permeability hysteresis to be used from the following:
CARLSON Carlson’s method
LINEAR Linearized version of Carlson’s method
DRAINAGE Drainage curve is scaled onto the range

of saturation needed for imbibition,
R2003.4 - Landmark 2-91

using the trapped hydrocarbon saturation

from Carlson’s method and the historical
maximum hydrocarbon saturation as the
endpoints.
USER User-specified imbibition curve assigned

using ISATI.
The default method is LINEAR.
2.2.7.8 Relative Permeability Hysteresis Tolerances (RPHYST)
The RPHYST card can be used to modify the tolerances to be used for the oil and
gas relative permeability hysteresis calculations. These tolerances must be
exceeded before the hysteresis calculations are performed; otherwise, only the
drainage relative permeability curves are used. 00
RPHYST tolrev (tolhys)
Definitions:
tolrev Saturation fraction by which the phase saturation must be

below the historical maximum phase saturation before
hysteresis calculations are performed. The imbibition
curve is constructed starting at the phase saturation equal
to historical maximum phase saturation minus tolrev.
Default value is 0.02.
tolhys Used for gas relative permeability hysteresis, only. This

is the incremental gas saturation by which the adjusted
historical maximum gas saturation (historical maximum
gas saturation minus tolrev) must exceed the critical gas
saturation before hysteresis calculations are performed.
Default value is 0.05.
NOTE: For both oil and gas relative permeability hysteresis, the calculated trapped
saturation from Land’s equation is restricted to be no greater than the critical
saturation plus 70 percent of (adjusted historical maximum saturation minus
the critical saturation).
2.2.7.9 Leverett J-Function (JFUNC) (Not available with SDFUNC option)
JFUNC
The JFUNC card invokes the option to use the Leverett J-function for the
calculation of capillary pressures. The J-function is input in place of capillary
2-92 Landmark - R2003.4

pressure in the SWT table as a function of water saturation. For each gridblock,
the program calculates the square root of permeability divided by porosity, in
order to scale the J-function to a unique capillary pressure curve. The J-function is
defined as follows: 00
Pc K
J ( Sw ) = ------------------- ---
σ cos θ c φ
The capillary pressure table input should be
Pc wo ( Sw ) = J ( Sw ) σ cos θ c 00
such that the program can calculate capillary pressure as
Pc wo ( Sw )
Pc = ------------------------
- 00
Kx
------
φ
where Kx is the x-direction permeability and φ the porosity.
2.2.7.10 Rock Compaction (COMPACT)
Also see Section 4.12.
The COMPACT card invokes the compaction option. Compaction tables are
described in Section 4.12.
COMPACT (REVERSE)
Definition:
REVERSE Alpha label indicating that compaction is reversible (i.e.,

the current gridblock pressure is used in compaction
calculations). Optional; default is that compaction is
irreversible (i.e., the minimum pressure ever achieved in
the gridblock is used in the compaction calculations).
2.2.7.11 Freeze Pcwo at Initial Value (FRZPCW)
FRZPCW
This option freezes the water-oil capillary pressure at its initial value for the entire
simulation. Applies only to saturation tables, does not apply to saturation-
dependent functions option.
R2003.4 - Landmark 2-93

2.2.7.12 Freeze Pcgo at Initial Value (FRZPCG)
FRZPCG
This option freezes the gas-oil capillary pressure at its initial value for the entire
simulation. Applies only to saturation tables, does not apply to saturation-
dependent functions option.
2.2.8 Initialization
2.2.8.1 Nonequilibrium Initialization (NONEQ)
Also see Section 4.2.3 and Section 5.30. 00
The NONEQ card is required for a nonequilibrium initialization. The default

initialization procedure is to always produce an equilibrium system, which is to
say that regardless of which input data options are used, capillary pressure
adjustments are computed for each gridblock which will ensure that the phases are
in equilibrium. If the default GBC option is used, the adjustments are zero;
otherwise, small capillary pressure adjustments are calculated, and remain
constant for each of the gridblocks for the entire simulation. The integrated
saturation initialization options may require small adjustments to capillary
pressures in order to maintain initial phase equilibrium. 00
NONEQ can be specified to deactivate the computation of the capillary pressure

adjustments. This allows the user to initialize at dynamic conditions by
specifying saturations, pressures, and possibly compositions, even though there
may be fluid movements at these initial conditions. 00
NONEQ
2.2.8.2 Gridblock Center Initialization (GBC)
The GBC card invokes the gridblock center initialization algorithm. In this case
the saturation distribution of the gridblock is determined by the fluid located at the
gridblock center. This is the default. 00
GBC
2.2.8.3 Integrated Saturation Initialization (INTSAT)
INTSAT (MOBILE) (sorwmn sorgmn sgcmin)
2-94 Landmark - R2003.4

Definitions: 00
MOBILE Mobile saturation calculations will be performed.
sorwmn Optional minimum calculated residual oil saturation

(MOBILE specified) in a water-oil system. Default is 0.
sorgmn Optional minimum calculated residual gas saturation

(MOBILE specified) in a gas-oil system. Default is 0.
sgcmin Optional minimum calculated critical gas saturation

(MOBILE specified) in a gas-oil system. Default is 0.
The INTSAT card invokes the integrated saturation initialization algorithm. In this
case, initial fluid saturations are calculated based upon the actual fluid distribution
throughout the gridblock, by integrating the capillary pressure on the block
thickness (default is gridblock center initialization, see GBC card). The MOBILE
keyword turns on calculation of modified oil and gas residual values, to account
for initial contacts in some blocks. This is especially useful for grids with large
blocks downdip, near the water-oil contact, where a small oil thickness above the
contact will contain mobile oil, while the oil saturation is much less than Sorw. 00
Examples: 00
For integrated saturation initialization and mobile fluid calculations 00
INTSAT MOBILE 00
2.2.8.4 Integrated Saturation Initialization (VAITS) (Not available in VIP-

THERM)
VAITS (tolsw tolsg tolvol) (NPVUPD)
Definitions: 00
tolsw Relative approximation error tolerance for initial water

saturation. Default is 0.001.
tolsg Relative approximation error tolerance for initial gas

saturation. Default is 0.001.
tolvol Relative approximation error tolerance for block bulk

volume. Default is 0.001. The tolvol parameter is used
only for pore volume calculations.
NPVUPD If this keyword is included, the bulk volume will not be

updated. For cornerpoint grids, DX . DY . DZ will be
used.
The VAITS card invokes the volume averaged integrated saturation initialization
algorithm. In this case, the saturation values are calculated based on the actual
R2003.4 - Landmark 2-95

fluid distribution throughout the gridblock by integrating the inverse capillary

pressure function over the gridblock volume. (The default is the gridblock center
initialization procedure, see GBC card). This option allows calculations of
average gridblock saturations and bulk volume with specified approximation error
tolerances. This option gives the same answer as the INTSAT option for
rectangular gridblocks. 00
Examples: 00
For volume average integrated saturation initialization with relative

approximation error tolerances for water and gas saturations of 0.05%,
0.001%, respectively, and applications of the standard VIP mapping technique
for bulk volume calculations.
VAITS 0.0005 0.00001 0.001 NPVUPD 00
2.2.8.5 Thickness Center (THCNTR)
THCNTR
The THCNTR card uses the thickness along the bedding plane to calculate block
properties. The default is to use true vertical thickness to calculate block
properties; this more accurately represents dipping reservoir blocks. 00
2.2.8.6 Do Not Initialize (NOINIT)
NOINIT
The NOINIT card will cause the program to stop after all the coefficents are
calculated. This card is useful when used in conjunction with the PRINT COEFS
FILE, Section 3.3.2. 00
2.2.8.7 Totally Refined ROOT Grid (NOROOT)
NOROOT
The keyword NOROOT will reduce memory and disk space by ignoring the
ROOT grid, when LGR’s result in no active grid blocks remaining in the ROOT
grid. The keyword NOROOT should not be used if grids are planed for
deactivation in VIP-EXEC such that grid blocks in the ROOT grid will become
active. 00
2-96 Landmark - R2003.4

2.2.8.8 Grid Deactivation (DEACTIVATE)
DEACTIVATE
The keyword DEACTIVATE is required when LGR’s of the same level (i.e.,
siblings) touch, and are planed to be deactivated separately in VIP-EXEC.
Without this keyword, the transmissibility connections between the LGR’s and the
parent grid at the interface between the sibling grids are not created. 00
2.2.9 Off-Band Connections
2.2.9.1 Pinchout Gridblock Connections (PINCHOUT)
The PINCHOUT card controlls the generation of nonstandard gridblock

connections between layers of the grid system where pinchouts occur. Such
connections will be generated automatically whenever two layers are separated by
one or more inactive blocks, where the total thickness separating them is less than
tolth. The transmissibilities generated in this way may be overridden by the use of
FTRANS cards (see Section 6.6.2). The PINCHOUT card requires the use of the
corner-point (see Section 1.5.3) or LGR option (see Section 11.19). 00
PINCHOUT (tolnet) (tolth) (tolgrs) (NONE)
Definition: 00
tolnet Gridblock net thickness tolerance, ft (m). Pore volume is

set to zero for blocks with a net thickness less than or
equal to tolnet. In VIP-COMP or VIP-ENCORE, blocks
with a zero pore volume are considered to be inactive.
Default is 0.
tolth Interblock gross thickness tolerance, ft (m). A block is

considered to be "pinched out" if it is inactive (zero pore
volume or total volume (VIP-THERM)) and the gross
thickness between two active gridblocks is less than or
equal to tolth. Default is tolnet.
tolgrs Gridblock gross thickness tolerance, ft(m). Total volume

and pore volume are set to zero for blocks with a gross
thickness less than or equal to tolgrs. In VIP-THERM,
blocks with zero total volume are considered to be
inactive. Default is tolnet.
NONE Keyword to turn off the automatic generation of

pinchouts.
R2003.4 - Landmark 2-97

2.2.9.2 Fault Modeling (FAULTS)
Also see Section 6.1. 00
The FAULTS card invokes the fault modeling option. Additional fault data are
described in Section 6.1. 00
 LATERAL 
 
FAULTS
NONE
Definition: 00
LATERAL Calculates connections, across any block on the other

side of the fault plane. Default only connects logically
vertical blocks.
NONE Do not generate automatic faults or pinchout

connections.
2.2.9.3 Completing the Circle in Radial Grids (FLOW360)
The FLOW360 card indicates that, for a radial model, flow is permitted between
the first and last gridblocks in the theta direction. There is no internal boundary in
the angular direction. This option requires that the total angular span be 360
degrees. In radial models sweeping less than 360 degrees it is assumed that no
flow occurs across the external boundaries of the first and last gridblocks in the
theta direction. Without a FLOW360 card, a full 360 degree model has a no-flow
boundary at θ = 0 degrees = 360 degrees. The FLOW360 option is subject to the
same formulation choices and solution technique choices as the FAULT option. 00
FLOW360
2-98 Landmark - R2003.4

2.2.10 Vertical Equilibrium (Not available in VIP-THERM)

The vertical equilibrium with completely segregated fluids may be invoked for the
water and oil phases, the gas and oil phases, or both. Initial fluid distributions are
calculated which are consistent with total gravity segregation at the phase contacts
and with the gridblock geometry, if that option is used. Pseudo capillary pressures
are calculated to ensure that the segregated fluids remain in equilibrium. Each
gridblock is divided into several sublayers. Fractional volumes and fractional face
areas of the sublayers are calculated and stored in tables. Oil and gas saturations in
the sublayers are defined to be consistent with the segregated flow assumption and
the sublayer fractional volumes. Pseudo relative permeabilities, krw, krow, krg,
krog, for six faces of each gridblock are defined from saturation values and
fractional face areas of the sublayers. 00
Oil relative permeability, kro, is calculated from the usual three phase
correlations. 00
The degree of vertical equilibrium in each block may be varied by using the
FVEWO and FVEGO array keywords (Section 5.33.1 and Section 5.33.2). 00
2.2.10.1 Water-Oil Vertical Equilibrium (VEWO)
VEWO (nvelev)
Definitions: 00
VEWO This card invokes the water-oil VE option.
nvelev Number of sublayers into which each gridblock is

divided. Fractional volumes and fractional face areas of
the sublayers are stored in tables, which are used for the
calculation of pseudo relative permeabilities and
capillary pressure in the dynamic part of a simulation.
The VE corner point option is used whenever nvelev is
greater than 1 even if the cartesian geometry option is
used. Setting nvelev to 1 will turn off the VE corner point
geometry option. VE corner point geometry is always off
with the PSEUDO option. Default is 10.
NOTE: If the grid dimension NZ is greater than one and VE corner point geometry
option is off then DRELPM (Section 2.2.10.3) should also be used.
R2003.4 - Landmark 2-99

2.2.10.2 Gas-Oil Vertical Equilibrium (VEGO)
VEGO (nvelev)
Definitions: 00
VEGO This card invokes the gas-oil VE option.

The VE corner point option is used whenever nvelev is
greater than 1 even if the cartesian geometry option is
used. Setting nvelev to 1 will turn off the VE corner point
geometry option. VE corner point geometry is always off
with the PSEUDO option. Default is 10.
NOTE: If the grid dimension NZ is greater than one and VE corner point geometry
option is off then DRELPM (Section 2.2.10.3) should also be used.
2.2.10.3 Vertical Equilibrium Directional Relative Permeability (DRELPM)
DRELPM (drpfrc)
Definition: 00
drpfrc The fraction of the gridblock to be considered when

computing the effective saturation in the vertical
directions when using the directional relative
permeability option in a vertical equilibrium model. The
value must be in the range 0. to 1. inclusive, with default
value of .25.
The DRELPM card is used to select the directional relative permeability option
for a vertical equilibrium model. DRELPM turns off the VE corner point
geometry option (nvelev > 1, sections 2.2.10.1 and 2.2.10.2). If the DRELPM card
is omitted in a vertical equilibrium model, and nvelev = 1, the same effective
saturation will be used for vertical flow as for areal flow. If the model does not use
vertical equilibrium, the DRELPM card has no effect. 00
2-100 Landmark - R2003.4

Example: 00
TITLE1 SPECIFY FRACTION OF BLOCK FOR VE

TITLE2 OVERRIDE THE DEFAULT VALUE OF .25
VEWO
VEGO
DRELPM .5 00
2.2.10.4 Capillary Gravity Equilibrium (VEITS)
VEITS (nvelev)
Definitions: 00
VEITS This card invokes the capillary gravity equilibrium

option.

Default value is 10.
NOTE: A capillary gravity equilibrium option can be applied only in corner point
geometry models if capillary pressure curves are not flat. This assumes
that phase hydrostatic potential is independent of depth within a cell. But
the assumption about complete fluid segregation is not used. The VAITS
option is applied for the calculation of initial saturation distributions.
Accuracy of the initial saturation calculations can be controlled by the
VAITS card. Each gridblock is divided into several sublayers. Fractional
volumes and fractional face areas of the sublayers are calculated and
stored in tables. Phase pressure and saturations in the sublayers are
accurately defined, taking into account the sublayer fractional volumes,
varying ratios of capillary, viscous and gravity forces at different times
during simulation. Pseudo relative permeabilities, krw, krow, krg, krog, for
the six faces of each gridblock are determined from saturation values and
fractional face areas of the sublayers. Oil relative permeability, kro, is
calculated from the usual three phase correlations.
Example: 00
VEITS 20 00
R2003.4 - Landmark 2-101

2.2.11 Fluid Property Options
2.2.11.1 Energy Minimization Phase Equilibrium (GIBBS) (VIP-COMP)
GIBBS
This card invokes a phase stability test, and calculation of phase equilibrium,
using a GIBBS energy minimization algorithm. The technique provides superior
near critical fluid property values, but at the expense of higher computing cost. It
should be tried in any compositional case where near critical behavior is
suspected, and program performance is unsatisfactory. 00
2.2.11.2 Near Critical Fluid Property Adjustment (IFT) (VIP-COMP)
IFT (tenthr) (xex) (teni)
Definitions: 00
tenthr The threshold interfacial tension for relative permeability

adjustment, dynes/cm. Default is 0.01 dynes/cm.
xex The value of the exponent for relative permeability

adjustment. Default is 0.25.
teni The reference interfacial tension, dynes/cm. Default is

defined as the gas-oil interfacial tension at the gas-oil
contact of equilibration region 1.
This card invokes the near critical relative permeability and capillary pressure
adjustment option. The adjustments are based on interfacial tension (ift)
calculations - capillary pressure is multiplied by 00
[ift / ift(reference)] when the fraction is less than 1 00
and relative permeability is interpolated 00
[ift / ift(threshold)]**xex. 00
The IFT option is compatible with both GIBBS and non-GIBBS phase
equilibrium calculation options. Additionally, PCHOR data must be included in
the fluid properties table. 00
The IFT option is not compatible with the velocity-dependent relative

permeabilities. 00
2-102 Landmark - R2003.4

2.2.11.3 Suppresses Table Data Checking (NOCHK)
NOCHK (PVTTAB) (SATTAB)
Definitions: 00
PVTTAB Suppress PVT property data checking of monotonicity

and total hydrocarbon compressibility, when BOTAB
tables are read. This is necessary in some 3-component
miscible cases.
SATTAB Suppress saturation table monotonicity checks -

primarily used with pseudo relative permeability curves,
generated by Stone’s method, which may not be single
valued.
The NOCHK card can selectively suppress PVT table and saturation table data
checks. By default, all table checks listed above are suppressed if a NOCHK card
is entered. This card should be used cautiously since PVT and saturation table
nonconformity can cause instability in the simulation. 00
Examples: 00
To suppress PVT table checking in 3-component miscible case 00
NOCHK PVTTAB 00
2.2.11.4 PVT Interpolation for VIP-ENCORE (BOTINT)
The BOTINT card is used to invoke the PVT interpolation option. In this option,
three hydrocarbon components are required, instead of the usual two components
for VIP-ENCORE with black-oil data. PVT data is still specified in terms of two
pseudo-components, just as for ordinary black-oil models, but the PVT data is
parameterized by the API gravity or density of the liquid oil phase at stock tank
conditions. In each PVT region, BOTABS data is specified for several different
values of API gravity (i.e., for several different oil types), and PVT properties are
calculated by interpolation between the specified tables depending on the actual
stock tank API gravity of the insitu oil. Internally, the simulator treats the oil
phase as a mixture of three pseudo-components, and the PVT properties vary
based on the liquid phase split between the heavier two components as well as on
the values of pressure and light component composition. Initially, the split
between the heavier components is chosen to match the API gravity of the stock
tank liquid as specified in a table of API gravity versus depth, so the overall
treatment is equivalent to varying PVT properties with stock tank density. 00
The use of the PVT interpolation option requires changes to some of the following
data cards: NX card (Section 2.2.3.1), NR card (Section 2.2.3.2), PRINT INIT
card (Section 2.2.1.1), MAP card (Section 2.2.2.5), IEQUIL card (Section 4.2.1),
BPTAB card (Section 4.2.4), BOTAB card (Section 4.5.2), SEPTEST data
(Section 4.8.3), and other associated cards. In the simulation modules, the option
R2003.4 - Landmark 2-103

may cause a change to the OUTPUT card (Section 2.5.1 of the Simulation
Modules Manual). 00
BOTINT ntypes
Definition: 00
ntypes The number of oil types for which BOTABS data must be
provided in each PVT region. The product of ntypes and
the actual number of PVT regions must be no larger than
the maximum number of PVT tables for which the
program is dimensioned. Default is 1.
If SEPTEST separator battery data is input, then the data

must be provided for each oil type, for each separator
battery defined.
Example: 00
If there are two API gravities in each PVT region: 00
BOTINT 2 00
NOTE: The BOTAB tables for each PVT region must be introduced in decreasing
order of API gravity.
2.2.11.5 Flash Calculation Method (FLASH) (VIP-COMP)
The FLASH card allows the user to define the flash calculation method and
maximum allowable iterations for reservoir and surface flashes. The two available
methods are accelerated successive substitution and Newton-Raphson with
successive substitution preconditioning. The default method for reservoir flashes
is accelerated successive substitution. The default method for surface flashes is
Newton-Raphson. 00
RES
FLASH maxss maxnr (ACC)
SURF
Definitions:
maxss Maximum number of successive substitution iterations

allowed for a flash calculation. Default is 5 for flashes to
surface conditions and 20 for flashes to reservoir
conditions.
2-104 Landmark - R2003.4

maxnr Maximum number of Newton-Raphson iterations

allowed for a flash calculation. Default is 10 for flashes to
surface conditions and 0 for flashes to reservoir
conditions.
RES Keyword indicating that the data on this card apply to

flashes to reservoir conditions.
SURF Keyword indicating that the data on this card apply to

flashes to surface conditions.
ACC Keyword indicating that accelerated successive

substitution flash calculations will be performed.
NOTE: 1. Only one of the RES or SURF labels may be specified. Separate
FLASH cards can be input for RES and SURF. If neither the RES nor
SURF label is specified, the data are used for both reservoir and
surface flash calculations.
2. If a FLASH card with the RES option is not input, then ACC
(accelerated successive substitution) is the default. If a FLASH card
with the SURF option is not input, accelerated successive substitution
calculations are not performed. When a FLASH card is input, ACC
must be specified to invoke the option.
Example:
To specify the SS and NR iterations for surface flashes as 20 and 10,

respectively:
FLASH 20 10 SURF
2.2.11.6 Super-Critical Equilibration (CRINIT) (VIP-COMP)
CRINIT (iequil1 iequil2 ...)
Definition: 00
CRINIT This card invokes super-critical equilibration.
iequil Equilibrium region to which super-critical equilibration

is applied.
The CRINIT card is used to invoke the super-critical equilibration option. This
option is used to initialize fluid systems which are always one phase but are gas
condensate overlaying volatile oils. The compositions are such that they are
always above the equilibrium two phase envelope at the reservoir temperature and
pressure. The gas-oil contact is defined by looking at the heaviest component k-
value to insure it is less than one because there is no two phase region in the
R2003.4 - Landmark 2-105

reservoir at initial conditions. The value of PINIT at DEPTH from the IEQUIL
card is used as the starting point for the initial pressure profile calculations. 00
If the CRINIT card is used with no arguments, all equilibrium regions will be
initialized using the super-critical option. If the CRINIT keyword is followed by a
list of equilibrium region numbers, the super-critical option will only be applied to
the specified equilibrium regions. 00
2.2.11.7 Dry Gas Simulation (DRYGAS)
DRYGAS
This card invokes the dry gas option. 00
The dry gas option enables the compositional modeling of a hydrocarbon system
that is always in a single phase state. The water phase can co-exist with this single
phase. The hydrocarbon fluid properties are calculated by an equation of state. 00
The dry gas option should only be used if fluids always remain in a single phase
state without crossing any phase boundaries. For example, injection and
production from a gas storage reservoir would be an appropriate situation for this
option, depending on the compositions of the in-situ and injected gas. 00
The dry gas option is required for a fluid system existing at a reservoir
temperature above its cricondentherm. For such a system, no saturation pressure
can be found. This would result in termination of the VIP initialization procedure
without the dry gas option. The dry gas option also allows the simulator to run
considerably faster because phase transition calculations are avoided. 00
2.2.11.8 Limit on Rate of Increase of Solution GOR (DRSDT)
DRSDT limit (FREE)
Definitions: 00
DRSDT Turns limit on. By default, no limit is applied.
limit The limiting value of the rate of solution GOR increase.

Units are SCF/STB/day (field), SCM/SCM/day (metric),
or Scc/Scc/hr (lab), unless the RSM card (Section 2.2.21)
is entered, in which case units are MSCF/STB/day
(field), MSCM/SCM/day (metric), or MScc/Scc/hr (lab).
FREE Only applies DRSDT in blocks with free gas saturation.
The DRSDT option can be used in conjunction with certain combinations of

extended black oil tables only. They can be used with the BOETAB table, but
only if RS is non-zero and RV is zero. In other words, gas must be allowed to
enter into solution with the liquid phase, but oil is not allowed to condense from
2-106 Landmark - R2003.4

the vapor phase. The equivalent separate oil and gas data tables are BOOTAB and
BDGTAB. 00
The DRSDT option controls the rate at which the solution gas-oil ratio (Rs) within
a block can increase. The rate at which Rs can decline during depletion is
unaffected. Additionally, the rate at which Rs increases will still be limited by the
availability of free gas, and by the saturated values in the tables. 00
At the extreme where DRSDT has a limit of 0, Rs will stay constant within each
gridblock, and free gas cannot dissolve into the undersaturated oil. At the other
extreme, where DRSDT has a very large limit, Rs will rise to that allowed by the
table or until no free gas remains. This is equivalent to not using the option at all. 00
The use of the FREE keyword limits the application of the DRSDT constraint to
blocks that have free gas. This prevents the limiting of changes in Rs due to the
mixing of fluids from adjacent unsaturated blocks that have different starting
values of Rs. This will allow gas flowing from a two-phase cell into an
undersaturated cell to dissolve into solution in an unrestrained manner. 00
Example: 00
DRSDT 10
C Limits increase of solution GOR to 10 SCF/STB/day
2.2.12 Corner-Point Grid
2.2.12.1 Corner-Point Simulation Grid (CORNER)
The CORNER card is used to set optional parameters for corner point grids. The
user may set the variables iquads, jquads, and kquads to control the accuracy of
the integration process used for pore volume and transmissibility calculations.
Corner point grids allow the user to describe more general grid systems than those
describable through the specification of block-size arrays only. Some examples of
the use of the corner-point option include the description of nonorthogonal grids
and the modeling of sloping faults and pinchouts. The user should take great care
with the use of this option, since less data checking is performed on the grid
system description. The corner-point option is not compatible with radial or
cylindrical grids. 00
When the FAULTS card (see Section 2.2.9.2) is also specified, the corner-point
option requires somewhat different specification of faults than the standard fault
data description (see Section 6.3). If the user specifies corner-point depths (instead
of explicit faults), the program will automatically generate fault connections. 00
When corner point grids are used, the program will automatically recognize
pinchouts and generate the appropriate nonstandard interlayer gridblock
connections. The FTRANS fault option (see Section 6.6.2) allows the user to
overread the transmissibilities generated in this way. 00
The default method for calculation of inter-block transmissibilities is a method

based on harmonic integration (HARINT). This has been found to give a more
accurate representation of transmissibilities for corner-point grids. This was not
R2003.4 - Landmark 2-107

the default in previous versions of VIP-CORE. The previous default can be

invoked by using the optional keyword NEWTRAN. 00
The optional keyword LINE should be used to specify corner-point positions

along depth lines. 00
CORNER (NEWTRAN (V98)) (LINE) (iquads jquads kquads)
Definitions: 00
NEWTRAN Invoke the NEWTRAN option for the inter-block

transmissibility calculation.
V98 Invoke the NEWTRAN calculation in use in version 98.
LINE Specification of corner-point positions along depth lines.
iquads Number of quadrature points (1 ≤ iquads ≤ 3) in the x

direction. Default is 3 (Default for NEWTRAN option is
2).
jquads Number of quadrature points (1 ≤ jquads ≤ 3) in the y

2).
kquads Number of quadrature points (1 ≤ kquads ≤ 3) in the z

2).
Example: 00
CORNER NEWTRAN 3 3 3 00
2.2.12.2 Fault Connections from Corner-Point Data (CORTOL)
CORTOL tola tolt tolpv tolpn toltt tolvb
Definitions: 00
tola Tolerance for relative overlap area for corner-point faults.

When LGR is on or CORP data is read, tola is the
absolute overlap area, sq. ft. (sq m). Default is 1.E-3.
tolt Tolerance for absolute transmissibility cutoff for corner-

point faults, rb-cp/day/psi (cm-cp/day/kPa). Default is
1.E-8 rb-cp/day/psi.
tolpv Tolerance for pore volume cutoff, rb (cm). Pore volumes

in cells with calculated values less than tolpv are set to
2-108 Landmark - R2003.4

zero. In VIP-COMP or VIP-ENCORE, zero pore volume

cells are inactive. OVER/VOVER of pore volumes are
applied after this check. Default is 0.
tolpn Tolerance for determining if corner-point gridblock

corner points are in vertical contact, ft (m). If the
difference in depth between the corner points at the top of
layer n and the bottom of layer n-1 is less than tolpn it is
assumed layer n and n-1 are in contact and a non-zero z-
direction transmissibility is calculated. Default is 1.E-4
ft.
toltt Tolerance for thermal transmissibility cutoff for corner-

point faults. Default is 1.E-8 BTU/DAY-DEG.F (2.198 x
10-10 W/DEG.C). Enter in VIP-THERM only.
tolvb Tolerance for block volume cutoff, rb(cm). Total volume

and pore volume in cells with calculated total volume
less than tolvb are set to zero. In VIP-THERM, zero total
volume cells are inactive. Enter in VIP-THERM only.
The CORTOL card is used to control under what conditions block connections
will be generated from corner-point data. If a block connection value is less than
one or more of the tolerances, a connection is not calculated. 00
Examples: 00
To change the overlap, transmissibility, and pore volume tolerances to

1.E-2, 1.E-7, and 100, respectively: 00
CORTOL 1.E-2 1.E-7 100 00
NOTE: The CORTOL data must be in put in the order shown, but may truncate at
any point after tolt.
2.2.12.3 Data Checking Corner-Point Grid Data (CORCHK)
The program automatically checks to make sure that each face of each gridblock
projects as a convex quadrilateral on to an average plane "parallel" to the face.
Faces that fail the convexity condition are checked for the angle between each of
the pair of opposite sides. If any angle is larger than 90 degrees a warning message
is printed. The check is performed initially excluding blocks with zero porosity.
After the pore volume has been calculated the check is repeated for blocks with
non-zero pore volume. The CORCHK card allows the user to control the amount
of printout. 00
The program checks that x coordinates of corner points (XCORN array) do not
decrease with increasing i index. The optional keyword NOX can be used to
bypass this check. 00
R2003.4 - Landmark 2-109

The program checks that y coordinates of corner points (YCORN array) do not
increase with increasing j index. The optional keyword NOY can be used to
bypass this check. 00
CORCHK (nblocks) (NOX) (NOY)
Definition: 00
nblocks The maximum number of blocks for which detailed

warning messages are printed. Regardless of the value of
nblocks, a summary line is printed that shows the total
number of blocks that violate the convexity and angle
conditions simultaneously. Default is 20.
NOX No checking of x coordinate increasing order.
NOY No checking of y coordinate decreasing order.
Example: 00
CORCHK 300 00
2.2.13 Dual Porosity with Optional Dual Permeability (VIP-DUAL) (Not

available with VIP-THERM)
2.2.13.1 Dual-Porosity/Permeability Option (DUAL)
This card invokes the dual porosity/permeability option. Two distinct options are
available in VIP-DUAL. By default this option models the flow of fluids in two
continuous media which represent the matrix rock and fractures. Exchange of
fluids between the fractures and matrix rock is based on the Warren and Root
theory and includes the effects of imbibition and gravity drainage. 00
Alternatively, a dual porosity/single permeability option may be selected which

assumes that the fractures alone are a continuous media and the matrix rock exists
only as a source or sink for reservoir fluids. While less general than the full dual
porosity/dual permeability approach, this option can result in a substantial
decrease of computer time. 00
The dual porosity/permeability option requires extra data to be supplied to the

simulator. The minimum extra data required is: 00
1. Saturation tables for fractures
2. Fracture array data (porosity, permeability)
3. Matrix block size
4. Surface tension ratio tables (see Section 4.15.1).
2-110 Landmark - R2003.4

DUAL (POR) (SWAPMF) (TEXORG)
Definition: 00
POR Alpha label that invokes the dual porosity/single

permeability option. By default the dual porosity/
dual permeability option is invoked.
SWAPMF Alpha label used to properly simulate dual porosity

reservoirs that are not fractured in some regions. Only
applicable with the single permeability option.
TEXORG Invokes the original method for calculating the matrix/

fracture exchange transmissibilities. The default is to use
the equation described by Coats, reference 53 of the
Technical Reference Manual.
Example: 00
C INITIAL DATE
DATE 23 6 1983
C DUAL POROSITY
DUAL 00
2.2.13.2 Matrix Pseudo Capillary Pressure (PSEUDO)
VIP-DUAL accounts accurately for the effects of imbibition and gravity drainage
from matrix gridblocks that contain many matrix blocks by invoking an automatic
calculation of matrix pseudo capillary pressure. 00
For water-oil imbibitions, the calculation assumes an equilibrium distribution of

saturations in each of the matrix blocks and then calculates, for each gridblock, a
table of average gridblock saturation versus pseudo capillary pressure at the block
center by varying the fluid contact between the top of the gridblock and the
bottom of the gridblock. 00
A smooth curve of pseudo capillary pressure is produced by integrating the

saturations over a number of columns of matrix blocks displaced areally relative
to one another. 00
Gas-oil gravity drainage is modeled using either a method which is parallel to that
described for the water-oil imbibitions above, or Coats’ method (Reference 29).
Coats’ method requires additional data as described in Section 4.15. 00
The PSEUDO card allows the user to change the various parameters associated
with these calculations. 00
PSEUDO (NOCOATS) (ncol) (PRINT) (nsmtab) (INTSW)
R2003.4 - Landmark 2-111

Definitions: 00
NOCOATS For gas-oil matrix-fracture exchange, use the method

parallel to that of water-oil imbibition. If not specified,
the default is to use Coats’ method (Reference 29) for
gas-oil matrix-fracture exchange.
ncol Number of columns of matrix blocks used in the pseudo

capillary pressure calculation. Default is 1.
PRINT Prints to Fortran Unit 28 the internally generated pseudo

capillary pressures that are used in the matrix-fracture
flow. If not specified, the default is to not print the pseudo
capillary pressure.
nsmtab Number of saturation entries in the pseudo capillary

pressure tables. Default is 10.
INTSW Integrate water-oil capillary pressure over matrix blocks

above the water-oil contact. Default SW = SWC above
water-oil contact. Gas-oil capillary pressure is always
integrated above the gas-oil contact.
Example: 00
To use 10 entry pseudo Pc tables based on 5 columns and to print the

generated pseudo Pc tables. 00
PSEUDO NOCOATS 5 PRINT 10 00
NOTE: The data on the PSEUDO card is order-dependent. Except for the COATS/
NOCOATS keyword, all previous fields must be entered to specify a later
one. The COATS/NOCOATS keyword may be omitted entirely if COATS
is to be used.
2.2.13.3 Oil-Gas Phase Diffusivities (DIFF)
The DIFF card is used to enter values of oil phase and gas phase diffusivities.
These are used to compute mass transfer between fracture and matrix via the
mechanism of molecular diffusion. The diffusion calculation is not used for
matrix-matrix or fracture-fracture mass transfer. If the DIFF card is omitted, no
diffusive mass transfer will take place. 00
DIFF diffg diffo
Definitions: 00
diffg Gas phase diffusivity, sq. ft./day (sq.cm./sec.).
2-112 Landmark - R2003.4

diffo Oil phase diffusivity, sq. ft./day (sq. cm./sec.).
NOTE: The oil and gas phase diffusivities are converted into mass transfer
coefficients using the matrix block shape factors (Section 5.37.2 and
5.37.3) and gridblock dimensions:
TDg = (diffg)*(sigmad)*(∆x ∆y ∆z)

TDo = (diffo)*(sigmad)*(∆x ∆y ∆z)
Alternatively, TDg and TDo may be entered directly via the TDIFFG and
TDIFFO arrays (Section 5.37.2 and 5.37.3).
Example: 00
For gas diffusivity of 1 sq. ft/day and no oil diffusivity: 00
DIFF 1 0 00
2.2.14 Fluid Tracking (Not available in VIP-THERM)
2.2.14.1 Hydrocarbon Tracking Option (TRACK)
TRACK nfl
Definition: 00
nfl Number of tracked fluids.
The TRACK card is used to invoke the fluid tracking option and to define the
number of tracked fluids. 00
Example: 00
When tracking six fluid Types 00
TRACK 6 00
2.2.14.2 Names of Tracked Hydrocarbons (NAMES)
The TRACK card must precede the NAMES card. 00
The NAMES card is used to assign alphanumeric names to the tracked fluids. 00
NAMES iflnm1 iflnm2 . . . iflnmnfl
Definition: 00
R2003.4 - Landmark 2-113

iflnm Tracked fluid name. The first character in the name must
be alphabetic unless the name is immediately preceded
by the character #. Only the first six (6) characters of the
name are retained.
NOTE: The number of iflnm names must equal the number of tracked fluids.
Example: 00
See the OILTRF and GASTRF arrays for specification of initialtracked

fluid type. 00
2.2.14.3 Transition Block Assignments (CONTACT)
CONTACT nflup nfldwn (resoil)
Definitions: 00
nflup Number of the tracked hydrocarbon fluid assigned to the

oil above the gas-oil contact in transition blocks.
nfldwn Number of the tracked fluid assigned to the oil below the
gas-oil contact in transition blocks.
resoil Residual oil saturation used to calculate the fraction (F)

of the transition block oil located below the gas-oil
contact, fraction. Default is to use the block value of the
residual oil saturation. The formula for the fraction is:
F = ((S(o) - S*(or))(1-S(w))) / (S(o) (1-S(w) - S*(or)))
The CONTACT card is used to invoke the special option of assigning oil in
transition blocks to two tracked fluids. 00
Example: 00
If the RELICT and BLACK Oil are tracked fluids 1 and 2 respectively,
and GOC is near the bottom of the grid block: 00
CONTACT 1 2 0.077 00
2-114 Landmark - R2003.4

2.2.14.4 Water Tracking Option (TRACKW)
The TRACKW card is used to invoke the water tracking option and to define the
number of tracked water types. This feature is available with the IMPES
formulation option only. 00
TRACKW nwtrk nsitu
Definition: 00
nwtrk Number of tracked water types (maximum 6).
nsitu Index to the water type to be used for tracking the insitu
water.
2.2.14.5 Names of Tracked Water Types (NAMESW)
The TRACKW card must precede the NAMESW card. 00
The NAMESW card is used to assign alphanumeric names to the tracked water
types. 00
NAMESW tknamw1 tknamw2 ... tknamwnwtrk
Definition: 00
tknamw Tracked water type name, maximum of eight (8)

characters. The first character in the name must be
alphabetic unless the name is immediately preceded by
the character #.
NOTE: The number of tknamw names must equal the number of tracked water
types.
R2003.4 - Landmark 2-115

2.2.15 Todd and Longstaff Miscible Displacement (Not available in VIP-

THERM)
2.2.15.1 Miscible Option Specifications (MIS)
MIS (gridname1)...(gridnamei) omegavomegad imis sorm beta (CDPKRH)
Definitions: 00
gridname Names of grids to be assigned the values on this card. If

this list only contains the keyword ALL, or no grid names
are provided, then all grid refinements will be assigned
these values.
omegav Value of the mixing parameter in viscosity calculations.
omegad Value of the mixing parameter in density calculations.
imis A flag for the effective density calculation. A value of 1

causes the normal quarter power mixing rule to be used.
A value of 2 selects a linear mixing procedure.
sorm The residual oil saturation to miscible flood.
beta The water blocking factor. The value must be greater than
zero.
CDPKRH Keyword to invoke interpolation option for miscible

hydrocarbon relative permeability. The krow curve will
be used for miscible hydrocarbon if this keyword is
omitted.
Input for the miscible option, in addition to the MIS and the ALPHA cards, is
discussed in the Tabular Data section and the Matrix Grid Data Array section. The
miscible option contains both a three-component (the original Todd and
Longstaff) option and a four-component option. To select the three component
(water, oil and solvent) option, two hydrocarbon components must be selected on
the grid dimension card (NX). To select the four component (water, oil, gas and
solvent) option, three hydrocarbon components must be selected. The miscible
option is compatible with both the IMPES formulation and the implicit
formulation. 00
2.2.15.2 Miscibility Transition Zone (ALPHA)
ALPHA (gridname1)...(gridnamei)pmis1 pmis2 ssmin
2-116 Landmark - R2003.4

or 00
ALPHA (gridname1)...(gridnamei)dpmis
Definitions: 00
gridname Names of grids to be assigned the values on this card. If

this list only contains the keyword ALL, or no grid names
are provided, then all grid refinements will be assigned
these values.
pmis1 The lower-bound miscibility pressure.
pmis2 The upper-bound miscibility pressure.
ssmin The minimum solvent pseudo-saturation to maintain

miscibility.
dpmis The size of the transition zone (i.e. pmis2-pmis1).
The user can turn on the miscible transition zone option by entering an ALPHA
card. If this card is omitted, a first contact miscible process will be represented. In
a first contact miscible process, to avoid the solution gas and oil being treated as
miscible when the solvent is not present (i.e., during depletion or waterflood), an
ALPHA card with zero values for pmis1 and pmis2 and a non-zero value for
ssmin must be input. 00
There are no default values for pmis1, pmis2, ssmin, and dpmis. The employment
of Format (1) automatically invokes a miscible-immiscible transition where the
interpolation parameter increases linearly between the lower- and the upper-
bound miscibility pressures, provided that the solvent pseudo-saturation is larger
than the value of ssmin. Using the IMPES formulation, the value of pmis1 must
be less than or equal to pmis2, and the user may specify a step function for
interpolation by entering identical values for pmis1 and pmis2. However, if the
fully implicit formulation is to be used, the value of pmis2 must be greater than
pmis1, i.e., a step function for interpolation (with pmis1 = pmis2) is not allowed.
Todd and Longstaff suggest that a value of 0.01 for the parameter ssmin is
sufficient to account for the loss of miscibility. 00
Conversely, the employment of Format (2) above automatically invokes the

second option for the miscible-immiscible transition where the miscibility
pressure is specified as a function of the total hydrocarbon composition. The user
is required to enter a two-dimensional (four-component case) or a one-
dimensional (three-component case) miscibility pressure table after the solvent
property table input. Using the IMPES formulation, the size of the transition zone,
dpmis, can have a value of zero to model a step function. On the other hand,
dpmis must be greater than 0 if the fully implicit formulation is used. 00
R2003.4 - Landmark 2-117

2.2.16 Time-Dependent Compressibility - Creep Option (Not available in

VIP-THERM)
See Section 5.40 for an explanation of and how to invoke the creep option. 00
2.2.16.1 Reversible Creep (CREEP)
CREEP REVERSE
Definition: 00
REVERSE Alpha label indicating that creep is reversible. Optional;

default is that creep is irreversible.
2.2.17 Hydraulic Fracture Option (Not available in VIP-THERM)

The purpose of this option is to simulate the performance of a hydraulically
fractured, packed fracture in the first XZ plane of a model, including the effects of
fracture closure and non-Darcy flow within the fracture. The fracture is assumed
to be a vertical fracture, and the simulation involves modelling only one-fourth of
the fracture and one-fourth of the drainage area of the well. The well is assumed to
be adjacent to the (1,1) gridblock column. 00
The grid description must be defined with the DX, DY, DZ, KX arrays, and the
simulator must be run in the fully implicit, single porosity mode. 00
The required data for this option are HYDFRAC and HYDBETA (Section 4.16),
along with appropriate compaction (CMT) tables to define the fracture closure
effects and permeability reduction as a function of pressure. 00
2.2.17.1 Fracture Blocks (HYDFRAC)
HYDFRAC nf
Definition: 00
nf Number of gridblocks in the X direction comprising the

maximum horizontal extend of the fracture.
NOTE: The DY’s for Y=1 should be adjusted to define the tapering half-fracture
widths.
The porosities for gridblocks nf+1 through NX (for Y=1) should be set to
zero.
Fracture closure stress can be simulated using the compaction option, with
a separate table(s) for the fracture gridblocks. The pore volume reduction
2-118 Landmark - R2003.4

factor will also be used to reduce the cross-sectional area in the flow
velocity calculations. The transmissibility reduction factor will also be
used to reduce the original KX for the Beta (turbulence) factor
calculations.
2.2.18 Polymer Injection Option (VIP-POLYMER)

VIP-POLYMER is available as a separately licensed option. 00
2.2.18.1 Initialize for Polymer Injection (POLYMER)
POLYMER
The POLYMER card will initialize the model for polymer injection. By default
the model does not initialize for polymer injection. Initializing for polymer
injection will increase the size of the restart files. 00
The physical properties required to model the polymer transport can be introduced
at any point of the recurrent data in the simulation module, preceding polymer
injection. 00
2.2.19 Thermal Option (VIP-THERM)

VIP-THERM is available as a seperately licensed option. 00
2.2.19.1 THERMAL Card
The THERMAL card is used to invoke VIP-THERM. 00
THERMAL
2.2.19.2 WATIDEAL Card (Compositional Model)
The WATIDEAL card invokes the following assumptions regarding water-oil-

vapor phase behavior:
■ The saturation pressure of an oil-water system is equal to the sum of the

saturation pressures of the oil and water alone at system temperature,
regardless of the relative amounts of oil and water as long as sufficient
quantities of each are present to saturate the vapor.
■ Water mole fraction in the vapor phase yw is given by VPW/P where VPW is
the vapor pressure of water as a function of temperature.
■ Hydrocarbon vapor-liquid equilibrium (using fugacity coefficients or k-

values) is computed at the hydrocarbon partial pressure ( ( l – y w ) ⋅ P ) on a
R2003.4 - Landmark 2-119

water-free basis. Vapor phase properties are obtained from internally

tabulated steam properties and water-free hydrocarbon vapor properties using
mixing rules. If k-value options are used, k-values are assumed to be input on
a water-free basis (The k-values are two phase gas-oil values).
In the default method, water is treated as a component in the vapor phase by the
equation of state. Water EOS parameters are internally fixed and were adjusted to
match vapor pressure, steam z-factor, and steam enthalpy along the saturation
curve. Liquid water fugacity coefficient is obtained from an internal table which
contains EOS-predicted values which were adjusted to match the vapor values
along the saturation curve. All other liquid water properties are obtained from
steam tables. Saturation pressure and flash calculations are performed using three
phase algorithms. If k-value options are used, input k-values are assumed to be
three-phase values and are evaluated at total system pressure.
WATIDEAL
2.2.19.3 FLOWS Card
The FLOWS card is required in order to map, print, or write to the spreadsheet
file (in VIP-EXECUTIVE) flow rate arrays or region boundary flow rates or
cumulatives. If all arrays are mapped, flow rate arrays will be mapped only if a
FLOWS card is input. Individual flow rate array names may be specified on the
MAP card only if a FLOWS card is input.
FLOWS
2-120 Landmark - R2003.4

2.2.20 Velocity Dependent Relative Permeability

The following sets of keywords are used to turn on and control the velocity
dependency of relative permeabilities (see options CN and FNDG in EXEC
manual section 6.2). Both capillary number and non-Darcy (Forchheimer) flow
effects may be modeled. 00
The formulation of the velocity dependent models have been developed in the
Department of Petroleum Engineering at Heriot-Watt University under the
directorship of Professor A. Danesh and Professor D. H. Tehrani in a research
project sponsored by the UK Department of Trade and Industry and 11 oil and gas
companies. 00
Velocity dependent effects may be applied to both the production well model and
for flow between gridblocks. 00
Parachor values must be input in the equation of state property tables (see section
4.4.3). 00
 WELL 
 CN   
VELCTY    FIELD   SAND 
NDARCY  CARBON
 BOTH  
 ALL 

(RPCNO  NCBO (MO) (NO) )

 VG 
  N cbg  
   ( m o ) ( no )  00
  Vg
 
(RPCNG  NCBG (MG) (NG) )

 VG 
00
  N cbg  
   ( m g ) ( ng )  00
  Vg
 
(NDARCY (B0) (B1) (B2) (B3) (B4) (B5) ) 00
( (b0) (b1) (b2) (b3) (b4) (b5) ) 00
Definitions: 00
VELCTY: Turns on velocity dependency of relative permeabilities.

No other keywords are required unless default
parameters are to be re-defined.
CN Calculate only capillary number dependency.
NDARCY Calculate only non-Darcy effect.
BOTH Calculate combined capillary number and non-Darcy
effect (default).
R2003.4 - Landmark 2-121

WELL Apply velocity dependent calculations only at the well

(default).
FIELD Apply velocity dependent calculations only for inter-

gridblock flow.
ALL Apply velocity dependent calculations both at the well

and between gridblocks.
SAND Use sandstone default parameters (default).
CARBON Use carbonate default parameters.
RPCNO, RPCNG, and NDARCY are optional input fields that can be used to
override the default parameters. They are discussed below.
RPCNO
Ncbo Threshold value for oil phase capillary number

dependency.
vg Superficial gas velocity to be used for calculating the

threshold value of capillary number dependency.
mo Exponent of residual oil saturation factor.
no Exponent of weighting factor for oil phase relative

permeability.
RPCNG
Ncbg Threshold value for gas phase capillary number

dependency.
vg Superficial gas velocity to be used for calculating the

threshold value of capillary number dependency.
mg Exponent of residual gas saturation factor.
ng Exponent of weighting factor for gas phase relative

permeability.
See the Technical Reference manual for a full explanation of these

parameters.
2-122 Landmark - R2003.4

Examples 00
1. Use all default parameters:
VELCTY
This is equivalent to:
VELCTY BOTH WELL SAND
Explicitly declaring all parameters, this is also equivalent to
VELCTY BOTH WELL SAND

RPCNO VG MO NO
10. 0 0.35
RPCNG VG MG NG
10. 35. 0.35
NDARCY BO B1 B2 B3 B4 B5
0.001524 -0.5 -5.5 -0.5 -2.99 -4.422
2. Apply only capillary number dependency, using default parameters, both

at the wells and between gridblocks:
VELCTY CN ALL
3. Apply both capillary number effects and non-Darcy effects at the well
only, but using carbonate default parameters. Also, selectively modify
some of the non-Darcy exponents, removing the dependency on
interfacial tension.
VELCTY CARBON
NDARCY B1 B3 B5
-0.7 0.7 0.
When velocity dependency is applied to wells, the condensate banking option is

automatically activated for every production well. The parameters on the
condensate banking control cards are ignored, except for the number of intervals
to be used for the numerical integration. By default, four intervals are used in
each phase region. Condensate banking can be used with or without velocity
effects. 00
4. To use 20 intervals for the numerical integration, input the following

keyword entry in the well data for VIP-EXEC:
CNDBNK TRAP 20
R2003.4 - Landmark 2-123

2.2.21 Change Units for Solution Gas-Oil Ratio (RSM)

This keyword indicates that the units for solution gas oil ratio in VIP-CORE only
are multiplied by a thousand, i.e.: 00
■ normal field units of SCF/STB will be input as MSCF/STB,
■ normal metric units of SCM/SCM will be input as MSCM/SCM,
■ normal lab units of stcc/stcc will be input as mstcc/stcc.
RSM
2-124 Landmark - R2003.4

Chapter
3
00000Print Control
3.1 Introduction
Because of the large volume of data that can be generated, PRINT cards
should be used judiciously.
Three different print options control processed initialization data printing.

(1) The NONE option is the default. The NONE option is used to suppress
printing of the processed data. If any errors occur on the PRINT cards, the
NONE option will be activated. (2) The ALL option is used to print all
processed tables and arrays. (3) Printing of each individual group of data
can be separately controlled by directly specifying the group type and the
desired information to be printed.
The processed initialization input data are divided into the following
groups: equilibrium data, compositional data, tables, input arrays,
coefficient arrays, fault descriptions, influx data, initialization arrays,
corner-point arrays, separation data, and region data.
3.2 General
3.2.1 Print Everything (ALL)
PRINT ALL
Definition:
ALL All of the processed tables and arrays are printed.
3.2.2 Print Nothing (NONE)
PRINT NONE
Definition:
NONE None of the tables or arrays are printed. This is the

default if no PRINT cards are read or if any PRINT
card errors occur.
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-125

Print Control VIP-CORE REFERENCE MANUAL
3.3 Individual Group Print Controls

Printing each individual group of data can be separately controlled by
directly specifying the group type and the desired information to be
printed. If no PRINT card is specified for any given group, no data
pertaining to that group is printed. If any errors occur on the PRINT cards,
the NONE option is activated.
To continue the table or array names on a PRINT card, list the remaining
table or array names on successive cards. Do not repeat the PRINT label.
Vertically aligned data indicate a choice; these data are mutually exclusive.
3.3.1 Input Array Printing (PRINT ARRAYS)

DO NOT USE PARENTHESES ON THE DATA CARD.
The ARRAYS option controls the printing of the input arrays of the grid
data (Section 5.1) as specified, after any modifications have been applied.
If no PRINT ARRAYS card is read, none of the arrays that were read are
printed. Array names can be used with the E as described below. If
EXCEPT is omitted, only the arrays listed are printed. The array names
can appear in any order. The parentheses indicate that the labels within
them are optional.
array 1 (array 2 ...)
ALL
PRINT ARRAYS
NONE
EXCEPT array 1 (array 2 ...)
Definitions:
ALL All of the arrays that were read are printed.
NONE None of the input array data is printed. This has the
same result as not reading a PRINT ARRAYS card.
EXCEPT All of the input arrays are printed except those

listed. At least one array name must be given.
array The alpha label of any array names that are

contained in the array data portion of the input
stream (see Section 5.1).
Example:
PRINT ARRAYS DX DY KX
3-126 Landmark - R2003.4

VIP-CORE REFERENCE MANUAL Print Control
3.3.2 Coefficient Array Printing (PRINT COEFS)

The COEFS option controls the printing of the coefficient (calculation grid
property) arrays as specified, after overreads are applied. If no PRINT
COEFS card is read, none of the coefficients are printed. Coefficient names
can be used with the EXCEPT option as described below. If EXCEPT is
omitted, only those coefficients listed are printed. The coefficient names
can appear in any order. The parentheses indicate that the labels within
them are optional. Sufficient coefficients to completely describe a model
(both corner-point and non-corner-point) may be output to a separate file
in VIP-CORE input format using the optional FILE keyword. In a single
porosity conversion 5-point, unfaulted problem these are MDEPTH, PV,
TX, TY, and TZ. In a faulted problem the fault connections are output
using the FTRANS keyword.
array 1 (array 2 ...)
ALL
PRINT COEFS NONE
EXCEPT array 1 (array 2 ...)
FILE
Arrays
DZNET DZBNET NETGRS MDEPTH PV TX TY TZ TXYL TXYR TR

TTHETA MULTX MULTY MULTZ DX DY DZ TOP TMX TMY TMZ
TMXYL TMXYR TMR TMTH
MDEPF PVF TEX TXYLF TXYRF TDIFFG TDIFFO TXF TYF TRF TZF
TTHETF (Dual Porosity Only)
TXT0 TYT0 TZT0 TRT0 TTHT0 (VIP-THERM Only)
Definitions:
ALL All of the coefficients are printed.
NONE None of the coefficients are printed. This has the

same result as not reading a PRINT COEFS card.
EXCEPT All of the coefficient arrays are printed except those

listed. At least one array name must be given.
FILE Selected coefficients are output to unit 13.
Single porosity, cartesian, geometry.
MDEPTH, PV, TX, TY, TZ
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-127

Single porosity radial geometry
MDEPTH, PV, TR, TTHETA, TZ
Single porosity, cartesian 9-point geometry
MDEPTH, PV, TX, TY, TZ, TXYL, TXYR
If faults are present the fault connections are output

using FTRANS.
In a dual porosity case the fracture equivalent of the

above arrays are also written to file.
DZNET Net vertical thickness of each gridblock.
DZBNET Net stratum thickness of each gridblock (measured

perpendicular to the bedding plane).
NETGRS Ratio of net vertical thickness to gross thickness of

each gridblock.
MDEPTH Depth to the center of each gridblock.
PV Pore volume at reference conditions.
TX Transmissibility in the x direction at reference

conditions (Half transmissibilities in the x-direction
are also printed with the LGR option).
TR Transmissibility in the r direction at reference

conditions.
TY Transmissibility in the y direction at reference

conditions (Half transmissibilities in the y-direction
TTHETA Transmissibility in the angular direction at reference

conditions.
TZ Transmissibility in the z direction at reference

conditions (Half transmissibilities in the z-direction
TXYL Transmissibility in the -x,-y (diagonal) direction at

reference conditions, available only if the nine-point
option is in use.
TXYR Transmissibility in the +x,-y (diagonal) direction at

reference conditions, available only if the nine-point
option is in use.
3-128 Landmark - R2003.4

MULTX Multiplier of transmissibility in the x direction (after

OVER/VOVER cards).
MULTY Multiplier of transmissibility in the y direction

(after OVER/VOVER cards).
MULTZ Multiplier of transmissibility in the z direction (after

OVER/VOVER cards).
DX Block thickness in the x direction. It can be printed

only in corner point geometry models.
DY Block thickness in the y direction. It can be printed

DZ Block thickness in the z direction. It can be printed

TOP Depth of a center of top block face. It can be printed

TMX Multiplier of transmissibility in the x direction

(before OVER/VOVER cards).
TMR Multiplier of transmissibility in the r direction

TMY Multiplier of transmissibility in the y direction

TMTH Multiplier of transmissibility in the angular

direction (before OVER/VOVER cards).
TMZ Multiplier of transmissibility in the z direction

TMXYL Multiplier of transmissibility in the -x, -y (diagonal)

direction (before OVER/VOVER cards), available
only if the nine-point option is in use.
TMXYR Multiplier of transmissibility in the +x, -y (diagonal)

direction (before OVER/VOVER cards), available
only if the nine-point option is in use.
MDEPF Depth to the center of each fracture block.
PVF Fracture pore volume at reference conditions.
TXF Fracture transmissibility in the x direction at

reference conditions.
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-129

TRF Fracture transmissibility in the r direction at

TYF Fracture transmissibility in the y direction at

TTHETF Fracture transmissibility in the angular direction at

TZF Fracture transmissibility in the z direction at

TEX Matrix-fracture exchange transmissibility at

TXYLF Fracture transmissibility in the -x,-y (diagonal)

direction at reference conditions, available only if
the nine-point option is in use.
TXYRF Fracture transmissibility in the +x,-y (diagonal)

direction at reference conditions, available only if
the nine-point option is in use.
TDIFFG Gas diffusion mass transfer coefficients.
TDIFFO Oil diffusion mass transfer coefficients.
TXT0 Thermal transmissibility in the x direction at

TRT0 Thermal transmissibility in the r direction at

TYT0 Thermal transmissibility in the y direction at

TTHT0 Thermal transmissibility in the angular direction at

TZT0 Thermal transmissibility in the z direction at

Examples:
PRINT COEFS PV TX TY TZ
3-130 Landmark - R2003.4

3.3.3 Compositional Data Printing (PRINT COMP)

The COMP option controls the printing of PVT property data (Section 4.4).
If no PRINT COMP card is read, the compositional data are not printed.
ALL
PRINT COMP
NONE
Definitions:
ALL All of the PVT compositional data are printed.
NONE None of the PVT compositional data are printed.

This has the same result as not reading a PRINT
COMP card.
Example:
PRINT COMP ALL
3.3.4 Corner-Point Data Printing (PRINT CORNER)

The CORNER option controls the printing of corner-point data and the
writing of a formatted corner-point output file (FORTRAN Unit 12). The
parentheses indicate that the labels within them are optional.
( PRINT ) ( FILE )
PRINT CORNER ALL
NONE
Definitions:
ALL The corner-point data are printed and a corner-

point output file is written (Default, no corner-point
data printed or output).
PRINT Prints the corner-point coordinates for each block in

tabular form.
FILE Writes a formatted output file of corner-point data

that may be used for post-processing.
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-131

NONE No corner point data are printed or written to the

output files.
Example:
PRINT CORNER PRINT
3.3.5 Equilibrium Data Printing (PRINT EQUIL)

The EQUIL option controls the printing of the equilibrium data (Section
4.2), including saturation pressure tables if input. If no PRINT EQUIL card
is read, the equilibrium data are not printed.
ALL
PRINT EQUIL
NONE
Definitions:
ALL All of the equilibrium data are printed.
NONE None of the equilibrium data are printed. This has

the same result as not reading a PRINT EQUIL card.
Example:
PRINT EQUIL ALL
3.3.6 Fault Data Printing (PRINT FAULTS)

The FAULTS option controls the printing of fault data (Section 6.1) in
tabular form, array form, or both. This card also controls the printing of
any PINCHOUT (Section 2.2.9.1) warning messages. If no PRINT FAULTS
card is read, none of the data are printed. If EXCEPT is omitted, the data
are printed only in the form(s) specified. The parentheses indicate that the
labels within them are optional.
( TABLES ) (ARRAYS)
PRINT FAULTS ALL

NONE
EXCEPT (TABLES) (ARRAYS)
3-132 Landmark - R2003.4

Definitions:
ALL The fault data are printed in both tabular form and
array form.
NONE None of the fault data are printed. This has the
same result as not reading a PRINT FAULTS card.
EXCEPT All of the data are printed except those specified. At

least one name must follow the EXCEPT.
TABLES Lists the connecting gridblocks across the fault, the

shared thickness of each "connection", and the
transmissibility of the "connection". (For the corner-
point option, only the transmissibility is printed.)
TABLES also prints PINCHOUT warning messages.
ARRAYS Shows the location of the fault and the amount of

fault displacement in array form. (Not applicable to
the corner-point option.) Also prints the IFID
arrays if named faults have been defined.
Example:
PRINT FAULTS TABLES
3.3.7 Influx Data Printing (PRINT INFLUX)

The INFLUX option controls the printing of the tabular and/or array
influx data (Section 10.2) as specified. If no PRINT INFLUX card is read,
none of the influx data are printed. If EXCEPT is omitted, the data are
printed only in the form(s) specified. The parentheses indicate that the
( TABLES ) (ARRAYS)
PRINT INFLUX ALL

NONE
EXCEPT (TABLES) (ARRAYS)
Definitions:
ALL Both the tabular and array influx data are printed.
NONE None of the influx data are printed. This has the
same result as not reading a PRINT INFLUX card.
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-133

EXCEPT All of the data are printed except those specified. At

least one name must follow the EXCEPT.
TABLES The influx data as expressed in tabular form.
ARRAYS The influx data as expressed in array form.
Example:
PRINT INFLUX ARRAYS
3.3.8 Initialization Arrays

The INIT option controls the printing of requested initialization
(calculated initial conditions) arrays as specified. If no PRINT INIT card is
read, none of the initialization arrays are printed. Initialization array
names can be used with the EXCEPT option as described below. If
EXCEPT is omitted, only those arrays listed are printed. Array names can
appear in any order. The parentheses indicate that the labels within them
are optional.
table 1 (table 2 ...)
ALL
PRINT INIT
NONE
EXCEPT table 1 (table 2 ...)
Arrays
P PSAT SO SW SG VISO VISG DENO DENG VF XI YI ZI PV KH PDAT

SOM SWM PCSW PCSG IFT API TX TY TR TTHETA TZ TXYL TXYR SGR
SGRO SWRO SGM OMGV OMGD TEMP PWSAT WCO2 SCLFCT TCTBD
BTBD
PF PSATF SOF SWF SGF DENOF DENGF VISOF VISGF VFF XIF YIF ZIF
PVF KHF PDATF SOMF SWMF PCSWF PCSGF IFTF TXF TYF TRF
TTHETF TZF TEX TXYLF TXYRF SGMF PWSATF WCO2F (Fractured
Cases Only)
TEMP VISW DENW HL HV HW CPRT0 (VIP-THERM Only)
Definitions:
ALL All of the initialization arrays are printed.
NONE None of the initialization arrays are printed. This

has the same result as not reading a PRINT INIT
card.
3-134 Landmark - R2003.4

EXCEPT All of the initialization arrays are printed except

those listed. At least one array name must be given.
P Initial pressure.
PSAT Initial saturation pressure.
SO Initial oil saturation.
SW Initial water saturation.
SG Initial gas saturation.
VISO Initial oil viscosity.
VISG Initial gas viscosity.
DENO Initial oil density.
DENG Initial gas density.
VF Initial vapor fraction.
XI Initial mole fraction of all components in the liquid

phase.
YI Initial mole fraction of all components in the vapor

phase.
ZI Initial overall hydrocarbon mole fraction of all

components.
PV Pore volume at initial conditions.
KH Permeability thickness at initial conditions.
PDAT Initial datum pressure (datum depth defined by the

IEQUIL card).
SOM Initial normalized mobile oil saturation.
SWM Initial normalized mobile water saturation.
RS Solution gas-oil ratio.
RV Solution oil-gas ratio.
PCSW Water-oil capillary pressure adjustment, meaningful

only if the integrated saturation initialization
algorithm is used for equilibrium initialization, or
saturations have been overread.
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-135

PCSG Gas-oil capillary pressure adjustment, meaningful

only if the integrated saturation initialization
algorithm is used for equilibrium initialization, or
saturations have been overread.
IFT Interfacial tension, available only if the IFT option is

in use.
API Initial API gravity of the liquid phase, available

only if the PVT interpolation option is in use.
TX X direction transmissibility at initial conditions.
TY Y direction transmissibility at initial conditions.
TZ Z direction transmissibility at initial conditions.
TR R direction transmissibility at initial conditions.
TTHETA Angular direction transmissibility at initial

conditions.
TXYL (-x,-y) direction transmissibility at initial conditions,

available only if the nine-point option is in use.
TXYR (+x,-y) direction transmissibility at initial

conditions, available only if the nine-point option is
in use.
SGR Calculated residual gas saturation (MOBILE fluid

option).
SGRO Calculated gas saturation at residual oil (MOBILE

fluid option).
SWRO Calculated water saturation at residual oil (MOBILE

fluid option).
SGM Initial normalized mobile gas saturation.
OMGV Mixing parameter for effective viscosity.
OMGD Mixing parameter for effective density.
TEMP Temperature, if variable temperature is in use.
PWSAT Initial saturation pressure for water (CO2 option).
WCO2 Initial CO2 dissolved in water.
SCLFCT Scaling factor for turbidite reservoir option.
TCTBD Time constant for turbidite reservoir option.
3-136 Landmark - R2003.4

BTBD Shale capacity for turbidite reservoir option.
PF Initial fracture pressure.
PSATF Initial fracture saturation pressure.
SOF Initial fracture oil saturation.
SWF Initial fracture water saturation.
SGF Initial fracture gas saturation.
DENOF Initial fracture oil density.
DENGF Initial fracture gas density.
VISOF Initial fracture oil viscosity.
VISGF Initial fracture gas viscosity.
VFF Initial fracture vapor fraction.
XIF Initial fracture mole fraction of all components in

the liquid phase.
YIF Initial fracture mole fraction of all components in

the vapor phase.
ZIF Initial fracture overall hydrocarbon mole fraction of

all components.
PVF Fracture pore volume at initial conditions.
KHF Fracture permeability thickness at initial conditions.
PDATF Initial fracture datum pressure (datum depth

defined by the IEQUIL card).
SOMF Initial normalized fracture mobile oil saturation.
SWMF Initial normalized fracture mobile water saturation.
PCSWF Fracture water-oil capillary pressure adjustment,

available only if the integrated saturation
initialization algorithm is used for equilibrium
initialization.
PCSGF Fracture gas-oil capillary pressure adjustment,

available only if the integrated saturation
initialization algorithm is used for equilibrium
initialization.
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-137

IFTF Fracture interfacial tension, available only if the IFT

option is in use.
TXF X direction fracture transmissibility at initial

conditions.
TYF Y direction fracture transmissibility at initial

conditions.
TZF Z direction fracture transmissibility at initial

conditions.
TRF R direction fracture transmissibility at initial

conditions.
TTHETF Angular direction fracture transmissibility at initial

conditions.
TEX Matrix-fracture exchange transmissibility at initial

conditions.
TXYLF (-x,-y) direction fracture transmissibility at initial

in use.
TXYRF (+x,-y) direction fracture transmissibility at initial

in use.
SGMF Initial normalized fracture mobile gas saturation.
PWSATF Initial fracture saturation pressure for water (CO2

option).
WCO2F Initial fracture CO2 dissolved in water.
TEMP Temperature.
VISW Liquid water phase viscosity.
DENW Liquid water phase density.
HL Oil phase enthalpy.
HV Gas phase enthalpy.
HW Water phase enthalpy.
CPRT0 Total reference gridblock heat capacity.
Examples:
PRINT INIT EXCEPT SOM
3-138 Landmark - R2003.4

3.3.9 Region Data

The REGION option controls the printing of output region names,
separator battery assignments and region datum depths (Section 9.1). If no
PRINT REGION card is read, no region data are printed. Region data are
printed with PRINT REGION only if this optional data is input.
ALL
PRINT REGION
NONE
Example:
PRINT REGION ALL
3.3.10 Separation Data

The SEPARATOR option controls the printing of all input separator data
(Section 4.8 and Section 4.9) and derived separator properties. If no PRINT
SEPARATOR card is read, none of the data are printed. Default separator
properties are printed only if no separation data are input, the separation
data print flag is on, and the derived PVT properties print flag for VIP-
ENCORE (Section 3.3.11) or the compositional data print flag for VIP-
COMP (Section 3.3.3) is on. When using BOTABS PVT data in VIP-
ENCORE, default separator properties will appear as part of the derived
PVT properties output if printed.
ALL
PRINT SEPARATOR
NONE
Example:
PRINT SEPARATOR ALL
3.3.11 Tabular Data - Saturation and PVT tables

The TABLES option controls the printing of the saturation tables and PVT
tables as specified. If no PRINT TABLES card is read, none of the tables are
printed. The table names can be used with the EXCEPT option as
described below. If EXCEPT is omitted, only the tables listed are printed.
The table names can appear in any order. The parentheses indicate that the
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-139

table 1 (table 2 ...)
ALL
PRINT TABLES
NONE
EXCEPT table 1 (table 2 ...)
Table Names
SWT RSWT SGT RSGT KR3P COMPACT RCOMPACT PROFILE
PVT DPVT RPVT (Black-Oil Only)
CO2 RCO2 (Compositional only)
SWTF RSWTF SGTF RSGTF KR3PF SIGT (Dual Porosity Only)
Definitions:
ALL All tables (except RPVT and RCO2) are printed.
NONE None of the tabular data are printed. This has the
same result as not reading a PRINT TABLES card.
EXCEPT All of the tables (except RPVT and RCO2) are

printed except those listed. At least one table name
must be given.
SWT Water saturation tables.
RSWT Reconstructed water saturation tables.
SGT Gas saturation tables.
RSGT Reconstructed gas saturation tables.
KR3P Three phase oil relative permeability tables.
PVT PVT or K-value tables.
PROFILE PVT profile table vs. depth
DPVT Derived PVT tables.
RPVT Reconstructed PVT or K-value tables. These tables

will be printed only if the RPVT keyword is input.
COMPACT Compaction tables.
RCOMPACT Reconstructed compaction tables.
3-140 Landmark - R2003.4

CO2 Carbon dioxide solubility tables.
RCO2 Reconstructed carbon dioxide solubility tables.

These tables will be printed only if the RCO2
keyword is input.
SWTF Water saturation tables (fractures).
RSWTF Reconstructed water saturation tables (fractures).
SGTF Gas saturation tables (fractures).
RSGTF Reconstructed gas saturation tables (fractures).
KR3PF Three phase oil relative permeability tables

(fractures).
SIGT Tension vs. pressure table (pseudo matrix capillary

pressure).
Examples:
PRINT TABLES ALL

PRINT TABLES KR3P
3.4 Rescaled Saturation Tables

The PRSTAB/PRSTABF keywords MUST follow the SWT/SGT table
data.
3.4.1 Print Rescaled Saturation Tables

The saturation-dependent tables (SWT and SGT section 4.3) can be
rescaled and printed using a user supplied set of endpoints. A rescaled
three-phase oil relative permeability table will also be printed if requested
with the PRINT TABLES KR3P option described in section 3.3.11. These
prints are for diagnostic purpose only and do not effect the simulation
results.
PRSTAB ENDPOINT1 (ENDPOINT2 ...)

nt endpoint1 (endpoint2 ...)
( repeat values for different rescaled endpoint print tables )
Endpoint Names:
SWL SWR SWRO SWU KROLW KRWRO (SWT tables)
SGL SGR SGRO SGU KROLG KRGRO (SGT tables)
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-141

Definitions:
nt The table number (rock type) to be rescaled and

printed.
SWL Connate (minimum) water saturation.
SWR Residual water saturation.
SWRO Water saturation at residual oil saturation.
SWU Maximum water saturation.
KROLW Kro at connate water saturation.
KRWRO Krw at residual oil saturation.
SGL Connate (minimum) gas saturation.
SGR Residual gas saturation.
SGRO Gas saturation at residual oil saturation.
SGU Maximum gas saturation.
KROLG Kro at connate gas saturation (equal to KROLW).
KRGRO Krg at residual oil saturation.
Examples:
PRSTAB SWL SWR SWRO SWU SGL SGR SGRO SGU
1 .05 .1 .8 1.0 0.0 .03 .65 .95
1 .05 .1 .8 1.0 0.0 .03 .65 .95
2 .1 .1 .7 1.0 0.0 .03 .65 .9
PRSTAB SWR SWRO KRWRO
1 .1 .9 .8
3.4.2 Print Rescaled Fracture Saturation Tables (VIP-DUAL)

The saturation-dependent tables for the fractures (SWTF and SGTF section
4.3) can be rescaled and printed using a user supplied set of endpoints.
This option works like the one for printing the matrix saturation tables
3-142 Landmark - R2003.4

described in section 3.4.1.
PRSTABF ENDPOINT1 (ENDPOINT2 ...)

nt endpoint1 (endpoint2 ...)
( repeat values for different rescaled endpoint print tables )
Endpoint Names:
SWL SWR SWRO SWU KROLW KRWRO (SWT tables)
SGL SGR SGRO SGU KROLG KRGRO ( SGT tables)
Definitions:
Definitions are as given in Section 3.4.1, Print Rescaled Saturation

Tables.
R2003.4 - Landmark 3-143

3-144 Landmark - R2003.4

Chapter
4
00000Tables
4.1 Introduction
00 VIP-CORE tabular data must be preceded by the alpha label TABLES.
TABLES
4.2 Equilibrium Tables

00 VIP-CORE can initialize multiple reservoirs, called equilibrium regions,
within the same model (Figure 4-1). The IEQUIL array (Section 5.28) is
used to relate each gridblock to the appropriate equilibrium table (region).
If no IEQUIL array is read, then the entire grid is assumed to lie in
Region 1.
Figure 4-1: Multiple Reservoirs in the Same Field
WARNING: When two equilibration regions are in communication, initial

equilibrium cannot be guaranteed.
VIP-CORE initializes to equilibrium conditions on the basis of data found

in the equilibrium table. A vertical profile of reservoir fluid and pressure
distributions assuming gravity-capillary pressure equilibrium is shown in
Figure 4-2. Note that where a phase becomes immobile, the pressure
gradient follows the density gradient of the still-mobile phase. 00
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-145

Tables VIP-CORE REFERENCE MANUAL
00 The labels on the left side of the figure correspond to specific entries in the
equilibrium initialization table (Section 4.2.1 and Section 4.2.2). The
reference values of capillary pressure are shown in the right hand figure.
VIP-CORE constructs pressure versus depth tables for each phase and
assigns to each gridblock an oil pressure equal to the oil phase pressure at
the depth of the gridblock center. The difference between phase pressures,
capillary pressure, is then used to compute average saturation values for
each gridblock.
Figure 4-2: Equilibrium Initialization
Data for each region are input in one of two ways: (1) with a constant
saturation pressure, Section 4.2.1, or (2) with a variable saturation pressure
that is a function of depth, Section 4.2.2. If one equilibrium region has a
constant saturation pressure while another region has a varying saturation
pressure, use the variable saturation pressure format to enter all of the
equilibrium data. 00
Initial reservoir temperature may be specified in one or more of the

following ways for compositional or thermal models (temperature
variation is not allowed in black oil models, but a constant value is
required in the constant data): 00
2. Specified by equilibrium region in the IEQUIL table (Section 4.2.1.1,

4.2.1.2, 4.2.1.3, or 4.2.2), overriding the constant value in option 1.
3. Specified by equilibrium region, as a function of depth or as a function

of depth and areal location, overriding values in options 1 and 2:
a. For isothermal and thermal compositional models, Section 4.4.12.3,

orSection 4.4.12.4.
4-146 Landmark - R2003.4

VIP-CORE REFERENCE MANUAL Tables
Entering temperature as a function of depth and areal location

(Section 4.4.12.4) is discouraged, since the areal temperature
variation is not accounted for in the calculation of equilibrium
phase pressures versus depth. See option 4 below for further
discussion of this problem.
4. Specified as a gridblock array in Section 5.25.1, overriding all other

input values. This method is discouraged, since the calculation of the
phase pressure versus depth curves by equilibrium region, from which
initial gridblock pressures and saturations are computed, does not
account for variation of temperature by gridblock (or for areal
variation of temperature by equilibrium region). This results in errors
in the computed initial gridblock fluid properties of pressure,
saturation pressure, phase saturations, and possibly compositions.
These errors may be avoided only by specifying all of these initial
gridblock fluid properties (only the pressure array in the thermal
4.2.1 Saturation Pressure is Constant by Regions
4.2.1.1 IEQUIL for Three-Phase
IEQUIL PINIT (TINIT) DEPTH PCWOC WOC PCGOC GOC PSAT (API)(IPVT)(IPVTW)
iequil pinit (tinit) depth pcwoc woc pcgoc goc psat (api)(ipvt)(ipvtw)
(one data card for each equilibrium region)
Definitions: 00
The titles on this card must appear in the order shown. The title card is not
repeated for multiple equilibrium regions. 00
iequil The equilibrium region to which these data apply.

Values must increase consecutively for each data
card.
pinit Initial reservoir pressure at the specified depth, psia

(kPa).
tinit Initial reservoir temperature in the equilibrium

region, degrees F (degrees C). Valid in VIP-COMP
or VIP-THERM only.
depth Depth at which initial reservoir pressure is given, ft

(m). This is also the datum depth used to calculate
datum pressures.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-147

pcwoc Water-oil capillary pressure at the water-oil contact,

psia (Kpa), where pcwoc = po - pw.
woc Depth of the water-oil contact, ft (m).
pcgoc Gas-oil capillary pressure at the gas-oil contact, psia

(kPa), where pcgoc = pg - po.
goc Depth of the gas-oil contact, ft (m).
psat Initial saturation pressure, psia (kPa).
api Initial API gravity of the stock-tank liquid, ˚API

(˚API), available only if the PVT interpolation
option is in use.
ipvt PVT table number (black-oil or EOS) that applies

within this equilibrium region. Only one PVT table
can be used within any equilibrium region. It is
highly recommended that the PVT table be set by
this method, instead of setting it in the IPVT array,
to obtain proper initialization. The ipvt parameter
may also be entered on the COMPOSITION or
OILMF or GASMF cards.
ipvtw Water property table number (PVTW/PVTWSAL)

that applies within this equilibrium region. Only
one water table can be used within any equilibrium
region. It is highly recommended that the water
table be set by this method instead of setting it in
the IPVTW array.
If the goc is within the reservoir, then the model calculated psat at goc will
be used for initializing the reservoir pressure, and PINIT will be ignored.
In the VIP-THERM dead oil model, the value of psat is arbitrary and is not
used. 00
4.2.1.2 IEQUIL for GASWATER Option
The following format is used to enter saturation pressures with the

GASWATER option described in Section 2.2.6.1. 00
IEQUIL PINIT (TINIT) DEPTH PCGWC GWC (IPVT) (IPVTW)

iequil pinit (tinit) depth pcgwc gwc (ipvt) (ipvtw)
Definitions: 00
4-148 Landmark - R2003.4


card.

(kPa).

or VIP-THERM only.

(m).
pcgwc Gas-water capillary pressure at the gas-water

contact, psia (kPa), where pcgwc = pg - pw.
gwc Depth of the gas-water contact, ft (m).

can be used within any equilibrium region. It is
to obtain proper initialization. The ipvt parameter
may also be entered on the COMPOSITION or
OILMF or GASMF cards.

the IPVTW array.
4.2.1.3 IEQUIL for WATEROIL Option
The following format is used to enter saturation pressures with the

WATEROIL option discussed in Section 2.2.6.2. 00
IEQUIL PINIT (TINIT) DEPTH PCWOC WOC PSAT (IPVT) (IPVTW)

iequil pinit (tinit) depth pcwoc woc psat (ipvt) (ipvtw)
Definitions: 00
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-149


card.

(kPa).

or VIP-THERM only.

(m).
pcwoc Water-oil capillary pressure at the water-oil contact,

psia (kPa), where pcwoc = po - pw.
woc Depth of the water-oil contact, ft (m).
psat Initial saturation pressure, psia (kPa).

can be used within this equilibrium region. It is
to obtain proper initialization. The ipvt input may
also be entered on the COMPOSITION or OILMF
or GASMF cards.

the IPVTW array.
Examples: 00
00 TABLES
C
IEQUIL PINIT DEPTH PCWOC WOC PCGOC GOC PSAT
1 4335 8575 6.0 9022 0.0 8575 4335
00 C
IEQUIL PINIT DEPTH PCGWC GWC
1 5000. 8000. 0.0 8000.
4-150 Landmark - R2003.4

4.2.2 Saturation Pressure Varies with Depth

The following data should be entered for either VIP-COMP or VIP-
ENCORE or the VIP-THERM compositional model if saturation pressure
will vary with depth. 00
IEQUIL PINIT (TINIT) DEPTH PCWOC WOC PCGOC GOC (IPVT) (IPVTW)
iequil pinit(tinit) depth pcwoc woc pcgoc goc (ipvt) (ipvtw)
Data items are defined exactly as described in Section 4.2.1. Note that the
only difference is the absence of the PSAT, and possibly API, data. 00
BOTAB (VIP-ENCORE) or COMPOSITION (VIP-COMP or VIP-THERM)

must be specified when saturation pressure varies with depth. 00
4.2.3 Equilibrium for User-Specified Saturations

An equilibrium initialization can be achieved for any specified
distribution of initial water and gas saturations. The user must first enter
the fluid contact information in one of the formats described above. Then,
saturation arrays are entered (Section 5.30) to "overwrite" the equilibrium
initialization. However, equilibrium conditions are still maintained for the
specified saturation distribution since the program automatically shifts
the capillary pressure curve to ensure that these saturations are in
equilibrium. For this equilibrium option, a NONEQ card must not be
included in the utility data (Section 2.2.8.1) since a NONEQ card forces the
capillary pressure shift to be set to zero. 00
4.2.4 Saturation Pressures for VIP-ENCORE (BPTAB)

This card may not be specified if PSAT was entered on the IEQUIL
card. 00
Depth versus psat tables using the BPTAB card only apply when the PVT
property data are input using the BOTAB card (Section 4.5.2). 00
Saturation pressure tables are read immediately after the cards defining
the fluid contacts for VIP-ENCORE. The values on these cards must
appear in the order shown. One saturation pressure table must be read for
each equilibrium region. 00
(1) BPTAB iequil

(2) DEPTH PSAT (API)
(3) depth psat (api) (repeat as necessary)
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-151

Definitions: 00
00 (1) BPTAB Indicates the data being read is a saturation

pressure table.

The values must be consecutively increasing.
00 (2) The alpha labels on this card must appear as shown.
00 (3) depth Depth corresponding to psat, ft (m). Values must

increase consecutively.
psat Saturation pressure at the specified depth, psia

(kPa).
api API gravity of the liquid phase at the specified

depth, ˚API (˚API), available only when the PVT
interpolation option is in use.
00 Example:
00 BPTAB 1
DEPTH PSAT
6600 2850
7800 2647
8600 2540
4.2.5 Saturation Pressure Variation with Depth for Modified Black Oil
00 PSTAB or RSTAB and RVTAB cards
These cards may not be specified if PSAT was entered on the IEQUIL card. 00
Depth versus psat or solution oil/gas and solution gas/oil tables using the PSTAB,
RSTAB, or RVTAB cards only apply when the PVT property data are input using
the BOETAB, or some combination of BODTAB, BOOTAB, BOGTAB,
BDGTAB cards. 00
These tables are read immediately after the cards defining the fluid contacts for
VIP-ENCORE. The values on these cards must appear in the order shown. Either
a PSTAB or a RVTAB/RSTAB combination must be read for each equilibrium
region. For a dead oil, only a RVTAB card is required. For a dry gas, only a
RSTAB card is required. 00
(1) PSTAB iequil

(2) DEPTH PSAT
(3) depth psat (repeat as necessary)
4-152 Landmark - R2003.4

00 Definitions:
(1) PSTAB Indicates the data being read is a saturation pressure

table.
iequil The equilibrium region to which these data apply. The

values must be consecutively increasing.
(2) The alpha labels on this card must appear as shown.
(3) depth Depth corresponding to psat, ft (m). Values must

increase consecutively.
psat Saturation pressure at the specified depth, psia (kPa).
00 Example:
00 PSTAB 1
DEPTH PSAT
6600 2850
7800 2647
8600 2540
(1) RSTAB iequil

(2) DEPTH RS
(3) depth rs (repeat as necessary)
00 Definitions:
(1) RSTAB Indicates the data being read is a table of solution gas-oil
ratio versus depth.

(3) depth Depth corresponding to rs, ft (m). Values must increase

consecutively.
rs Solution gas-oil ratio at the specified depth. Units of rs

are the same as the units input using the BOETAB or
BOOTAB cards.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-153

00 Example:
00 RSTAB 1
DEPTH RS
6600 700
7800 750
8600 800
(1) RVTAB iequil

(2) DEPTH RV
(3) depth rv (repeat as necessary)
00 Definitions:
(1) RVTAB Indicates the data being read is a table of solution oil-gas
ratio versus depth.

(3) depth Depth corresponding to rv, ft (m). Values must increase

consecutively.
rv Solution oil-gas ratio at the specified depth, STB/MSCF

(stcm/stcm).
Example:
00 RVTAB 1
DEPTH RV
6600 0.04
7800 0.042
8600 0.045
4-154 Landmark - R2003.4

4.3 Saturation-Dependent Data

00 Relative permeability data must follow the equilibrium data.
VIP-CORE accepts either tabular or functional data describing two-phase

(water-oil and gas-oil) relative permeabilities and capillary pressures. The
water and gas relative permeabilities are used directly from the input
coefficients or tables. Three-phase oil relative permeability is not directly
entered. It is computed from the two-phase values of krg, krog, krw, krow
according to one of the two Stone (Reference 2) probability models or the
Saturation Weighted Interpolation (Reference 25). The default is Stone
Model II. 00
Stone Model I: 00
k rog k row ( 1 – S wc – S or m ) ( 1 – S w – S g – S orm )

k ro = --------------------- --------------------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------
( 1 – S w – S or m ) ( 1 – S wc – S g – S orm )
00
k rocw
00 where
00 S orm = S orw – γ S g ,
S orw – S org
00 γ = -------------------------------- .
1 – S wc – S org
00 An extension of the Sorm term is available:
Sg A Sg  A
S orm = S org  ---------- + S orw  1 – ---------
2 2 3
 S gro  - – ε ( S gro S g – S g ) + ν ( S gro S g – S g )
S gro
00
00 where S gro = 1 – S wc – S org .
This collapses to the first definition of Sorm when A = 1, ε = ν = 0. The

values A, ε, ν are input on the STONE1 card. 00
Stone Model II: 00
k row k rog
k ro = k rocw  ------------ + k rw  ------------ + k rg – k rg – k rw ,
 k rocw   k rocw 
00
Saturation Weighted Interpolation: 00
( S g * k rog + ( S w – S wc ) * k row )
K ro = ------------------------------------------------------------------------
( S g + S w – S wc )
00
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-155

where: 00
00 krog is evaluated at (Sg + Sw - Swc) and

Krow is evaluated at (Sg + Sw)
00 A ternary diagram exhibiting kro for pairs of typical two-phase data is

shown in Figure 4-3.
Figure 4-3: kro From Stone’s Model II (Ref. 2)
An arbitrary number of sets of relative permeability data may be input,

each with a unique table number. All data must be input using either the
tabular or functional format - the two types cannot be mixed. 00
Assignment of table numbers to each gridblock for use in the

intergridblock flow calculations is down with the ISAT, ISATI, ISATF, and
ISATFI arrays (Section 5.13). Assignment of the table numbers to each
perforation for use in the well bore flow calculations is done with the ISAT
and ISATI entries in the FPERF data (Section 3.2.2 in the Simulation
Module Reference Manual). No ISAT values are required if only one set of
saturation-dependent data is entered. 00
Often the shape of the relative permeability and capillary pressure curves
are identical for several core samples even though the endpoints are not
the same. VIP-CORE allows the user to model spatial differences in curve
endpoints (such as connate water and critical gas saturation) with a single
set of generic relative permeability and capillary pressure curves. 00
Arrays of curve endpoints may be entered as described in Section 5.32. For

the tabular option, the program automatically renormalized the tables for
each gridblock. For the functions option, the array value for each
gridblock simply overrides the constant value given in the SDFUNC data. 00
In VIP-THERM, temperature dependence of all endpoint relative

permeabilities and saturations may be specified for each set of saturation-
dependent data as described in Section 4.3.3. 00
4-156 Landmark - R2003.4

4.3.1 Saturation-Dependent Tables

The saturation tables must satisfy the following requirements: 00
1. All water saturation tables must precede the gas saturation tables,
which must precede the gas-water tables, if present.
2. The table numbers for both the water and gas tables must be
consecutively increasing.
3. The number of water saturation tables must equal the number of gas
saturation tables.
One or both of capillary pressure and relative permeability hysteresis can

be represented in one or both of the water-oil and gas-oil tables, but not in
the gas-water table. The user can choose to activate one, or the other, or
both at once. 00
Capillary pressure hysteresis requires the following changes to the water-

oil and/or gas-oil table data: 00
■ Secondary drainage curves must be provided on the appropriate

drainage saturation table (SWT or SGT). These are used in making the
transition from the imbibition curve to the drainage curve and
consequently start on the drainage curve and end at the table residual
oil saturation.
■ An imbibition saturation table must be provided, with the imbibition

capillary pressure curve input as the primary capillary pressure.
■ An ISATI array must be specified to assign imbibition tables to grid

blocks (in concert with the ISAT array for drainage tables.
■ PCHYSW and PCHYSG cards can optionally be specified to control

scanning loop parameters for the water and gas tables, respectively.
Relative permeability hysteresis (for the relative permeability of oil in an

oil-water system and/or the relative permeability of gas in a gas-oil
system) requires changes to the water-oil and/or gas-oil table data. There
are two options: 00
■ Trapped hydrocarbon saturation. A trapped hydrocarbon saturation

can be specified on the appropriate table (SOTR with SWT and SGTR
with SGT). Note that this value may not be matched exactly if
endpoint scaling is also employed. RPHYSO and RPHYSG cards can
optionally be specified to control the method used to calculate oil and
gas relative permeability hysteresis, respectively.
■ Curve input. An imbibition saturation table can be provided, with the

appropriate imbibition relative permeability curve input. An ISATI
array must be specified to assign imbibition tables to grid blocks (in
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-157

concert with the ISAT array for drainage tables). RPHYSO and
RPHYSG cards can optionally be specified to control the method used
to calculate oil and gas relative permeability hysteresis, respectively.
4.3.1.1 Water-Oil Saturation for the Matrix (SWT)
Water saturation tables define the rock properties that depend on water
saturation: relative permeability of water, relative permeability of oil in
the presence of water, and water-oil capillary pressure. If capillary
pressure hysteresis is selected, secondary water-oil capillary pressure
must also be defined for a drainage table. These tables are not needed for
the GASWATER option, Section 2.2.6.1. 00
(1) SWT nswt

(2) (SWMNI swmni)
(3) SW KRW KROW PCWO (PCWOS)
(4a) swc 0.0 krocw pcwocw
. . . .
(4b) swr 0.0 krorw pcworw
. . . .
(4c) (swd) (krwd) (krowd) (pcwod) (pcwod)
. . . .
(4d) swro krwro 0.0 pcworo (pcworos)
. . . .
(4e) swmx krwmx 0.0 pcwomn (pcworos)
Definitions: 00
00 (1) SWT Alpha label indicating that a water saturation table

is being read.
nswt The table number (rock type). This number

corresponds to the values in the ISAT array (Section
5.13.1).
00 (2) SWMNI Alpha label indicating that the following entry on

this line is the table value of the effective connate
water saturation to be used for initialization. This
allows the user to extend the oil relative premability
curve below the initialization value of connate
water saturation, and is useful when water
saturation may be reduced below connate either
through compressibility effects in isothermal
simulations or through the vaporization of water in
thermal simulations.
swmni Table value of effective connate water saturation to

be used for initialization. Must be greater than or
equal to swc and less than or equal to swro. Default
value is swc.
4-158 Landmark - R2003.4

00 (3) The values on the data cards following this title card appear in the
order defined by this card. They must appear in the order shown.
SW Water saturation as a fraction of total pore volume.

Values must increase consecutively.
KRW Relative permeability of water (in an oil-water

system) at a given water saturation. Values must
increase with water saturation.
KROW Relative permeability of oil in the presence of water

(in an oil-water system) at a given water saturation.
Values must decrease with increasing water
saturation. If this is an imbibition table, krow must
be less than or equal to the corresponding drainage
curve value.
PCWO Water-oil capillary pressure, psia (kPa). Values must

decrease with increasing water saturation unless all
values are equal. This will either be a primary
drainage curve or an imbibition curve. If this is an
imbibition table, pcwo must be less than or equal to
the corresponding secondary drainage curve value.
Here, pcwo = po - pw.
PCWOS Optional column heading for water-oil capillary

pressure for a secondary drainage process (on
drainage tables in hysteresis cases only), psia (kPa).
Values must decrease with increasing water
saturation and must be less than or equal to the
primary drainage curve values. Here, pcwos = po -
pw. Values of pcwos for sw < swd should be
omitted, causing pcwos for the saturation entry to
be set equal to pcwo.
(3) Data cards There must be a minimum of three data cards

including each of the types (b), (d), and (e). The last
data card in the table must be type (e). Table entries
for water saturations lying between the required
points or between swc and swr should be selected
to adequately define the shape of the curves. See
Figure 4-3.
00 (a) SW = swc (connate water saturation).
00 KRW = 0.0
00 KROW = krocw (from permeability of oil

in the presence of water at swc).
00 PCWO = pcwocw (water-oil capillary
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-159

pressure at swc).
00 (b) SW = swr
00 KRW = 0.0
00 PCWO = krorw
00 PCWOS = pcworw
00 (c) SW = swd
00 KRW = krwd
00 KROW = krowd
00 PCWO = pcwod
00 PCWOS = pcwod
00 (d) SW = swro
00 KRW = krwro
00 KROW = 0.0
00 PCWO = pcworo
00 PCWOS = pcworos
00 (e) SW = swmx
00 KRW = krwmx
00 KROW = 0.0
00 PCWO = pcwomn
00 PCWOS = pcworos
For PCWO, if only the values pcwocw and pcwomn are read and the
capillary pressure entries between these two values are left blank, the
program linearly interpolates between these two values to complete the
table entries. 00
When vertical flow potential is negligible, reservoir flow is ‘segregated’.

Here the relative permeability function depends only on the endpoints of
the rock curves and the initial fluid distribution. Water-oil and gas-oil
pseudo-relative permeabilities consistent with segregated flow are
calculated by the simulation module. VE water-oil tables require only
three entries, for water saturations of swr, swro and swmx. 00
4-160 Landmark - R2003.4

Example: 00
00 C
C SATURATION DEPENDENT TABLES
C
C
SWT 1
SW KRW KROW PCWO
.05000 0.00000 1.00000 56.30945
.32500 .00005 .64416 39.83473
.36250 .00071 .50332 32.91141
.40000 .00292 .38467 26.80040
.43750 .00758 .29631 21.45391
.47500 .01563 .20633 16.82418
.51250 .02798 .14283 12.86340
.55000 .04555 .09391 9.52381
.58750 .06928 .05768 6.75761
.62500 .10008 .03221 4.51702
.66250 .13888 .01563 2.75426
.70000 .18659 .00601 1.42156
.73750 .24414 .00147 .47111
.77500 .31245 .00009 .17500
.81250 .39245 0.00000 .13750
.85000 .48506 0.00000 .10000
.88750 .59119 0.00000 .06250
.92500 .71178 0.00000 0.02500
1.0000 1.00000 0.00000 0.00000
C
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-161

00 Example:
00 C
C SATURATION DEPENDENT TABLES WITH HYSTERESIS
C
00 C
SWT 1
SW KRW KROW PCWO PCWOS
.25000 0.00000 1.0000 56.30945
.32500 .00005 .64416 39.83473
.36250 .00071 .50332 32.91141
.40000 .00292 .38467 26.80040
.43750 .00758 .28631 21.45391
.47500 .01563 .20633 16.82418
.51250 .02798 .14283 12.86340
.55000 .04555 .09391 9.52381
.58750 .06928 .05768 6.75761
.62500 .10008 .03221 4.51702 4.51702
.66250 .13888 .01563 2.75426 2.0
.70000 .18659 .00601 1.42156 -1.0
.73750 .24414 .00147 .47111 -3.0
.77500 .31245 .00009 .17500 -8.5
.81250 .39245 0.00000 .13750 -15.0
.85000 .48506 0.00000 .10000 -15.0
.88750 .59119 0.00000 .06250 -15.0
.92500 .71178 0.00000 0.00000 -15.0
4-162 Landmark - R2003.4

4.3.1.2 Gas-Oil Saturation for the Matrix (SGT)
00 Do not use these tables with the WATEROIL option (Section 2.2.6.2).
Gas saturation tables define the rock properties that depend on gas
saturation: relative permeability of gas, relative permeability of oil in the
presence of gas, and gas-oil capillary pressure. The rock properties defined
with the GASWATER option (Section 2.2.6.1) are: relative permeability of
gas; relative permeability of water in the presence of gas; and gas-water
capillary pressure. 00
(1) SGT nsgt

(2) SG KRG KROG PCGO (PCGOS)
(3a) sgmn 0.0 krocw pcgomn (pcgomns)
. . . .
(3b) sgc 0.0 krocg pcgocg pcgocgs
. . . .
(3c) (sgd) (krgd) (krogd) (pcgod) (pcgod)
. . . .
(3d) sgro krgro 0.0 pcgoro
. . . .
(3e) sgmx krgmx 0.0 pcgomx
GASWATER Option 00
SGT nsgt
SG KRG KRWG PCGW
0.0 0.0 1.0 pcgwmn
. . . .
sgc 0.0 krwgc .
. . . .
. . . .
sgcw krgcw 0.0 pcgwcw
Definitions: 00
00 (1) SGT Alpha label indicating that a gas saturation table is

being read.
nsgt The table number (rock type). This number

5.13.1).
SG Gas saturation as a fraction of total pore volume.

R2003.4 - Landmark 4-163

KRG Relative permeability of gas (in a gas-oil or gas-

water, Section 2.2.6.1, system with connate water) at
a given gas saturation. Values must increase with
gas saturation.
KROG Relative permeability of oil in the presence of gas

(at irreducible water saturation) at a given gas
saturation. Values must decrease with increasing
gas saturation. If this is an imbibition table, krog
must be less than or equal to the corresponding
drainage curve value.
KRWG Relative permeability of water in the presence of

gas at a given gas saturation. Values must decrease
with increasing gas saturation.
PCGO Gas-oil capillary pressure, psia (kPa). Values must

increase with increasing gas saturation unless all
values are equal. If this is an imbibition table, pcgo
must be less than or equal to the corresponding
secondary drainage curve value. Here, pcgo = pg -
po.
PCGOS Gas-oil capillary pressure for a secondary drainage

process (on drainage tables in hysteresis cases), psia
(kPa). Values must increase with increasing gas
saturation and must be less than or equal to the
primary drainage curve values. Here, pcgo = pg -
po. Values for sg > sgd should be omitted, causing
pcgos for the saturation entry to be set equal to
pcgo.
PCGW Gas-water capillary pressure, psia (kPa). Values

must increase with increasing gas saturation unless
all values are equal. pcgw = pg - pw.
00 (3) Data cards A minimum of four data cards, including each of

the types (a), (b), (d), and (e), is required for each
gas saturation table. The first data card must be
type (a), while the last must be type (e). See Figure
4-3. For the GASWATER option, a minimum of
three data cards (gas saturations of 0.0, sgc, and
sgcw) is required for each table.
00 (a) SG = sgmn
00 KRG = 0.0
00 KROG = krocw (from data card (a) in the

water saturation table).
4-164 Landmark - R2003.4

00 PCGO = pcgomn (minimum gas-oil

capillary pressure at SG = 0).
00 PCGOS = pcgomns
00 (b) SG = sgc
00 KRG = 0.0
00 KROG = krocg
00 PCGO = pcgocg
00 PCGOS = pcgocgs
00 (c) SG = sgd
00 KRG = krgd
00 KROG = krogd
00 PCGO = pcgod
00 PCGOS = pcgod
00 (d) SG = sgro (gas saturation at which oil

becomes immobile, one minus
the connate water saturation
minus residual oil saturation to
gas).
00 KRG = krgro (KRG at sgro).
00 KROG = 0.0
00 PCGO = pcgoro
00 (e) SG = sgmx
00 KRG = krgmx
00 KROG = 0.0
00 PCGO = pcgomx
For PCGO, if only the values pcgomn and pcgomx are read and the
capillary pressure entries between these two values are left blank, the
program linearly interpolates between these two values to complete the
table entries. If capillary pressure hysteresis is selected, secondary gas-oil
capillary pressure must also be defined. 00
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-165

When vertical flow potential is negligible, reservoir flow is ’segregated’.

calculated by the simulation module. VE gas-oil tables require four
entries: Sgmn, Sgr, Sgro, and Sgcw. Critical gas saturation is ignored in
the calculation of gas-oil VE relative permeabilities. Hence the gas relative
permeability is a straight line between zero at sgmn and krgro at sgro as
the gas cap size is increasing. The entry at Sgr is used to define a residual
gas saturation and oil relative permeability krogr for use when the gas cap
size is decreasing. 00
00 Examples:
00 C
C GAS SATURATION FUNCTIONS - DRAINAGE
C NOTE: ENTRIES OMITTED IN THE PCGOS COLUMN
C WILL HAVE VALUES SET TO PCGO AT THAT
C GAS SATURATION.
C
SGT 1
SG KRG KROG PCGO PCGOS
0. 0. 1. 0. 0.
.03 .007 .91 .21 0.
.10 .04 .77 .30 0.
00 .20 .075 .57 .34 0.

.30 .18 .42 .40 0.
.32 .206 .402 .43 0.25
.36 .258 .366 .49 0.40
.40 .31 .33 .55 0.55
.50 .46 .20 .78
.60 .64 .11 1.00
.70 .825 .04 1.80
.75 .92 0. 17.00
.78 1. 0. 150.00
C
C GAS SATURATION FUNCTIONS - IMBIBITION
C
C
SGT 2
C
SG KRG KROG PCGO
0. 0. 1. 0.
.03 0. .91 0.
.10 0. .77 0.
.20 0. .57 0.
.30 0. .4 0.
.40 .095 .33 .04
.50 .269 .20 .09
4-166 Landmark - R2003.4

.60 .494 .11 .25

.70 .761 .04 .73
.75 .908 0. 1.70
.78 1. 0. 150.00
00 C
C GAS WATER OPTION
C
SGT 1
SG KRG KRWG PCGW
0.0 0.0 1.0 0.0
0.05 0.0 0.92
0.1 0.0 0.83
0.2 0.1 0.650
0.3 0.2 0.430
0.4 0.37 0.250
0.5 0.45 0.110
0.6 0.57 0.032
0.7 0.75 0.006
0.75 0.85 0.00 4.0
4.3.1.3 Gas-Dependent Water Relative Permeability for the Matrix

(SGWT)
SGWT nsgwt
SG KRWG
0.0 1.0
. .
sgrw 0.0
. .
1.0 0.0
00 Definitions:
SGWT Alpha label indicating that a gas dependent water

relative permeability table is being read.
nsgwt The table number (rock type). This number

corresponds to the values in the ISAT array.
00 The values on the data cards following this title card must appear in the
order shown.
KRWG Relative permeability of water in a water-gas

system at the given gas saturation (zero oil
saturation).
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-167

A minimum of three data cards, for gas saturations of 0.0, sgrw and 1.0 are
required for each table. SG must increase and the KRWG must be
monotonically decreasing. 00
sgrw gas saturation at which water becomes immobile.
The two-curve option for water relative permeability is invoked simply by

entering "SGWT" tables in the initialization input data set. This table
should follow the gas saturation (SGT) table. 00
The keywords "STONE1", "STONE2", and "KROINT" are used to invoke

Stone’s model I, Stone’s model II, and Saturation Weighted Interpolation,
respectively, for calculation of three phase oil relative permeability. If the
SGWT option is selected, both the oil and water 3-phase relative
permeabilities will be calculated based on the same selected model.
Otherwise, only the oil relative permeability will be calculated from the
selected model. 00
4.3.1.4 Water-Oil Saturation for the Fracture (SWTF)
When the DUAL option is invoked the user must specify fracture
saturation tables in addition to the matrix saturation tables. The water
saturation tables for the fracture must follow the normal (matrix) gas
saturation tables. These tables define the rock properties that depend on
water saturation in the fractures: relative permeability of water, relative
permeability of oil in the presence of water, and water-oil capillary
pressure. 00
SWTF nswtf
(SWMNI swmni)
SW KRW KROW PCWO
swc 0.0 krocw pcwocw
. . . .
swr 0.0 krorw .
. . . .
swro krwro 0.0 .
. . . .
swmx krwmx 0.0 pcwomn
00 Definition:
SWTF Alpha label indicating that a water saturation table

for the fracture is being read.
nswtf The table number (rock type). This number

corresponds to the values in the ISATF array
(Section 5.13.3).
SWMNI Alpha label indicating that the following entry on

4-168 Landmark - R2003.4



value is swc.
00 All other definitions are as given in Section 4.2.1, WATER Saturation

Tables for the Matrix.
00 Example:
00 SWTF 1
SW KRW KROW PCWO
0. 0. 1. 0.
.5 .5 .5 0.
1. 1. 0. 0.
4.3.1.5 Gas-Oil Saturation for the Fracture (SGTF)
When the DUAL option is invoked the user must specify fracture gas
saturation tables. These must follow the fracture water saturation tables.
These tables define the rock properties that depend on gas saturation in
the fractures: relative permeability of gas, relative permeability of oil in
the presence of gas, and gas-oil capillary pressure. 00
SGTF nsgtf
SG KRG KROG PCGO
0.0 0.0 krocw pcgomn
. . . .
sgc 0.0 krocg .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
sgro krgro 0.0 .
. . . .
sgmx krgmx 0.0 pcgomx
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-169

00 Definitions:
SGTF Alpha label indicating that a gas saturation table for

the fracture is being read.
nsgtf The table number (rock type). This number

corresponds to the values in the ISATF array
(Section 5.13.3).
All other definitions are as given in Section 4.3.1.2, Gas Saturation Tables
for the Matrix. 00
00 Examples:
00 SGTF 1
SG KRG KROG PCGO
0. 0. 1. 0.
.5 .5 .5 0.
.9999 .999 0. 0.
1. 1. 0. 0.
4.3.1.6 Gas-Dependent Water Relative Permeability for the Fracture

(SGWTF)
SGWTF nsgwtf
SG KRWG
0.0 1.0
. .
sgrw 0.0
. .
1.0 0.0
00 Definitions:
SGWTF Alpha label indicating that a gas dependent water

relative permeability table for the fracture is being
read.
nsgwt The table number (rock type). This number

corresponds to the values in the ISATF array.
All other definitions are as given in Section 4.3.1.3, Gas-Dependent Water

Relative Permeability for the Matrix. 00
4-170 Landmark - R2003.4

4.3.1.7 Oil Phase Hysteresis Option (SOTR) (Not available in VIP-

THERM)
To invoke the oil hysteresis option, the SOTR card must be inserted in the
water-oil saturation table as shown, unless user defined tables are entered
for imbibition functions. All other water saturation data (table entries) are
unchanged. 00
SWT nswt
(SWMNI swmni)
SOTR sotr
SW KRW KROW PCWO PCWOS
swc 0.0 krocw pcwocw
. . . . .
swr 0.0 krorw pcworw
. . . . .
(swd) (krwd) (krowd)(pcwod)(pcwod)
. . . . .
swro krwro 0.0 pcworo pcworos
. . . . .
swmx krwmx 0.0 pcwomn pcworos
00 Definitions:
SWMNI Alpha label indicating that the following entry on


value is swc.
00
SOTR Alpha label indicating that the value to follow is the

maximum allowed trapped oil saturation for this
table.
sotr Maximum trapped oil saturation. Must be greater

than sorw.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-171

Hysteresis in oil relative permeability can be modeled in VIP-EXECUTIVE

using any of the methods described on the RPHYSO card (LINEAR by
default). A family of imbibition oil relative permeability curves is
constructed from the user-specified drainage curve and the user-specified
maximum trapped oil saturation, SOTR. The endpoints of a typical
intermediate imbibition curve are the historical maximum oil saturation,
Somax, and the corresponding trapped oil saturation, Sotr. The historical
maximum oil saturation is tracked for each gridblock. In general, each
gridblock may follow its own imbibition curve. Trapped oil saturation is
calculated from Somax by using Land’s formula (Reference 6). 00
00 Sotr = Somax / [ 1 + (C * Somax) ],
00 where C is Land’s constant C, given by:
00 C = [ (1 -Swc) -Sotr] / [ Sotr * (1 -Swc) ]
Carlson’s approach assumes the imbibition oil relative permeability is

equal to the drainage oil relative permeability evaluated at the ’free’ or
continuous oil saturation, Sodr: 00
00 krowi(1-So) = krowd(1-Sodr),
00 where the free oil saturation, Sodr, is defined as
00 Sodr = 1/2[(So-Sotr) + [(So-Sotr)**2 + 4*C*(So-Sotr)]**1/2]
4-172 Landmark - R2003.4

4.3.1.8 Gas Phase Hysteresis Option (SGTR) (Not available in VIP-

THERM)
To invoke the gas hysteresis option, the SGTR card must be inserted in the
gas saturation table as shown unless user defined tables are entered for
imbibition functions. All other gas saturation data (table entries) are
unchanged. 00
SGT nsgt
SGTR sgtr
SG KRG KROG PCGO (PCGOS)
sgmn 0.0 krocw pcgomn (pcgomns)
. . . . .
sgc 0.0 krocg pcgocg pcgocgs
. . . . .
(sgd) (krgd) (krogd) (pcgod) (pcgod)
. . . . .
sgro krgro 0.0 pcgoro .
. . . . .
sgmx krgmx 0.0 pcgomx .
00 GASWATER Option
SGT nsgt
SGTR sgtr
SG KRG KRWG PCGW
0.0 0.0 1.0 pcgwmn
. . . .
sgc 0.0 krwgc .
. . . .
. . . .
sgcw krgcw 0.0 pcgwcw
00 Definitions:
SGTR Alpha label indicating that the value to follow is the

maximum trapped gas saturation for this table.
sgtr Maximum trapped gas saturation. Must be greater

than sgc.
Hysteresis in gas relative permeability can be modeled in VIP-

EXECUTIVE using any of the methods described on the RPHYSG card
(LINEAR by default). A family of imbibition gas relative permeability
curves is constructed from the user-specified drainage curve and the user-
specified maximum trapped gas saturation, SGTR. The endpoints of a
typical intermediate imbibition curve are the historical maximum gas
saturation, Sgmax, and the corresponding trapped gas saturation, Sgtr.
The historical maximum gas saturation is tracked for each gridblock. In
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-173

general, each gridblock may follow its own imbibition curve. Trapped gas
saturation is calculated from Sgmax by using Land’s formula (Reference
6). 00
S gmax * C VIP
S gtr = -------------------------------
S gmax + C VIP
where CVIP is the reciprocal of Land’s constant, C,
SGTR * (1 – S wc )
C VIP = -------------------------------------------
( 1 – S wc ) – SGTR
Drainage and imbibition relative permeability curves and the endpoints

described above are shown in Figure 4-4.
krg
Sg
D
krg
I
krg
0 Sgc Sgc Sg 1-Swc 1

tr tr
Figure 4-4: Drainage and Imbibition krg from Carlson’s Model
Carlson’s approach assumes the imbibition gas relative permeability is

equal to the drainage gas relative permeability evaluated at the "free" or
continuous gas saturation, Sgdr: 00
k rg ( S g ) = k rg ( S gdr ) ,
l D
where the free gas phase saturation, Sgdr, is defined as
1
--
1 2 2
S gdr = -- ( S g – S gtr ) + [ ( S g – S gtr ) + 4C VIP ( S g – S gtr ) ]
2
4-174 Landmark - R2003.4

00 Example:
00 C
C GASWATER OPTION
C
SGT 1
SGTR 0.25
SG KRG KRWG PCGW
0.0 0.0 1.0 0.0
0.5 0.0 0.92
0.1 0.0 0.83
0.2 0.1 0.650
0.3 0.2 0.430
0.4 0.37 0.250
0.5 0.45 0.110
0.6 0.57 0.032
0.7 0.75 0.006
0.75 0.85 0.00 4.0
4.3.1.9 Gas Remobilization Option (GASRM) (Not available in VIP-

THERM)
The gas remobilization option models the remobilization of trapped gas

resulting from gas expansion during pressure blowdown. The following
input data specifies the secondary drainage curve for remobilized gas in
gridblocks subject to remobilization calculation. These data may not
appear before any SGT table input. The gas remobilization option may not
be invoked if the gas relative permeability hysteresis option is not
invoked. 00
(1) GASRM ngasrm

(2) SGTR SGRM KRGMAX
(3a) sgtr1 sgrm1 krgmax1
. . .
(3b) sgtrn sgrmn krgmaxn
00 Tabular Form:
(4) GASRMT
(5) SG KRG
(6a) sgrmi 0.
. .
(6b) sgmx krgmx
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-175

00 Analytical Function:
(4) C1 C2 C3
(5) c1 c2 c3
00 Definitions:
00 (1) GASRM Alpha label indicating that a gas remobilization

table is being read.
ngasrm The table number (rock type). This number

5.13.1). If data for any saturation table (other than
saturation table 1) are not entered, they will be
defaulted to the table 1 values.
SGTR Trapped gas saturation as a fraction of total pore

volume. Values must increase consecutively.
SGRM Gas saturation at which the trapped gas becomes

mobile during gas expansion.
KRGMAX Maximum relative permeability to remobilized gas

at the maximum gas saturation (sgmx) in the SGT
table.
00 (3) Data cards A minimum of two data cards is required for each
saturation table.
00 Secondary drainage curve can be specified either in a tabular form or

as an analytic function.
00 Tabular Form:
00 (4) GASRMT Alpha label indicating that a tabular secondary

drainage curve is being read.

KRG Secondary drainage relative permeability to gas at a

given gas saturation. Values must increase with gas
saturation.
4-176 Landmark - R2003.4

00 (6) Data cards A minimum of two data cards, including each of the
types (a) and (b), is required for each saturation
table. The first data card must be type (a), while the
last must be type (b).
(a) SG = sgrmi
KRG = 0.0
(b) SG = sgmx (from data card 3(e) in the

gas saturation table).
KRG = krgmx
00 Analytic Function:
00 (4) The values on the data card following this title card appear in the
C1 Parameter C1 in the analytic secondary drainage

relative permeability function.


00 (5) Data card Input c1, c2, and c3 are values of C1, C2, and C3.
00 Note:
Using the tabular form, the secondary drainage relative permeability

is calculated using the standard two-point endpoint scaling method:
K rgmax, m o
K rg ( S g ) = ------------------------K rg2d, r ( S g )
krgmx
00 where
o ( sgmx – sgrmi )
S g = sgrmi + ( S g – S grm, m ) ------------------------------------------------
( S gma, m – S grm, m )
00 Here Sgma,m is the gridblock maximum gas saturation in the SGT table.
Symbols Sgrm,m and Krgmax,m are gridblock sgrm and krgmax values
determined from the table lookup of cards (2) and (3) above. The input
sgtr for the table lookup is the gridblock trapped gas saturation
corresponding to the historic maximum gas saturation.
00 Using the analytic function, the secondary drainage Krg is determined
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-177

by
C
( 1 + C 2 )S g11
00 K rg ( S g ) = K rgmax, m ----------------------------
C3
-
1 + C 2 S g1
00 where
S g – S grm, m
S g1 ≡ -------------------------------------------
S gma, m – S grm, m
00 The output of the input tables and the reconstructed tables may be
requested through keywords SGT and RSGT in the PRINT card.
00 Example:
C
C Gas Remobilization Option Input
C
GASRM 1
SGTR SGRM KRGMAX
0.05 0.10 0.9
0.10 0.15 0.85
0.17 0.23 0.81
0.24 0.30 0.75
0.33 0.40 0.7
0.4 0.48 0.6
0.5 0.6 0.5
GASRMT
SG KRG
0.21 0.0
0.30 0.02
0.43 0.10
0.55 0.20
0.66 0.33
0.77 0.5
0.985 0.65
C
GASRM 2
SGTR SGRM KRGMAX
0.05 0.10 0.9
0.10 0.15 0.85
0.17 0.23 0.81
0.25 0.31 0.74
0.33 0.40 0.7
0.4 0.48 0.6
0.5 0.6 0.5
GASRMT
SG KRG
4-178 Landmark - R2003.4

0.21 0.0
0.30 0.02
0.43 0.10
0.55 0.20
0.66 0.33
0.78 0.51
0.9 0.65
4.3.1.10 Normalized Saturation-Dependent Functions
Often the shape of the relative permeability and capillary pressure curves
are similar for several core samples even though the endpoints are not the
same. VIP-CORE allows the user to model spatial differences in connate
water and critical gas saturations with a single set of generic relative
permeability and capillary pressure curves. 00
VIP-CORE accepts generic saturation-dependent data as unnormalized

entries that the program automatically normalizes using the endpoint
arrays as described in Section 5.32. For multiple tables, the format may
vary from table to table. Generic saturation-dependent data can be defined
in one table while specific saturation-dependent data is entered in another
table. 00
4.3.1.11 Vertical Equilibrium Pseudo-Relative Permeabilities
When vertical flow potential is negligible, reservoir flow is "segregated".

calculated by the simulation module. 00
Water-Oil Tables (SWT) 00
00 VE water-oil tables require only three entries: Swc, 1-Sor, and 1.
SWT nswt
SW KRW KROW PCWO
swc 0.0 krocw 0.0
1-sor krwro 0.0 .
1.0 1.0 0.0 0.0
00 Definitions:
The definitions in Section 4.3.1.1 apply, except only the three data
cards shown are entered.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-179

Gas-Oil Tables (SGT) 00
00 VE gas-oil tables require four entries: 0, Sgr, Sgro, and Sgcw.
SGT nsgt
SG KRG KROG PCGO
0.0 0.0 krocw 0.0
sgr 0.0 krogr .
sgro krgro 0.0 .
sgcw krgcw 0.0 0.0
00 Definitions:
The definitions in Section 4.3.1.1 apply, except only the four data cards
shown are entered. 00
sgr The residual gas saturation.
krogr krog at sgr.
NOTE: Critical gas saturation is ignored in the calculation of gas-oil VE

relative permeabilities. Hence the gas relative permeability is a
straight line between zero at Sg = 0 and krgro at Sg = Sgro as the
gas cap size is increasing. The entry at Sgr is used to define a
residual gas saturation and oil relative permeability krogr for use
when the gas cap size is decreasing.
4.3.2 Saturation-Dependent Functions (VIP-THERM)

Two-phase relative permeability and capillary pressure data may be
described using the following analytic functions:
ew
 Sw – Swir 
krw = krwro  ----------------------------------------------
 
 1 – Sorw – Swir 
eow
 1 – Sorw – Sw 
krow = krocw  --------------------------------------------
 
 1 – Sorw – Swc 
eg
 Sg – Sgc 
krg = krgro  ----------------------------------------------------------
 
 1 – Swc – Sorg – Sgc 
4-180 Landmark - R2003.4

eog
 1 – Swc – Sorg – Sg 
krog = krocw  -------------------------------------------------------
 
 1 – Swc – Sorg 
3
Pcwo = Po – Pw = – ( Pcw1 + Pcw2 ( 1 – Sw ) + Pcw3 ( 1 – Sw ) ) ⋅ ( 1 – Pcw4 ( T – Tini ) )
3
Pcgo = Pg – Po = ( Pcg1 + Pcg2 Sg + Pcg3 Sg ) ⋅ ( 1 – Pcg4 ( T – Tini ) )
where
Sw = water saturation
Sg = gas saturation
Swir = irreducible water saturation
Sorw = residual oil saturation to water
Swc = connate water saturation
Sgc = critical gas saturation
Sorg = residual oil saturation to gas
e* = relative permeability exponents
krwro = water relative permeability at residual oil (to

water)
krocw = oil relative permeability at connate water

saturation
krgro = gas relative permeability at residual oil (to gas

at connate water saturation)
krw = water relative permeability
krow = oil relative permeability to water (2-phase)
krg = gas relative permeabilty.
krog = oil relative permeability to gas (2-phase)
Pcwo = water-oil capillary pressure (Po - Pw)
Pcgo = gas-oil capillary pressure (Pg - Po)
Pcwn = water-oil Pc coefficients, n=1,4.
Pcgn = gas-oil Pc coefficients, n=1,4.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-181

T = temperature
Tini = initial temperature
(1) Title Card:SDFUNC isat

(2) Title Card:EW EOW EG EOG
(3) Data Card: ew eow eg eog
SWRO SGRO
(4) Title Card:(SWIR) SWC SGC KRWRO KROCW KRGRO
SORW SORG
swro sgro
(5) Data Card: (swir) swc sgc krwro krocw krgro
sorw sorg
(6) Title Card:(PCWO1 PCWO2 PCWO3 PCWO4)

(7) Data Card: (pcwo1 pcwo2 pcwo3 pcwo4)
(8) Title Card:(PCGO1 PCGO2 PCGO3 PCGO4)
(9) Data Card: (pcgo1 pcgo2 pcgo3 pcgo4)
Definitions:
isat Rock type number.
Swro 1 - Sorw, water saturation at which oil becomes

immobile.
Sgro 1 - Swc - Sorg, gas saturation at which oil becomes

immobile (in presence of connate water).
NOTE: 1. The cards must appear in the order shown.
2. The order of the entries on cards 2 through 5 are arbitrary.
3. SWIR is optional. The default is Swir = Swc.
4. The capillary pressure data is optional (cards 6, 7, 8 and 9). The

default is Pc = 0.
4-182 Landmark - R2003.4

4.3.3 Temperature-Dependent Endpoints (VIP-THERM)

Temperature variations in all endpoints may be specified for each set of
saturation-dependent data. Any spatial variations in endpoints (Section
5.32) are ignored for blocks which are assigned to rock types with
temperature-dependent endpoints. Only those endpoints which are
temperature-dependent need be specified. Default values are the constant
values in the corresponding set of saturation-dependent data.
TENDPT isat
TEMP t1 t2 t3 ...
SWIR swir1 swir2 swir3 ...
SWC swc1 swc2 swc3 ...
SWRO swro1 swro2 swro3 ...
SORW sorw1 sorw2 sorw3 ...
SGR sgr1 sgr2 sgr3 ...
SGRO sgro1 sgro2 sgro3 ...
SORG sorg1 sorg2 sorg3 ...
KRWRO krwro1 krwro2 krwro3 ...
KROCW krocw1 krocw2 krocw3 ...
KRGRO krgro1 krgro2 krgro3 ...
Definitions:
isat Rock type number.
TEMP Alpha label indicating that the following entries on

this line are the table temperature values.
ti Table temperature values, ˚F (˚C).
SWIR Alpha label indicating that the following entries on

this line are values of irreducible water saturation.
Used only in saturation-dependent functions
option.
swir Values of irreducible water saturation.
SWC Alpha label indicating that the following entries on

this line are: tables option - irreducible water
saturation; functions option - connate water
saturation.
swc Values for above definition.
SWRO Alpha label indicating that the following entries on

this line are values of water saturation at residual
oil, SWRO = 1-SORW.
swro Values of water saturation at residual oil.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-183

SORW Alpha label indicating that the following entries on

this line are values of residual oil saturation to
water.
sorw Values of residual oil saturation to water.
SGR Alpha label indicating that the following entries on

this line are values of critical gas saturation.
sgr Values of critical gas saturation.
SGRO Alpha label indicating that the following entries on

this line are values of gas saturation at residual oil.
sgro Values of gas saturation at residual oil.
SORG Alpha label indicating that the following entries on

this line are values of residual oil saturation to gas.
sorg Values of residual oil saturation to gas.
KRWRO Alpha label indicating that the following entries on

this line are values of water relative permeability at
residual oil saturation.
krwro Values of water relative permeability at residual oil

saturation.
KROCW Alpha label indicating that the following entries on

this line are values of oil relative permeability at
connate water saturation.
krocw Values of oil relative permeability at connate water

saturation.
KRGRO Alpha label indicating the the following entries on

this line are values of gas relative permeability at
residual oil saturation.
krgro Values of gas relative permeability at residual oil

saturation.
NOTE: When using the saturation-dependent functions option, capillary

pressures are unaffected by endpoint variations, whereas they are
in the tables option.
4-184 Landmark - R2003.4

4.3.4 Water-Oil Hysteresis (Reference 32) (VIP-THERM)
NOTE: Related data - ISATI (Section 5.13.2), KWHYS, and KOHYS

(Section 5.45) arrays and NOHYSW card (Simulation Module
Reference Manual Section 3.2.2)
The treatment of hysteresis is restricted to water and oil relative

permeabilities for the two-phase water-oil system. Three phase oil relative
permeabilities are computed using the hysteretic water-oil value and the
non-hysteretic gas-oil value in one of the two Stone models. The treatment
is further restricted to imbibition and drainage curves with common
endpoints, as shown in Figures 4-5 to 4-8.
imbibition
krw
drainage
Swr Swro
Figure 4-5: Hysteretic Water Relative Permeability Bounding Curves for a

Water-wet System.
drainage
krow
imbibition
Swr Swro
Figure 4-6: Hysteretic Oil Relative Permeability Bounding Curves for a Water-
wet System.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-185

drainage
krw
imbibition
Swr Swro
Figure 4-7: Hysteretic Water Relative Permeability Bounding Curves for an Oil-
wet System.
imbibition
krow
drainage
Swr Swro
Figure 4-8: Hysteretic Oil Relative Permeability Boundary Curves for an Oil-
wet System.
For a water-wet system, the ISAT array (Section 5.13.1) is used to assign
the drainage curves, and the ISATI array (Section 5.13.2) is used to assign
the imbibition curves. The definitions of ISAT and ISATI are reversed for
an oil-wet system. In other words, the ISAT array defines the bounding
curves for decreasing water saturation and the ISATI array defines the
bounding curves for increasing water saturation. Table ISATI is used for
krw and krow for water saturations less than Swr or greater than Swro
and for krg, krog, and all capillary pressures.
Hysteretic relative permeabilities are computed using the method of

Beattie, Boberg, and McNab (Reference 32), for which the scanning curve
equations are:
4-186 Landmark - R2003.4

For Sw increasing:
Sw – Swr ewi
1 – --------------------------------
Swro – Swr
krw = krwi – Kwrev ( krwi – krwd ) --------------------------------------------
Swrev – Swr
1 – -----------------------------------
Swro – Swr
Sw – Swr eoi
1 – --------------------------------
Swro – Swr
krow = krowi + Korev ( krowd – krowi ) --------------------------------------------
Swrev – Swr
1 – -----------------------------------
Swro – Swr
For Sw decreasing:
Sw – Swr ewd
--------------------------------
Swro – Swr
krw = krwd + ( 1 – Kwrev ) ( krwi – krwd ) -----------------------------------
Swrev – Swr
-----------------------------------
Swro – Swr
Sw – Swr eod
--------------------------------
Swro – Swr
krowd – ( 1 – Korev ) ( krowd – krowi ) -----------------------------------
Swrev – Swr
-----------------------------------
Swro – Swr
where
ewi, eoi, ewd, eod = scanning curve exponents
krwi – krw
kwrev = ---------------------------------- at Swrev
krwi – krwd
krow – krowi
korev = ------------------------------------------ at Swrev
krowd – krowi
Swrev = Water Saturation at last reversal
i = values from Table ISATI (imbibition for water-

wet, drainage for oil-wet)
d = values from Table ISAT (drainage for water-wet,

imbibition for oil-wet).
By default, Kwrev and Korev are initialized to 1.0 (to drainage curves for
water wet, to imbibition curves for oil-wet). If water saturation is at or
below Swr initially or if water saturation decreases to Swr or below during
simulation, kwrev and korev are reset to 0.0 in order to follow the
imbibition curves (water-wet) or drainage curves (oil-wet) when water
saturation increases. Similar logic applies to the endpoint at Swro. Kwrev
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-187

and Korev can be specified with the KWHYS and KOHYS arrays (Sections
5.45.1 and 5.45.2) to initialize to either bounding curve or a scanning
curve.
HYSWO EWI EWD EOI EOD

ewi ewd eoi eod
NOTE: By default, relative permeabilities appearing in the production/

injection equations for each perforation are set equal to those in the
gridblock containing the perforation. Hysteretic tables differing
from gridblock values may not be assigned to perforations. Non-
hysteretic relative permeability tables may be assigned to
perforations using the ISAT label in the FPERF data (VIP-
EXECUTIVE Section 3.2.2) only if a NOHYSW card (VIP-
EXECUTIVE Section 3.2.2) appears previous to the FPERF card in
the recurrent data.
4.4 Equation of State PVT Property Data (VIP-COMP or VIP-

THERM)
The PVT properties of both vapors and liquids are predicted in VIP-
COMP, and optionally in VIP-THERM, by means of a cubic equation of
state. Available equations of state include Redlich-Kwong (RK), Soave-
Redlich-Kwong (SRK), Zudkevitch-Joffe-Redlich-Kwong (ZJRK), and
Peng-Robinson (PR), each with optional density correction (3 parameter).
In VIP-THERM, the hydrocarbon system may alternatively be
characterized as a single component non-volatile “dead” oil as described
in Section 4.7. 00
In order to completely define fluid properties it is necessary only to define

fluid composition and various properties of individual components. The
individual components may be pure components, but frequently they are
themselves mixtures. For example, isobutane i-C4 and normal butane n-C4
may be treated together simply as C4. 00
Heavy fractions are normally grouped together over a reasonably wide

range of molecular weights. For example, C16 - C20 may be grouped
together as a single component that is designated as C18. 00
The properties of a large number of components have been internally

coded, so they are automatically assigned unless the user elects to
override the default. For light components the internal values usually
represent pure component properties, but for heavier fractions the internal
values have been adjusted to produce improved results for naturally
occurring oils and gases at reservoir conditions. 00
4-188 Landmark - R2003.4

Table 4-1 and 4-2 summarize the internally coded properties for all
components that can be automatically determined. Using one of the
component identification codes contained in these tables as data in the
"COMPONENTS" input data will cause the tabulated values to be loaded
as data. Unless these values are overridden by the user in the
"PROPERTIES" data section, they will be used by default. 00
Initial reservoir temperature may be specified in one or more of three

ways: 00
1. Specified as a constant value (Section 2.2.4). This value is always

required.
2. Specified as a function of depth in the COMPOSITION data (Section

4.4.12.3), overriding option 1.
3. Specified by gridblock as the TEMP array (Section 5.18), overriding

options 1 and 2.
4.4.1 Reservoir Equation of State (EOS)

00 This card should be used only with VIP-COMP or VIP-THERM.
The equation of state to be used for PVT properties for reservoir

calculations is specified on the EOS data card. 00
The additional data required for three parameter EOS treatment

(Reference 26 and 27), is input by supplying VSHFT data as a part of the
PROPERTIES data. 00
PR
PRORIG
EOS RK (ipvt)
SRK
ZJRK
00 Definitions:
PR Modified Peng-Robinson equation of state.

(Reference 41)
PRORIG Original version of Peng-Robinson equation of

state. (Reference 22)
RK Redlich-Kwong equation of state. (Reference 23)
SRK Soave-Redlich-Kwong equation of state. (Reference

24)
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-189

ZJRK Zudkevitch-Joffe extension to the Redlich-Kwong

equation of state. (References 29 and 30)
ipvt PVT table number.
NOTE: 1. The Zudkevitch-Joffe equation (ZJRK) is not available in VIP-

THERM.
2. The modified (PR) or the original (PRORIG) equations must be

used in VIP-THERM unless the WATIDEAL option (Section
2.2.19.2) is selected.
3. Only one EOS table is allowed for VIP-THERM.
4. If only a single equation of state is used for all calculations, the

ipvt parameter may be omitted. If multiple equations of state are
utilized, the table numbers must consecutively increase.
00 Example:
00 C*********************************************
EOS PR 1
COMPONENTS
CO2 N2 C1 C2 C3 IC4 NC4 IC5 NC5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10
C11 C14P C20P C27P C36P
C
4-190 Landmark - R2003.4

4.4.2 Component Names (COMPONENTS)

The alphanumeric labels that will be used to identify the components are
defined here. If any of the component names contained in either Table 4-1
or Table 4-2 are used, the properties data will be picked from the tables,
subject to user override. If unrecognized labels are used, the user must
directly specify all of the properties data. 00
For multiple equation of state tables, the component names need only be
entered for the first table. Component names may also be entered for
subsequent tables, but the names must be the same as those entered for
the first table. 00
COMPONENTS
cmp1 cmp2 . . . cmpnc
00 Definition:
cmp Component name. An alphanumeric label

containing up to 6 characters. Using a name
contained in either Table 4-1 or Table 4-2 will cause
the tabulated properties to be automatically loaded.
00 Example:
00 C*********************************************
EOS PR
COMPONENTS
C11P C14P C20P C27P C36P
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-191

4.4.3 Component Characteristics (PROPERTIES)

Properties data are entered to define the PVT characteristics of individual

components in EOS cases. These are combined by appropriate mixing
rules and used with the equation of state to determine the properties of
mixtures. 00
Default properties for internally defined components are given in Table 4-

1 and 4-2. Omitting the properties data card for these components results
in use of the default properties. 00
For non-internally defined components, a minimum of molecular weight

data must be entered on the properties data card. Default properties for
these components are determined by table lookup on the internally
defined hydrocarbon component properties based on molecular weight. 00
All properties for internally-defined components and all except molecular

weight for non-internally defined components may be defaulted by
entering the alpha label X on the properties data card (Card 3) where the
default value is desired. 00
The properties table (Card 2 and Cards 3) may be truncated at any point
after molecular weight. All unread data is defaulted. The column titles on
the table title card (Card 2) must appear in the order shown. The number
of entries on Card 2 and Cards 3 must be the same. 00
F PSIA
(1) PROPERTIES C KPA
K PSIG
R K ⁄ C2
(2) COMP MW TC PC ZC ACENTRIC OMEGAA OMEGAB(VSHFT)(PCHOR)

(3) cmp1 mw1 tc1 pc1 zc1 w1 Ωa1 Ωb1 (vs1) (pch1)
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
cmpn mwn tcn pcn zcn wn Ωan Ωbn (vsn) (pchn)
00 The properties table is extended as follows for the Zudkevitch-Joffe

equation of state:
(2) ... PCHOR NBP GRVL TREF

(3) ... pchor1 nbp1 grvl1 tref1
... . . . .
... . . . .
... . . . .
... pchornc nbpnc grvlnc trefnc
4-192 Landmark - R2003.4

00 Definitions:
00 (1) Alpha label indicating that the units of the critical temperature values
(TC) are:
F Degrees Fahrenheit, ˚F. This is the default for

english units.
C Degrees Centigrade, ˚C. This is the default for

metric units.
K Degrees Kelvin, ˚K.
R Degrees Rankine, ˚R.
Alpha label indicating that the units of the critical pressure values (PC)
are:
PSIA Psia. This is the default for english units.
KPA KPa. This is the default for metric units.
PSIG Psig.
K/C2 Kg/cm2.
00 (2) The titles on this card must appear in the order shown. PCHOR is not
allowed in VIP-THERM.
00 (3) cmpi Component name for component i. Must be

identical to one of the names included in the
COMPONENTS data.
mwi The molecular weight of component i.
tci Critical temperature of component i.
pci Critical pressure of component i.
zci Critical z-factor of component i. (This affects

nothing but viscosity calculations.)
wi Acentric factor of component i.
Ωai Ωa for component i. This is treated as a universal

constant in the original formulations of the
equations of state (0.4274802 for RK, SRK and ZJRK;
0.457235529 for PR). Additional flexibility in fitting
data is gained by allowing it to vary by component.
Ωbi Ωb for component i. This is treated as a universal

constant in the original formulation of the equations
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-193

of state (0.08664035 for RK, SRK and ZJRK;

0.077796074 for PR). Additional flexibility in fitting
data is gained by allowing it to vary by component.
vsi Shift parameter S used for volume correction in any

three parameter equation of state.
pchi Parachor for component i for use with the IFT or

VELCTY options only to calculate interfacial
tension. If an X is entered in this column a value
will be calculated from pchori = -11.4 + 3.23mwi -
0.0022(mwi)**2. Not allowed in VIP-THERM.
nbpi Normal boiling point temperature of component i.
grvli Specific gravity of component i at temperature trefi

relative to water at 60˚F.
trefi Reference temperature for specific gravity of

component i.
NOTE: 1. If either of the temperature or pressure unit flags is specified,

then both must be specified.
2. Repeat the data card containing cmpi, mwi, etc. as necessary

to specify all properties correctly.
3. If a three parameter EOS treatment is required, vshft values

must be entered.
4-194 Landmark - R2003.4

00 Example:
00 EOS PR
C************ COMPONENT PROPERTIES **************
C
PROPERTIES
COMP MW TC PC ZC ACENTRIC OMEGAA OMEGAB VSHFT
00 CO2 44.01 87.58 1071.92 0.2826 0.2250 .45723553 .07779607 0.02700

N2 28.01 -232.73 493.19 0.294 0.0400 .45723553 .07779607 -0.17520
C1 16.04 -116.96 667.97 0.2997 0.0130 .45723553 .07779607 -0.11800
C2 30.07 89.76 707.95 0.2926 0.0986 .45723553 .07779607 -0.10700
00 C3 44.10 205.68 616.52 0.2882 0.1524 .45723553 .07779607 -0.08477

IC4 58.12 274.65 529.20 0.2857 0.1848 .45723553 .07779607 -0.08269
NC4 58.12 305.32 550.81 0.2845 0.2010 .45723553 .07779607 -0.06858
IC5 72.15 368.77 490.54 0.2828 0.2223 .45723553 .07779607 -0.04671
NC5 72.15 385.37 488.78 0.2804 0.2539 .45723553 .07779607 0.04103
C6 85.18 464.75 469.96 0.2816 0.2385 .45723553 .07779607 0.02115
C7 92.03 494.32 419.54 0.2793 0.2693 .45723553 .07779607 0.10456
C8 104.23 570.03 389.40 0.2772 0.2974 .45723553 .07779607 0.13470
C9 120.73 628.33 374.85 0.2733 0.3516 .45723553 .07779607 0.08856
C10 134.00 662.5 364.85 0.2705 0.3910 .45723553 .07779607 0.04730
C11P 158.27 694.63 327.66 0.2660 0.4577 .45723553 .07779607 0.03175
C14P 214.42 808.93 276.65 0.2557 0.6174 .45723553 .07779607 0.01107
C20P 300.93 996.43 233.14 0.2448 0.7999 .45723553 .07779607 0.00579
C27P 403.05 1089.67 173.46 0.2381 0.9202 .45723553 .07779607 0.10818
C36P 668.30 1354.26 93.78 0.2273 1.1307 .45723553 .07779607 0.42092
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-195

4.4.4 Binary Interaction Coefficients (DJK)

DJK cards are used to define binary interaction coefficients djk. These are
used in the mixing rules that determine for mixtures the "A" parameter of
the equation of state. 00
Table 4-3 summarizes values of djk that have been internally coded for
various combinations of components. These values will be automatically
loaded as data when the corresponding component names are entered in
the COMPONENTS data. All binary combinations that involve an
unrecognized component will be assigned default values of zero. 00
Any of the default values for binary interaction coefficients can be

overridden by means of DJK data. 00
DJK cmpj
cmpk djk
00 Definitions:
cmpj Component name of the first component in a binary

mixture.
cmpk Component name of the second component in a

binary mixture.
djk The binary interaction coefficient for mixtures of

component j and component k.
NOTE: 1. Repeat the data card containing cmpk for each component k
that interacts with component j.
2. Remember that djk = dkj. It is not necessary to define both.
3. Unless the WATIDEAL option (Section 2.2.19.2) is used,

binary interaction coefficients between water adn other
components may be defined by specifying the alpha label H2O
for cmpj. Specifying H2O for cmpk will result in an error.
4-196 Landmark - R2003.4

00 Example:
00 EOS PR
00 COMPONENTS
C1N2 NO2C3 C4C5 C5C8 C9C19 C2035 C36P
C
C****************** COMPONENTS PROPERTIES *********************
C
PROPERTIES
COMP MW TC PC ZC ACENTRIC OMEGAA OMEGAB
00 C1N2 16.13 -117.31 666.64 0.3141 0.0132 .45723553 .07779607

CO2C3 40.17 107.29 911.55 0.3016 0.1805 .45723553 .07779607
C4C5 62.99 325.6 525.53 0.2993 0.2118 .45723553 .07779607
C6C8 94.57 514.09 422.18 0.2952 0.2712 .45723553 .07779607
C9C19 152.75 690.49 339.57 0.2838 0.4427 .45723553 .07779607
C2035 311.26 1006.50 227.12 0.2619 0.8142 .45723553 .07779607
C36P 668.30 1354.89 93.78 0.2458 1.1307 .45723553 .07779607
C
DJK CO2C3
C1N2 -0.508225E-01
DJK C4C5
C1 N2 0.4172094E-01
CO2C3 -0.2031559E-01
DJK C6C8
C1N2 -0.3255523E-01
CO2C3 -0.6801761E-01
C4C5 -0.1434877E+00
DJK C9C19
C1 N2 0.1238972E+00
CO2C3 -0.8605607E-03
C4C5 0.2762086E+00
C6C8 -0.6246630E-01
DJK C2035
C1 N2 0.8639371E-01
CO2C3 0.1466657E-01
C4C5 -0.2710768E+00
C6C8 -0.1425948E+00
C9C19 0.8496494E-02
DJK C36P
C1 N2 0.8916950E-01
CO2C3 0.1177855E+00
C4C5 -0.2947721E-01
C6C8 0.5526345E-01
00 C9C19 -0.7258570E-01
C2035 -0.9795381E-01
ENDEOS
C
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-197

4.4.5 Lohrenz-Bray-Clark Viscosity Coefficients

00 This card should be used only with VIP-COMP.
00 The Lohrenz-Bray-Clark viscosity calculation is as follows:

2 3 4 4 –4
00 µ = µ b + ζ ( [ C 1 + C 2 ρ r + C 3 ρ r + C 4 ρ r + C 5 ρ r ] – 10 )
00 where µ is the phase viscosity, µ b is a base viscosity, ζ is a function of

pseudo critical pressures, pseudo critical temperatures, and mixture
molecular weight, and ρ r is a pseudo reduced phase density.
00 By default, the coefficients C1, C2, C3, C4, and C5 are equal to 0.1023,
0.023364, 0.058533,-0.040758, and 0.0093324, respectively. Use of the LBC
keyword allows the user to modify these default coefficients to obtain a
better match with experimental viscosities.
00 The LBC keyword is not required if the user wishes to retain the default
coefficients.
00 The LBC keyword can appear anywhere after the PROPERTIES keyword
and data and before the ENDEOS keyword. The modified coefficients will
only apply for the current EOS table being defined.
LBC
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5
4.4.6 HSTAR Card (VIP-THERM)

00 The HSTAR card is used to define component ideal gas state enthalpy
coefficients. The ideal gas state enthalpy for each component is given by
the fifth degree polynomial
H i* = h i0
* + h * T + h * T2 + h * T3 + h * T4 + h * T5
i1 i2 i3 i4 i5
where H i* is the ideal gas state enthalpy of component i in Btu/LB mole

(KJ/kg mole), T is the temperature in degrees Rankin (degrees Kelvin) and
*
h in are the ideal gas state enthalpy coefficients of component i in Btu/LB
mole-(˚R)n (KJ/kg mole-(˚K)n).
Table 4-4 gives component Passut-Danner ideal gas state enthalpy

coefficients for pure components (References 33 and 34) which have been
internally coded. Note that these coefficients are given on a mass rather
than a molar basis. These values will be automatically loaded when the
corresponding component names are entered in the COMPONENTS data.
For components not listed in Table 4-4, default ideal gas state enthalpy
coefficients are calculated using the Kesler and Lee correlation (References
35, 36, and 37). This correlation is not always applicable. It fails if the
4-198 Landmark - R2003.4

component critical temperature is less than 60 ˚F. The correlation requires

component specific gravity. If the component is a gas at standard
conditions, then we use the density at the vapor pressure at standard
temperature. For the relatively heavy components commonly used in
thermal reservoir simulation, these shortcomings are not a problem.
Any of the default values for ideal gas state enthalpy coefficients may be
overridden by means of HSTAR data.
HSTAR * * * * * *
cmpi h io h i1 h i2 h i3 h i4 h i5
Definitions:
cmpi Component name for component i. Must be

identical to one of the components included in the
COMPONENTS data.
*
hi Ideal gas state enthalpy coefficients for component
i, Btu/LB mole-(˚R)n (KJ/kg mole-(˚k)n).
NOTE: Water ideal gas state enthalpy coefficients are internally hardcoded
and may not be input.
4.4.7 Separator Equation of State (EOSSEP) (VIP-COMP or VIP-THERM)
PR
RK
EOSSEP
SRK
ZJRK
00 Definitions:
PR Peng-Robinson equation of state.
RK Redlich-Kwong equation of state.
SRK Soave-Redlich-Kwong equation of state.
ZJRK Zudkevitch-Joffe extension to the Redlich-Kwong

equation of state (not available in VIP-THERM).
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-199

The equation of state to be used for PVT properties for surface calculations
is specified on the EOSSEP data card. The default equation of state is the
reservoir equation of state. 00
NOTE: 1. Since separator equation of state parameters default to

reservoir values, if a different equation of state is defined for
surface separation, a full set of surface separator equation of
state parameters will probably be required.
2. If the equation of state for surface separation is set to Peng-

Robinson and the reservoir equation of state is one of the
Redlich-Kwong types, the surface Ωai and Ωbi will be set to the
Peng-Robinson defaults. Similarly, if the equation of state for
surface separation is set to one of the Redlich-Kwong types and
the reservoir equation of state is Peng-Robinson, the surface Ωai
and Ωbi will be set to the Redlich-Kwong defaults. In both cases
these defaults may be replaced by user-supplied PROPERTIES
data.
3. If not entered on the surface PROPERTIES card, the units of

critical temperature and pressure will be the same as for the
reservoir properties.
4. The Zudkevitch-Joffe (ZJRK) equation is not available in VIP-

THERM.
00 The additional data required for three parameter EOS treatment is input
by supplying VSHFT data as a part of the PROPERTIES data.
00 Examples:
00 EOS PR
COMPONENTS
C02 N2 C1 C2 C3 IC4 NC4 IC5 NC5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10
C
PROPERTIES
.
.
.
DJK
.
.
.
EOSSEP SRK
PROPERTIES
.
.
4-200 Landmark - R2003.4

.
STKZDN
.
DJKSEP
.
.
.
ENDEOS
4.4.8 Standing-Katz Density Coefficients (STKZDN) (VIP-COMP)
STKZDN
den1 . . . dennc
00 Definition:
deni Standing-Katz density correlation coefficient for

component i, gm/cc.
The coefficients for the Standing-Katz density correlation for surface

separation calculations are entered using STKZDN card and associated
data. 00
The Standing-Katz correlation is used to calculate surface liquid density. 00
NOTE: This data can be entered only after the EOSSEP card. If the equation
of state data for surface separators is identical to that for the
reservoir, the EOSSEP card can be followed by STKZDN card.
00 Examples:
00 C
EOSSEP SRK
STKZDN
0.632 0.641 0.658 0.70 0.80 0.777
ENDEOS
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-201

4.4.9 Binary Interaction Coefficients for Separators (DJKSEP) (VIP-COMP

or VIP-THERM)
DJKSEP cmpj
cmpk djk
00 Definitions:
cmpj Component name of the first component in a binary

mixture.
cmpk Component name of the second component in a

binary mixture.
djk The binary interaction coefficient for mixtures of

DJKSEP cards are used to define binary interaction coefficients djk for
surface separators. These are used in the mixing rules that determine for
mixtures the ’A’ parameter of the equation of state. 00
Table 4-3 summarizes values of djk that have been internally coded for
various combinations of components. These values will be automatically
loaded as data when the corresponding component names are entered in
the COMPONENTS data. All binary combinations that involve an
unrecognized component will be assigned default values of zero. 00
Any of the default values for binary interaction coefficients can be

overridden by means of DJKSEP data. 00
The data entered using DJKSEP card is used for all stages. The data can be
selectively overridden by using the DJKSEP card as a part of the separator
stage data. 00
Repeat the data card containing cmpk for each component k that interacts
with component j. 00
00 Remember that djk = dkj. It is not necessary to define both.
00 Examples:
00 EOS PR
COMPONENTS
C1 N2 C02C3 C4C5 C6C8 C9C19 C2035 C36P
C
C COMPONENTS PROPERTIES
C
PROPERTIES
4-202 Landmark - R2003.4

.
.
.
C
DJK C02C3
C1 N2 -0.508225E-01
DJK C4C5
C1 N2 0.4172094E-01
C02C3 -0.2031559E+00
DJK C6C8
C1 N2 -0.3255523E-01
C02C3 -0.6801761E-01
C4C5 -0.1434877E+00
DJK C9C19
C1 N2 0.1238792E+00
C02C3 -0.8605607E-03
C4C5 0.2762086E+00
C6C8 -0.6246630E-01
DJK C2035
C1 N2 0.8639371E-01
2C3 0.1466657E-01
C4C5T -0.2710768E+00
C6C8 -0.1425948E+00
C9C19 0.8496494E-02
DJK C36P
C1 N2 0.8916950E-01
C02C3 0.1177855E+00
C4C5 -0.2947721E-01
C6C8 0.5526345E-01
C9C19 -0.7258570E-01
C2035 -0.9795381E-01
C
EOSSEP SRK
C
00 PROPERTIES
C
DJKSEP C02C3
C1 N2 -0.508225E-01
DJKSEP C4C5
Cl N2 0.4172094E-01
C02C3 -0.2031559E+00
DJKSEP C2035
.
. .
.
C1 N2 0.8639371E-01
C02C3 0.1466657E-01
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-203

C4C5 -0.2710768E+00
C6C8 -0.1425948E+00
C9C19 0.8496494E-02
ENDEOS
4-204 Landmark - R2003.4

4.4.10 End of EOS data (ENDEOS)

00 This card should be used only with VIP-COMP.
The ENDEOS card terminates the reading of the equation-of-state

properties for the components whose mixture characteristics are to be
simulated. 00
ENDEOS
00
Table 4-1: Component Properties Data - Pure Compounds Critical Properties
MOL. ACENTRIC
COMPONENT TC, ˚F. PC, psia ZC
WT. FACTOR
CO2 44.010 87.9 1070.9 .2742 .2225*
H2S 34.076 212.7 1036.0 .2660 .0920
N2 28.013 -232.4 493.0 .2910 .0372
C1 16.043 -116.6 667.8 .2890 .0126
C2 30.070 90.1 707.8 .2850 .0978
C3 44.097 206.0 616.3 .2810 .1541
NC4 58.124 305.7 550.7 .2740 .2015
IC4 58.124 275.0 529.1 .2830 .1840
NC5 72.151 385.7 488.6 .2620 .2524
IC5 72.151 369.1 490.4 .2730 .2286
NC6 86.178 453.7 436.9 .2640 .2998
NC7 100.210 512.8 396.8 .2630 .3498
NC8 114.230 564.2 360.6 .2590 .3981
NC9 128.260 610.7 332.0 .2510 .4452
NC10 142.290 652.1 304.0 .2470 .4904
* Adjusted to fit the vapor pressure curve using the P-R equation.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-205

00
Table 4-2: Component Properties - Heavy Fractions* Critical Properties

MOL. ACENTRIC METHANE
COMPONENT TC, ˚F. PC, psia
WT. FACTOR Djk
C6 84 463 468.3 .2313 .0298
C7 96 525 449.4 .2718 .0350
C8 107 576 429.8 .3151 .0381
C9 121 625 402.0. .3636 .0407
C10 134 668 379.6 .4176 .0427
C11 147 706 359.3 .4680 .0442
C12 161 743 340.2 .5147 .0458
C13 175 776 323.9 .5575 .0473
C14 190 810 308.8 .5982 .0488
C15 206 844 294.3 .6445 .0502
C16 222 872 280.0 .6889 .0512
C17 237 900 269.3 .7315 .0523
C18 251 920 258.7 .7664 .0530
C19 263 940 251.3 .8002 .0537
C20 275 961 244.7 .8415 .0544
C21 291 982 235.4 .8750 .0551
C22 300 1001 232.1 .9261 .0558
C23 312 1020 226.9 .9629 .0565
C24 324 1037 221.6 1.0045 .0571
C25 337 1055 216.2 1.0382 .0575
C26 349 1071 211.5 1.0804 .0581
C27 360 1087 207.8 1.1167 .0586
C28 372 1102 203.4 1.1583 .0591
C29 382 1114 200.0 1.1987 .0595
C30 394 1129 196.2 1.2325 .0599
C31 404 1143 193.7 1.2706 .0605
C32 415 1156 190.5 1.3151 .0609
C33 426 1169 187.5 1.3494 .0613
C34 437 1180 184.2 1.3901 .0616
C35 445 1191 182.5 1.4284 .0620
C36 456 1202 179.5 1.4718 .0623
C37 464 1213 178.1 1.4993 .0627
C38 475 1223 175.2 1.5423 .0630
C39 484 1233 173.2 1.5781 .0633
C40 495 1243 170.6 1.6237 .0635
C41 502 1252 169.4 1.6494 .0638
C42 512 1260 166.9 1.6927 .0640
C43 521 1269 165.2 1.7294 .0642
C44 531 1279 163.2 1.7829 .0645
C45 539 1287 161.8 1.8213 .0648
* Tc, Pc, and acentric factor have been adjusted to fit the liquid density and boiling point data of Katz
and Firoozabadi.
4-206 Landmark - R2003.4

00
Table 4-3: Binary Interaction Coefficients

CO2 H2S N2 C1 C2 C3 NC4 IC4
CO2 .0 .0 .0 .150 .150 .150 .150 .150
H2S .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0
N2 .0 .0 .0 .120 .120 .120 .120 .120
C1 .150 .0 .120 .0 .0 .0 .020 .020
C2 .150 .0 .120 .0 .0 .0 .010 .010
C3 .150 .0 .120 .0 .0 .0 .010 .010
NC4 .150 .0 .120 .020 .010 .010 .0 .0
IC4 .150 .0 .120 .020 .010 .010 .0 .0
NC5 .150 .0 .120 .020 .010 .010 .0 .0
IC5 .150 .0 .120 .020 .010 .010 .0 .0
NC6 .150 .0 .120 .025 .010 .010 .0 .0
NC7 .150 .0 .120 .025 .010 .010 .0 .0
NC8 .150 .0 .120 .035 .010 .010 .0 .0
NC9 .150 .0 .120 .035 .010 .010 .0 .0
NC10 .150 .0 .120 .035 .010 .010 .0 .0
NC5 IC5 NC6 NC7 NC8 NC9 NC10
CO2 .150 .150 .150 .150 .150 .150 .150
H2S .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0
N2 .120 .120 .120 .120 .120 .120 .120
C1 .020 .020 .025 .025 .035 .035 .035
C2 .010 .010 .010 .010 .010 .010 .010
C3 .010 .010 .010 .010 .010 .010 .010
NC4 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0
IC4 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0
NC5 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0
IC5 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0
NC6 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0
NC7 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0
NC8 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0
NC9 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0
NC10 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-207

Table 4-4: Passut-Danner Ideal Gas State Enthalpy Coefficients BTU/LB-(˚R)n

* * * * * *
COMPONENT h i0 h i1 h i2 ( *10 4 ) h i3 ( *10 7 ) h i4 ( *10 11 ) h i5 ( *10 15 )
CO2 4.778 0.11443 1.01130 -0.26490 0.34706 -0.13140
H2S -0.617 0.23858 -0.24460 0.41070 -1.30126 1.44852
N2 -0.934 0.25520 -0.17790 0.15890 -0.32203 0.15893
C1 -6.977 0.57170 -2.94312 4.23157 -15.26740 19.45261
C2 -0.021 0.26488 -0.25014 2.92334 -12.86050 18.22060
C3 -0.738 0.17260 0.94041 2.15543 -10.70986 15.92794
NC4 7.430 0.09857 2.69180 0.51820 -4.20139 6.56042
IC4 11.498 0.04668 3.34801 0.14423 -3.16420 5.42893
NC5 27.172 -0.00280 4.40073 -0.86287 0.81764 -0.19715
IC5 27.623 -0.03150 4.69884 -0.98282 1.02985 -0.29485
NC6 -7.391 0.22911 -0.81569 4.52784 -25.23180 47.48019
NC7 -0.066 0.18021 0.34729 3.21879 -18.36600 33.76939
NC8 1.120 0.17308 0.48810 3.05401 -17.36459 31.24831
NC9 1.720 0.16906 0.58126 2.92611 -16.55850 29.29610
NC10 -2.993 0.20335 -0.34904 4.07057 23.06441 42.96899
00
4.4.11 Non-EOS PVT Property Data (VIP-THERM Compositional Model)

Data described in this section may be input in any order, but must appear
as a group immediately following the ENDEOS card.
Described in this section are oil and gas phase viscosity data and data for
options in which EOS calculations (oil and gas phase fugacity coefficients,
densities, and enthalpies) may be selectively replaced by tables or
correlations.
4-208 Landmark - R2003.4

4.4.11.1 Oil Phase Viscosity Data
Four methods are available for modeling oil phase viscosity - (A) the
Pederson Model28, (B) mixing rule option, (C) the molecular weight-
dependent intercept logarithmic correlation option, and (D) the Lohrenz,
Bray, and Clark model38 (not recommended for non-isothermal problems).
A) Pedersen Viscosity Correlation (Reference 28)
VISOIL PEDERSON
VISK
i ki
. . .
VISKJ
i j Xij
. . . . . .
Definitions:
VISK The keyword for inputting K-values. Optional.
i Index for ki.
ki Overwriting ki value.
VISKJ The keyword for inputting binary interaction

coefficients Xij. Optional.
i Component i.
j Component j.
Xij Interaction coefficient for components i and j.

Default is 0.
The Pedersen correlation is based on the corresponding states principle

(see Reference 28). A group of substances obeys the corresponding states
principle if these substances have the same reduced viscosity at the same
reduced density and reduced temperature. In such a case, only
comprehensive viscosity data for one component (the reference
component - methane) in the group are needed. Others can be calculated
from the reduced viscosity. This correlation is especially useful for heavy
oils where the Lohrenz-Bray-Clark correlation (LBC) fails to give a proper
viscosity prediction. The user has the option of specifying binary
interacting coefficients Xij for calculating the mixture critical temperature
and k1 to k7 for calculating the viscosity of the reference component. VISK
and VISKJ cards are optional. Default values will be used if they are not
entered. The default values are zero for all the interaction coefficients Xij
and are the following values for the coefficients kj. Only those data
overwriting the default values need to be entered.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-209

k1 = 9.74602
k2 = 18.0834
k3 = 4126.66
k4 = 44.6055
k5 = 0.976544
k6 = 81.8134
k7 = 15649.9
Examples:
ENDEOS
VISOIL PEDERSON
VISK
1 42.5
2 0.0002279
3 11770
4 600.3
5 16.49
6 1614
7 0.05552.
VISKJ
35 -0.36409
36 -0.38517
37 -0.8
38 -0.62763
OILMF 1
0.0001 0.2917 0.0045 0.0024 0.1538 0.3003 0.1095 0.1377
GASMF 1
X X X X X X X X
B) Component Oil Viscosity Option
In this option, oil viscosity for each component is tabulated versus

temperature. The mixing rule
µ 01
x1
* µ 02
x2
* µ 03
x3
. . . µ oxNC
NC
is used to obtain the oil phase viscosity from the component viscosities µoi
which are interpolated/extrapolated from the tabular data using the
equation
In(In(µoi +1.000001 - µ min

o )) = A + B In T,
min
where µ o is the limiting viscosity as temperature approaches infinity
min
and T is absolute temperature. The value of µ o is .200001 by default,
and may be input using a VOMIN card:
VOMIN vomin
4-210 Landmark - R2003.4

where vomin is in cp.
The component oil viscosities are input in the form:
Title Card: VISOIL COMP

Header Card: T 1 2 3 . . . NC
Data Cards: t1 vo1,1 vo2,1 vo3,1 . . . voNC,1
. t2 vo1,2 vo2,2 vo3,2 . . . voNC,2
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
Definitions:
Title Card: VISOIL COMP Alpha labels indicating that

component oil viscosity data is to
follow.
Header Card:T 1 2 ... NC Table header card, where NC is

replaced by the numeric value of the
total number of components.
tj Temperature, ˚F (˚C).
voij Viscosity of pure component i at temperature tj, cp.
C) Logarithmic Correlation Option
In this option, oil viscosity is modeled by assuming a linear relationship

between viscosity and temperature on a standard ASTM viscosity plot (In
(In (µo + .8)) versus InT). The slope of the line is assumed constant, while
the y-intercept is allowed to vary with composition and is correlated
against oil molecular weight. Oil viscosity is then given by
µo = exp (exp (A + B In(t)) - 1.00001 + µ min

o
min
00 where µo is oil viscosity in centipoise, µ o is minimum oil viscosity, T is
temperature in degrees Rankin, B is a constant, and A is a function of oil
min
molecular weight. Note that the use of µ o = .200001 is equivalent to the
standard ASTM viscosity relationship in which viscosity approaches a
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-211

value of .2 as temperature approaches infinity for all fluids.
VISOIL
(VOMIN vomin)
B b
A MW
a1 mw1
a2 mw2
. .
. .
. .
Definitions:
VISOIL Alpha label indicating that the following data is oil

viscosity data.
VOMIN Alpha label indicating that the next entry on this

line is the minimum oil viscosity. (Optional.)
vomin Value of minimum oil viscosity, cp (cp). This is the

limiting value of oil viscosity as temperature
approaches infinity. Default is .200001. (Optional.)
B Alpha label indicating that the next entry on this

line is the parameter B in the oil viscosity
correlation.
b Value of the parameter B in the oil viscosity

correlation, dimensionless.
A Alpha label indicating that the entry in this location

on the following data cards is the parameter A in
the oil viscosity correlation.
MW Alpha label indicating that the entry in this location

on the following data cards is the oil molecular
weight for each value of A.
ai Value of A in oil viscosity correlation corresponding

to oil molecular weight mwi.
mwi Value of oil molecular weight corresponding to oil

viscosity parameter ai.
D) Lohrenz, Bray, and Clark Option
VISOIL LBC
4-212 Landmark - R2003.4

4.4.11.2 Gas Phase Viscosity Data
Three methods are available fo modeling gas phase viscosity - (A) the
Pederson Model28, (B) the component gas viscosity option, and (C) the
Lohrenz, Bray, and Clark model38.
In all three methods, steam tables are used to obtain the steam viscosity,
which is combined with the hydrocarbon gas viscosity (determined by
one of the methods) by mole fraction average. Steam viscosity is given by

 µ s ( T, P ) if P < Pwsat
µs = 
 µ sat ( T ) if ≥ Pwsat
 s
SAT
where: µ s ( T, P ) is the steam table value at T,P ; µ s ( T ) is the saturated
value at T, and Pwsat is the water saturation pressure as a function of
temperature.
A) Pedersen Viscosity Correlation
VISGAS PEDERSON
VISK
i ki
. . .
VISKJ
i j Xij
. . . . . .
Definitions:
i Index for ki.

i Component i.
j Component j.

Default is 0.

R2003.4 - Landmark 4-213


viscosity prediction. The user has the option of specifying binary
entered. The default values are zero for all the interacting coefficients Xij
and the following values for the coefficients kj. Only those data
overwriting the default values need to be entered.
k1 = 9.74602
k2 = 18.0834
k3 = 4126.66
k4 = 44.6055
k5 = 0.976544
k6 = 81.8134
k7 = 15649.9
Examples:
ENDEOS
VISGAS PEDERSON
VISK
1 42.5
2 0.0002279
3 11770
4 600.3
5 16.49
6 1614
7 0.05552.
VISKJ
35 -0.36409
36 -0.38517
37 -0.8
38 -0.62763
OILMF 1
0.0001 0.2917 0.0045 0.0024 0.1538 0.3003 0.1095 0.1377
GASMF 1
X X X X X X X X
4-214 Landmark - R2003.4

B) Component Gas Viscosity Option 00
This option is identical to the component oil viscosity option except that
the component viscosities are linearly interpolated/extrapolated from the
tabular data and that a mole fraction average mixing rule is used:
NCV
∑
*
µg = µ gi y i
i=1
Title Card: VISGAS COMP

Header Card: T 1 2 3 . . . NCV
Data Cards: t1 vg1,1 vg2,1 vg3,1 . . . vgNCV,1
. t2 vg1,2 vg2,2 vg3,2 . . . vgNCV,2
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
Definitions:
Title Card: VISGAS COMP Alpha labels indicating that

component gas viscosity data is to
follow.
Header Card: T 1 2 ... NCV Table header card, where NCV is

replaced by the numeric value of the
number of volatile components.
tj Temperature, ˚F(˚C)
vgij Viscosity of pure component i at temperature tj, cp.
C) Lohrenz, Bray, and Clark Option
VISGAS LBC
4.4.11.3 Component Oil Density Option
In this option, pure component compressibilities coefficients of thermal

expansion, and densities at standard conditions along with a mixing rule
are used to compute oil density, thus eliminating the equation-of-state oil
z-factor calculations.
The pure component densities are given by

STD
ρ oi = ρ oi * ( 1 + C oi ( P – P s ) – C TEOi * ( T – T s ) )
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-215

and are used to obtain the oil phase density in the volume-average mixing
rule
1
ρ o = ---------------------
NC
-
xi Mi
∑ -----------
ρ oi
-
i=1
DENO COMP
COIL coil1 coil2 . . . coilNC
CTEOIL cteoil1 cteoil2. . . cteoilNC
DOSTD dostd1 dostd2 . . . dostdNC
Definitions:
DENO COMP Alpha labels indicating that component oil density

data is to follow.
COIL Alpha label indicating that the next NC entries on

this card are oil component compressibilities.
coili Value of compressibility of oil component i, psi-1

(kPa-1). If the values for all components are the
same, only one value is required.
CTEOIL Alpha label indicating that the next NC entries on

this card are oil component coefficients of thermal
expansion.
cteoili Value of coefficient of thermal expansion of oil

component i, ˚R-1 (˚K-1). If the values for all
components are the same, only one value is
required.
DOSTD Alpha label indicating that the next NC entries on

this card are oil component densities at standard
conditions.
dostdi Value of density at standard conditions of oil

component i, gm/cc (gm/cc).
4-216 Landmark - R2003.4

4.4.11.4 Component Enthalpy Option
In this option, specific heat capacity coefficients for components in the oil
and gas phases and volatile component heats of vaporization are used to
obtain oil and gas phase enthalpies, thus eliminating the equation-of-state
enthalpy calculations.
Component specific heat capacities in the oil and gas phase are defined as
Cpoi = cpoi0 + cpoi1 * T

Cpgi = cpgi0 + cpgi1 * T + cpgi2 * T2 + cpgi3 * T
Volatile component specific heats of vaporization are assumed constant

and are specified at the boiling point TBi.
Component enthalpies in the oil and gas phases are given by
T
h oi = ∫ Cpoi dT
Ts
TB i T
h gi = ∫ C poi dT + ∫ Cpgi dT + ∆H vi
Ts TB i
The oil and gas phase enthalpies are then given by mole fraction averages
of the component values:
NC
ho = ∑ xi hoi
i=1
NCV
hg = ∑ y i h gi + y s h gs
i=1
where ys is the steam mole fraction in the gas phase and hgs is the steam
enthalpy, which is taken from the steam tables as:

 H ( P, T ) + ∆H vw ( T )if P > Pwsat
h gs =  WL
 H WV ( P, T ) if P ≤ Pwsat

where: HWL (P,T) and HWV (P,T) are liquid water and steam enthalpies at
P,T; ∆HVW(T) is the saturated water heat of vaporization at T; and Pwsat is
the water saturation pressure as a function of temperature.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-217

ENTHALPY COMP
CPO0 cpo01 cpo02 . ..cpo0NC
CPO1 cpo11 cpo12 . ..cpo1NC
CPG0 cpg01 cpg02 . ..cpg0NCV
CPG3 cpg31 cpg3s . . . cpg3ncv
HVAP hvap1 hvap2 . . .havapNCV
TB tb1 tb2 . . .tbNC
Definitions:
ENTHALPY COMP Alpha labels indicating that enthalpy

component data is to follow.
CPO0, CPO1 Apha labels indicating that the next NC entries

on each card are the 0th or 1st degree specific
heat capacity coefficients for the oil phase
components.
cpo0i, cpo1i Values of the 0th and 1st degree specific heat
capacity coefficients for oil component i, Btu/
(LB ˚Fdegree+1) (KJ/(KG ˚Cdegree+1)).
CPG0, CPG1, CPG2, Apha labels indicating that the next NCV
CPG3 entries on each card are the 0th or 1st or 2nd or
3rd degree specific heat capacity coefficients for
the gas phase components. CPG3 data is
optional.
cpg0i, cpg1i, cpg2i Values of the 0th and 1st and 2nd and 3rd
cpg3 degree specific heat capacity coefficients for gas
component i, Btu/(LB ˚Fdegree+1) (KJ/(KG
˚Cdegree+1)).
HVAP Alpha label indicating that the next NCV entries

on this card are the specific heats of
vaporization for the gas phase components.
hvapi Value of the specific heat of vaporization at

thvapi for gas component i, Btu/LB (KJ/KG).
TB Alpha label indicating that the next NC entries

on this card are the boiling point temperatures
corresponding to hvapi for the NCV volatile
components.
tbi Values of the boiling point temperatures

corresponding to hvapi for volatile gas
component i, ˚F (˚C).
4-218 Landmark - R2003.4

4.4.11.5 Component K-value Options
Two options are provided in which equation of state component fugacity

coefficient calculations are replaced by component k-value equilibrium
relationships. The first option (A) uses a fixed functional dependence on
temperature and pressure of the volatile component k-values. In the
second option, (B) k-values for the volatile components are expressed as
two dimensional tables in temperature and pressure.
If the WATIDEAL option (Section 2.2.19.2) is invoked, the k-values are

assumed to apply to the water-free fluid system at the hydrocarbon partial
pressure in the gas phase (PHC = (1-ystm)*P). As a result, the k-values are a
function of temperature, pressure, and steam mole fraction in the vapor
phase.
In the default treatment of water in the vapor phase (using the Equation of
State), the k-values are assumed to be three phase values which account
for the presence of water in the vapor phase.
A) Component K-Value Correlation Option
In this option, k-values for the volatile components in a water-free system

are expressed as
B –Di
KV i =  A i + -----i + C i *P *EXP  --------------
 P   T – E i
KVCOR
COMP A B C D E
1 a1 b1 c1 d1 e1
2 a2 b2 c2 d2 e2
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
NCV aNCV bNCV cNVC dNCV eNCV
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-219

B) Component K-Value Tables Option
KVTBS
P p1
COMP 1 2 3 ... NCV
TEMP
t11 kv111 kv211 kv311 ...
t21 kv121 kv221 kv321 ...
t31 kv131 kv231 kv331 ...
. . . .
. . . .
. . .
P p2
COMP 1 2 3 ...
TEMP
t21 kv112 kv212 kv312 ...
t22 kv122 kv222 kv322 ...
t32 kv132 kv232 kv332 ...
P p3
.
.
.
Definitions:
P Alpha label indicating that the following entry on

this line is the pressure at which the subsequent k-
value vs. temperature table applies.
pk Values of pressure, psia (kPa).
COMP Alpha label indicating that NCV component

numbers follow.
TEMP Alpha label indicating that the entries appearing in

this location on the following data cards are
temperature values.
tjk Temperature value for temperature entry j at

pressure pk, ˚F (˚C).
kvijk Water-free k-value for component i at temperature

tjk and pressure pk.
4-220 Landmark - R2003.4

NOTE: 1. Data is required for at least two pressures.
2. At least two temperature entries are required at each pressure.
3. Pressures and temperatures must be monotonically increasing

(with the k and j indices, respectively).
4. Linear interpolation is performed in pressure assuming linear

kp vs. P and in temperature assuming linear ln k vs. 1/T.
5. Below p1 and above pnp, kp is held constant with pressure.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-221

4.4.12 Initial Fluid Composition Data (VIP-COMP or VIP-THERM)

The initial compositions of the liquid and vapor hydrocarbon phases must
be specified to initialize the fluids in the reservoir model. Composition
may be constant for a given phase or may vary with depth. Use OILMF/
GASMF if PSAT was entered on the IEQUIL card; use COMPOSITION if
PSAT was not entered on the IEQUIL card. 00



a. For isothermal and thermal compositional models, Section 4.4.12.3

or Section 4.4.12.4.

(Section 4.4.12.4) is discouraged, since the areal temperature
variation is not accounted for in the calculation of equilibrium
phase pressures versus depth. See option 4 below for further
discussion of this problem.

gridblock fluid properties (only the pressure array in the thermal
00
4-222 Landmark - R2003.4

4.4.12.1 Constant Equilibrium Region Oil Composition (OILMF)
00 Use only if PSAT was entered on the IEQUIL card.
00 Component mole fractions in the liquid hydrocarbon phase may be

specified as follows:
OILMF ieq (ipvt)

x1 x2 . . . xnc
00 Definitions:
ieq Equilibrium region number for this composition.

Default is 1.
ipvt PVT table number used for saturation pressure

calculations. The PVT number can be specified on
this card instead of on the IEQUIL card.
xi Mole fraction of component i in the liquid

hydrocarbon phase.
4.4.12.2 Constant Equilibrium Region Gas Composition (GASMF)
00 Use only if PSAT was entered on the IEQUIL card.
Component mole fractions in the vapor hydrocarbon phase may be

specified as follows: 00
GASMF ieq (ipvt)

y1 y2 . . . ync
00 Definitions:
ieq Equilibrium region number for this composition.

Default is 1.

this card instead of on the IEQUIL card.
yi Mole fraction of component i in the vapor

hydrocarbon phase.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-223

NOTE: 1. Both the OILMF and GASMF cards must be entered when
defining an equilibrium region composition that is constant.
However, the composition for the equilibrium phase may be
defaulted by using the alpha label X in place of the
composition values xi or yi. In this case, the primary phase
composition must be entered first, with the defaulting
equilibrium phase following.
2. There are two options for entering the default designation:

either one alpha label X or the alpha label X for each
component.
00 Example:
00 C USE EQUILIBRIUM GAS COMPOSITION

OILMF 1
0.4471288 0.1630387 0.0365740 0.06565135
0.1575420 0.0932349 0.0368287
GASMF 1
XXXXXXX
4.4.12.3 Composition Varies with Depth (COMPOSITION)
00 This card should be used only with VIP-COMP or VIP-THERM. This

card may not be specified if PSAT was entered on the IEQUIL card.
00 To specify composition as a function of depth, the table described below

should be entered instead of OILMF and GASMF data. The table consists
of a value of saturation pressure, primary phase composition, and
optional temperature value for each depth entry. The program assumes
that compositions entered for depths above the gas-oil contact are gas
phase compositions. Compositions entered for depths at or below the gas-
oil contact are assumed to be oil phase compositions. If a gas-oil contact is
present in the reservoir, an entry at the gas-oil contact depth must be in the
table.
00 In VIP-THERM, all mole fractions are input on a water-free basis. For gas
compositions, enter zero values for non-volatile components.
COMPOSITION ieq (ipvt)

DEPTH PSAT (T) Z
d1 ps1 (t1) z1,1 . . . z1,nc
. . . . .
. . . . .
dn psn (tn) zn,1 . . . zn,nc
4-224 Landmark - R2003.4

00 Definitions:
ieq Equilibrium region number. Default is 1.

this card instead of on the IEQUIL card. The user
should consistently use the same ipvt parameter for
the same equilibrium region entries. Entering IPVT
on the IEQUIL card is recommended.
di Depth, ft (m).
psi Saturation pressure, psia (kPa).
ti Reservoir temperature, ˚F (˚C). Enter only if

temperature dependency option is used. Default
value equals constant reservoir temperature as
described in Section 2.2.4.
zi,j Composition of component j for depthi.
NOTE: The alpha keyword T is optional; it should be entered only if the

temperature dependency option or the thermal option is used. Do
not enter the parentheses.
00 Example:
00 EOS PR
COMPONENTS
C11P C14P C20 C27P C36P
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COMPOSITION 1
DEPTH PSAT Z
8393.0 4312.0 0.114694 0.00596171 0.0535574 0.0253688
0.00375082 0.00931554 0.00287086 0.00407180 0.0452978 0.00641069
0.00608870 0.00382681 0.00266587 0.00422379 0.00241988
0.000426779 0.0000480376 0.00000520974
8568.5 4312.0 0.092183 0.00286226 0.449443 0.0467961 0.0290827
0.00647076 0.0177852 0.00652344 0.00992164 0.0138857 0.0260174
0.0308275 0.026336 0.0222263 0.0454738 0.0655906 0.0668725
0.0214402 0.0219302
8784.0 4312.0 0.0725313 0.00335000 0.444713 0.0461563 0.0293813
0.00583125 0.0140063 0.00593125 0.00847500 0.0126438 0.0246996
0.0294541 0.0232041 0.0197861 0.0495547 0.0694539
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-225

4.4.12.4 Areal Composition Variation (COMPOSITION)
00 This card should be used only with VIP-COMP or VIP-THERM. This

card may not be specified if PSAT was entered on the IEQUIL card.
To specify areal composition variation, the table described below should

be entered instead of OILMF and GASMF data. The table consists of
saturation pressure, primary phase composition, and optional
temperature value for each depth entry, as in the table described in Section
4.4.9.3. In addition, an areal location must be specified for each depth
entry. The areal location can be constant for each of the depth entries in a
table, corresponding to composition measurements from a vertical well,
by specifying an (x,y) location on the COMPOSITION card. Alternatively,
the areal location can vary for each depth value, corresponding to
composition measurements from a deviated well, by entering columns of
x and y location in the table. 00
This option is particularly useful for fields in which measurements of

composition versus depth have been made for several wells covering a
large portion of the model area. Initial compositions for each gridblock are
computed by interpolating both with depth and areal location in a two-
step procedure. The first step is similar to the standard composition versus
depth option. However, instead for interpolating composition only for the
equilibration region to which a grid block belongs, an interpolated
composition is obtained from each composition versus depth table, at the
depth of the center of the gridblock. The areal location of each of these
interpolated compositions is also obtained by linear interpolation. The
second step is an areal interpolation, using a weight factor of inverse
distance squared, to obtain the final gridblock value of composition. 00
Constant Areal Location with Depth 00
COMPOSITION ieq (x1 y1)

DEPTH PSAT (T) Z
d1 ps1 (t1) z1,1 . . . z1,nc
. . . . .
. . . . .
dn psn (tn) zn,1 . . . zn,nc
Variable Areal Location with Depth 00
COMPOSITION ieq
DEPTH PSAT X Y (T) Z
d1 ps1 x1 y1 (t1) z1,1 . . . z1,nc
. . . . .
. . . . .
dn psn xn yn (tn) zn,1 . . . zn,nc
4-226 Landmark - R2003.4

00 Definitions:
ieq Equilibrium region number. Default is 1.
xi Value of x-direction coordinate location.
yi Value of y-direction coordinate location.
di Depth, ft(m).
psi Saturation pressure, psia(kpa).
ti Reservoir temperature, ˚F (˚C). Enter only if

temperature dependency option is used. Default
value equals constant reservoir temperature as
described in Section 2.2.4.
zi,j Composition of component j for depth i.
NOTE: 1. The alpha keyword T is optional; it should be entered only if

the temperature dependency option is used. Do not enter the
parentheses.
00 2. Corner point geometry must be used in the model. The areal

location of the composition versus depth tables must be (x,y)
coordinates, rather than gridblock (i,j) indices.
00 3. Each composition versus depth table must have the areal

location specified in order for the option to interpolate
properly. Both constant and variable areal location specification
may be used in the same data set.
00 4. There must be as many sets if IEQUIL data (Section 4.2.2) as

composition versus depth tables. This allows VIP-COMP to
calculate phase pressure versus depth tables for each
composition table using the standard method. As a result, each
grid block must be assigned to one of the IEQUIL regions, even
though the final composition of each block will be derived by
interpolation from all the tables.
00 5. The resulting composition distribution is not in capillary-

gravity equilibrium. As a result, some initial fluid movement
will occur even without production and injection.
00 6. There are no bounds placed on the interpolated fluid

compositions other than to normalize them to sum to 1.0. As a
result, areas of the model with no measurements nearby may
encounter extrapolated values of composition that are
inconsistent. To prevent this unconstrained extrapolation, it is
recommended to enter additional tables of composition to
better control computations in areas without measured data.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-227

4.4.13 Pedersen Viscosity Correlation (VISPE) (VIP-COMP)

00 For VIP-THERM, see Section 4.4.11.
VISPE (ipvt)
VISK
i ki
. . .
VISKJ
i j Xij
. . . . . .
ENDVIS
00 Definitions:
VISPE The keyword for invoking the Pedersen viscosity

options.
ipvt PVT table number. If ipvt is not input, the Pedersen

viscosity correlation will be used for all equation of
state tables. If ipvt is input, the Pedersen viscosity
parameters will be used for only that particular
table. Different equations of state can use different
Pedersen parameters.
i Index for ki.

i Component i.
j Component j.

Default is 0.
ENDVIS This keyword marks the end of the Pedersen

viscosity option input.

4-228 Landmark - R2003.4


viscosity prediction. To invoke the Pedersen viscosity option, a keyword
"VISPE" should be entered between the PVT data and the surface
separation data input. The user has the option of specifying binary
entered. The default values are zero for all the interacting coefficients Xij
and the following values for the coefficients kj. Only those data
overwriting the default values need to be entered. 00
00 k1 = 9.74602
k2 = 18.0834
k3 = 4126.66
k4 = 44.6055
k5 = 0.976544
k6 = 81.8134
k7 = 15649.9
00 Examples:
00 OILMF 1
0.0001 0.2917 0.0045 0.0024 0.1538 0.3003 0.1095 0.1377
GASMF 1
X X X X X X X X
VISPE
VISK
1 42.5
2 0.0002279
3 11770
4 600.3
5 16.49
6 1614
7 0.05552.
VISKJ
35 -0.36409
36 -0.38517
37 -0.8
38 -0.62763
ENDVIS
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-229

4.4.14 Gas Plant Data Input (GASPLANT) (VIP-COMP or VIP-ENCORE)
GASPLANT
NKEY ikey ibat
KEYCMP
vkcmp1 (vkcmp2... vkcmpj ... vkcmpNI)
(enter number of KEY component plus composition values for
interpolation, j = 1 to number of interpolation points, NI)
PLNTRY
pr1,1 (pr1,2 ... pr1,j ... pr1,NI)
pr2,1 (pr2,2 ... pr2,j ... pr2,NI)
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
pri,1 (pri,2 ... pri,j ... pri,NI)
. . . . . .
prNC,1 (prNC,2 ... prNC,j ... prNC,NI)
(enter the plant liquid molar recovery fractions for each
interpolation point, j = 1 to number of interpolation values, NI
and repeat for all components, i = 1 to the number of components,
NC)
00 Definitions:
NKEY Alpha label indicating that the key component plus

fraction number and battery are to be read. The
cards KEYCMP and PLNTRY defined below should
follow the NKEY card, as all values correspond to
ibat, the battery defined on this card.
ikey The number of the key component plus fraction to

be used in the liquid recovery fraction table look up.
The sum of the well stream over all mole fractions
from the key component plus all the following
components are used in the table look up of
component liquid recovery values.
ibat The battery number of the Gas Plant.
KEYCMP Alpha label indicating the key component plus over

all mole fractions are to be entered. These are the
sum of key component plus mole fractions that are
to be used in the liquid recovery fraction table look
up. The key component plus fraction is used for
ibat, the battery defined on the NKEY card.
vkcmp The value of the sum of key component plus

fraction to be used as an interpolation value. There
are NI (number of interpolation point values) to be
read. They should cover the range of sums that are
to be expected in the run. The range of values on
this card should be between 0. and 1. NI is
4-230 Landmark - R2003.4

determined by the number of values read on the

card.
PLNTRY Alpha label indicating that the separate liquid

recovery fractions will be entered. The liquid
recovery fraction is the molar fraction of the
component that will be separated to the liquid
stream. The plant recovery values are for ibat, the
battery that was defined on the NKEY card.
pr The fraction of the component that will be

separated to the liquid stream in the Gas Plant. The
liquid recovery fractions are entered for each
component as a function of the key component plus
mole fraction and one value must be entered for NI
points and for each component. The data must be
ordered so that the liquid recovery fractions should
be entered for component 1 for all values of key
component plus fraction interpolation points (NI).
The next card is for component 2 recovery fractions
at NI points. This continues until all component
values have been read. In all there should be (NI *
NC) values read. The values must be between 0.
and 1.
00 Notes:
■ Input to a gas plant is the total well stream, while output is determined
by the molar liquid recovery fractions. There are no surface flash
calculations as are carried out with a normal surface separator.
■ A gasplant can be entered in VIP-CORE and/or the simulation

modules. Surface batteries in addition to those defined in VIP-CORE
may be input, and those defined in VIP-CORE can be redefined in the
simulation modules.
■ The user may optionally enter the surface separator equation of state
parameters. These parameters will be used for the stock tank density
calculations to obtain the surface rates. The new equation of state
parameters must follow the last stage of the battery to which they
apply. The values of the separator equation of state parameters will
default to the reservoir if not given.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-231

00 Example:
C=================================
C GAS PLANT SURFACE SEPARATOR
C=================================
GASPLANT
NKEY 6 1
KEYCMP
C DEFINE KEY COMPONENT PLUS FRACTIONS (NC = 6 TO 8)
C NUMBER OF INTERPOLATION POINTS (NI = 11)
.9999 .108 .104 .098 .075 .065 .047 .028 .018 .010 .000
C DEFINE COMPONENT LIQUID RECOVERIES (NI = 11, NC = 8)
.0240 .0240 .0240 .0220 .0170 .0140 .0100 .0050 .0030 .0020 .0020
.0070 .0070 .0070 .0060 .0050 .0040 .0030 .0010 .0010 .0000 .0000
.0610 .0610 .0590 .0560 .0430 .0370 .0270 .0140 .0090 .0060 .0060
.1790 .1790 .1750 .1790 .1370 .1220 .0920 .0550 .0400 .0290 .0290
.4680 .4680 .4640 .4530 .4000 .3710 .3050 .2200 .1770 .1480 .1480
.9960 .9960 .9960 .9960 .9940 .9930 .9890 .9790 .9690 .9590 .9590
1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
4.4.15 Carbon Dioxide Solubility in Water Option (CO2TAB) (VIP-COMP)
NOTE: CO2 solubility tables must follow all mole fraction and surface
separation data.
00 Use of this option allows carbon dioxide to dissolve in water and provides
for the dependence of water volume factor and viscosity upon carbon
dioxide content.
00 Use of this option is restricted as follows:
1. Temperature dependence is not allowed.
2. CO2 must be defined as component 1.
00 The input data describes water CO2 content and water properties for
water at equilibrium with 100% CO2 vapor.
(1) CO2TAB (STD)

(2) psw1 rsw1 bw1 cw1 vw1
psw2 rsw2 bw2 cw2 vw2
. . . . .
. . . . .
0. 0. bwn cwn vwn
4-232 Landmark - R2003.4

00 Definitions:
STD Indicates units of rsw1 are SCF of CO2/STB of water

(SCM/STCM). The default is mass of CO2/100
mass units of water.
pswi Values of saturation pressure for CO2/water

system, psia (kPa).
rswi Values of quantity of CO2 dissolved in water at

equilibrium at pswi.
bwi Values of formation volume factor of CO2 saturated

water at pswi, RB/STB (CM/STCM).
cwi Values of water compressibility at pswi, vol/vol/

psi (vol/vol/kPa).
vwi Values of CO2 saturated water viscosity at pswi, cp.
00 Water formation volume factor is computed internally as follows:

sat
bw = bw (rsw)
sat
cw = cw (rsw)
sat
pw = psw (rsw)
sat sat
Bw = 1 ⁄ bw
sat sat sat

Bw = B w ( 1 + c w ( P – p w ) ) , STB/RB (STCM/CM)
00 Notes:
■ At least two data cards are required.
■ The last data card (pswn = 0, rswn = 0) defines pure water properties.
■ Saturated water volume factor, water compressibility, and water

viscosity are functions of water CO2 content only.
■ Aquifer blocks are initialized at equilibrium with the nonexistent oil

phase.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-233

4.5 Black Oil PVT + (VIP-ENCORE)

PVT property data are input using tables based on either 1) black-oil
laboratory data or 2) equilibrium K-values as a function of pressure. These
tables are input subject to the following restrictions: 00
■ Both table types cannot appear in the same dataset.
■ Table numbers for each type of table must increase consecutively.
■ The number of oil PVT tables read must be greater than or equal to the
maximum value in the IPVT array (Section 5.14).
■ Only one PVT table can apply to any one equilibrium region (see
Section 5.28). However, one PVT table can apply to any number of
different equilibrium regions.
Saturated liquid is described by tabulating properties as functions of

saturation pressure. For each saturation pressure entry, values also need to
be entered to describe the undersaturated VO and BO curves. The
undersaturated curves describe VO and BO for pressures above the
saturation pressure. See Figure 4-9. 00
00
Bo Vo
Figure 4-9: Liquid Volume Factor and Liquid Viscosity
00 Two distinct types of black oil tables may be entered. One type of input
uses the BOTAB table. This approach is best when the results of a
differential liberation experiment are available. The user can input the
experimental results directly, and the simulator can account for variations
in produced gas gravity. Separator calculations are treated independently,
so that changes in separator conditions are allowed. Internally, data is
converted to K-value data and internal calculations are performed using
K-values and compositions.
00 Alternatively, black oil table data may be input with a combination of the
BOETAB, BOOTAB, BODTAB, BOGTAB, and BDGTAB tables. The
internal representation of these tables is more traditional, because black oil
4-234 Landmark - R2003.4

table data are retained in their original input form. Additionally, it is

expected that this data has already been adjusted to implicitly account for
separator conditions.
00 The user may choose this alternate form of black oil table data, which we
refer to as the modified black oil approach, for a number of reasons.
Among them are:
1. The modified approach interpolates directly from the input tables.
2. The modified approach can be used to control the amount of

vaporization and oil swelling. It can represent four different cases:
a. Oil swelling without vaporization. This is the traditional black oil

model. The BOTAB input format will always lead to some degree
of oil vaporization, because of non-zero K-values, but the modified
approach can ensure zero vaporization.
b. Vaporization without swelling.
c. Vaporization with swelling.
d. No vaporization or swelling, i.e., no mass transfer between

hydrocarbon phases.
3. The modified black oil tables are more flexible because they allow for
separate input of oil phase and gas phase tables. This can be
considerably more convenient, especially for computer-generated
black oil data. The modified tables are also considerably more flexible
for the input of undersaturated data, both in terms of the form of the
data and the location of the data points. They are also more
convenient in that they allow data to be monotonically increasing or
decreasing.
00 The original BOTAB table does not allow for the direct specification of a
heavy component in the gas phase, so it cannot be used for gas condensate
systems. The modified tables allow the user to specify solution oil-gas
ratios, which makes them suitable for modeling gas condensate systems.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-235

4.5.1 Black Oil Laboratory Data (VIP-ENCORE)

PVT data for VIP-ENCORE is entered directly from results routinely
reported in laboratory differential expansion and constant composition
expansion experiments performed at reservoir temperature. No
adjustment should be made for separator conditions, since VIP-ENCORE
is an extended black-oil model in which phase and volumetric behavior in
the reservoir is distinct from that in the separators. The separators are
defined by direct input of laboratory separator test data. 00
Alternatively, the conventional black-oil adjustment of the differential

expansion test data (oil volume factors, gas-oil ratios, and gas gravities)
may be performed and surface separation data omitted. A default
separator is provided for this case which gives "flash" volumetrics (oil
volume factor and gas-oil ratio) equivalent to the input "differential"
volumetrics if the gas gravities have been set to the constant surface gas
value. Use of the adjusted data with default separators simplifies VIP-
ENCORE to the level of a conventional black-oil simulator in which
surface volumes of oil and gas are conserved. 00
Minimum data requirements include the following (items 2, 3, and 5 are

adjusted values if VIP-ENCORE is being run in the conventional black-oil
mode): 00
1. Density and molecular weight of:
a. The residual oil from the differential expansion, or
b. The reservoir oil at the original bubblepoint.
2. Solution gas-oil ratio Rs as a function of pressure under saturated

conditions.
3. Oil formation volume factor Bo as a function of pressure under

saturated conditions.
4. Gas compressibility factor (z-factor) or gas formation volume factor Bg

as a function of pressure for the equilibrium gas at each stage of the
differential expansion.
5. Gas gravity relative to air for the gas removed at each stage of the
differential expansion. In most "black-oil" models this is treated as a
constant, but gas gravity actually changes with pressure and is
reported at each stage by the PVT laboratory. If the correct pressure
variation is unknown, a constant value can be entered at each
pressure.
6. Viscosity of oil as a function of pressure under saturated conditions.

This is normally measured from oil samples removed from a parallel
experiment to the one being used for volumetric data.
4-236 Landmark - R2003.4

7. Gas viscosity as a function of pressure for the equilibrium gas. This is

normally calculated by the PVT laboratory, rather than being
measured.
8. The volume of undersaturated oil relative to the volume of the same

oil at its saturation pressure, as a function of pressure elevation above
the saturation pressure (p-psat). These values can be taken directly
from the relative volume data normally reported among the results of
a constant composition expansion experiment.
9. Viscosity of oil measured at undersaturated conditions relative to the

viscosity of the same oil at its saturation pressure. Values are tabulated
as a function of pressure elevation above the saturation pressure (p-
psat).
Since the molecular weight of the residual oil is not usually reported in the
differential expansion test, the preferred method is to use values of oil
density and molecular weight at the original bubblepoint of the reservoir
oil. The molecular weight of the bubblepoint oil is easily calculated from
the compositional analysis of the reservoir fluid usually given in the
reservoir fluid study. Residual oil molecular weight can be approximated
but will lead to inaccuracies in produced oil molecular weight and molar
production rates. Surface volumes will not be affected. 00
The data for undersaturated conditions is normally available only for the
original oil sample. (Oil that is saturated at the measured bubblepoint of
the reservoir.) This is the only data required by the program, but in the
event that undersaturated data has been measured for samples at various
stages of depletion, the additional data can be used to better define
volumetric behavior in the undersaturated region. 00
Similarly, oil properties at saturated conditions are normally reported only

at pressures at or below the original bubblepoint of the oil sample. In gas
injection projects oil may become saturated at pressures well above the
original bubblepoint. Data under such conditions can be determined from
the "swelling test" performed by some PVT laboratories. If such data is
available, it should be included in the data provided to the program. If
unavailable, the user of the program should extrapolate the available data
to saturation pressures as high as any that will be encountered in the
simulation. Otherwise, the program will extrapolate in a linear fashion as
required during the course of the simulation. 00
Since the simulator solves all problems, including black-oil, using

multicomponent logic, differential liberation data is internally converted
into a compositional format. Properties derived from the input data
include oil density, oil z-factor, molecular weight of both oil and gas at
each stage of expansion, mole fraction of light and heavy components in
both the oil and gas at each stage, and the equilibrium K-values of each
component at each stage. If the gas formation volume factor Bg is input,
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-237

the gas z-factor will also be derived. During the simulation, K-values and
z-factors are used for phase behavior and density calculations, rather than
Rs, Bo, and Bg values.
The PVT data for saturated conditions (Type 5 Data Cards) is subjected to
a consistency check that determines whether the data could lead to a
nonpositive total hydrocarbon compressibility. Total hydrocarbon
compressibility is given by the following equation:
1 dV h
00 c h = ------ ---------- ,
V h dp
where Vh is the total hydrocarbon volume at reservoir conditions. The test

used by the program requires that the following equation be satisfied for
all values of pressure covered by the input data:
dR s dB o
00 B g --------- – --------- > 0 .
dp dp
This simply states that; for an increase in pressure, the reduction in total
volume due to gas going into solution must be greater than the increase
due to oil swelling. If Bg is in RB/MSCF, dRs/dp is in (MSCF/STB)/psi
and dBo/dp is in (RB/STB)/psi, the units will be correct. Bg should be
evaluated at the lower pressure.
The consistency check can be disabled by entering a NOCHK card in the

utility data (Section 2.2.11.3).
4-238 Landmark - R2003.4

4.5.2 Black Oil PVT Data (BOTAB) (VIP-ENCORE)
4.5.2.1 Three Phase Data
(1) BOTAB ipvt (itype)
DOB WTRO
DOR WTRO
(2) API WTRO
DOS WTOS PSAT
APIS WTOS PSAT
dob wtro
dor wtro
(3) api wtro
dos wtos psat
apis wtos psat
ZG
(4) PSAT RS BO GR VO VG
BG
zg
(5) psat rs bo gr vo vg
bg
(At least two data cards are required here.)
(6) PSAT psat1 (psat2). . . (psati)
(7) DP BOFAC VOFAC (BOFAC VOFAC) . . . (BOFAC VOFAC)
(8) dp bofac1 vofac1 (bofac2 vofac2) . . . (bofaci vofaci)

(Only one data card is required here.)
00 Definitions (1):
00 (1) BOTAB Alpha label indicating the data being read are
differential expansion data.
ipvt The PVT table number. This number corresponds to

values in the IPVT array (Section 5.14).
itype Oil type when the PVT interpolation option is in

use. Not used otherwise.
00 Definitions (2):
DOB Alpha label indicating that the data value that

appears in this location on the following card is the
density of the residual oil at standard conditions as
defined in Section 2.2.4.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-239

DOR Alpha label indicating that the data value that

density of the residual oil at reservoir temperature
and standard pressure as defined in Section 2.2.4.
API Alpha label indicating that the data value that

API gravity of the residual oil at standard
conditions as defined in Section 2.2.4.
DOS Alpha label indicating that the data value that

density of saturated oil at psat and reservoir
temperature.
APIS Alpha label indicating that the data value that

API gravity of saturated oil at psat and reservoir
temperature.
WTRO Alpha label indicating that the data value that

molecular weight of the residual oil. This alpha
label must be used if the previous alpha label on
this data line is either DOB, DOR, or API. When the
PVT interpolation option is in use, this label or
WTOS must appear for the first oil type only.
Otherwise, this label must appear for all tables.
WTOS Alpha label indicating that the data value that

molecular weight of the saturated oil at psat. This
alpha label must be used if the previous alpha label
on this data line is either DOS or APIS. When the
PVT interpolation option is in use, this label or
WTRO must appear for the first oil type only.
Otherwise, this label must appear for all tables.
PSAT Alpha label indicating that the data value that

saturation pressure at which the saturated oil
density (dos or apis) and molecular weight (wtos)
are given.
4-240 Landmark - R2003.4

00 Definitions (3):
dob Density of the residual oil in the differential

expansion experiment at standard conditions, gm/
cc (gm/cc).
dor Density of the residual oil in the differential

expansion experiment at reservoir temperature and
standard pressure, gm/cc (gm/cc).
api API gravity of the residual oil in the differential

expansion at standard conditions, ˚API (˚API).
dos Density of the saturated oil in the differential

expansion experiment at psat and reservoir
temperature, gm/cc (gm/cc).
apis API gravity of the saturated oil in the differential

expansion experiment at psat and reservoir
temperature, ˚API (˚API).
wtro Molecular weight of the residual oil. This can be

approximated if data is unavailable. A value in the
range of 175 to 200 is suitable in many cases.
However, this approximation will lead to errors in
produced oil molecular weight and molar
production rates (surface volumes will not be
affected). If the saturation (bubblepoint) value of
molecular weight is known, it is preferable to input
wtos instead (along with dos or apis and psat). The
value wtro is entered only if either dob, dor, or api
is the previous entry on this data line. When the
PVT interpolation option is in use, this value (or
wtos) must be supplied for the first oil type only.
Otherwise, a value must be supplied for all tables.
wtos Molecular weight of the saturated oil at psat. This

value is entered only if either dos or apis is the
previous entry on this data line. Otherwise, wtro is
entered. When the PVT interpolation option is in
use, this value (or wtro) must be supplied for the
first oil type only. Otherwise, a value must be
supplied for all tables.
psat The saturation pressure corresponding to dos or

apis and wtos. This value is entered only if wtos is
the previous entry on this data line.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-241

00 Definitions (4):
PSAT Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in

this location on the following data cards are values
of saturation pressure at successive pressure steps
in the differential expansion experiment.
RS Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in

of solution gas-oil ratio.
BO Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in

of oil formation volume factor.
ZG Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in

of gas compressibility factor (gas z-factor).
BG Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in

of gas formation volume factor.
GR Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in

of gas gravity.
VO Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in

of saturated oil viscosity.
VG Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in

of gas viscosity.
00 Definitions (5):
psat Values of saturation pressure at successive pressure

steps in the differential expansion experiment, psia
(kPa). These values must be monotonically
decreasing.
rs Values of solution gas-oil ratio corresponding to

each value of psat, SCF/STB (SCM/STCM).
bo Values of oil formation volume factor

corresponding to each value of psat, rb/STB (cm/
STCM).
zg Values of gas compressibility factor (z-factor)

corresponding to each value of psat.
4-242 Landmark - R2003.4

bg Values of gas formation volume factors

corresponding to each value of psat, rb/MSCF (cm/
SCM).
gr Values of gas gravity corresponding to each value of

psat. Values are measured as density relative to air
at standard conditions.
vo Values of saturated oil viscosity corresponding to

each value of psat, cp (cp).
vg Values of gas viscosity corresponding to each value

of psat, cp (cp).
00 Definitions (6):
PSAT Alpha label indicating that data values following

the label on this card are values of saturation
pressure.
psati The value of saturation pressure to which the bofaci

and vofaci values that appear in this location
correspond, psia (kPa). Only one value of psati is
required, since undersaturated volume factor data
are ordinarily available only at the initial saturation
pressure.
00 Definitions (7):
DP Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in

this location represent values of pressure relative to
the appropriate saturation pressure (p-psat).
BOFAC Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in

this location represent values of oil formation
volume factor at pressure p relative to the volume
factor at pressure psat. [bo(p)/bo(psat)].
VOFAC Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in

this location represent values of oil viscosity at
pressure p relative to the viscosity at pressure psat.
[vo(p)/vo(psat)].
00 Definitions (8):
dp Values of pressure relative to the corresponding

saturation pressure, psi (kPa). [p-psati].
bofaci Values of oil formation volume factor at pressure p

relative to the volume factor at pressure psati.
[bo(p)/bo(psati)].
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-243

vofaci Values of oil viscosity at pressure p relative to the

viscosity at pressure psati. [vo(p)/vo(psati)].
00 Notes:
1. There may only be one data card for:
a. a Type 6 Data Card,
b. a Type 7 Title Card,
c. each value of dp on a Type 8 Data Card.
2. The following data restrictions apply to the Type 5 Data Cards:
a. Saturation pressure must decrease (psatj < psatj-1).
b. The last psat value must equal the standard pressure PS (Section
2.2.4).
c. Solution gas-oil ratio must decrease (rsj < rsj-1).
d. Oil formation volume factor must decrease (boj < boj-1).
e. If applicable, gas formation volume factor must increase (bgj > bgj-
1).
f. Oil viscosity must increase (voj > voj-1).
g. Gas viscosity must decrease (vgj < vgj-1).
3. The following data restrictions apply to the Type 6 Data Card:
a. Saturation pressure must be greater than the standard pressure PS

(Section 2.2.4).
b. If applicable, saturation pressure must decrease (psati < psati-1).
a. Relative pressure must be positive (dpj > 0).
b. If applicable, relative pressure must decrease (dpj < dpj-1).
c. Relative oil volume factor must be less than 1.0 (bofacij < 1.).
d. If applicable, relative oil volume factor must increase (bofacij >

bofacij-1).
e. Relative oil viscosity must be no less than 1.0 (vofacij ≥ 1.)
f. Relative oil viscosity must not increase (vofacij < vofacij-1).
4-244 Landmark - R2003.4

5. The BOFAC and VOFAC alpha labels on the Type 7 Data Card are
repeated as a pair for each value of psati entered on the Type 6 Data
Card.
6. The bofaci and vofaci values on the Type 8 Data Card are repeated as a
pair for each value of psati entered on the Type 6 Data Card.
7. A non-zero value for solution gas-oil ratio (Type 5 Data Card) in the
last entry of the table (at standard pressure) is allowed but is not
physically possible. Gas cannot be liberated by cooling a saturated
fluid from reservoir temperature to standard temperature at constant
(standard) pressure. A non-zero value would indicate a composition
change between the conditions for the last entry in the table and
standard conditions. This implied composition change is not
considered.
8. If the initial saturation pressure is not input (psat, Type 3 Data Card),
the default value is equal to the saturation pressure at the gas-oil
contact in the IEQUIL table (Section 4.2.1.2).
9. When the PVT interpolation option is in use, PVT data must be

supplied for each oil type option in each PVT region. The data order
must be by increasing region number. Within each region the data
order must be by increasing oil type number with API gravity
decreasing as the oil type number increases. Molecular weight data is
required for the first oil type of each region and may not be given for
other oil types.
00 Example:
00 C
BOTAB 1
API WTRO
27.40 200
PSAT RS BO ZG GR VO VG
00 6014.7 1128.1 1.562 0.9163 0.80000 0.529 0.03286

5014.7 931.3 1.476 0.8819 0.80000 0.712 0.02893
4514.7 822.8 1.421 0.8647 0.80000 0.803 0.02697
3514.7 627.3 1.333 0.8212 0.80000 0.983 0.02349
2514.7 458.3 1.268 0.7990 0.80000 1.183 0.01979
2014.7 378.0 1.239 0.8059 0.80000 1.319 0.01655
1514.7 296.8 1.208 0.8262 0.80000 1.513 0.01655
1014.7 212.0 1.172 0.8579 0.80000 1.808 0.01415
514.7 122.5 1.129 0.9005 0.80000 2.215 0.01324
14.65 0.0 1.059 0.9551 0.80000 3.390 0.01255
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-245

4.5.2.2 WATEROIL Option
(1) BOTAB ipvt (itype)
DOB WTRO GR
(2) DOR WTRO GR
API WTRO GR
dob wtro gr
(3) dor wtro gr
api wtro gr
(4) PSAT RS BO VO
(5) psat rs bo vo
(6) PSAT psat1 (psat2). . . (psati)
(8) dp bofac1 vofac1 (bofac2 vofac2). . .(bofaci vofaci)

(Only one data card is required here.)
00 Definitions (1):
BOTAB Alpha label indicating the data being read are

differential expansion data.

itype Oil type when the PVT interpolation option is in

use. Not used otherwise.
00 Definitions (2):
DOB Alpha label indicating that the data value that

density of the residual oil at standard conditions as
defined in Section 2.2.4.
DOR Alpha label indicating that the data value that

density of the residual oil at reservoir temperature
and standard pressure as defined in Section 2.2.4.
API Alpha label indicating that the data value that

4-246 Landmark - R2003.4

API gravity of the residual oil at standard

conditions as defined in Section 2.2.4.
WTRO Alpha label indicating that the data value that

molecular weight of the residual oil. When the PVT
interpolation option is in use, this label must appear
for the first oil type only. Otherwise, this label must
appear for all tables.
GR Alpha label indicating that the data value

appearing in this location on the following card is
the gas gravity of the solution gas.
00 Definitions (3):
dob Density of the residual oil in the differential

expansion experiment at standard conditions, gm/
cc (gm/cc).
dor Density of the residual oil in the differential

expansion experiment at reservoir temperature and
standard pressure, gm/cc (gm/cc).
api API gravity of the residual oil in the differential

expansion at standard conditions, ˚API (˚API).

approximated if data is unavailable. A value in the
range of 175 to 200 is suitable in many cases. When
the PVT interpolation option is in use, this value
must appear for the first oil type only. Otherwise,
the value must appear for all tables.
gr The gas gravity of the solution gas.
00 Definitions (4):

of saturation pressure at successive pressure steps
in the differential expansion experiment.
RS Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in

of solution gas-oil ratio.
BO Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in

of oil formation volume factor.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-247


of saturated oil viscosity.
00 Definitions (5):
psat Values of saturation pressure at successive pressure

steps in the differential expansion experiment, psia
(kPa). These values must be monotonically
decreasing.
rs Values of solution gas-oil ratio corresponding to

each value of psat, SCF/STB (SCM/STCM).
bo Values of oil formation volume factor

corresponding to each value of psat, rb/STB (cm/
STCM).
vo Values of saturated oil viscosity corresponding to

each value of psat, cp (cp).
00 Definitions (6):

pressure.
psati The value of saturation pressure to which the botaci

and votaci values that appear on the Type 8 Data
Cards correspond, psia (Kpa). Only one value of
psati is required, since undersaturated volume
factor data are ordinarily available only at the initial
saturation pressure.
00 Definitions (7):

this location on the Type 8 Data Cards represent
values of pressure relative to the appropriate
saturation pressure (p-psat).

values of oil formation volume factor at pressure p
relative to the volume factor at pressure psat.
[bo(p)/bo(psat)].

values of oil viscosity at pressure p relative to the
viscosity at pressure psat. [vo(p)/vo(psat)].
4-248 Landmark - R2003.4

00 Definitions (8):

saturation pressure, as it appears on the Type 6 Data
Card, psi (kPa). [p-psati].

[bo(p)/bo(psati)].

NOTE: The notes in Section 4.5.2.1 also apply to this section.
4.5.3 Gas PVT Data for the GASWATER Option (BGTAB) (VIP-ENCORE)
(1) BGTAB ipvt

(2) GR
(3) gr
ZG
(4) PSAT VG
BG
zg
(5) psat vg
bg
00 Definitions (1):
BGTAB Alpha label indicating the data being read are gas
properties.

00 Definitions (2):
GR Alpha label indicating that the value appearing in

this location on the following card is the gas gravity.
00 Definition (3):
gr Value of gas gravity.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-249

00 Definitions (4):

of pressure.

BG Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in

of gas formation volume factor.

of gas viscosity.
00 Definitions (5):
psat Values of pressure, psia (kPa).

bg Values of gas formation volume factors

corresponding to each value of psat, rb/MSCF (cm/
SCM). If applicable, gas formation volume factor
must increase (bg(j) > bg (j-1)).

of psat, cp (cp). Gas viscosity must decrease (vg(j) <
vg(j-1)).
NOTE: The notes in Section 4.5.2.1 also apply to this section.
4-250 Landmark - R2003.4

4.5.4 Modified Black Oil

00 Use the BOETAB keyword to specify both oil and gas properties in the same
table. Alternately, use the BOOTAB or BODTAB keyword to specify oil
properties separately. Then use the BDGTAB or BOGTAB keyword to specify
gas properties. Examples are provided at the end of this section.
4.5.4.1 BOETAB
(1)BOETAB ipvt
(2) DOB WTRO DGB

API GR
(3) dob wtro dgb

api gr
(4)PSAT RS RV BO BG VO VG
(5)psat rs rv bo bg vo vg
(At least two Type 5 data cards are required.)
 psat   
(6) PSAT
psat 1
 2  . . .  psat i 
RS rs 1  rs   rs 
 2   i 
(Only one Type 6 data card is required. Cards 7 and 8 must be
repeated for each Card 6.)
 VO  . .  VO 
P BO VO .  BO
(7)  
BO

DP BOFAC VOFAC  BOFAC VOFAC   BOFAC VOFAC 
p bo 1 vo 1  bo 2 vo 2   bo i vo i 
(8) .  . .  
dp  bofac vofac   bofac vofac 
bofac 1 vofac 1  2 2   i i 
(Only one Type 8 data card is required for each Type 7 data
card.)
p1  p   
(9) P  2  . . .  pi 
RVSAT rvsat 1  rvsat   rvsat 
 2   i 

BG VG  BG VG   BG VG 
(10) RV .   . .  
BGFAC VGFAC  BGFAC VGFAC   BGFAC VGFAC 
 bg 2 vg 2   bg i vg i 
. . . 
bg 1 vg 1
(11) rv
bgfac 1 vgfac 1  bgfac vgfac   bgfac vgfac 
 2 2   i i 
card.)
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-251

00 Definitions (1):
(1) BOETAB Alpha label indicating the data being read are extended
black oil data, with both oil and gas data read in the same
table.

values in the IPVT array.
00 Definitions (2):
DOB Alpha label indicating that the data value that appears in
this location on the following card is the density of the
residual oil at standard conditions as defined in Section
2.2.4.
API Alpha label indicating that the data value that appears in
this location on the following card is the API gravity of
the residual oil at standard conditions as defined in
Section 2.2.4.
WTRO Alpha label indicating that the data value that appears in
this location on the following card is the molecular
weight of the residual oil. This alpha label must be used
if the previous alpha label on this data line is either DOB,
DOR, or API.
DGB Alpha label indicating that the data value that appears in
gas at standard conditions as defined in Section 2.2.4.
GR Alpha label indicating that the data value that appears in

this location on the following card is the specific gravity
of the gas at standard conditions as defined in Section
2.2.4.
Definitions (3): 00
dob Density of the residual oil at standard conditions, gm/cc

(gm/cc).
api API gravity of the residual oil at standard conditions,

˚API (˚API).

approximated if data is unavailable. A value in the range
of 175 to 200 is suitable in many cases. However, this
approximation will lead to errors in produced oil
molecular weight and molar production rates (surface
volumes will not be affected).
4-252 Landmark - R2003.4

dgb Density of the evolved gas at standard conditions, gm/cc

(gm/cc).
gr Specific gravity of the evolved gas at standard conditions,

dimensionless.
Definitions (4): 00
PSAT Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in this

location on the following data cards are values of
saturation pressure at successive pressure steps.
RS Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in this

solution gas-oil ratio.
RV Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in this

solution oil-gas ratio.
BO Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in this

location on the following data cards are values of oil
formation volume factor.
BG Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in this

location on the following data cards are values of gas
VO Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in this

saturated oil viscosity.
VG Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in this

viscosity.
00 Definitions (5):
psat Values of saturation pressure at successive pressure steps,

psia (kPa). These values must either be monotonically
decreasing, or monotonically increasing.
rs Values of solution gas-oil ratio corresponding to each

value of psat, SCF/STB (SCM/STCM). If the RSM
keyword is used, units of rs are in MSCF/STB(MSCM/
STCM). If values of psat are monotonically increasing,
values of rs must also be monotonically increasing. If
values of psat are monotonically decreasing, values of rs
must also be monotonically decreasing. To specify a dead
oil, all values of rs should be set to zero in the saturated
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-253

data table. For dead oils, data card types 6, 7, and 8 are
not allowed.
rv Values of solution oil-gas ratio corresponding to each

value of psat, STB/MSCF (SCM/STCM). If all values of
rv are zero in the saturated data table, data card types 9,
10, and 11 are not allowed.
bo Values of oil formation volume factor corresponding to

each value of psat, rb/STB (cm/STCM). For a live oil,
(i.e. rs values are greater than 0) , values of bo must
monotonically increase if values of psat are
monotonically increasing, or values of bo must
monotonically decrease, if values of psat are
monotonically decreasing. For a dead oil, (i.e. rs values
are all equal to 0), values of bo must monotonically
decrease if values of psat are monotonically increasing,
and values of bo must monotonically increase if values of
psat are monotonically decreasing.
bg Values of gas formation volume factors corresponding to

each value of psat, rb/MSCF (cm/SCM). For a dry gas,
(i.e. all rv values equal 0), values of bg must
monotonically increasing, or values of bg must
monotonically increase, if values of psat are
monotonically decreasing.
vo Values of saturated oil viscosity, cp (cp) corresponding to

each value of psat. For a live oil, (i.e. values of rs are
greater than 0), values of vo must monotonically
decrease, if values of psat are monotonically increasing,
and values of vo must monotonically increase, if values
of psat are monotonically decreasing, For a dead oil (i.e.
values of rs are all equal to 0), values of vo must
monotonically increasing, and values of vo must
monotonically decrease if values of psat are
vg Values of gas viscosity, cp (cp), corresponding to each

value of psat. For a dry gas (i.e. values of rv are all equal
to 0), values of vg must monotonically increase if values
of psat are monotonically increasing, and values of vg
must monotonically decrease if values of psat are
4-254 Landmark - R2003.4

NOTE: If all values of zero in the RS column, the oil phase does not contain any
solution gas. Therefore, input of Data Card Types 6, 7, and 8 is not
permitted.
NOTE: Data Card Types 6, 7, and 8 may be repeated as a group as many times as
are necessary.
Definitions (6): 00
PSAT Alpha label indicating that data values following the

label on this card are values of saturation pressure. The
user may choose to input either psat by inputting the
PSAT keyword or rs values by inputting the RS
keyword.
RS Alpha label indicating that data values following the

label on this card are values of solution gas-oil ratio at the
saturation pressure. The user may choose to input either
psat by inputting the PSAT keyword or rs values by
inputting the RS keyword.
psati The value of saturation pressure to which the boi or

bofaci and voi or vofaci values that appear in this
location correspond, psia (kPa). Only one value of psati
is required, since undersaturated volume factor data are
ordinarily available only at the initial saturation pressure.
All values of psat entered must be greater than the
standard pressure PS. Values of psat must either
monotonically increase or monotonically decrease.
rsi The value of solution gas-oil ratio to which the boi or

location correspond, SCF/STB (SCM/STCM. Only one
value of rsi is required, since undersaturated volume
factor data are ordinarily available only at the initial
saturation pressure. Values of rs must either
00 Definitions (7):
P Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in this

location represent values of pressure. The user may
choose to either input relative pressures by inputting the
DP keyword, or absolute pressure by inputting the P
keyword.
DP Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in this

location represent values of pressure relative to the
appropriate saturation pressure (p-psati). The user may
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-255


keyword.

location represent values of oil formation volume factor
at pressure p or the equivalent solution gas-oil ratio, rs.
BOFAC Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in this

at pressure p relative to the volume factor at pressure
psat. [bo(p)/bo(psat)].

location represent values of oil viscosity at pressure p
VOFAC Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in this

relative to the viscosity at pressure psat. [vo(p)/
vo(psat)].
00 Definitions (8):
p Values of pressure, psi (kPa). Values of p must be greater

than the corresponding values of psat. Values of pressure
must either monotonically increase or monotonically
decrease.

saturation pressure, psi (kPa). [p-psati]. Values of dp
must be greater than 0. Also, values of dp must
boi Values of oil formation volume factor at pressure p.

Values of bo must be less than the corresponding value of
bo at psat. If values of p or dp are monotonically
decreasing, values of bo must be monotonically
increasing. If values of p or dp are monotonically
increasing, values of bo must be monotonically
decreasing.

relative to the volume factor at pressure psati. [bo(p)/
bo(psati)]. Values of bofac must be less than 1. If values
of p or dp are monotonically decreasing, values of bofac
must be monotonically increasing. If values of p or dp
are monotonically increasing, values of bofac must be
voi Values of oil viscosity at pressure p. Values of vo must be

greater than the corresponding value of vo at psat. If
4-256 Landmark - R2003.4

values of p or dp are monotonically decreasing, values of

vo must be monotonically decreasing. If values of p or
dp are monotonically increasing, values of vo must be
monotonically increasing.

viscosity at pressure psati. [vo(p)/vo(psati)].Values of
vofac must be greater than 1. If values of p or dp are
monotonically decreasing, values of vofac must be
monotonically decreasing. If values of p or dp are
monotonically increasing, values of vofac must be
NOTE: If all values of zero in the RV column, a dry gas is defined. Therefore,
input of Data Card Types 9, 10, and 11 cannot be permitted.
NOTE: Data Card Types 9, 10, and 11 may be repeated as a group as many times
as are necessary. However, one set is required.
00 Definitions (9):
P Alpha label indicating that data values following the

label on this card are values of pressure. The user has a
choice of inputting pressures by using the keyword P or
of inputting saturated oil-gas ratios by using the keyword
RVSAT. P is preferred over RVSAT because solution
oil-gas ratios are not guaranteed to be monotonic. If the
RV values in the saturated part of the table are not
monotonic, data cannot be input with the RVSAT
keyword.
RVSAT Alpha label indicating that data values following the

label on this card are values of the corresponding
saturated oil-gas ratio at the pressure. The user has a
keyword.
pi The value of pressure to which the bgi or bgfaci and voi

and vofaci values that appear in this location correspond,
psia (kPa). Only one value of pi is required. Pressure
must be greater than the pressure at standard conditions,
ps. Pressure must either monotonically increase or
decrease.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-257

rvsati The value of saturated oil-gas ratio to which the bgi or

bgfaci and voi and vofaci values that appear in this
location correspond, psia (kPa). Only one value of rvsati
is required. Oil-gas ratio must monotonically increase or
decrease.
Definitions (10): 00

location represent values of solution oil-gas ratio at
undersaturated conditions at that pressure.

location represent values of gas formation volume factor
at pressure p and solution oil-gas ratio, rv.
BGFAC Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in this

at pressure p and solution oil-gas ratio, rv, relative to the
volume factor at the saturated solution oil-gas ratio,
rvsat. [bg(rv)/bg(rvsat)].

location represent values of gas viscosity at pressure p
and solution oil-gas ratio, rv.
VGFAC Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in this

and solution oil-gas ratio, rv, relative to the viscosity at
the saturated solution oil-gas ratio, rvsat. [vo(rv)/
vo(rvsat)].
00 Definitions (12):
rv Values of solution oil-gas ratio, STB/MSCF (SCM/

STCM). Values of rv must monotonically increase or
decrease. Values of rv must be less than the
corresponding value at saturated conditions.
bgi Values of gas formation volume factor at pi and rv, RB/

MSCF (cm/SCM).
bgfaci Values of gas formation volume factor at solution oil gas

ratio rv relative to the volume factor at the saturated
solution oil-gas ratio, rvsati. [bo(rv)/bo(rvsati)].
vgi Values of gas viscosity at pressure pi and rv.
vgfaci Values of gas viscosity at pressure pi and solution oil-gas

ratio, rv, relative to the viscosity at the saturated solution
oil-gas ratio, rvsati. [vg(rv)/vg(rvsati)].
4-258 Landmark - R2003.4

4.5.4.2 BOOTAB
(1)BOOTAB ipvt
(2) DOB WTRO

API WTRO
(3) dob wtro

api wtro
(4)RS PSAT BO VO
(5)rs psat bo vo
 psat 
psat 1  psat 
(6) PSAT  2 
. . .  i 
RS rs 1  rs   rs 
 2   i 
  
P VO 
BO VO . BO VO
(7) . .  BO

DP BOFAC VOFAC  BOFAC VOFAC   BOFAC VOFAC 
p bo 1 
vo 1bo 2 vo 2   bo i vo i 
(8) .  . . 
dp bofac 1 vofac 1  bofac vofac   bofac vofac 
 2 2   i i 
(Only one Type 8 data card is required is for each Type 7
data card.)
00 Definitions (1):
(1) BOOTAB Alpha label indicating that live black oil data is being
read.

00 Definitions (2):
2.2.4.
Section 2.2.4.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-259


DOR, or API.
Definitions (3): 00

(gm/cc).

˚API (˚API).

Definitions (4): 00
RS Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in this

solution gas-oil ratio.



saturated oil viscosity.
00 Definitions (5):
rs Values of solution gas-oil ratio corresponding to each

value of psat, SCF/STB (SCM/STCM). If the RSM
keyword is used, units of rs are in MSCF/STB(MSCM/
STCM). If values of psat are monotonically increasing,
values of rs must also be monotonically increasing. If
values of psat are monotonically decreasing, values of rs
must also be monotonically decreasing. To specify a dead
oil, all values of rs should be set to zero in the saturated
data table. For dead oils, data card types 6, 7, and 8 are
not allowed.
4-260 Landmark - R2003.4


decreasing, or monotonically increasing.

each value of psat, rb/STB (cm/STCM). For a live oil,
(i.e. rs values are greater than 0) , values of bo must
monotonically increasing, or values of bo must
monotonically decreasing. For a dead oil, (i.e. rs values
are all equal to 0), values of bo must monotonically
decrease if values of psat are monotonically increasing,
and values of bo must monotonically increase if values of
psat are monotonically decreasing.

monotonically increasing, and values of bg must

each value of psat. For a live oil, (i.e. values of rs are
greater than 0), values of vo must monotonically
decrease, if values of psat are monotonically increasing,
and values of vo must monotonically increase, if values
of psat are monotonically decreasing, For a dead oil (i.e.
values of rs are all equal to 0), values of vo must
monotonically increasing, and values of vo must
monotonically decrease if values of psat are

NOTE: If all values are zero in the RS column, the oil phase does not contain any
solution gas. Therefore, input of Data Card Types 6, 7, and 8 is not
permitted.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-261

are necessary.
Definitions (6): 00
PSAT Alpha label indicating that data values following the

label on this card are values of saturation pressure. The
user may choose to input either psat by inputting the
PSAT keyword or rs values by inputting the RS
keyword.
RS Alpha label indicating that data values following the

label on this card are values of solution gas-oil ratio at the
saturation pressure. The user may choose to input either
psat by inputting the PSAT keyword or rs values by
inputting the RS keyword.
psati The value of saturation pressure to which the boi or

location correspond, psia (kPa). Only one value of psati
is required, since undersaturated volume factor data are
All values of psat entered must be greater than the
standard pressure PS. Values of psat must either
rsi The value of solution gas-oil ratio pressure to which the

boi or bofaci and voi or vofaci values that appear in this
location correspond, psia (kPa). Only one value of rsi is
required, since undersaturated volume factor data are
Values of rs must either monotonically increase or
monotonically decrease.
00 Definitions (7):
P Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in this

location represent values of pressure. The user may
keyword.
DP Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in this

location represent values of pressure relative to the
appropriate saturation pressure (p-psati). The user may
keyword.
4-262 Landmark - R2003.4


at pressure p or the equivalent solution gas-oil ratio, rs.
BOFAC Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in this

at pressure p relative to the volume factor at pressure
psat. [bo(p)/bo(psat)].

VOFAC Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in this

relative to the viscosity at pressure psat. [vo(p)/
vo(psat)].
00 Definitions (8):
p Values of pressure, psi (kPa). Values of p must be greater

than the corresponding values of psat. Values of pressure
must either monotonically increase or monotonically
decrease.

saturation pressure, psi (kPa). [p-psati]. Values of dp
must be greater than 0. Also, values of dp must
boi Values of oil formation volume factor at pressure p.

Values of bo must be less than the corresponding value of
bo at psat. If values of p or dp are monotonically
decreasing, values of bo must be monotonically
increasing. If values of p or dp are monotonically
increasing, values of bo must be monotonically
decreasing.

relative to the volume factor at pressure psati. [bo(p)/
bo(psati)]. Values of bofac must be less than 1. If values
of p or dp are monotonically decreasing, values of bofac
must be monotonically increasing. If values of p or dp
are monotonically increasing, values of bofac must be
voi Values of oil viscosity at pressure p. Values of vo must be

greater than the corresponding value of vo at psat. If
values of p or dp are monotonically decreasing, values of
vo must be monotonically decreasing. If values of p or
dp are monotonically increasing, values of vo must be
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-263


viscosity at pressure psati. [vo(p)/vo(psati)].Values of
vofac must be greater than 1. If values of p or dp are
monotonically decreasing, values of vofac must be
monotonically decreasing. If values of p or dp are
monotonically increasing, values of vofac must be
4.5.4.3 BODTAB
(1) BODTAB ipvt
00 (2) DOB WTRO

API WTRO
00 (3) dob wtro

api wtro
00 (4) PSAT BO VO
00 (5) psat bo vo
00 Definitions (1):
(1) BODTAB Alpha label indicating that dead black oil data is being
read.

00 Definitions (2):
2.2.4.
Section 2.2.4.
DOR, or API.
Definitions (3): 00
4-264 Landmark - R2003.4


(gm/cc).

˚API (˚API).

Definitions (4): 00



viscosity.
00 Definitions (5):


each value of psat, rb/STB (cm/STCM). Values of bo
monotonically increasing, and values of bo must

each value of psat. Values of vo must monotonically
increase if values of psat are monotonically increasing,
and values of vo must monotonically decrease if values
of psat are monotonically decreasing.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-265

4.5.4.4 BOGTAB
00 (1) BOGTAB ipvt
00 (2) DGB
GR
00 (3)
dgb
gr
00 (4) PSAT RV BG VG
00 (5) psat rv bg vg
p1  p   p 
(6) P  2   i 
00
RVSAT rvsat 1  rvsat  . . .  rvsat 

 2   i 

BG VG  BG VG   BG VG 
00 (7) RV .   . .  
BGFAC VGFAC  BGFAC VGFAC   BGFAC VGFAC 
 bg 2 vg 2   bg i vg i 
. . . 
bg 1 vg 1
(8) rv
 bgfac vgfac   bgfac vgfac 
00
bgfac 1 vgfac 1  2 2   i i 
card.)
00 Definitions (1):
(1) BOGTAB Alpha label indicating that wet gas data is being read.

00 Definitions (2):

2.2.4.
00 Definitions (3):

(gm/cc).
4-266 Landmark - R2003.4

gr Specific gravity of the evolved gas at standard conditions,

dimensionless.
00 Definitions (4):


solution oil-gas ratio.


viscosity.
00 Definitions (5):

increasing or decreasing.
rv Values of solution oil-gas ratio corresponding to each

value of psat, STB/MSCF (SCM/STCM). If all values of
rv are zero in the saturated data table, data card types 4,
5, and 6 are not allowed.


NOTE: If all values of zero in the RV column, a dry gas is defined. Therefore,
input of Data Card Types 6, 7, and 8 cannot be permitted.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-267

are necessary. However, one set is required.
00 Definitions (6):
P Alpha label indicating that data values following the

label on this card are values of pressure. The user has a
keyword.
RVSAT Alpha label indicating that data values following the

label on this card are values of the corresponding
saturated oil-gas ratio at the pressure. The user has a
keyword.
pi The value of pressure to which the bgi or bgfaci and voi

and vofaci values that appear in this location correspond,
psia (kPa). Only one value of pi is required. Pressure
must be greater than the pressure at standard conditions,
ps. Pressure must either monotonically increase or
decrease.
rvsati The value of saturated oil-gas ratio to which the bgi or

bgfaci and voi and vofaci values that appear in this
location correspond, psia (kPa). Only one value of rvsati
is required. Oil-gas ratio must monotonically increase or
decrease.
Definitions (7): 00

location represent values of solution oil-gas ratio at
undersaturated conditions at that pressure.

at pressure p and solution oil-gas ratio, rv.
4-268 Landmark - R2003.4

BGFAC Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in this

at pressure p and solution oil-gas ratio, rv, relative to the
volume factor at the saturated solution oil-gas ratio,
rvsat. [bg(rv)/bg(rvsat)].

and solution oil-gas ratio, rv.
VGFAC Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in this

and solution oil-gas ratio, rv, relative to the viscosity at
the saturated solution oil-gas ratio, rvsat. [vo(rv)/
vo(rvsat)].
00 Definitions (8):
rv Values of solution oil-gas ratio, STB/MSCF (SCM/

STCM). Values of rv must monotonically increase or
decrease. Values of rv must be less than the
corresponding value at saturated conditions.
bgi Values of gas formation volume factor at pi and rv, RB/

MSCF (cm/SCM).
bgfaci Values of gas formation volume factor at solution oil gas

ratio rv relative to the volume factor at the saturated
solution oil-gas ratio, rvsati. [bo(rv)/bo(rvsati)].
vgi Values of gas viscosity at pressure pi and rv.
vgfaci Values of gas viscosity at pressure pi and solution oil-gas

ratio, rv, relative to the viscosity at the saturated solution
oil-gas ratio, rvsati. [vg(rv)/vg(rvsati)].
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-269

4.5.4.5 BDGTAB
00 (1) BDGTAB ipvt
00 (2) DGB
GR
00
dgb
00 (3)
gr
00 (4) PSAT BG VG
00 (5) psat bg vg
00 Definitions (1):
(1) BDGTAB Alpha label indicating that dry gas data is being read.

00 Definitions (2):

2.2.4.
00 Definitions (3):

(gm/cc).
gr Specific gravity of the evolved gas in the differential

expansion at standard conditions, dimensionless.
00 Definitions (4):


4-270 Landmark - R2003.4


viscosity.
00 Definitions (5):

increasing or decreasing.

each value of psat, rb/MSCF (cm/SCM). Values of bg
must monotonically decrease, if values of psat are

value of psat. Values of vg must monotonically increase
if values of psat are monotonically increasing, and values
of vg must monotonically decrease if values of psat are
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-271

4.5.4.6 Examples
00 Example 1: Specification of dead oil and live gas tables:
00 C DEAD OIL TABLE

00 BODTAB 1
00 DOB WTRO
00 42.5 200.
00 C SATURATED DATA
00 PSAT BO VO
00 280. 1.1258 0.1962
00 780. 1.1132 0.1966
00 1280. 1.1024 0.2051
00 1780. 1.0927 0.2100
00 2280. 1.0841 0.2200
00 2780. 1.0764 0.2300
00 3280. 1.0693 0.2452
00 3780. 1.0630 0.2815
00 4280. 1.0570 0.3378
00 4780. 1.0516 0.4435
00 C NO UNDERSATURATED DATA FOR DEAD OIL!
00
00 C LIVE GAS DATA

00 BOGTAB 1
00 DGB
00 0.495
00 C
00 C SATURATED DATA
00 C
00 PSAT RV BG VG
00 280. 0.02207 12.5134 0.0144
00 780. 0.01806 4.3571 0.0149
00 1280. 0.01797 2.5938 0.0157
00 1780. 0.01963 1.8368 0.0168
00 2280. 0.02590 1.4251 0.0184
00 2780. 0.02590 1.1728 0.0202
00 3280. 0.02590 1.1728 0.0202
00 3780. 0.03406 0.8917 0.024
00 4280. 0.03779 0.8094 0.0270
00 4780. 0.04004 0.7486 0.0292
00 C
00 C UNDERSATURATED DATA
00 C
00 P 280. 780. 1280.
4-272 Landmark - R2003.4

00 RV BG VG BG VG BG VG
00 0. 12.5694 0.0143 4.4010 0.0147 2.6341 0.0154
00 P 1780. 2280.
00 RV BG VG BG VG
00 0. 1.8760 0.0164 1.4631 0.0175
00 P 2780. 3280. 3780.
00 0. 1.2086 0.0189 1.0388 0.0203 0.9191 0.0218
00 P 4280 4780
00 RV BG VG BG VG
00 0. 0.8309 0.0234 0.7636 0.0249
00
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-273

00 Example 2: Combination of oil and gas tables from Example 1 into a

single table.
00 BOETAB 1
00 DOB WTRO DGB
00 42.5 200. 0.495
00 C
00 C SATURATED DATA
00 C
00 PSAT BO VO RS RV BG VG
00 280. 1.1258 0.1962 0.0 0.02207 12.5134 0.0144
00 780. 1.1132 0.1966 0.0 0.01806 4.3571 0.0149
00 1280. 1.1024 0.2051 0.0 0.01797 2.5938 0.0157
00 1780. 1.0927 0.2100 0.0 0.01963 1.8368 0.0168
00 2280. 1.0841 0.2200 0.0 0.02590 1.4251 0.0184
00 2780. 1.0764 0.2300 0.0 0.02590 1.1728 0.0202
00 3280. 1.0693 0.2452 0.0 0.02590 1.1728 0.0202
00 3780. 1.0630 0.2815 0.0 0.03406 0.8917 0.024
00 4280. 1.0570 0.3378 0.0 0.03779 0.8094 0.0270
00 4780. 1.0516 0.4435 0.0 0.04004 0.7486 0.0292
00 C
00 C UNDERSATURATED DATA
00 C
00 P 280. 780. 1280.
00 0. 12.5694 0.0143 4.4010 0.0147 2.6341 0.0154
00 P 1780. 2280.
00 RV BG VG BG VG
00 0. 1.8760 0.0164 1.4631 0.0175
00 P 2780. 3280. 3780.
00 0. 1.2086 0.0189 1.0388 0.0203 0.9191 0.0218
00 P 4280 4780
00 RV BG VG BG VG
00 0. 0.8309 0.0234 0.7636 0.0249
00
00
4-274 Landmark - R2003.4

00 Example 3:
00 C Separate black live oil and live gas tables, with different pressure
C entries. RSM keyword invoked, so solution gas-oil ratio divided by
C 1000.
00 C
00 BOOTAB
00 DOB WTRO
00 48.25 200.
00 C
00 C SATURATED DATA
00 C
00 RS PSAT BO VO
00 0.00001 14.7 1.103 1.126
00 0.040 264.7 1.126 0.960
00 0.084 514.7 1.152 0.809
00 0.187 1014.7 1.203 0.703
00 0.292 1514.7 1.252 0.615
00 0.399 2014.7 1.303 0.535
00 0.511 2514.7 1.357 0.450
00 0.627 3014.7 1.415 0.387
00 0.757 3514.7 1.483 0.316
00 0.884 3900.0 1.539 0.270
00 1.400 5000.0 1.639 0.270
00 C
00 C UNDERSATURATED OIL DATA SET 1
00 C
00 RS 0.00001 0.040 0.084
00 P BO VO BO VO BO VO
00 5514.7 0.9688 1.127 0.9979 0.961 1.0302 0.810
00 C
00 RS 0.187 0.292 0.399
00 5514.7 1.0932 0.704 1.1544 0.616 1.2176 0.536
00 C
00 C
00 RS 0.511 0.627 0.757
00 5514.7 1.2838 0.451 1.354 0.388 1.4342 0.317
00 RS 0.884 1.40
00 P BO VO BO VO
00 5514.7 1.503 0.271 1.624 0.280
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-275

00 6014.7 1.497 0.273 1.620 0.285

00 C
00 C
00 C GAS DATA TABLE
00 C
00 BOGTAB
00 DGB
00 0.056
00 C
00 C SATURATED DATA
00 PSAT RV BG VG
00 14.7 0.04309 223.714 0.0130
00 264.7 0.04111 12.370 0.0133
00 514.7 0.03818 6.334 0.0136
00 1014.7 0.03519 3.196 0.0143
00 1514.7 0.03612 2.127 0.0153
00 2014.7 0.03719 1.592 0.0165
00 2514.7 0.04110 1.275 0.0179
00 3014.7 0.046 1.072 0.0195
00 3514.7 0.04822 0.936 0.0213
00 3900.0 0.05 0.862 0.0224
00 4514.7 0.05 0.785 0.0246
00 C
00 C UNDERSATURATED GAS DATA
00 C
00 P 2514.7 4514.7
00 RV BG VG BG VG
00 0. 1.275 0.0179 0.785 0.0246
4-276 Landmark - R2003.4

4.6 K-value Tabular Data (VIP-ENCORE)

Data which define equilibrium K-values as a function of pressure for two
or more components may optionally be entered in VIP-ENCORE. The data
described below are required and if not measured may be provided by
DESKTOP-PVT. K-value tables may be entered for either a black-oil or a
gas condensate sample. The data requirements are as follows: 00
1. Gas compressibility factor (z-factor) as a function of pressure for the

equilibrium gas at each step of a differential expansion or for the
primary gas at each step of a constant volume depletion.
2. Gas viscosity as a function of pressure at each step.
3. Oil compressibility factor (z-factor) as a function of pressure at each

step.
4. Oil viscosity as a function of pressure at each step
5. Oil phase mole fraction of the first component and/or the gas phase
mole fraction of the last component at each pressure step.
6. Equilibrium K-values for each component as a function of pressure

only for each step.
7. The volume of undersaturated oil relative to the volume of the same

oil at its saturation pressure, as a function of pressure elevation above
a constant composition expansion experiment for an oil sample. For a
gas condensate sample, the values may be estimated or calculated
with DESKTOP-PVT.
8. Viscosity of oil measured at undersaturated conditions relative to the

viscosity of the same oil at its saturation pressure. Values are tabulated
as a function of pressure elevation above the saturation pressure (p-
psat).
9. The volume of undersaturated gas relative to the volume of the same

gas at its saturation pressure, as a function of pressure elevation above
a constant composition expansion experiment for a gas sample.
10. Viscosity of gas measured at undersaturated conditions relative to the

viscosity of the same gas at its saturation pressure. Values are
tabulated as a function of pressure elevation above the saturation
pressure (p-psat).
11. Initial phase compositions and component molecular weights.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-277

4.6.1 Start of K-Value Data Input (KVALUES)

00 This card should be used only with VIP-ENCORE.
00 The K-value tabular data must be preceded by the alpha label KVALUES.
KVALUES
4.6.2 K-Value Component Names (COMPONENTS)

00 The alphanumeric labels that will be used to identify the components are
defined here.
COMPONENTS
cmp1 cmp2 . . . cmpnc
00 Definitions:
cmp Component name. An alphanumeric label

containing up to 6 characters. A component name
contained in either Table 4-1 or Table 4-2 will cause
the tabulated properties to be automatically loaded.
00 Example:
00 C************************
KVALUES
COMPONENTS
4.6.3 K-Value Component Molecular Weights (PROPERTIES)

00 Molecular weight data for each component are defined here.
PROPERTIES
COMP MW
cmp1 mw1
. .
. .
. .
cmpnc mwnc
4-278 Landmark - R2003.4

00 Definitions:
cmpi Component name for component i. Must be

identical to one of the names included in the
COMPONENTS data.
mwi The molecular weight of component i.
NOTE: Repeat the data card containing cmpi and mwi for each
component.
Properties data must be entered for any components whose names

are not included in either Table 4-1 or Table 4-2. The properties
whose names do appear in Table 4-1 or Table 4-2 can be selectively
modified with this card.
For any value when the default is acceptable, enter the alpha label
X.
00 Example:
00 C KVALUES CASE
COMPONENTS
ONE TWO THREE
PROPERTIES
COMP MW
ONE mw1
TWO mw2
THREE mw3
ENDKV
4.6.4 End of K-Value Components (ENDKV)

00 The ENDKV card terminates the reading of the component data.
ENDKV
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-279

4.6.5 K-Value Tables (KVTAB)

(1) KVTAB itab

(2) (PSAT COMPSAT)
(3) (psat compsat1 ... compsatNC)
 
(4)  ZRO 
 DRO 
 
 APIRO 
 
(5)  zro 
 dro 
 
 apiro 
X1
(6) PSAT ZG VG ZO VO YNC KV
X1 YNC
x1
(7) psat zg vg zo vo ync kv1 . . . kvNC
x1 ync
(8) PSAT psat1 (psat2) . . . (psati)

(10) dp bofac1 vofac1 (bofac2 vofac2). . .(bofaci vofaci)
(Only one data card is required.)
(11) PSAT psat1 (psat2) . . . (psatj)
(12) DP BGFAC VGFAC (BGFAC VGFAC) ... (BGFAC VGFAC)
(13) dp bgfac1 vgfac1 (bgfac2 vgfac2) ... (bgfacj vgfacj)
(Only one data card is required)
Cards (8), (9), (10) are required if X1 is input on card (6).

Cards (11), (12), (13) are required if YNC is input on card (6).
All 6 cards are required if both X1 and YNC are input on card (6).
00 Definitions (1):
KVTAB Alpha label indicating that a table of K-values is

being read.
itab The K-value table number. This number

corresponds to values in the IPVT array (Section
5.14).
4-280 Landmark - R2003.4

00 Definitions (2):
PSAT Alpha label indicating that the data value

appearing in this location on the following card is
the initial saturation pressure in the differential
expansion or constant volume depletion
experiment.
COMPSAT Alpha label indicating that the values appearing in

the remaining NC locations on the following cards
are the saturated oil mole fractions at the initial
saturation pressure.
00 Definitions (3):
psat Value of initial saturation pressure in the

differential expansion or constant volume depletion
experiment, psia (kPa).
compsat Mole fraction of component j in the saturated oil at

the initial saturation pressure.
00 Definitions (4):
ZRO Alpha label indicating that the value appearing in

this location on the following card is the residual oil
Z-factor at standard temperature and pressure.
DRO Alpha label indicating that the value appearing in

this location on the following card is the residual oil
density at standard temperature and pressure. This
label may be used only if a Type 2 Title Card and a
Type 3 Data Card are entered.
APIRO Alpha label indicating that the value appearing in

this location on the following card is the API gravity
of the residual oil at standard temperature and
pressure. This label may be used only if a Type 2
Title Card and a Type 3 Data Card are entered.
00 Definitions (5):
zro Value of residual oil Z-factor at standard

temperature and pressure. Used only for default
separator properties (Section 4.9.1).
dro Value of residual oil density at standard

temperature and pressure, gm/cc (gm/cc). This
value may be entered only if a Type 2 Title Card and
a Type 3 Data Card are also entered.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-281

apiro Value of residual oil API gravity at standard

temperature and pressure, ˚API (˚API). This value
may be entered only if a Type 2 Title Card and a
Type 3 Data Card are also entered.
00 Definitions (6):

of pressure at successive pressure steps in a
differential expansion or constant volume depletion
experiment.


of gas viscosity.
ZO Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in

of oil compressibility factor (oil z-factor).

of oil viscosity.
X1 Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in

of oil phase mole fraction of the first component.
YNC Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in

of gas phase mole fraction of the last (NC)
component.
KV Alpha label indicating that the remaining NC

locations on the following data cards are
equilibrium K-values.
00 Definitions (7):
psat Values of pressure, psia (kPa).


of psat, cp (cp).
4-282 Landmark - R2003.4

zo Values of oil compressibility factor (z-factor)

vo Values of oil viscosity corresponding to each value

of psat, cp (cp).
x1 Values of oil mole fraction of the first component

ync Values of gas mole fraction of the last (nc)

component corresponding to each value of psat.
kv1...NC K-values for each component corresponding to each

value of psat.
00 Definitions (8):

pressure.
psati Value of saturation pressure to which the bofaci and

vofaci values that appear on the Type 10 Data Cards
must correspond, psia (kPa). At least one value of
psati is required.
00 Definitions (9):

values of pressure relative to saturation pressure (p-
psat).

values of oil formation volume factor at pressure p
[bo(p)/bo(psat)].

values of oil viscosity at pressure p relative to the
viscosity at pressure psat. [vo(p)/vo(psat)].
00 Definition (10):
dp Incremental values of pressure relative to the

saturation pressure, psi (kPa) [p-psat].

[bo(p)/bo(psati)].
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-283



pressure (dewpoint).
psatj Value of saturation pressure (dewpoint) to which

the bgfacj and vgfacj values that appear on the
Type 13 Data Cards must correspond, psia (kPa).
Only one value of psatj is required, since
undersaturated volume factor data are ordinarily
available only at the initial saturation pressure.

values of pressure relative to the appropriate
saturation pressure (p-psat).
BGFAC Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in

values of gas formation volume factor at pressure p
[bg(p)/bg(psat)].
VGFAC Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in

values of gas viscosity at pressure p relative to the
viscosity at pressure psat. [vg(p)/vg(psat)].
00 Definition (13):
dp Incremental values of pressure relative to the

saturation pressure, psi (kPa) [p-psat].
bgfacj Values of gas formation volume factor at pressure p

relative to the volume factor at pressure psatj.
[bg(p)/bg(psatj)].
vgfacj Values of gas viscosity at pressure p relative to the

viscosity at pressure psatj. [vg(p)/vg(psatj)].
4-284 Landmark - R2003.4

00 Notes:
1. There may only be one data card for:
a. a Type 8 (Type 11) Data Card,
b. a Type 9 (Type 12) Title Card,
c. each value of dp on a Type 10 (Type 13) Data Card.
a. Saturation pressure must decrease (psatj < psatj-1).
b. The last saturation pressure value must equal the standard

pressure PS (Section 2.2.4).
c. Gas viscosity must decrease (vgj < vgj-1).
d. Oil viscosity must increase (voj > voj-1).
e. Oil composition cannot be equal (x1j ≠ x1j-1).
f. Gas composition cannot be equal (yncj ≠ yncj-1).
3. The following data restrictions apply to the Type 8 (Type 11) Data
Card:
a. Saturation pressure must be greater than the standard pressure PS

(Section 2.2.4).
b. If applicable, saturation pressure must decrease (psati < psati-1).
4. The following data restrictions apply to the Type 10 (Type 13) Data
Cards:
a. Relative pressure must be positive (dpj > 0.).
b. If applicable, relative pressure must decrease (dpj < dpj-1).
c. Relative oil (gas) volume factor must be less than 1.0 (bofacij <1.).
d. If applicable, relative oil (gas) volume factor must increase (bofacij

>bofacij-1).
e. Relative oil (gas) viscosity must be no less than 1.0 (vofacij ≥ 1.).
f. If applicable, relative oil (gas) viscosity must not increase (vofacij

< vofacij-1).
5. The BOFAC and VOFAC alpha labels on the Type 9 (Type 12) Data
Card are repeated as a pair for each value of psati entered on the Type
8 (Type 11) Data Card.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-285

6. The bofaci and vofaci values on the Type 10 (Type 13) Data Card are
repeated as a pair for each value of psati entered on the Type 8 (Type
11) Data Card.
7. The optional residual oil Z-factor (Type 5 Data Card) is used to define
the oil Z-factor for the default separator. If not input, the default
separator oil Z-factor is set equal to that in the last Type 7 Data Card
(which should be at standard pressure) corrected for temperature.
Since this approximation neglects oil density variation between
reservoir and standard temperature, errors in surface volumes will
result if the default separator is used for separation and a Type 5 Data
Card is not input.
4.6.6 Initial Fluid Composition Data (VIP-ENCORE)

00 VIP-COMP PVT Property Data (Section 4.4) must also be entered.
4.6.7 Example of K-Value Input Data (VIP-ENCORE)

The following template shows the data requirements for a three-
component gas condensate system: 00
00 KVALUES
COMPONENTS
ONE TWO THREE
PROPERTIES
COMP MW
ONE MW1
TWO MW2
THREE MW3
ENDKV
KVTAB 1
PSAT ZG VG ZO VO X1 KV
psat zg vg zo vo x1 kv1 kv2 kv3
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
PSAT psat1
DP BOFAC VOFAC
dp bofac vofac
. . . .
. . .
. . .
GASMF 1 1
y1 y2 y3
OILMF 1 1
x1 x2 x3
4-286 Landmark - R2003.4

4.7 Dead Oil PVT Property Data (VIP-THERM)

When no volatile components are present in the reservoir, two options are
available for the representation of oil PVT properties. Oil must be
represented by a single component (nc = 1, ncv = 0). Although gas does
not exist in the reservoir, gas is allowed to evolve upon surface separation
by entering a fixed surface gas-oil ratio and gas gravity. This provides for
the case in which the reservoir has previously been depleted to low
pressure at which a small amount of solution gas remains in the oil.
In the Dead Oil PVT Property Tables option, oil density, enthalpy, and
viscosity are input in tabular form as functions of temperature and
pressure. In the Dead Oil PVT Properties Correlations option, oil density is
represented by compressibility and coefficient of thermal expansion, oil
enthalpy is represented by a constant heat capacity, and oil viscosity is
input as a function of temperature.

following ways for dead-oil thermal models: 00
1. Specified as a constant value (Section 2.2.4).
2. Specified by equilibrium region in the IEQUIL table (Section 4.2.1.1),

overriding the constant value in option 1.
3. Specified as a function of depth (Section 4.7.1 or 4.7.2), overriding

values in options 1 and 2.

phase pressure versus depth curves by equilibruim region, from which
account for variation of temperature by gridblock. This results in
errors in the computed initial gridblock pressure. Saturations are not a
problem in dead oil models unless there is an initial steam cap with a
gas-oil transition zone (non-zero capillary pressure curves). These
errors may be avoided only by specifying all erroneous initial
gridblock fluid properties as gridblock array data.
4.7.1 Dead Oil PVT Property Tables Option

When using this option, required data for the oil include molecular
weight, density at standard conditions, and values of density, enthalpy,
and viscosity as a function of temperature and pressure over the ranges
expected during simulation. Oil densities and enthalpies are calculated by
linear interpolation. Oil viscosity is interpolated based on a linear
relationship between log (log viscosity) and log (temperature).
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-287

OILTABLES
MWOIL mwoil
DOSTD dostd
(RSF GR )
(rsf gr )
DOTAB
NP np
T t1 t2 t3 . . .
P
p1 d11 d12 d13 . . .
p2 d21 d22 d23 . . .
p3 d31 d32 d33 . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
HOTAB
NP np
T t1 t2 t3 . . .
P
p1 h11 h12 h13 . . .
p2 h21 h22 h23 . . .
p3 h31 h32 h33 . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
VOTAB
(VOMIN vomin)
NP np
T t1 t2 t3 . . .
P
p1 v11 v12 v13 . . .
p2 v21 v22 v23 . . .
p3 v31 v32 v33 . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
(TTAB (ieqr))
(DEPTH T)
(depth1t1)
(depth2t2)
Definitions:
OILTABLES Alpha label indicating that the data being read are
Dead Oil PVT Property Tables.
MWOIL Alpha label indicating that the next entry on this

line is the oil molecular weight.
mwoil Value of oil molecular weight.
DOSTD Alpha label indicating that the next entry on this

line is the oil density at standard conditions.
4-288 Landmark - R2003.4

dostd Value of oil density at standard conditions, gm/cc

(gm/cc).
RSF Alpha label indicating that the entry in this location

on the following card is the surface gas-oil ratio.
(Optional.)
GR Alpha label indicating that the entry in this location

on the following card is the surface gas gravity.
(Optional.)
rsf Value of surface gas-oil ratio, SCF/STB (SCM/

STCM). Optional.
gr Value of surface gas gravity (relative to air).

(Optional.)
DOTAB Alpha label indicating that the following data

describe the oil density table.
HOTAB Alpha label indicating that the following data

describe the oil enthalpy table.
VOTAB Alpha label indicating that the following data

describe the oil viscosity table.
NP Alpha label indicating that the next entry on this

line is the number of pressure entries in the table.
np Value of the number of pressure entries in the table.

This value must be the same in the density,
enthalpy, and viscosity tables.
T Alpha label indicating that the following entries on

this line are the table temperature entries.
tj Values of table temperature entries. The number

and values of the table temperature entries must be
the same in all tables except for the temperature
versus depth table, ˚F (˚C).
P Alpha label indicating that the first entry on the

next np card is a table pressure entry.
pi Values of table pressure entries. The number and

values of table pressure entries must be the same in
all tables, psia (kPa).
dij Values of oil density at pi and tj, gm/cc (gm/cc).
hij Values of oil enthalpy at pi and tj, Btu/lb mole (kJ/

kg mole).
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-289

vij Values of oil viscosity at pi and tj, cp (cp).


TTAB Alpha label indicating that the following data is a

temperature versus depth table. (Optional)
ieqr Equilibrium region to which the temperature versus

depth table applies. Default is 1. (Optional)
DEPTH Alpha label indicating that the entries in this

location on the following data cards are the depth
values in the temperature versus depth table.
T Alpha label indicating that the entries appearing in

this location on the following data cards are the
temperature values in the temperature versus depth
table.
depthi Values of depth in temperature versus depth table,

ft (m).
NOTE: 1. The number and values of the temperature and pressure entries
in the DOTAB, HOTAB, and VOTAB tables must be the same.
2. The minimum table dimensions for the DOTAB, HOTAB, and

VOTAB tables are 2 by 2 (two temperature and two pressure
entries).
3. Properties at conditions outside of the tables are extrapolated.
4.7.2 Dead Oil PVT Property Correlations Option

Input data requirements for this option are greatly simplified over those
for the Dead Oil PVT Property Tables Option due to the following
assumptions:
1. Oil density varies linearly with temperature and pressure.
2. Oil heat capacity is constant (oil enthalpy varies linearly with

temperature and is independent of pressure).
3. Oil viscosity is a function of temperature only.
4-290 Landmark - R2003.4

Required data for the oil include molecular weight, density at standard
conditions, compressibility, coefficient of thermal expansion, heat capacity
and values of viscosity as a function of temperature.
Oil compressibility is defined as
δDO 1
CTEOIL = ------------- ----------------------
δP DOSTD
and the oil coefficient of thermal expansion is defined as
δDO 1
CTEOIL = – ------------- ----------------------
δT DOSTD
Oil density is therefore given by
DO = DOSTD * (1 + COIL * (P - PS) - CTEOIL * (T - TS))
Oil enthalpy is given by
HO = CPOIL * (T - TS)
Oil viscosity is interpolated from the viscosity versus temperature data

assuming a linear relationship between log (log viscosity) and log
(temperature).
OILPROPS
MWOIL mwoil
DOSTD dostd
COIL coil
CTEOIL cteoil
CPOIL cpoil
VISOIL
(VOMIN vomin)
T VISCOSITY
t1 v1
t2 v2
. .
. .
. .
(RSF GR)
(rsf gr)
(TTAB ieqr)
(DEPTH T)
(depth1 t1)
(depth2 t2)
(. .)
(. .)
(. .)
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-291

Definitions:
OILPROPS Alpha label indicating that the data being read are
Dead Oil PVT Correlations data.
MWOIL Alpha label indicating that the next entry on this

line is the oil molecular weight.
mwoil Value of oil molecular weight.
DOSTD Alpha label indicating that the next entry on this

card is the oil density at standard conditions.
dostd Value of oil density at standard conditions, gm/cc

(gm/cc).
RSF Alpha label indicating that the entry in this location

on the following card is the surface gas-oil ratio.
(Optional)
GR Alpha label indicating that the entry in this location

on the following card is the surface gas gravity.
(Optional)
rsf Value of surface gas-oil ratio, SCF/STB (SCM/

STCM). (Optional)
gr Value of surface gas gravity (relative to air).

(Optional)
COIL Alpha label indicating that the next entry on this

card is the oil compressibility.
coil Value of oil compressibility, psia-1 (kPa-1).
CTEOIL Alpha label indicating that the next entry on this

card is the oil coefficient of thermal expansion.
cteoil Value of oil coefficient of thermal expansion, ˚R-1

(˚K-1).
CPOIL Alpha label indicating that the next entry on this

card is the oil heat capacity.
cpoil Value of oil heat capacity, Btu/LB ˚R (J/G ˚K).
VISOIL Alpha label indicating that the following data

describe the oil viscosity table.

4-292 Landmark - R2003.4


T Alpha label indicating that the entries in this

location on the following cards are the temperatures
in the viscosity table.
VISCOSITY Alpha label indicating that the entries in this

location on the following data cards are the
viscosities in the viscosity table.
ti Values of temperature in tables, ˚F (˚C).
vi Values of viscosity in viscosity table, cp (cp).
TTAB Alpha label indicating that the following data is a

temperature versus depth table. (Optional)
ieqr Equilibrium region to which the temperature versus

depth table applies. Default is 1. (Optional)
DEPTH Alpha label indicating that the entries in this

location on the following data cards are the depth
values in the temperature versus depth table.
T Alpha label indicating that the entries in this

location on the following data cards are the
temperature values in the temperature versus depth
table.
depthi Values of depth in temperature versus depth table,

ft (m).
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-293

4.8 Surface Separation Data (VIP-COMP or VIP-THERM)

00 Surface separation data must immediately follow the PVT Property
Data (Section 4.4).
Surface Separation Data may be entered in VIP-CORE and/or the

simulation module. 00
Each separator battery may contain an arbitrary number of stages. Each

stage contains one feed stream and two output streams, one vapor and
one liquid. Each of the two output streams can itself be split into two
streams, each of which may be fed to (1) any downstream separator stage,
(2) the gas sales line, or (3) the oil sales line. 00
The default separator is single stage at standard temperature and

pressure. A vapor fraction of 1.0 is assigned the destination GAS (gas sales
line) and a liquid fraction of 1.0 is assigned the destination OIL (oil sales
line). Surface separator equation-of-state parameters cannot be entered
without entering all of the separator data, and default values are
calculated from reservoir values considering temperature dependency
(Reference 17). 00
Both the default and the input separators can be accessed for surface
volume calculations by means of the REGSEP Card (Section 9.2). 00
4.8.1 EOS Separator Data (SEPARATOR)
SEPARATOR ibat
(PVTTABLE ipvt)
(1) STAGE TEMP PRES VFRAC VDEST LFRAC LDEST
(2) n tn pn vfn1 vdn1 lfn1 ldn1
(3) X X X vfn2 vdn2 lfn2 ldn2
(Type 2 and 3 Data Cards are repeated as
necessary to define all the stages of separation.)
00 Definitions:
ibat List of separator battery numbers.
ipvt EOS table number used for separator flash

calculations. If the particular EOS table has EOSSEP
data, the EOSSEP parameters will be used for the
calculations. If the PVTTABLE number is not input,
EOS table 1 will be assumed.
n Separator stage number. Values range from 1 to the

total number of stages.
tn Operating temperature of separator stage n, ˚F (˚C).
4-294 Landmark - R2003.4

pn Operating pressure of separator stage n, psia (kPa).
vfn1 Fraction of the vapor stream leaving separator stage

n to be sent to the destination indicated by vdn1.
Values must lie in the range 0-1. If vfn1 is less than
1.0, then one Type 3 Data Card must be provided for
this stage so that vfn1 and vfn2 sum to 1.0.
vdn1 Destination of the first vapor stream leaving stage

n. Alternatives include a downstream separator
stage, the gas sales line, and vent.
 m ( stage number )

vd n1 =  GAS ( alpha label )

 VENT ( alpha label )
lfn1 Fraction of the liquid stream leaving separator stage
n to be sent to the destination indicated by ldn1.
Values must lie in the range 0-1. If lfn1 is less than
this stage so that lfn1 and lfn2 sum to 1.0.
ldn1 Destination of the first liquid stream leaving stage

stage and the oil sales line.
ld n1 = 
 OIL ( alpha label )
X Alpha label that must be entered in the first three

locations on the Type 3 Data Card.

The values of vfn1 and vfn2 must sum to exactly 1.0.
vdn2 Destination of the second vapor stream leaving

stage n. Alternatives include a downstream
separator stage and the gas sales line.

n to be sent to the destination indicated by ldn2. The
values of lfn1 and lfn2 must sum to exactly 1.0.
ldn2 Destination of the second liquid stream leaving

separator stage and the oil sales line.
NOTE: 1. Stock tank conditions should be entered as the last stage of
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-295

separation in order to obtain the stock tank liquid volume.
2. The user may optionally enter surface separator

equation-of-state parameters. Because Ωa and Ωb
parameters, binary interaction coefficients and volume
shift factors at reservoir conditions are sometimes not
adequate for describing fluid behavior during surface
separations, an option to change these parameters is
provided. If entered, these data must immediately follow
the data for the last stage of the separator battery to
which they apply. The user may override the data for any
or all stages for a battery.
00 Example:
00 C ========================================
C COMPOSITIONAL SEPARATOR BATTERY
C ========================================
SEPARATOR 1
STAGE TEMP PRES VFRAC VDEST LFRAC LDEST
1 100.0 665.0 1. GAS 1. 2
2 132.0 100.0 1. GAS 1. 3
3 126.0 40.0 1. GAS 1. 4
4 149.0 15.0 1. GAS 1. 4
5 60.0 14.7 1. GAS 1. OIL
4.8.2 Surface Separator OMEGA Data (OMEGAS)
OMEGAS istg
Ωa1 . . . Ωanc
OMEGBS istg
Ωb1 . . . Ωbnc
00 Definitions:
OMEGAS Alpha label indicating that surface separator Ωa

values will be entered.
OMEGBS Alpha label indicating that optional surface

separator Ωb values will be entered.
istg The separator stage in the current battery to which

the equation-of-state parameters apply.
Ωai Values of Ωa for each hydrocarbon component.
Ωbi Values of Ωb for each hydrocarbon component.
4-296 Landmark - R2003.4

4.8.3 Surface Separator Binary Interaction Coefficients (DJKSEP)
DJKSEP cmpj istg

cmpk djk
ENDSEP
00 Definitions:
DJKSEP Alpha label indicating that optional surface

separator binary interaction coefficients will be
entered.
cmpj Component name of first component in a binary

mixture.

the interaction coefficients apply.
cmpk Component name of second component in a binary

mixture.
djk Binary interaction coefficient for mixtures of

ENDSEP Alpha label indicating the end of the input of this

set of DJKSEP data. The DJKSEP data for a
component can be terminated by another DJKSEP
card or by an ENDSEP card.
4.8.4 Surface Separator Volume Shift Factor (VSHFTS)
VSHFTS istg
vshfts1... vshftsnc
00 Definitions:
VSHFTS Alpha label indicating that optional surface

separator volume shift factors will be entered.

the shift factors apply.
vshftsi Surface separator volume shift factor for

component i at stage istg.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-297

4.9 Surface Separation Data with BOTAB PVT Data (VIP-

ENCORE)
00 Surface separation data must immediately follow the PVT Property
Data (Section 4.5).
00 Surface separation data may be entered in VIP-CORE and/or the

simulation modules. However, more options are available in VIP-CORE.
When “black-oil” type problems are run in VIP-ENCORE, the PVT data
are converted into a multicomponent format, including the use of K-
values and z-factors to calculate the phase behavior and volumetric
behavior of both oil and gas. This treatment makes it possible for
separator conditions to be exactly modeled, while using differential
expansion data to describe fluid behavior in the reservoir. This eliminates
the conflict between differential and flash volumetrics that creates
difficulty for conventional black-oil simulators. 00
The types and format of surface separation data depend upon the type of
PVT Property Data which is input (black-oil laboratory data or K-value
tabular data, see Section 4.4). 00
Both the default and the input separators can be accessed for surface
volume calculations by means of the REGSEP Card (Section 9.2). 00
For black-oil laboratory PVT data input, there are four options for the
treatment of separators. 00
00 These options are not mutually exclusive, i.e., any number of input
separator data options may be used in the same run. Order is not
important.
00 Default Separator (only for use with adjusted PVT data)
00 Separator K-value Input
00 Separator Test Data Input
00 Black-oil Separator Data Input
The second option is a slightly modified version of the separator data

input format given in the Simulation Modules Manual. 00
Use of the default separator implies that the differential liberation data
have been adjusted for flash conditions in the conventional manner (see
Section 2.2.2.2 (VIP-ENCORE)). If no adjustments are made and the
default separator is used, significant errors in surface volumes will result. 00
4-298 Landmark - R2003.4

4.9.1 Default Separator

Default separators should be used only when VIP-ENCORE is being
run in the conventional black-oil mode (the PVT data have been
appropriately adjusted). See Section Section 4.5.1. 00
Default separator K-values and liquid compressibility factors are

calculated from input laboratory differential liberation data (PVT property
data). One separator battery is created for each PVT property table. Each
separator is single stage at standard temperature and pressure with a
vapor fraction of 1.0 sent to the destination GAS (gas sales line) and a
liquid fraction of 1.0 sent to the destination OIL (oil sales line) (see
separator configuration data below.) 00
K-values are calculated from the differential liberation data using the
calculated composition of the total gas liberated from the initial saturation
pressure to standard pressure and the composition of the liquid at
standard pressure. A liquid compressibility factor at standard conditions
is calculated for each battery using the residual oil density and molecular
weight input in or derived from the differential liberation data. 00
If a non-zero value for gas-oil ratio at standard pressure was input in the
PVT data, use of the default separator will result in a match between the
separation gas-oil ratio at the initial saturation pressure and the “effective”
input gas-oil ratio at the initial saturation pressure. The “effective” gas-oil
ratio is equal to the difference between the input gas-oil ratio and the gas-
oil ratio at standard pressure. See Note 7 at end of Section 4.5.2.1. 00
4.9.2 Separator K-Value Input (SEPARATOR)

Input data format for this option is similar to that given in the reference
manual for the simulation modules. In earlier documentation it has been
suggested that one use the K-values derived for the last step in the
differential liberation experiment. This may lead to large errors in surface
volumes. This option should be used only when accurate separator K-
values and liquid density are known. When using this option, one must
take great care to insure that the input K-values are consistent with the
internally defined component molecular weights, which are printed out in
the default separator properties table. 00
00 The data required for this option include the following:
1. Definition of the separator configuration. This includes the number of

stages, the destinations of the two outflow streams leaving each stage,
and the fraction of each outflow stream that flows to each destination.
2. The density of the oil product (stock tank oil) leaving the last separator
stage.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-299

3. The molecular weight of the stock tank oil or the saturation pressure of
the saturated oil feed.
4. The equilibrium K-values for each component in the system for each
stage of separation.
SEPARATOR ibat
PVTTABLE ipvt
(1) STAGE VFRAC VDEST LFRAC LDEST
(2) n vfn1 vdn1 lfn1 ldn1
(3) X vfn2 vdn2 lfn2 ldn2
(Data Cards are repeated as necessary to define all of the
stages of separation.)
PSATF
(4) DLIQ
MWL
psatf
(5) dliq
mwl
(6) KVALUES
(7) COMP STAGE 1 (STAGE 2 . . . STAGE n)
(8) comp kval1 (kval2 . . . kvaln)
(Enter one of these cards for each component in the fluid
system.)
00 Definitions:
ipvt PVT table number describing the fluid to which this

separation data applies. Used for deriving table of
differential versus flash volumetrics and for
calculating a liquid molecular weight if none is
entered.
STAGE Alpha label indicating that the data values

appearing in this location on the following data
cards are values of separator stage number.
VFRAC Alpha label indicating that the data values

cards are vapor stream fractions.
VDEST Alpha label indicating that the data values

cards are vapor stream destinations.
4-300 Landmark - R2003.4

LFRAC Alpha label indicating that the data values

cards are liquid stream fractions.
LDEST Alpha label indicating that the data values

cards are liquid stream destinations.





this stage, so that lfn1 and lfn2 sum to 1.0.

ld n1 = 
X Alpha label that must be entered in the first location

on the Type 3 Data Card.


R2003.4 - Landmark 4-301



DLIQ Alpha label indicating that the data value

card is the density of the stock tank oil.
PSATF Alpha label indicating that the data value

card is the saturation pressure of the feed fluid.
MWL Alpha label indicating that the data value

card is the molecular weight of the stock tank oil.
dliq Density of the oil product (stock tank oil) leaving

the last separator stage, gm/cc (gm/cc).
psatf Saturation pressure of the feed (saturated oil from

PVT table ntab) in the separator test from which the
data were derived, psia (kPa).
mwl Molecular weight of the stock tank oil.
comp Component name (or number).
kvali Equilibrium K-value for this component for stage i.
NOTE: Since the separator data should correspond to a fluid described in

one of the PVT tables, psatf should be input instead of mwl.
Molecular weight can and will be calculated (if not input) from the
input K-values and the differential liberation data.
This option may not be used in conjunction with the PVT

interpolation option.
Each separator battery may contain any number of stages. Each stage
contains one feed stream and two output streams: vapor and liquid. Each
of the two output streams can itself be split into two streams, each of
which may be fed to any downstream separator stage, the gas sales line or
the oil sales line. 00
4-302 Landmark - R2003.4

00 Example:
00 C==============================================
C BLACK-OIL AND K-VALUE SINGLE STAGE SEPARATOR
C==============================================
SEPARATOR 1
STAGE VFRAC VDEST LFRAC LDEST
1 1. GAS 1. OIL
DLIQ MWL
0.8966 200
00 C
KVALUES
COMP STAGE 1
1 89.4
2 0.0056
4.9.3 Separator Test Data Input (SEPTEST)

This option uses standard separator test data normally given in a

laboratory fluid analysis to derive separator K-values and the standard
condition liquid compressibility factor. If these data are available and
applicable, this option is the preferable method for separator treatment. 00
SEPTEST ibat
PVTTABLE ntab (itype)
PSATF BOF
psatf bof
P T GOR BOSTG GR
p1 t1 gor1 bostg1 gr1
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
pns tns gorns bostgns grns
(enter one data card for each stage)
00 Definitions:
ntab PVT table number for the fluid to which these data
apply.
itype Oil type when the PVT interpolation option

(BOTINT) is in use. Not used otherwise.
psatf Saturation pressure of the saturated oil feed, psi

(kPa).
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-303

bof “Flash” oil formation volume factor for feed of

saturated oil from PVT table ntab at psatf.
pn Operating pressure of separator stage n, psia (kPa).
tn Operating temperature of separator stage n, ˚F(˚C).
gorn Liberated gas-oil ratio of stage n, SCF/STB (SCM/

STCM).
bostgn Separator volume factor of the liquid leaving stage

n.
grn Gas gravity of the gas leaving stage n.
NOTE: Separator configuration (as described in Section 4.9.2) is defined

automatically with a vapor fraction of 1.0 of the vapor stream from
each stage sent to the destination GAS (gas sales line), a liquid
fraction of 1.0 of the liquid stream from each stage sent to the next
stage, and the liquid stream of the last stage sent to the destination
OIL (oil sales line).
Only one stage is allowed when the PVT interpolation option is in

use.
4-304 Landmark - R2003.4

4.9.4 Black-oil Separator Data Input (BOSEP)

This card should be used only with VIP-ENCORE.
This option is provided for cases in which laboratory separator test data is
not available or applicable, but a flash oil formation volume factor and
gas-oil ratio are known or estimated. These values must correspond to
feed of saturated oil at some pressure in one of the BOTAB tables. A stock
tank oil compressibility factor is calculated using the residual oil density
from PVT table ntab and a stock tank oil molecular weight computed
internally by material balance.
If the stock tank oil density or the stock tank oil molecular weight or the
surface gas gravity is known or can be estimated, then it is preferable to
use the Separator Test Data input option (with a single stage) as given in
the previous subsection. The required surface gas gravity can be
calculated from stock tank oil density or molecular weight by using the
equations:
S
5.6146 ⋅ 62.428 ⋅ RT ( BOF ⋅ DES – DENO )
GR = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
GOR ⋅ 29 ⋅ P
S
00 and
DOS ⋅ BOF GOR ⋅ P

S
00 DENO = WTO ---------------------------- – ------------------------------------------------S-
WTOS 5.6146 ⋅ 62.428 ⋅ RT
00 where
DENO = stock tank oil density, g/cc.
WTO = stock tank oil molecular weight.
GR = surface gas gravity.
BOF = flash oil formation volume factor, rb/STB.
GOR = flash gas-oil ratio, SCF/STB.
DOS = density of the saturated oil feed at reservoir

conditions, g/cc.
WTOS = molecular weight of the saturated oil feed.
R = gas constant, 10.736 psia ft3/LB mole ˚R.
Ps = standard pressure, psia.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-305

Ts = standard temperature, ˚R.
BOSEP ibat
PVTTABLE ntab
PSATF BOF GOR
psatf bof gor
00 Definitions:
ntab PVT table number for the fluid to which these data
apply.
psatf Saturation pressure of the saturated oil feed, psia

(kPa).
bof Flash value of oil formation volume factor for feed

of saturated oil from PVT table ntab at psatf.
gor Value of the gas-oil ratio observed at the surface,

SCF/STB (SCM/STCM).
NOTE: This option may not be used in conjunction with the PVT
interpolation option.
4.10 Separator Data with KVTAB PVT Data (VIP-ENCORE)

Default separators should only be used when the K-value table has been
derived from conventionally adjusted (for flash conditions) differential
expansion data. This is not recommended, since the separation data
should be obtained the same way as the K-value table - by regressing to
match laboratory data using DESKTOP-PVT. The separation data should
be directly input from DESKTOP-PVT results. 00
A default separator is created for each input PVT property table. Each
default separator is single stage at standard conditions with a vapor
fraction of 1.0 sent to the destination GAS (gas sales line) and a liquid
fraction of 1.0 sent to the destination OIL (oil sales line) (see separator
configuration data below). 00
Default separator K-values are equal to those in the last entry of the
KVTAB table (at standard pressure). If a residual oil Z-factor is input in the
KVTAB table (Section 4.6), this is the default separator value. If not, the
default separator oil Z-factor is given by the oil z-factor in the last entry of
the table (at standard pressure) corrected for temperature. Since this
neglects oil density variation between reservoir and standard
temperature, some error in oil surface volume will result. 00
4-306 Landmark - R2003.4

Separator properties may be input using the same format as given in the
reference manual for the simulation modules. The required data include: 00
1. Definition of the separator configuration. This includes the number of

stages, the destinations of the two outflow streams leaving each stage,
and the fraction of each outflow stream that flows to each destination.
2. The density of the oil product (stock tank oil) leaving the last separator
stage.
3. The molecular weight of the stock tank oil.
4. The equilibrium K-values for each component in the system for each
stage of separation.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-307

4.10.1 K-Values Separation Data (SEPARATOR)
SEPARATOR ibat
(1) STAGE VFRAC VDEST LFRAC LDEST
(2) n vfn1 vdn1 lfn1 ldn1
(3) X vfn2 vdn2 lfn2 ldn2
(Type 2 and 3 Data Cards are repeated as necessary to
define all of the stages of separation.)
(4) DLIQ MWL
(5) dliq mwl
(6) KVALUES
(7) COMP STAGE 1 (STAGE 2 . . . STAGE n)
(8) comp kval1 (kval2 . . . kvaln)
(Enter one of these cards for each component in the fluid
system.)
00 Definitions:





this stage, so that lfn1 and lfn2 sum to 1.0.

4-308 Landmark - R2003.4

ld n1 = 
X Alpha label that must be entered in the first location

on the Type 3 Data Card.




dliq Density of the oil product (stock tank oil) leaving

the last separator stage, gm/cc (gm/cc).
mwl Molecular weight of the stock tank oil.
comp Component name (or number).
kvali Equilibrium K-value for this component for stage i.
00 Example:
00 C=============================================
C BLACK-OIL AND K-VALUE SINGLE STAGE SEPARATOR
C=============================================
SEPARATOR 1
STAGE VFRAC VDEST LFRAC LDEST
1 1. GAS 1. OIL
DLIQ MWL
0.8966 200
C
KVALUES
COMP STAGE 1
1 89.4
2 0.0056
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-309

4.11 Water Property Regions

00 Multiple water property regions are available in a very similar manner as
hydrocarbon property regions. They can be defined via two different
methods; one for multiple water types for multiple horizons, and a second
for more complex treatment including property variations with salinity as
well as pressure. If neither of these is required, then the water PVT
constants can be input with the Physical Property Constants (DWB)
parameters. If two or more different water types are required, with
essentially constant but different salinities, then the PVTW data can be
used to define the different pressure-dependent water PVT parameters for
each region. The PVTWSAL data must be used if there is a significant
variation in properties due to salinity within one or more of the regions.
4.11.1 Region Constants (PVTW)

00 This data may be used to define the water property constants for one or
more water PVT regions. PVTW and PVTWSAL data may not both be
entered.
00 PVTW and PVTWSAL data may not both be entered.
PVTW IPVTW PBASEW DWB BWI CW VW (VWP)

ipvtw pbasew dwb bwi cw vw (vwp)
(repeat data card as necessary)
00 Definitions:
ipvtw Water porosity table number/region number. This

number corresponds to values in the IPVTW array
(Section 5.14).
pbasew Reference pressure for water compressibility

calculations in this region, psia (kPa). If not
enterred on either PVTW or PVTWSAL cards,
pbasew is set to the pbase value on the
CONSTANTS card (Section 2.2.4.1). If the
CONSTANTS card is not entered, pbasew is set to
the pinit value of the first equilibrium region
(Section 4.2.1 or Section 4.2.2).
dwb Density of the stock tank water in this region, gm/

cc (gm/cc).
bwi Water formation volume factor at pbasew in this

region, rb/STB (cm/STCM).
cw Water compressibility in this region, psi-1 (kPa-1).
4-310 Landmark - R2003.4

vw Water viscosity at pbasew, cp (cp).
vwp Derivative of water viscosity with respect to

pressure in this region, cp/psia (cp/kPa). Default is
0.
4.11.2 Salinity-Dependent Data (PVTWSAL)

00 This data must be used to define the water property variations with
salinity as well as pressure for one or more water PVT regions. PVTWSAL
and PVTW data may not both be entered.
00 PVTWSAL and PVTW data may not both be entered.
PVTWSAL ipvtw pbasew

SALINT DWB BWI CW VW (VWP)
salint dwb bwi cw vw (vwp)
(repeat data card as necessary)
00 Definitions:
ipvtw Water property table number/region number. This

number corresponds to values in the IPVTW array
(Section 5.14).
pbasew Reference pressure for water compressibility

calculations in this region, psia (kPa). If not
entered on either PVTW or PVTWSAL cards,
pbasew is set to the pbase value on the
CONSTANTS card (Section 2.2.4.1). If the
CONSTANTS card is not entered, pbasew is set to
the pinit value of the first equilibrium region
(Section 4.2.1 or Section 4.2.2).
salint Water salinity, user-defined units. In each table,

water salinity values must increase.
dwb Density of the stock tank water for salinity salint,

gm/cc (gm/cc).
bwi Water formation volume factor at pbasew for

salinity salint, rb/STB (cm/STCM).
cw Water compressibility for salinity salint, psi-1 (kPa-

1).
vw Water viscosity at pbasew for salinity salint, cp

(cp).
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-311

vwp Derivative of water viscosity with respect to

pressure for salinity salint, cp/psia (cp/kPa).
Default is 0.
4.12 Compaction Tables (CMT)

00 Also see Section 2.2.7.10.
The compaction tables provide for user input of pore volume and
permeability changes based on fluid pressure history. When the
compaction option is invoked with the COMPACT card in utility data, and
compaction tables are provided as shown in this section, then the pore
volumes and transmissibilities used by the simulator are multiplied by
reduction factors prior to use. The factors are looked up in the compaction
tables using either the current gridblock pressure (reversible option) or the
minimum historical gridblock pressure (irreversible option; default) in
each block. If more than one compaction table is provided, the ICMT array
(Section 5.19) is used to determine which one applies to each gridblock. 00
CMT ncmt
P PVMULT TAMULT (TVMULT)
p pvmult tamult (tvmult)
(At least two data cards are required.)
00 Definitions:
CMT Alpha label indicating that the data being read is a

compaction table.
ncmt Compaction table number. The ICMT array (Section

5.19) is used to relate this table number to a
gridblock.
The values on the data cards following this title card appear in the order
defined by this title card. The alpha labels must appear in the order
shown. 00
P Alpha label indicating that the data values

cards are values of pressure.
PVMULT Alpha label indicating that the data values

cards are pore volume multipliers.
TAMULT Alpha label indicating that the data values

cards are areal transmissibility multipliers.
4-312 Landmark - R2003.4

TVMULT Alpha label indicating that the data values

cards are vertical transmissibility multipliers.
Optional.
00 p Pressure, psia (kPa). Values must the greater than

zero and must increase.
pvmult Pore volume multiplier.
tamult Areal transmissibility multiplier.
tvmult Vertical transmissibility multiplier. If TVMULT is

not read, tvmult = tamult.
4.13 Water Induced Rock Compaction Tables (WIRCT)

The water induced rock compaction tables provide for user input of pore
volume and permeability changes based on water saturation history.
When the compaction tables are provided as shown in this section, then
the pore volumes and transmissibilities used by the simulator are
multiplied by reduction factors prior to use. The factors are interpolated
from the water induced rock compaction tables using the maximum
historical gridblock water saturation (irreversible) minus the gridblock
water saturation at time zero. If more than one compaction table is
provided, the IWIRC array (Section 5.21) is used to determine which one
applies to each gridblock. 00
WIRCT nwct (card 1)

SWINIT swinit (card 2)
DSW PVMULT TAMULT(TVMULT) (card 3)
dsw pvmult tamult (tvmult) (card 4)
(At least two data cards 4 are required.)
00 Definitions:
WIRCT Alpha label indicating that the data being read is a

water induced rock compaction table.
nwct Water induced rock compaction table number. The

IWIRC array Section(5...) is used to relate this table
number to a gridblock.
SWINIT Alpha label indicating that the next data value on

this card is initial water saturation
swinit Initial water saturation that applies to the following

table section. Valid values are between 0.0 and 1.0
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-313

The alpha labels on title Card 3 must appear in the order shown. 00
DSW Alpha label indicating that the data values

cards are values of water saturation changes.
PVMULT Alpha label indicating that the data values

cards are pore volume multipliers.
TAMULT Alpha label indicating that the data values

cards are areal transmissibility multipliers.
TVMULT Alpha label indicating that the data values

cards are vertical transmissibility multipliers.
Optional.
The values on Card 4 must appear in the order shown. There must be a
minimum of two Card 4 data cards 00
dsw Water saturation change, fraction. Values must be

between 0.0 and 1.0 and must increase.
pvmult Pore volume multiplier. Values must be between 0.0

and 1.0 and must decrease.
tamult Areal transmissibility multiplier. Values must be

greater than or equal to 0.0.
tvmult Vertical transmissibility multiplier. Values must be

greater than or equal to 0.0. If TVMULT is not read,
tvmult = tamult.
NOTE: Cards 2 through 4 can be repeated as necessary for each WIRCT

card. The values of swinit within a particular table must increase
consecutively.
00 Example:
00 C
C
WIRCT 1
SWINIT 0.06
DSW PVMULT TAMULT TVMULT
.01 1.0 1.0 1.0
.05 0.95 0.95 0.95
.1 0.9 0.9 0.9
1. 0.8 0.8 0.8
4-314 Landmark - R2003.4

00 SWINIT 0.12
.01 1.0 1.0 1.0
.05 0.95 0.95 0.95
.1 0.9 0.9 0.9
00 SWINIT 0.2
.01 1.0 1.0 1.0
.05 0.95 0.95 0.95
1. 0.8 0.8 0.8
00 SWINIT 0.3
.01 1.0 1.0 1.0
1. 0.8 0.8 0.8
00 WIRCT 2
SWINIT 0.06
.01 1.0 1.0 1.0
.05 0.95 0.95 0.95
1. 0.8 0.8 0.8
00 SWINIT 0.3
.01 1.0 1.0 1.0
.1 0.9 0.9 0.9
1. 0.8 0.8 0.8
00
4.14 Three and Four Component Miscible Data (Not available

in VIP-THERM)
To invoke the miscible flood option, a MIS card must appear in the
initialization utility data. 00
The original three-component Todd and Longstaff option is automatically

invoked with a MIS card and an input value of 2 for the number of
hydrocarbon components, NCOMP, on the grid system data card. In this
case, the black-oil table “BOTAB” is required to describe the PVT
properties and VLE for solvent and dead oil. In the three-component
option, the solvent is assigned as the first component and the dead oil as
the second component. The four-component miscible option is
automatically invoked with a MIS card and an input value of 3 for the
number of hydrocarbon components, NCOMP, on the grid system data
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-315

card. In this case, the light oil component is assigned as the first
component, the heavy oil component (dead oil) as the second component
and the injected solvent as the third component. In addition to the typical
black-oil table BOTAB that specifies the PVT properties and VLE for the
light and the heavy oil components, the user is required to input a solvent
property table, SLVTAB, immediately following the black oil table. 00
Note that in black-oil mode, with the multiple PVT table option, the user is
required to enter consecutively all BOTAB tables, followed by the same
number of SLVTAB and MISPTB tables (in pairs), i.e. for each PVT region,
a SLVTAB table must be immediately followed by an MISPTB table. After
all SLVTAB and MISPTB tables are entered, an MWS card must be input. 00
In the four-component miscible option, the simulator assumes that the

solvent is absent during initialization. Thus, the user is not required to
input the initial component mole fractions. 00
For the miscible model, there are two options for separators; default and
separator K-value input. Detailed descriptions of the options and the
input requirements are given in this section. The other two options
(separator test data input and black-oil separator data) for the
conventional black-oil model are not applicable. For the default option, a
large K-value (10E6) is used for the solvent component, if short solvent
property tables (P, BS and VS only in SLVTAB tables) are entered. The
component names for the three hydrocarbon components to be entered in
the separator K-value input option are “light,” “heavy,” and “solvent,”
which correspond to Components 1, 2, and 3, respectively. 00
The data cards that specify the injected solvent composition should take
into account the position of the solvent component. In the simulation
modules, pure solvent injection in the three and four-component cases
would be input as: 00
00 C 3 component
YINJ wl
1. 0.
and
C 4 component
YINJ wl
0.0 0.0 1.0
respectively, where wl is the solvent injection well list. Note that the
solvent is identified as the first hydrocarbon component in the three-
component case and the third hydrocarbon component in the four-
component case. 00
The miscible option is compatible with both IMPES and implicit

formulations of VIP. The only difference in the input requirements
between the IMPES and the implicit formulations is the specification of
the miscibility pressure transition zone in the ALPHA card (see the Utility
Data section). 00
4-316 Landmark - R2003.4

A full technical description of this method, along with detailed examples,

will be found in the VIP-EXECUTIVE Technical Manual in Section 15.2. 00
4.14.1 Solvent PVT Properties (SLVTAB)
SLVTAB (itab)
P BS (or ZS) VS (KS ZSO VSO)
p bs (or zs) vs (ks zso vso)
(at least two data cards are required here)
00 Definitions:
itab The PVT table number, optional. Only one PVT

table if itab is omitted.
P Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in

of pressure.
BS Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in

of solvent formation volume factor.
ZS Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in

of solvent compressibility factor.
VS Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in

of solvent viscosity.
KS Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in

of solvent phase equilibrium K-values, optional.
ZSO Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in

of solvent compressibility factor in the oil phase,
optional.
VSO Alpha label indicating that data values appearing in

of solvent viscosity in the oil phase, optional.
p Values of pressure, psia (Kpa).
bs Values of solvent formation volume factor

corresponding to each value of p, rb/STB (cm/
STCM).
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-317

zs Values of solvent compressibility factor

corresponding to each value of p.
vs Values of solvent viscosity corresponding to each

value of p, cp (cp).
ks Values of solvent equilibrium K-value

corresponding to each value of p, optional.
zso Values of solvent compressibility factor in oil phase

corresponding to each value of p, optional.
vso Values of solvent viscosity in oil phase

corresponding to each value of p, cp (cp), optional.
The values of p in each solvent table must be monotonically decreasing,

and the last entry must be 14.65 psia. There must be either three (no KS,
ZSO, VSO labels and their corresponding values in the data cards) or six
entries in each data card. If KS, ZSO, VSO and their corresponding values
are omitted from the solvent tables, the solvent is assumed to be insoluble
in the pseudo-oil phase. 00
If Format (2) in the ALPHA card is used, the user must enter a miscibility
pressure table immediately after each solvent table. The format for the
miscibility pressure table is described on the following card. 00
4.14.2 Miscibility Pressure Table (MISPTB)

00 Four Component (Gas, Oil, Solvent, Water) Case:
MISPTB (itab)
Z1
z11 z12 ... z1n
(at least two z1 values are required here)
Z3 z3
MISP
misp1 misp2 ... mispn
(the MISP lines are repeated for each new Z3 line)
00 Alternatively:
MISPTB (itab)
Y1
y11 y12 ..... y1n
(at least two y1 values are required here)
MISP
misp1 misp2 ........ mispn
4-318 Landmark - R2003.4

00 Three Component (Oil, Solvent, Water) Case:
MISPTB (itab)
Z1
z11 z12 ....... z1n
(at least two z1 values are required here)
MISP
misp1 misp2 ........mispn
00 Definitions:
MISPTB Keyword indicating the data being read are

miscibility pressure data.
Y1 Alpha label indicating that data values appearing

on the following data cards are values of the gas
molar fractions in the gas pseudo-phase (gas-
solvent mixture).
y1i ith value of the gas component in the gas pseudo-

phase.
Z1 Alpha label indicating that data values appearing

on the following data cards are values of the total
molar fractions of the solvent component for three-
component or the gas component for four-
component.
z1i ith value of the component total molar fraction.
Z3 Alpha label indicating that a value of the solvent

total molar fraction is being read, in four-
component cases only.
z3 Value of the solvent total molar fraction.
MISP Alpha label indicating that data values on the

following data cards are values of miscibility
pressure.
mispi Values of miscibility pressure corresponding to the

total composition (z1 in three-component and z1i,
z3 in four-component), psia (Kpa). The MISP and
mispi cards are repeated for each new z3 value, in
four-component cases.
At least two values of z1 (or y1) must be entered and the values of z1 (or
y1) must be monotonically increasing. In three-component cases, no gas is
allowed and misp is simply a function of solvent mole fraction (z1). In
four-component cases, when gas (z1) and solvent (z3) mole fractions are
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-319

both specified, misp values must be input for each combination (one set
for each z3 value). The values of z3 must also be monotonically increasing.
Alternatively, the gas pseudo-phase (y1) can be specified. The number of
misp values must be equal to the number of z1 values in three-component
cases. Values not specified in four-component cases will be filled with the
last misp value entered. 00
4.14.3 Solvent Molecular Weight (MWS)
MWS mws
00 Definition:
mws Value of the solvent molecular weight.
4-320 Landmark - R2003.4

4.15 Matrix-Fracture Transfer (VIP-DUAL) (Available in VIP-

COMP or VIP-ENCORE)
Coats’ method (Reference 29) is used to model the transfer of gas and oil
between matrix and fractures. This method is always used when DUAL is
invoked. 00
4.15.1 Surface Tension Ratio Tables (SIGT)

The surface tension ratio tables provide for user input of gas-oil surface
tension and density difference variation with pressure for each PVT
region. 00
SIGT itab
P SIGR (DGOG)
p sigr (dgog)
. . .
. . .
. . .
(At least two data cards are required.)
00 Definitions:
SIGT Alpha indicating that a table of surface tension

ratios is being read.
itab The table number. This number corresponds to

P Alpha label indicating that the data values that

appear in this location for the following cards are
values of pressure.
SIGR Alpha label indicating that the data values

cards are values of gas-oil surface tension ratios.
DGOG Alpha label indicating that the data values

cards are values of gas-oil density difference.
Optional.
p Values of pressure, psia (kPa).
sigr Values of surface tension ratios corresponding to

each value of p.
σ(p)
sigr ( p ) = ---------------
σ ( po )
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-321

σ = surface tension
po = pressure used to generate the matrix capillary
pressure curve entered in the SGT table, see Section
4.3.1.2. This is usually the initial reservoir pressure.
dgog Values of oil-gas density difference, corresponding

to each value of p, gm/cc (gm/cc).
NOTE: 1. At least two data cards are required.
2. If the dgog data is omitted, values corresponding to the

pressure entries will be calculated internally.
00 Example:
00 SIGT 1
P SIGR DGOG
14.7 100.0 .7795
1688.7 66.6667 .5934
2044.7 52.2222 .5666
2544.7 36.6607 .5299
3005.7 24.4444 .4972
3567.7 14.2222 .4597
4124.7 8.0 .4247
4558.7 4.9333 .3986
4949.7 2.8333 .3760
5269.7 1.7222 .3570
5559.7 1.0 .3411
7014.7 0.5556 .2676
4.15.2 Gas-Oil Gravity Drainage Parameter (BETAG)
BETAG irck betag
00 Definitions:
BETAG Alpha label.
irck The rock type number. This number corresponds to

the values in the ISAT array.
betag Values of the betag parameter.
NOTE: Rock types with no specified values of betag will default to betag
= 1.0.
4-322 Landmark - R2003.4

4.16 Hydraulic Fracture Option (Not available in VIP-THERM)

00 This option is explained in Section 2.2.17.
4.16.1 Beta (Turbulance) Factors (HYDBETA)

00 The non-Darcy flow behaviors within the hydraulic fracture gridblocks
can be described through the Beta (turbulance) factors. For each proppant
type, the Beta factors can be correlated as a function of effective
permeability, through the equation form below using two constant values.
These values must be entered for all layers; however, if the fracture does
not extend into a gridblock, its factors should be set to zero, as well as its
porosity set to zero.
HYDBETA
a1 a2 ... anf*NZ
b1 b2 ... bnf*NZ
00 Definitions:
nf Number of gridblocks in the X direction comprising

the fracture (defined by HYDFRAC card in Section
2.2.17.1).
a Exponent terms in the Beta factors.
b Coefficients in the Beta factors.
NOTE:
b
Beta = ----------------------------------------------a-
( tamult ( P ) ⋅ k D )
KX
where KD = ------------ Darcies.
1000
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-323

4.17 Equation of State Interpolation Option(Not available in

VIP-THERM)
00 Both VIP-COMP and VIP-ENCORE must be active.
00 The equation of state interpolation option (EOSINT) is designed for a

reduction of the CPU time required for phase-equilibrium calculations
and linearization of the equation of state in outer iterations of timesteps.
00 In the EOSINT option, saturation pressure, recovery factors of

hydrocarbon components, and liquid and vapor compressibility factors
are determined as tabular functions of pressure, temperature, and fluid
compositions. The equation of state (EOS) is applied for the automatic
generation of these functions in VIP-CORE. Then, the tabular functions of
the recovery and compressibility factors are used for phase-equilibrium
calculations in different timesteps of the reservoir simulation instead of
the equation of state. These functions (EOS interpolation tables) are
applied for the determination of compositions and densities of liquid and
vapor hydrocarbon phases.
00 The EOSINT option can be applied for the phase-equilibrium calculations

in any or all of
■ reservoir grid cells
■ separator batteries
■ well tubing strings (surface pipeline network system)
00 For example, it can be applied only in separator batteries and surface

pipeline network system.
00 Parameters of the equation of state must be formulated because the EOS is

applied for the generation of the EOS interpolation tables.
00 The user should define
■ maximum and minimum pressure on the PMIN and PMAX cards;
■ temperature entries of the EOS interpolation tables on the

TEMPERATURE card;
■ composition entries of the tables using the CMP card or simulations of

the PVT tests.
00 Initial compositions of the reservoir fluids defined after the OILMF,

GASMF, or COMPOSITION cards are automatically included in the list of
the composition entries.
00 Simulations of PVT tests (differential expansion, constant volume

depletion, swelling, and/or multiple contact tests) can be applied in VIP-
4-324 Landmark - R2003.4

CORE for the automatic generation of the composition entries. The fluid
compositions calculated in different stages of simulated PVT tests are
automatically included in the list of the composition entries. Also, these
compositions are output in a file (Fortran Unit 77) in the format of the
CMP card. Liquid and vapor densities, viscosities, and compressibility
factors in different stages of the differential expansion and multiple
contact tests are also included in this file.
00 The user can divide the composition entries into paths. Path numbers can
be defined in the CMP, SWELLTEST, DIFEXPTEST, CONVDPTEST, and
MULCONTEST cards.
00 The pressure entries of the EOS interpolation option are calculated

internally. NPMAX pressure entries are selected in the undersaturated
region (from the saturation pressure to the maximum pressure), and
NPMAX pressure entries are selected in the saturated region (from the
minimum pressure to the saturation pressure). The parameter NPMAX
can be defined by the user on the DIM card. The pressure increment
selected in the undersaturated region near the saturation pressure is much
smaller than outside of this region.
00 The EOS interpolation tables are generated in VIP-CORE. The simulator

calculates
■ saturation pressure (bubblepoint or dewpoint pressure) for all

combinations of composition and temperature entries;
■ K-values at the saturation pressure for all combinations of

composition and temperature entries;
■ recovery factors for all combinations of composition, temperature, and

pressure entries below the saturation pressure;
■ liquid and vapor compressibility factors for all combinations of

composition, temperature, and pressure entries.
00 An EOS interpolation table is generated for each equililibrium region. The

number of this table corresponds to the equilibrium region number. In the
EOSINT option, separator batteries and links, well connections, and node
connections of the surface network system need to be assigned to
equilibrium regions/EOS interpolation tables. By default they will each be
assigned to region/table one. A region/table number can be assigned to a
separator battery by entering a PVTTABLE card after the SEPARATOR
card. A region/table number can be assigned to a link, well connection, or
node connection by entering PVT table numbers on the LINK, NODCON,
or WELCON cards in the simulation module.
00 Different equations of state can be used to generate each EOS interpolation

table. This is accomplished by associating EOS numbers to each
equilibrium region on the IEQUIL card.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-325

00 An EOS interpolation table is also generated for each separator battery in

VIP-CORE. For this reason, all separator descriptions (the SEPARATOR
cards) must be included in the VIP-CORE input deck rather than in the
simulation module input deck.
00 A multidimensional interpolation procedure is used for the calculations of

the K-values, recovery factors, and compressibility factors between table
entries. The simulator applies
■ cubic spline interpolation in pressure,
■ linear spline interpolation in composition,
■ linear spline interpolation in temperature,
■ linear spline interpolation between compositional paths.
00 The cubic spline interpolation in pressure is applied to assure the

continuity of derivatives of the interpolated functions with respect to
pressure.
00 Two procedures are implemented for the interpolation in composition:
■ linear spline interpolation based on the following interpolation

function:
nc
F(Z) = ∑ ( ci × zi ) , (Eq. 14-1)
i=1
00 linear spline interpolation based on the following distance between two

composition vectors:
nc
∑ ( zi – zi )
j 2
D ( Z j, Z ) = × ci .
i=1
00 The non-negative coefficients ci can be defined by the user using the

COEFFICIENT card.
00 The MDI keyword must be included on the EOSINT card to apply the
multidimensional interpolation procedure based on the distance. The path
definitions are ignored in this case and the interpolation between
compositional paths is not applied.
00 The following path interpolation function is used for the interpolation

between compositional paths:
4-326 Landmark - R2003.4

nc
Fp ( Z ) = ∑ ( cpi × zi ) .
i=1
00 The coefficients c p1, c p2, …, c pnc can be input by the user on the
COEFFICIENT PATH card.
00 All input cards of the EOSINT option must be input in the TABLES section
after the EOSINT card. All input cards required for the simulation of a
PVT test must be input after the corresponding DIFEXPTEST,
CONVDPTEST, SWELLTEST, or MULCONTEST card. Several PVT tests
can be simulated.
00 The CPU memory requirements for the EOS interpolation option are
determined internally. Therefore, input on the DIM card is not required.
4.17.1 EOS Interpolation Option (EOSINT)
EOSINT (param1) (param2)...
Definitions:
param One or more of the following alpha labels may be

included:
NORESERVOIR Alpha label indicating that the EOS interpolation
option is not to be used for the phase equilibrium
calculations in reservoir gridblocks.
NOSEPARATOR Alpha label indicating that the EOS interpolation
calculations in separator batteries.
NONETWORK Alpha label indicating that the EOS interpolation
calculations in well tubing strings and surface
pipeline network system.
MDI Alpha label indicating that the multidimensional
interpolation based on the distance between two
composition vectors is to be used.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-327

STOP Alpha label indicating that the simulation must

be stopped if current pressure or temperature in a
grid cell, well tubing string, or surface pipeline
network device is outside the pressure or
temperature range of the EOS interpolation
tables.
ANARES Alpha label indicating that analytical calculation
of compressibility factors is used in reservoir grid
blocks. Default uses interpolation function for the
compressibility factor calculation.
ANASEP Alpha label indicating that analytical calculation
of compressibility factors is used in separator
batteries. This is the default option.
ANANET Alpha label indicating that the analytical
calculation of compressibility factors is used in
well tubing strings and surface pipeline network
system. Default uses interpolation function for
the compressibility factor calculation.
NOANSP Alpha label indicating that interpolation function
is used in compressibility factors calculation in
separator batteries.
PRTTAB Alpha label indicating that the output of the EOS
interpolation table is requested. Interpolation
functions, saturation pressure, pressure entries,
vapor and liquid compressibility factors, and
recovery factor for each component will be
output in a file (Fortran Unit 77) for each region
and temperature.
00 Example:
00 C
C The EOS interpolation option is to be used for the phase-equilibrium
C calculations in separator batteries and well tubing strings
C (surface facility system).
C
EOSINT NORESERVOIR
4-328 Landmark - R2003.4

4.17.2 Temperature Entries of EOS Interpolation Tables (TEMPERATURE)
TEMPERATURE t1 t2 …
Definition:
t Temperature entry of the EOS interpolation

tables, ˚F (˚C). Values must be increasing.
NOTE: The reservoir temperature TRES specified on the DWB card is

applied as the temperature entry of the EOS interpolation tables if
the TEMPERATURE card is not included.
00 Example
C
C Temperature entries of the EOS interpolation tables.
C
TEMPERATURE 100 150 180
4.17.3 Maximum Pressure Entry of EOS Interpolation Tables (PMAX)
PMAX pmax
Definition:
pmax Maximum pressure entry of the EOS interpola-

tion tables, psia (kPa).
NOTE: 12,000 psia is applied as the maximum pressure entry of the EOS
interpolation tables if the PMAX card is not included.
00 Example:
C
C Maximum pressure entry of the EOS interpolation tables.
C
PMAX 4600
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-329

4.17.4 Minimum Pressure Entry of EOS Interpolation Tables (PMIN)
PMIN pmin
Definition:
pmin Minimum pressure entry of the EOS interpola-

tion tables, psia (kPa).
NOTE: The standard pressure PS specifed on the DWB card is applied as

the minimum pressure entry of the EOS interpolation tables if the
PMIN card is not included.
00 Example:
C
C Minimum pressure entry of the EOS interpolation tables.
C
PMIN 940
4.17.5 Composition Entries of EOS Interpolation Tables (CMP)
ALL
CMP (ipath)
iequil
psat1
1
z1
1
z2 … 1
z nc
psat2
2
z1
2
z2 … 2
z nc
.
.
.
psatnz
nz
z1
nz
z2 … nz
z nc
Definitions:
ALL Alpha label indicating that the specified composi-

tion entries are to be used for all EOS interpola-
tion tables.
iequil Equilibrium region (EOS interpolation table)
number.
ipath Compositional path number. Default is 1. This
parameter is ignored if the MDI keyword is
included on the EOSINT card.
4-330 Landmark - R2003.4

psat Initial guess of the saturation pressure for the

specified composition, psia (kPa).
j
zi Mole fraction of the i-th hydrocarbon component
in the j-th composition entry. The sum of zi, i=1,
..., nc must be 1.
00 Example
C
C Composition entries of the EOS interpolation table.
C
CMP 1 1
C psat Z
2235.24 .4892781 .0303435 .0714230 .2044471 .1533799 .0511285
2163.28 .4783313 .0306918 .0728783 .2089891 .1568294 .0522801
2091.33 .4671521 .0310449 .0743667 .2136294 .1603513 .0534556
2019.37 .4557324 .0314028 .0758894 .2183714 .1639480 .0546560
1947.41 .4440639 .0317654 .0774476 .2232186 .1676224 .0558822
4.17.6 Coefficients of Interpolation Function (COEFFICIENTS)
COEFFICIENTS (PATH)
c1 c2 … cn
d d2 … d n
 1 
Definitions:
PATH Alpha label indicating that the coefficients of the

path interpolation function are input on this card.
c Coefficient of the (path) interpolation function.
Default is the molecular weight of the corre-
sponding hydrocarbon component. This parame-
ter is ignored if the MDI keyword is included on
the EOSINT card.
d Coefficient of the interpolation function. This

parameter cannot be input with the PATH option.
Also, this parameter is ignored if the MDI key-
word is included in the EOSINT card.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-331

NOTE: When d-coefficients are input, the following extended interpolation

function is used:
∑ ci zi
F(z) = i=1
-------------------
n
∑ di zi
i=1
Otherwise, a linear interpolation function is used:

n
F(z) = ∑ ci zi
i=1
00 Example:
C
C Coefficients of the path interpolation function.
C
COEFFICIENT PATH
0. 10. 0. 0. 0. 0.
4.17.7 Maximum Number of Outer Iterations (ITNMAX)
ITNMAX itnmax
Definition:
itnmax Maximum number of outer iterations during the

simulation run. Recovery and compressibility
factors are not recalculated after outer iteration
number itnmax. Default is 6.
00 Example:
C
C Number of outer iterations in
C which recovery and compressibility factors are recalculated.
C
ITNMAX 4
4-332 Landmark - R2003.4

4.17.8 Minimum Increment of the Interpolation Function (DELTA)
DELTA delta
00 Definition:
delta Minimum increment of the interpolation func-

tion. If an absolute difference between values of
the interpolation function in two composition
entries is smaller than delta, one of these entries
is ignored. Default value is 1.e-6. This parameter
is ignored if the MDI keyword is included on the
EOSINT card.
00 Example
C
DELTA 0.00001
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-333

4.17.9 Oil and Gas Composition Output (OUTPUT)
ROILCM
RGASCM
OUTPUT (iequil isepnum istnum)
SOILCM
SGASCM
Definitions:
ROILCM Alpha label indicating that the output of oil com-

positions is requested. Saturation pressure, oil
composition, density, viscosity, compressibility
factors will be output in a file (Fortran Unit 73)
for all combinations of temperature, composition,
and pressure entries of the EOS interpolation
table. The oil compositions will be output in the
format of the CMP card.
RGASCM Alpha label indicating that the output of gas
compositions is requested. Saturation pressure,
gas composition, density, viscosity, compressibil-
ity factors will be output in a file (Fortran Unit
74) for all combinations of temperature, composi-
tion, and pressure entries of the EOS interpola-
tion table. The gas compositions will be output in
the format of the CMP card.
SOILCM Alpha label indicating that the output of oil com-
positions in some stage of a separator battery is
requested. Saturation pressure and oil composi-
tion will be output in a file (Fortran Unit 75) for
all composition entries of the EOS interpolation
table. The oil compositions will be output in the
SGASCM Alpha label indicating that the output of gas
compositions in some stage of a separator battery
is requested. Saturation pressure and gas compo-
sition will be output in a file (Fortran Unit 76) for
all composition entries of the EOS interpolation
table. The gas compositions will be output in the
iequil Equilibrium region number. Default is 1.
isepnum Separator battery number. Default is 1.
4-334 Landmark - R2003.4

istnum Stage number of the separator battery. If the stage

number is zero and output of the separator oil
composition is requested, the oil composition in
the oil sales line will be output. If the stage num-
ber is zero and output of the separator gas com-
position is requested, the gas composition in the
gas sales line will be output.
00 Example:
C
C Output of oil compositions in the entries of the EOS interpolation
C table in Equilibrium Region 2.
C
OUTPUT ROILCM 2
C
C Output of oil compositions in the entries of the EOS interpolation
C table in oil sales line of Separator Battery 2.
C
OUTPUT SOILCM 1 2 0
4.17.10 Automatic Generation of Composition Entries of EOS

Interpolation Tables
4.17.10.1 Swelling PVT Test Simulation (SWELLTEST)
ALL
SWELLTEST (ipath)
iequil
OILCM x 1 x 2 … x nc
GASCM y 1 y 2 … y nc
(GASFRAC f 1 f 2 … f nf )
(NGASFR ngasfr)
(PSAT psat)
Definitions:
ALL Alpha label indicating that the calculated compo-

sitions in different stages of the PVT test are to be
included in all EOS interpolation tables.
number.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-335


OILCM Alpha label indicating that the oil composition is
input on this card.
xi Molar fraction of the i-th hydrocarbon compo-
nent in the oil. This sum of xi, i=1, ..., nc must be
1.
GASCM Alpha label indicating that the gas composition is
input on this card.
yi Molar fraction of the i-th hydrocarbon compo-
nent in the gas. This sum of yi, i=1, ..., nc must be
1.
GASFRAC Alpha label indicating that the gas fractions in
different stages of the PVT test are input on this
card.
fi Gas fraction in the i-th stage of the PVT test.
NGASFR Alpha label indicating that the number of the
stages in the PVT test is input on this card.
ngasfr Number of stages in the PVT test. Gas fractions in
these stages are calculated by equally dividing
the interval from 0 to 1 in ngasfr+1 subintervals.
Default is 5.
PSAT Alpha label indicating that saturation pressure is
input on this card.
psat Initial approximation of the saturation pressure
in the first stage of the PVT test, psia (kPa).
NOTE: If GASFRAC and NGASFR data are both entered, the NGASFR
data is ignored.
00 Example:
C
C Swelling test simulation
C
SWELLTEST ALL 1
C Oil Composition
OILCM .50 .03 .07 .20 .15 .05
C Gas Composition
GASCM .77 .20 .03 0.0 .0 .0
4-336 Landmark - R2003.4

C Number of the stages in the swelling test.

NGASFR 10
4.17.10.2 Differential Expansion PVT Test Simulation (DIFEXPTEST)
 OIL 
ALL  
 
DIFEXPTEST GAS (ipath)
iequil
 BOTH 
COMP z 1 z 2 … z nc
(PRINPS prinps)
(NPRNPS nprnps)
(PRES p 1 p 2 … p np
(NPRES npres)
(GASFRAC f 1 f 2 … f nf )
(NGASFR ngasfr)
(PSAT psat)
(TEMP t t … t )
1 2 nt
Definitions:

number.
OIL Alpha label indicating that the oil compositions
in different stages of the PVT test are to be
included in the EOS interpolation table. The oil
composition will be used as the fluid composition
in the next stage. This is the default.
GAS Alpha label indicating that the gas compositions
included in the EOS interpolation table. The gas
composition will be used as the fluid composition
in the next stage.
BOTH Alpha label indicating that the oil and gas com-
positions in different stages of the PVT test are to
be included in the EOS interpolation table. The
oil composition will be used as the fluid composi-
tion in the next stage. A swelling test between oil
and gas in the first stage of the differential expan-
sion test is also simulated.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-337


COMP Alpha label indicating that the fluid composition
in the first stage of the PVT test is input on this
card.
zi Molar fraction of the i-th hydrocarbon compo-
nent in the fluid. The sum of zi, i=1, ..., nc must be
1.
PRINPS Alpha label indicating that the pressure interval
near the calculated saturation pressure in the
PVT test is input on this card.
prinps Pressure interval near the saturation pressure in
the PVT test, psia (kPa). Default is 20.
NPRNPS Alpha label indicating that the number of stages
in the PVT test where the pressures in these
stages are near the calculated saturation pressure
is input on this card. The pressure interval from
(saturation pressure minus PRINPS) to the satu-
ration pressure is equally divided into nprnps
stages.
nprnps Number of stages in the PVT test where the stage
pressure is near the saturation pressure. Default
is 10.
PRES Alpha label indicating that the pressure values in
card.
pi Pressure in the i-th stage of the PVT test, psia
(kPa). If the pressure specified is larger than the
saturation pressure minus PRINPS, it will be
ignored.
NPRES Alpha label indicating that the number of the
npres Number of stages in the PVT test. From mini-
mum pressure pmin to the calculated saturation
pressure minus prinps, the pressure is divided
equally into npres-nprnps+1 stages. From satu-
ration pressure minus prinps, the pressure is
divided equally into nprnps stages. Default is 5.
4-338 Landmark - R2003.4


different stages of the swelling PVT test are input
on this card. This card is used only if the keyword
BOTH is included on the DIFEXPTEST card.
fi Gas fraction in the i-th stage of the swelling PVT
test.
stages in the swelling PVT test is input on this
card. This card is used only if the keyword BOTH
is included on the DIFEXPTEST card.
ngasfr Number of stages in the swelling PVT test. Gas
fractions in these stages are calculated by equally
dividing the interval from 0 to 1 in ngasfr+1 sub-
intervals. Default is 5.
input on this card.
TEMP Alpha label indicating that the temperature val-
ues in the PVT test are input on this card.
t Temperature used in the PVT test. The differen-
tial expansion test is repeated several times if the
number of the temperature values is larger than
one. Default is the reservoir termperature TRES
specified on the DWB card.
NOTE: If PRES and NPRES data are both entered, the NPRES data is
ignored. If GASFRAC and NGASFR data are both entered, the
NGASFR data is ignored.
00 Example:
C
C Differential expansion test simulation
C
DIFEXPTEST 1 BOTH 1
C Number pressure entries
NPRES 20
C Fluid composition in the differential expansion test
COMP .50 .03 .07 .20 .15 .05
Number of gas fractions in the swelling test.
NGASFR 10
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-339

4.17.10.3 Constant Volume Depletion PVT Test Simulation

(CONVDPTEST)
 OIL 
ALL  GAS 
CONVDPTEST   (ipath)
iequil  BOTH 
 TOTAL 
COMP z 1 z 2 … z nc
(PRINPS prinps)
(NPRNPS nprnps)
(PRES p 1 p 2 … p np )
(NPRES npres)
(GASFRAC f f … f )
1 2 nf
(NGASFR ngasfr)
(PSAT psat)
(TEMP t t … t )
1 2 nt
Definitions:

number.
OIL Alpha label indicating that the oil compositions
included in the EOS interpolation table.
GAS Alpha label indicating that the gas compositions
included in the EOS interpolation table.
BOTH Alpha label indicating that the oil and gas com-
positions in different stages of the PVT test are to
be included in the EOS interpolation table. A
swelling test between oil and gas in the first stage
of the constant volume depletion test is also sim-
ulated.
TOTAL Alpha label indicating that the total compositions
included in the EOS interpolation tables. This is
the default.
4-340 Landmark - R2003.4


COMP Alpha label indicating that the fluid composition
in the first stage of the PVT test is input on this
card.
zi Molar fraction of the i-th hydrocarbon compo-
nent in the fluid. The sum of zi, i=1, ..., nc must be
1.
PRINPS Alpha label indicating that the pressure interval
near the calculated saturation pressure in the
PVT test is input on this card.
prinps Pressure interval near the saturation pressure in
the PVT test, psia (kPa). Default is 20.
NPRNPS Alpha label indicating that the number of stages
in the PVT test where the pressures in these
stages are near the calculated saturation pressure
is input on this card. The pressure interval from
(saturation pressure minus PRINPS) to the satu-
ration pressure is equally divided into nprnps
stages.
nprnps Number of stages in the PVT test where the stage
pressure is near the saturation pressure. Default
is 10.
card.
pi Pressure in the i-th stage of the PVT test, psia
(kPa). If the pressure specified is larger than the
saturation pressure minus PRINPS, it will be
ignored.
npres Number of stages in the PVT test. From mini-
mum pressure pmin to the calculated saturation
pressure minus prinps, the pressure is divided
equally into npres-nprnps+1 stages. From satu-
ration pressure minus prinps, the pressure is
divided equally into nprnps stages. Default is 5.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-341


different stages of the swelling PVT test are input
on this card. This card is used only if the keyword
BOTH is included on the CONVDPTEST card.
fi Gas fraction in the i-th stage of the swelling PVT
test.
stages in the swelling PVT test is input on this
card. This card is used only if the keyword BOTH
is included on the CONVDPTEST card.
ngasfr Number of stages in the swelling PVT test. Gas
fractions in these stages are calculated by equally
dividing the interval from 0 to 1 in ngasfr+1 sub-
input on this card.
t Temperature used in the PVT test. The constant
volume depletion test is repeated several times if
the number of the temperature values is larger
than one. Default is the reservoir termperature
TRES specified on the DWB card.
00 Example:
00 C
C Constant volume depletion test simulation
C
CONVDPTEST 1 TOTAL 1
C Number pressure entries
NPRES 25
C Fluid compositon
COMP .50 .03 .07 .20 .15 .05
PRINPS 20.
NPRNPS 11
4-342 Landmark - R2003.4

4.17.10.4 Multiple Contact PVT Test Simulation (MULCONTEST)
 FORWARD 
ALL  
 
MULCONTEST BACKWARD (ipath)
iequil
 BOTH 
OILCM x x … x
1 2 nc
GASCM y y … y
1 2 nc
NFLASH nflash
(PRES p p … p )
1 2 np
(NPRES npres)
(GASFRAC f f … f )
1 2 nf
(NGASFR ngasfr)
(PSAT psat)
(TEMP t t … t )
1 2 nt
Definitions:

number.
FORWARD Alpha label indicating that the simulation of a
forward multiple contact PVT test is requested.
BACKWARD Alpha label indicating that the simulation of a
backward multiple contact PVT test is requested.
BOTH Alpha label indicating that the simulation of for-
ward and backward multiple contact PVT tests is
requested. This is the default.
ipath Path number. Default is 1. This parameter is
ignored if the MDI keyword is included on the
EOSINT card.
OILCM Alpha label indicating that the oil composition is
input on this card.
xi Molar fraction of the i-th hydrocarbon compo-
nent in the oil. The sum of xi, i=1, ..., nc must be 1.
GASCM Alpha label indicating that the composition of
injected gas is input on this card.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-343

yi Molar fraction of the i-th hydrocarbon compo-

nent in the injected gas. The sum of yi, i=1, ..., nc
must be 1.
NFLASH Alpha label indicating that the number of the
nflash Number of stages in the PVT test.
the PVT test are input on this card.
p Pressure in the PVT test, psia (kPa). The simula-
tion of the multiple contact test is repeated sev-
eral times if the number of the pressure values on
this card is larger than one.
pressure values in the PVT test is input on this
card. The simulation of the multiple contact test
is repeated several times if the number of the
pressure values on this card is larger than one.
npres Number of pressure values in the PVT test. The
pressure values are calculated by equally divid-
ing the interval from minimum pressure pmin to
calculated saturated pressure in npres+1 sub-
the PVT test are input on this card.
f Gas fraction in the PVT test. The simulation of the
multiple contact test is repeated several times if
the number of the gas fractions on this card is
larger than one.
NGASFR Alpha label indicating that the number of the gas
fractions in the PVT test is input on this card. The
simulation of the multiple contact test is repeated
several times if the number of the gas fractions on
this card is larger than one.
ngasfr Number of the gas fractions in the PVT test. Gas
fractions are calculated by equally dividing the
interval from 0 to 1 in ngasfr+1 subintervals.
Default is 5.
input on this card.
4-344 Landmark - R2003.4


t Temperature used in the PVT test. The multiple
contact test is repeated several times if the num-
ber of the temperature values is larger than one.
Default is the reservoir temperature TRES speci-
fied on the DWB card.
00 Example
C
C Multiple contact test simulation.
C
MULCON ALL BACKWARD 1
C Oil Composition
OILCM .50 .03 .07 .20 .15 .05
C Injected Gas Composition
GASCM .77 .20 .03 0.0 .0 .0
C Number of the stages in the PVT test
NFLASH 10
C Pressure in the PVT test
PRES 2000
C Gas fraction in the PVT test
GASFRAC 0.525
4.18 Fracture Modeling (VIP-THERM)

Formation breakdown due to steam injection is known to occur in some
unconsolidated media and tarsands. This breakdown, or fracturing, will
occur in the region of the reservoir in which the stress in the formation
exceeds the fracture stress, which is a function of pressure, temperature,
and formation composition. Since coupling of a rigorous three-
dimensional formation stress model and the simulator conservation
equations is not currently practical, simplified methods have been devised
to model the formation breakdown phenomena.
Two methods are currently available in VIP-THERM for predicting the

effect on permeability (or flow transmissibility) in the fractured region.
The first method is the empirical model of Beattie, Boberg, and McNab
(Reference 32). The second method is more rigorous and involves
coupling of VIP-THERM to SIMTECHs’ fracture mechanics model
TARFRAC through the fracture interface TFRACINT (Reference 39).
TARFRAC must be independently licensed by the user from SIMTECH
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-345

Consulting Services Ltd. in order to use this method, in which TARFRAC

is executed (stand-alone) to generate a dynamic fracture growth
description. This description is then read in as data to VIP-THERM
through the fracture interface TFRACINT which modifies flow
transmissibilities in the fractured region and by default computes pseudo
relative permeabilities (which can be turned off) of oil, gas, and water for
gridblocks in the fractured region. Pseudo relative permeabilities are not
available in the first method.
4.18.1 Porosity Deformation Model

In both methods, the porosity deformation model of Beattie, Boberg, and
McNab (Reference 32) is used to model the effect of fracturing on porosity.
This is an empirical model consistent with the behavior of unconsolidated
sands and tarsands for the effect on porosity of fracturing and subsequent
recompaction. Porosity behavior is shown in Figure 4-10.
Ce
φmax
FR = B/A
Ce 2
3
Ce
Cr
A 4 Cd
B Ce
φo 1
R I
Pbase P Pd
r
Figure 4-10: Porosity Deformation Model
Point R refers to the reference pressure at which porosity φο (POR array) is

specified. Point I refers to an arbitrary initial condition. All porosity-
pressure relationships shown in Figure 4-10 are described by
φ = φref ⋅ EXP ( C ⋅ ( P – Pref ) )

As pressure increases from point I, porosity follows Equation with φref =
φo, C = Ce, and Pref = Pbase until pressure reaches the dilation, or fracture,
pressure Pd. Between point I and point l, the curve is reversible. If pressure
continues to increase above point l, then porosity follows the irreversible
dilation curve until either pressure declines or the specified maximum
value of porosity is reached. If pressure continues to increase once the
maximum porosity is reached, then compressibility reverts to the original
elastic value Ce and the porosity behavior is reversible. The dilation curve
4-346 Landmark - R2003.4

is fixed and is given by Equation with φref = φo ⋅ EXP(Ce ⋅ (Pd - Pbase)), C =

Cd, and Pref = Pd. If pressure begins to decrease from a point on the
dilation curve, such as point 2, porosity follows Equation reversibly with
φref = φ2, C = Ce, and Pref = P2. As pressure decreases below the
recompaction pressure Pr, recompaction occurs and porosity follows
Equation irreversibly with φref = φ3, C = Cr, and Pref = Pr . Cr is calculated
from a specified parameter FR, which is defined as the fraction of total
dilation that is not recovered on recompaction to P = O and which is
shown in Figure 4-10 as the ratio of B to A. As pressure increases from a
point on the recompaction curve (point 4), porosity follows Equation
reversibly until either the dilation curve or the recompaction curve
defined by points 3 and 4 is intersected. Once recompaction occurs, the
recompaction curve is fixed until dilation occurs subsequently. If pressure
decreases to Pr immediately following dilation, a new recompaction curve
is computed from FR and the new value of A.
The default value of Pbase shown in Figure 4-10 is PINIT for equilibrium
region 1 in the EQUIL table (Section 4.2). If PINIT(1) is greater than Pd,
then Pbase must be reset to some value less than Pd as shown below.
PORDEF PD PR CRD FR PORMAX (PBASE)

pd pr crd fr pormax (pbase)
Definitions:
pd Dilation (fracture) pressure, psia (kPa).
pr Recompaction pressure, psia (kPa).
crd Dilatant rock compressibility, psia-1 (kPa-1).
fr Fraction of total dilation not recovered on

recompaction to P = O.
pormax Maximum allowable value of porosity.
pbase Reference pressure for reference porosity (POR

array), psia (kPa). Optional, but required if PINIT
(1) > Pd.
NOTE: 1. PD, PR, CRD, and FR may optionally be specified as gridblock

array data described in Section 5.46. Elastic rock
compressibility Ce is taken as the CR value specified either in
the constant data (Section 2.2.4.2) or the array data (Section
5.23).
2. The porosity deformation model is not required in conjunction

with SIMTECH’s fracture model, but no other method for
predicting the effect of fracturing on porosity is available.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-347

4.18.2 Permeability Models
4.18.2.1 Method of Beattie, Boberg, and McNab (Reference 32)
In this method, permeability behavior is modeled as a function of porosity

and user-specified permeability multipliers as:
 KMUL ⋅ ( φ – φ 0 )
k = k 0 ⋅ EXP  -------------------------------------------
 ( 1 – φ0 ) 
Values of KMUL are specified as array data (Section 5.46) for each flow
direction (including diagonal directions for NINEPT option) in such a
manner as to define the fracture plane.
4.18.2.2 SIMTECH Method
Documentation of the SIMTECH method will be provided at the users’

request after verification of TARFRAC licensing from SIMTECH.
4.19 Rock Heat Capacity Tables (VIP-THERM)

Rock heat capacity may be treated as a linear function of temperature as
described in Section 2.2.4.2 and Section 5.43 or may be entered as a tabular
function of temperature as described here. In either case, the input heat
capacity values correspond to the solid (non-porous) rock matrix and are
internally modified by a factor of (1- initial porosity) to account for
porosity.
Rock heat capacity table numbers are assigned to gridblocks with the
ICPRTB array which is described in Section 5.47.
CPRTAB icprtb
T CPR
t1 cpr1
t2 cpr2
. .
. .
. .
4-348 Landmark - R2003.4

Definitions:
CPRTAB Alpha label indicating that the data which follow

are rock heat capacity tables.
icprtb Rock heat capacity table number.
T, CPR Column headers for temperature and heat capacity

data.
ti Temperature, ˚F (˚C).
cpri Rock heat capacity, Btu/FT3 ˚F (kJ/M3˚C).
NOTE: 1. Temperature values in the tables must be input in increasing

order.
2. All CPRTAB tables must appear together.
4.20 Chemical Reactions (REACTION Card) (VIP-THERM

Compositional) (Reference 42)
00 An unlimited number of irreversible chemical reactions may be specified
involving any number of components specified on the COMPONENTS
card. Water (an implicitly defined component) may also be specified as a
reactant or product using the label H2O. The reaction rate expression is of
the same form of that given in the reference, but the definition of terms are
generalized so that it may apply to homogeneous reactions (those
involving reactants in a single fluid phase):
00 nreactants
Rate = V A e(-Ea / (R T)) Π (Ci)ni
i=1
00 where R is the gas constant, T is temperature, Ea is the activation energy, A

is the rate constant, Ci is the concentration of reactant i,and ni is the
reaction order in component i. The volume term V is user-defined as total
system volume (fluid plus rock, as in the reference), fluid volume, or
phase volume. The reactant molar concentrations Ci are defined as the
number of moles of component i in a specified phase divided by the
specified volume (total, fluid, or phase). Reactant concentrations and
volume terms are given by:
Ci = φ Sm ρm xim ; V = Vt (total volume option)
Ci = Sm ρm xim ; V = Vt φ (fluid volume option)
Ci = ρm xim ; V = Vt φ Sm (phase volume option)
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-349

00 where φ is porosity, Sm and ρm are the saturation and molar density of

reactant i's phase, and xim is the mole fraction of component i in its
reacting phase. Units of the various model parameters are discussed at
the end of this section.
00 Fully implicit treatment of all variables would lead to application of the

instantaneous reaction rate at the new time level to the entire timestep. As
in the reference, temperature T and phase saturations Sm are defined as
the average of the old and new time level values in order to better
approximate the average reaction rate over the timestep. If a phase
saturation is zero at the old time level or for any iterate value, then Sm is
re-defined at the new time level. All other variables (densities and mole
fractions) are defined at the new time level.
00 The phase volume option should be used for, and is allowed only for,
homogeneous reactions. The fluid volume option is recommended for
heterogeneous reactions. The total volume option is not recommended
except to match results from other simulators which may use this
representation. This option results in reactant concentrations which
depend on porosity, which is intuitively incorrect. Adding rock volume to
a system while maintaining fluid volume and saturations constant should
not change the reaction rate. This is not true in the total volume option
except for first-order reactions (reaction order is equal to the sum of
reactant orders).
00 The reaction model is fairly rigorous for homogeneous reactions, but is a

simple approximation to the actual process for heterogeneous reactions,
which involves complex factors such as saturation distributions within
gridblocks, pore structure, interfacial areas, and diffusion rates. The use of
fluid volume average concentrations approximates some of these effects,
in that increasing saturations of non-reacting phases decreases the
effective reactant concentrations and the rate of reaction for heterogeneous
reactions of order greater than one.
00 The input data allow specification of model parameter units for ease of
use. The units of rate are moles of first reactant consumed per unit time
(MUNIT/TUNIT), concentrations are in moles of reactant per unit volume
(MUNIT/VUNIT), molar energies (activation energy and heat of reaction,
units may be independently specified) are in energy per mole (EUNIT).
4-350 Landmark - R2003.4

00 Default units are:
English Metric Lab
MUNIT lb moles kg moles g moles
TUNIT days days hours
VUNIT cubic ft cubic m liters
EUNIT Btu/lb mole j/g mole j/g mole
00 Any of the above units given for any quantity may be specified for each
reaction. VUNIT may be additionally specified as barrels or cubic
centimeters. EUNIT may be additionally specified as calories/g mole. The
units of the rate constant A are (VUNIT / MUNIT)n-1/ TUNIT where n is
the order of reaction.
REACTION nr (card 1)
si cmpi PLUS sj cmpj PLUS ... = sk cmpk PLUS sl cmpl PLUS ...
(card 2)
ORDER ni nj ... (card 3)
PHASE W W ... (card 4)
O O ...
G G ...
VOLUME PHASE (VUNIT) (card 5)
FLUID
TOTAL
A a (card 6)
EACT eact (EUNIT) (card 7)
HR hr (EUNIT) (card 8)
( MOLES MUNIT ) (card 9)
( TIME TUNIT ) (card 10)
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-351

00 Definitions:
nr Reaction number. Default maximum is 5, which

may be increased by specification of the NRXMAX
parameter on the DIM card.
si Stoichiometric coefficient for component cmpi.
cmpi Either a component name or number, or the label

H2O for water.
PLUS Alpha label indicating multiple reactants or

products.
ORDER Alpha label indicating that the following values on

this line are the reaction orders in each reactant.
ni Reaction order in reacting component i.
PHASE Alpha label indicating that the following alpha

labels on this line indicate the fluid phase
containing each reactant as:
W water,
O oil, or
G gas.
VOLUME Alpha label indicating that the alpha label which

follows defines the volume basis for concentrations
and the volume term in the reaction rate expression
as:
PHASE Phase volume, valid only for homogeneous

reactions (the reactants are contained within a single
phase),
FLUID Total fluid volume, or
TOTAL Total system volume (fluid plus rock).
VUNIT One of the following alpha labels, used to change

the default units of volume:
FT3 cubic feet,
BBL barrels,
M3 cubic meters,
L liters, or
CC cubic centimeters.
4-352 Landmark - R2003.4

A Alpha label indicating that the following value on

this line is the reaction rate constant.
a Reaction rate constant. Units are

(VUNIT/MUNIT)n-1 / TUNIT where n is the
overall order of reaction.
EACT Alpha label indicating the following value on this

line is the activation energy.
eact Activation energy, Btu/lb mole (kj/kg mole).
EUNIT One of the following alpha labels, used to change

the default units for activation energy and/or heat
of reaction:
BLBM Btu/lb mole,
JGM joules/g mole, or
CGM cal/g mole.
HR Alpha label indicating that the following value on

this line is the heat of reaction.
hr Value for the heat of reaction, Btu/lbmole

(j/gmole).
MOLES Alpha label indicating that the following alpha label

specifies the units to be used for moles.
MUNIT One of the following alpha labels, used to change

the default units of moles:
LBM lb moles,
KGM kg moles, or
GM g moles.
TIME Alpha label indicating that the following alpha label

specifies the units to be used for time.
TUNIT One of the following alpha labels, used to change

the default units of time:
DAYS days, or
HRS hours.
R2003.4 - Landmark 4-353

NOTE: 1. Reaction numbers must be greater than zero and less than or
equal to the total number of reactions specified.
2. For multiple reactions, reaction data must be input in order of

increasing reaction number.
3. O or G may be specified for the defined components

(those on the COMPONENTS card). G may not be
specified for the non-volatile components.
4. Stoichiometric coefficients must satisfy mass balance

(within a small tolerance), i.e., si Mi + sj Mj + ... = sk Mk +
sl Ml + ..., where M is the component molecular weight.
5. O or G may be specified for the defined components

(those on the COMPONENTS card). G may not be
specified for the non-volatile components.
4-354 Landmark - R2003.4

Chapter
5
00000Grid Data Arrays
5.1 Array Data

The grid data must immediately follow the table data. 00
Arrays described in this section are input using the array input options
described in Section 1.5.2, and can be modified using the array
modification cards described in Sections 1.5.4 and 6.1. 00
Several different combinations of array data can be used to describe

reservoir properties. However, there are consistency requirements for the
data described in Section 5.1 through Section 5.41. The valid combinations
are summarized below. The user must first choose the appropriate
combination of arrays from the bracketed options. The parentheses ( )
indicate optional data, while a choice must be made among the arrays in
each vertically aligned group. These are schematics only; these are not
data. 00
In VIP-THERM, only combinations 1-4 are valid, and in each of those the
following arrays are additionally required: CPR0, DTX0 (or DTR0), DTY0
(or KTTH0) and KTZ0. 00
  KTHETA KZ
 
R DZNET KR DEPTH
1) DTHETA DZ POR
DR  NETGRS  KRF KTF KZF MDEPTH
 
 
DZNET KX KYF KZ DEPTH
2) DX DY DZ POR
 NETGRS  KXF KYF KZF MDEPTH
3) DXB DYB DZB (DZBNET) KX KY KZ POR DEPTH

KXF KYF KZF MDEPTH
4) DZCORN
XCORN YCORN ZCORN DZBCOR ( ZCORNE ) ( ZCORNW ) ( ZCORSW ) ( NETGRS ) KX KY KZ POR
DZVCOR
5) DZCORN
XCORN YCORN ZCORN DZBCOR ( ZCORNE ) ( ZCORNW ) ( ZCORSW ) ( NETGRS ) TX TY TZ PV
DZVCOR
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-355

Grid Data Arrays VIP-CORE REFERENCE MANUAL
6) TX TY TZ (TXYL TXYR) PV MDEPTH

TR TTHETA DZ DEPTH
Certain arrays must be read before other arrays. For example, the
thickness array must precede the depth array. Order restrictions are
specified in the array description. 00
Array data are defined at gridblock centers unless otherwise specified in

the array description. 00
When using the DUAL option (Section 2.2.13.1) these arrays represent the
matrix properties. Fracture properties are input using the following sets of
keywords: 00
TEX  
1) R ... KRFEFF KTFEFF KZFEFF PORF  DEPF 
SIGMA
DR  MDEPF 
LX LY LZ
TEX  
2) DX ... SIGMA KRFEFF KTFEFF KZFEFF PORF  DEPF 
 MDEPF 
LX LY LZ
TEX  
3) DXB ... SIGMA KRFEFF KTFEFF KZFEFF PORF  DEPF 
 MDEPF 
LX LY LZ
TEX  
4) XCORN ... POR SIGMA KRFEFF KTFEFF KZFEFF PORF  DEPF 
 MDEPF 
LX LY LZ
5) [ XCORN ... PV TEX TXF TYF TZF PVF (MDEPF) ]
TX ... TEX TXF TYF TZF (TXYLF TXYRF) PVF  DEPF 

6)  
TR TRF TTHETF  MDEPF 
5-356 Landmark - R2003.4

VIP-CORE REFERENCE MANUAL Grid Data Arrays
5.2 Start of Array Data (ARRAYS)
ARRAYS
The general format of array data is: 00
aname option (amin amax nl)

values
Definitions: 00
aname Array name as specified in this section.
amin Minimum value for data values (optional, unless

amax or nl specified).
amax Maximum value for data values (optional, unless

amin or nl specified).
nl Number of areal planes for which data will be

specified - used only with the LNXVAR,
LNYVAR, LNZVAR and LNVAL input options.
values Data values are entered as necessary for the array

option being used.
Certain arrays must be read before other arrays. For example, the
thickness array must precede the depth array. Order restrictions are
specified in the individual array writeups. 00
Array data are defined at gridblock centers unless otherwise specified in

the array description. 00
The array data must be preceded by the alpha label ARRAYS. 00
Examples: 00
ARRAYS
C
C GRID BLOCK DIMENSIONS
C
DX CON
66.67007
C
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-357

DY CON
66.67007
C
DZ ZVAR
7.2 4.4 15.8
C
C GRID BLOCK TOPS
C 00
5.3 Grid Definition
5.3.1 X (R) Non-Corner Point Grid Dimension (DX, DXB, DR, R)
array option (amin amax nl)

Enter data values as required.
These grid dimensions are usually input using the XVAR (RVAR) option. 00
Definitions: 00
Rectangular Grid: 00
DX, ft (m) Incremental length of each gridblock in the x

direction, measured along the horizontal.
DXB, ft (m) Incremental length of each gridblock in the x

direction, measured along the bedding plane.
Radial Grid: 00
DR, ft (m) Radial increment of each gridblock, measured

along the horizontal.
R, ft (m) Radius to the outer edge of each gridblock,

measured along the horizontal from the origin.
Example: 00
ARRAYS
C
DX XVAR
100 150 200 00
5-358 Landmark - R2003.4

5.3.2 X Direction Corner Point Location (XCORN)
XCORN option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
XCORN, ft(m) X direction coordinate of each corner point in the

grid. (NX+1) * (NY+1) * (NZ+1) values are
required. Values must not decrease with
increasing I index; i.e., XCORN(I,J,K) ≤
XCORN(I+1, J,K).
Example: 00
ARRAYS
XCORN VALUE
C FIRST LAYER
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10000
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10000
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10000
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10000
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10000
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10000
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10000
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10000
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10000
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10000
C SECOND LAYER
0.00 956.52 1913.04 2869.57 3826.09 4782.61 5739.13 6695.65 7652.17
8608.70 9565.2
0.00 956.52 1913.04 2869.57 3826.09 4782.61 5739.13 6695.65 7652.17
8608.70 9565.22
0.00 956.52 1913.04 2869.57 3826.09 4782.61 5739.13 6695.65 7652.17
8608.70 9565.22
0.00 956.52 1913.04 2869.57 3826.09 4782.61 5739.13 6695.65 7652.17
8608.70 9565.22
0.00 956.52 1913.04 2869.57 3826.09 4782.61 5739.13 6695.65 7652.17
8608.70 9565.22
0.00 956.52 1913.04 2869.57 3826.09 4782.61 5739.13 6695.65 7652.17
8608.70 9565.22
0.00 956.52 1913.04 2869.57 3826.09 4782.61 5739.13 6695.65 7652.17
8608.70 9565.22
0.00 956.52 1913.04 2869.57 3826.09 4782.61 5739.13 6695.65 7652.17
8608.70 9565.22
0.00 956.52 1913.04 2869.57 3826.09 4782.61 5739.13 6695.65 7652.17
8608.70 9565.22
0.00 956.52 1913.04 2869.57 3826.09 4782.61 5739.13 6695.65 7652.17
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-359

8608.70 9565.22
C THIRD LAYER
0.00 886.96 1773.91 2660.87 3547.83 4434.78 5321.74 6208.70 7095.65
7982.61 8869.57
0.00 886.96 1773.91 2660.87 3547.83 4434.78 5321.74 6208.70 7095.65
7982.61 8869.57
0.00 886.96 1773.91 2660.87 3547.83 4434.78 5321.74 6208.70 7095.65
7982.61 8869.57
0.00 886.96 1773.91 2660.87 3547.83 4434.78 5321.74 6208.70 7095.65
7982.61 8869.57
0.00 886.96 1773.91 2660.87 3547.83 4434.78 5321.74 6208.70 7095.65
7982.61 8869.57
0.00 886.96 1773.91 2660.87 3547.83 4434.78 5321.74 6208.70 7095.65
7982.61 8869.57 00
0.00 886.96 1773.91 2660.87 3547.83 4434.78 5321.74 6208.70 7095.65

7982.61 8869.57
0.00 886.96 1773.91 2660.87 3547.83 4434.78 5321.74 6208.70 7095.65
7982.61 8869.57
0.00 886.96 1773.91 2660.87 3547.83 4434.78 5321.74 6208.70 7095.65
7982.61 8869.57
0.00 886.96 1773.91 2660.87 3547.83 4434.78 5321.74 6208.70 7095.65
7982.61 8869.57
C FOURTH LAYER
0 800 1600 2400 3200 4000 4800 5600 6400 7200 8000
0 800 1600 2400 3200 4000 4800 5600 6400 7200 8000
0 800 1600 2400 3200 4000 4800 5600 6400 7200 8000
0 800 1600 2400 3200 4000 4800 5600 6400 7200 8000
0 800 1600 2400 3200 4000 4800 5600 6400 7200 8000
0 800 1600 2400 3200 4000 4800 5600 6400 7200 8000
0 800 1600 2400 3200 4000 4800 5600 6400 7200 8000
0 800 1600 2400 3200 4000 4800 5600 6400 7200 8000
0 800 1600 2400 3200 4000 4800 5600 6400 7200 8000
0 800 1600 2400 3200 4000 4800 5600 6400 7200 8000 00
5-360 Landmark - R2003.4

5.3.3 Y (THETA) Non-Corner Point Grid Dimension (DY, DYB, DTHETA)

These grid dimensions are usually input using the YVAR (THVAR)
option. 00
Definitions: 00
Rectangular Grid: 00
DY, ft (m) Incremental length of each gridblock in the y

direction, measured along the horizontal.
DYB, ft (m) Incremental length of each gridblock in the y

direction, measured along the bedding plane.
Radial Grid: 00
DTHETA, degrees Incremental angle spanned by each gridblock,

measured in a horizontal plane.
5.3.4 Y Direction Corner Point Location (YCORN)
YCORN option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
YCORN, ft(m) Y direction coordinate of each corner point in the

grid. (NX+1) * (NY+1) * (NZ+1) values are
required. Values must not increase with
increasing J index; i.e., YCORN (I,J,K) ≥ YCORN
(I,J+1,K).
Example: 00
ARRAYS
YCORN VALUE
C FIRST LAYER
10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000
8000 8000 8000 8000 8000 8000 8000 8000 8000 8000 8000
7000 7000 7000 7000 7000 7000 7000 7000 7000 7000 7000
6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000
5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000
4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-361

3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000
2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000
00000000000
C SECOND LAYER
8021.74 8021.74 8021.74 8021.74 8021.74 8021.74 8021.74 8021.74 8021.74
8021.74 8021.74
7130.43 7130.43 7130.43 7130.43 7130.43 7130.43 7130.43 7130.43 7130.43
7130.43 7130.43
6239.13 6239.13 6239.13 6239.13 6239.13 6239.13 6239.13 6239.13 6239.13
6239.13 6239.13
5347.83 5347.83 5347.83 5347.83 5347.83 5347.83 5347.83 5347.83 5347.83
5347.83 5347.83
4456.52 4456.52 4456.52 4456.52 4456.52 4456.52 4456.52 4456.52 4456.52
4456.52 4456.52
3565.22 3565.22 3565.22 3565.22 3565.22 3565.22 3565.22 3565.22 3565.22
3565.22 3565.22
2673.91 2673.91 2673.91 2673.91 2673.91 2673.91 2673.91 2673.91 2673.91
2673.91 2673.91
1782.61 1782.61 1782.61 1782.61 1782.61 1782.61 1782.61 1782.61 1782.61
1782.61 1782.61
891.30 891.30 891.30 891.30 891.30 891.30 891.30 891.30 891.30 891.30
891.30 891.30
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0 0
C THIRD LAYER
6456.52 6456.52 6456.52 6456.52 6456.52 6456.52 6456.52 6456.52 6456.52
6456.52 6456.52
5739.13 5739.13 5739.13 5739.13 5739.13 5739.13 5739.13 5739.13 5739.13
5739.13 5739.13
5021.74 5021.74 5021.74 5021.74 5021.74 5021.74 5021.74 5021.74 5021.74
5021.74 5021.74 00
4304.35 4304.35 4304.35 4304.35 4304.35 4304.35 4304.35 4304.35 4304.35

4304.35 4304.35
3586.96 3586.96 3586.96 3586.96 3586.96 3586.96 3586.96 3586.96 3586.96
3586.96 3586.96
2869.57 2869.57 2869.57 2869.57 2869.57 2869.57 2869.57 2869.57 2869.572
869.57 2869.57
2152.17 2152.17 2152.17 2152.17 2152.17 2152.17 2152.17 2152.17 2152.17
2152.17 2152.17
1434.78 1434.78 1434.78 1434.78 1434.78 1434.78 1434.78 1434.78 1434.78
1434.78 1434.78
717.39 717.39 717.39 717.39 717.39 717.39 717.39 717.39 717.39 717.39
717.39 717.39
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00
C FOURTH LAYER
5-362 Landmark - R2003.4

4500 4500 4500 4500 4500 4500 4500 4500 4500 4500 4500
4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000
3500 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500 3500
3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000
2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500
2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000
1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500
1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00
5.4 Gross Thickness - Z grid dimension
5.4.1 Gross Vertical Thickness, Non-Corner Point Grid (DZ)
DZ option (amin amax nl)

Gross thickness usually is input using the ZVAR or VALUE option. It must
precede the DEPTH or MDEPTH array (non-corner-point grids). 00
Definition: 00
DZ, ft (m) Gross vertical thickness of each gridblock. Net

thickness is assumed equal to gross thickness if
no DZNET or NETGRS array is read.
5.4.2 Gross Stratum Thickness, Non-Corner Point Grid (DZB)
DZB option (amin amax nl)

Gross thickness usually is input using the ZVAR or VALUE option. It must
precede the DEPTH or MDEPTH array (non-corner-point grids). 00
Definition: 00
DZB, ft (m) Gross stratum thickness of each gridblock,

measured perpendicular to the bedding plane.
Net stratum thickness is assumed equal to gross
thickness if no DZBNET array is read.
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-363

Example: 00
ARRAYS
DZB ZVAR
1.0 2.0 3.0 00
5.4.3 Corner Point Gross Vertical Thickness (DZCORN)
DZCORN option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
DZCORN, ft (m) Gross vertical thickness below each corner point,

measured as the depth difference between each
corner point and the corresponding corner point
in the next layer below it. Net thickness is
assumed equal to gross thickness if no NETGRS
array is read.
This gross thickness array must precede the ZCORN array. This array
requires (NX+1) * (NY+1) * NZ values and is used only to process the
LAYER or DIP options for the ZCORN array. 00
5.4.4 Corner Point Gross Stratum Thickness (DZBCOR)
DZBCOR option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
DZBCOR, ft (m) Gross stratum thickness below each corner point,

When this array is used, the XCORN and YCORN
values are adjusted so that the line from a corner
point in one layer to the corresponding corner
point in the next layer down is perpendicular to
the bedding plane. Net stratum thickness is
assumed equal to gross thickness if no NETGRS
array is read.
This gross thickness array is usually input using the VALUE option. It
must precede the ZCORN array. This array requires (NX+1) * (NY+1) * NZ
values and is used only to process the LAYER or DIP options for the
ZCORN array. 00
5-364 Landmark - R2003.4

5.4.5 Depth Corner Point Gross Stratum Thickness (DZVCOR)
DZVCOR option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
DZVCOR, ft (m) Gross stratum thickness below each corner point,

measured as the depth difference between a
corner point in one layer and the corresponding
corner point in the next layer down. This data
differs from the use of the DZCORN array in that
the XCORN and YCORN values are adjusted so
that the line from a corner point in one layer to
the corresponding corner point in the next layer
down is perpendicular to the bedding plane. Net
stratum thickness is assumed equal to gross
thickness if no NETGRS array is read.
This gross thickness array is usually input using the VALUE option. It
must precede the ZCORN array. This array requires (NX+1) * (NY+1) * NZ
values and is used only to process the LAYER or DIP options for the
ZCORN array. 00
5.5 Net Thickness - Z Grid Dimension
5.5.1 Net Vertical Thickness, Non-Corner Point Grid (DZNET)
DZNET option (amin amax nl)

Net thickness usually is input using the ZVAR or VALUE option. The net
pay is assumed to be evenly distributed across the entire gross interval. If
both gross and net thicknesses are input, gross thickness is used only in
the calculations of depth and vertical transmissibility; net thickness is used
to determine pore volume and areal transmissibility. 00
Definition: 00
DZNET, ft (m) Net vertical thickness of each gridblock. Used

only when gross vertical thickness is specified
with the DZ array. If net and gross thickness are
equal, use the DZ array.
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-365

5.5.2 Net Stratum Thickness, Non-Corner Point Grid (DZBNET)
DZBNET option (amin amax nl)

Net thickness usually is input using the ZVAR or VALUE option. The net
pay is assumed to be evenly distributed across the entire gross interval. If
both gross and net thicknesses are input, gross thickness is used only in
the calculations of depth and vertical transmissibility; net thickness is used
to determine pore volume and areal transmissibility. 00
Definition: 00
DZBNET, ft (m) Net stratum thickness of each gridblock,

Used only when gross stratum thickness is
specified with the DZB array. If net and gross
thickness are equal, use the DZB array.
5.5.3 Ratio Net Vertical Thickness to Gross Thickness (NETGRS)
NETGRS option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
NETGRS Ratio of net vertical thickness to gross thickness

of each gridblock. Default is 1.
Net/Gross ratio usually is input using the ZVAR or VALUE option. Net/
Gross ratio is used to calculate net from gross thickness. The net pay is
assumed to be evenly distributed across the entire gross interval. Gross
thickness is used in the calculations of depth and vertical transmissibility;
net thickness is used to determine pore volume and areal transmissibility. 00
Can be used with both non-corner point and corner-point grids. 00
5.5.4 Fracture Block Net to Gross Vertical Thickness Ratio (NETGF)
NETGF option (amin amax nl)

5-366 Landmark - R2003.4

Definition: 00
NETGF Ratio of net vertical thickness to gross thickness

of each fracture gridblock. Default is NETGRS,
(the matrix values).
Net/Gross ratio usually is input using the ZVAR or VALUE option. Net/
Gross ratio is used to calculate net from gross thickness. The net pay is
assumed to be evenly distributed across the entire gross interval. Gross
thickness is used in the calculations of depth and vertical transmissibility;
net thickness is used to determine pore volume and areal transmissibility. 00
Can be used with both non-corner point and corner-point grids. 00
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-367

5.6 Depth - Non-Corner Point Grid
5.6.1 Depth to Top of Gridblock (DEPTH)
DEPTH option (amin amax nl)

Enter data values as required
Depth usually is input using the LAYER, DIP, or ZVAR option. 00
Definition: 00
DEPTH, ft (m) Depth to the top of each gridblock, measured

from an arbitrary datum, positive downward.
5.6.2 Depth to Center of Gridblock (MDEPTH)
MDEPTH option (amin amax nl)

Depth usually is input using the LAYER, DIP, or ZVAR option 00
Definition: 00
MDEPTH, ft (m) Depth to the center of each gridblock, measured

Example: 00
MDEPTH LAYER
20*120.0 00
5.7 Depth - Corner Point Description

Cartesian and radial grid meshes impose limits on the physical reservoir
characteristics which can be represented. An example of this would be the
specification of fault planes, which must occur at block boundaries and are
restricted to vertical displacement. 00
Since the reservoir simulator deals with block properties and interblock
connections only, any system which can be described in these terms can be
modelled. Corner point gridding permits the user to define the eight
corners of each gridblock and generates the required simulation
properties. The user is cautioned that generation of non-orthogonal
connections between gridblocks can lead to errors in flow calculations,
because the resulting cross terms in the equations are ignored. 00
5-368 Landmark - R2003.4

5.7.1 Depth to Each Corner Point (ZCORN)
ZCORN option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
ZCORN, ft (m) Depth to each corner point, measured from an

arbitrary datum, positive downward.
(NX+1)*(NY+1)*(NZ+1) data values are required.
In a faulted grid system, this depth is interpreted
as the depth of the southeast corner of each block
(viewed with the (1,1) block in the northwestern
corner and the (NX,NY) block in the southeastern
corner of each layer). The depths of the other
three corners of each block may be input using
the ZCORNE, ZCORNW, or ZCORSW arrays.
5.7.2 Depth to NE Corner Point (ZCORNE)
ZCORNE option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
ZCORNE, ft (m) Depth to the northeast corner of each block in

each layer, measured from an arbitrary datum,
positive downward. NX*NY*(NZ+1) data values
are required. In a faulted grid system, this depth
is used, in conjunction with the XCORN, YCORN
and ZCORN arrays, to locate the exact position of
the corner point so that the depth value is
honored and the grid remains valid (e.g., without
holes or overlapping blocks).
Example: 00
ZCORNE ZVAR
100 200 250 00
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-369

5.7.3 Depth to NW Corner Point (ZCORNW)
ZCORNW option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
ZCORNW, ft (m) Depth to the northwest corner of each block in

is used, in conjunction with the XCORN, YCORN,
Example: 00
ZCORNW LAYER
20*110.0 00
5.7.4 Depth to SW Corner Point (ZCORSW)
ZCORSW option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
ZCORSW, ft (m) Depth to the southwest corner of each block in

is used, in conjunction with the XCORN, YCORN,
5-370 Landmark - R2003.4

Example: 00
ZCORSW ZVAR
50*200.0 00
5.7.5 Depth to Bottom Corner Point (ZBOT)
ZBOT option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
ZBOT, ft (m) Depth to each bottom corner point, measured

(NX+1)*(NY+1)*NZ data values are required. In a
faulted grid system, this depth is interpreted as
the depth of the southeast corner of each block
bottom (viewed with the (1,1) block in the
northwestern corner and the (NX, NY) block in
the southeastern corner of each layer). The depths
of the other three bottom corners of each block
may be input using the ZBOTNE, ZBOTNW, or
ZBOTSW arrays.
Example: 00
ZBOT ZVAR
15.3 18 00
5.7.6 Depth to NE Bottom Corner Point (ZBOTNE)
ZBOTNE option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
ZBOTNE, ft (m) Depth to the northeast bottom corner of each

block in each layer, measured from an arbitrary
datum, positive downward. NX*NY*NZ data
values are required. In a faulted grid system, this
depth is used, in conjunction with XCORN,
YCORN, and ZCORN arrays, to locate the exact
position of the bottom corner point so that the
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-371

depth value is honored and the grid remains

valid (e.g., without holes or overlapping blocks).
Example: 00
ZBOTNE ZVAR
15.3 18 00
5.7.7 Depth to NW Bottom Corner Point (ZBOTNW)
ZBOTNW option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
ZBOTNW, ft (m) Depth to the northwest bottom corner of each

valid (e.g., without holes or overlapping blocks).
Example: 00
ZBOTNW ZVAR
15.3 18 00
5.7.8 Depth to SW Bottom Corner Point (ZBOTSW)
ZBOTSW option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
ZBOTSW, ft (m) Depth to the southwest bottom corner of each

5-372 Landmark - R2003.4


valid (e.g., without holes or overlapping blocks.)
Example: 00
ZBOTSW ZVAR
15.3 18 00
5.7.9 Depth to Point on a Depth Line (ZLNCOR)
ZLNCOR option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
ZLNCOR, ft (m) Depth to a point on a depth line in each block of

two layers. This option is used for the
specification of depth lines in the LINE corner
position option. The options LNXVAR, LNYVAR,
LNZVAR or LNVAL can be used. If this array is
not input then the values of the array ZCORN in
the first two layers are used for the specification
of z-coordinates of two points on the depth lines.
Example: 00
ZLNCOR ZVAR
15.3 18 00
5.8 Fracture Block Depth (DEPF, MDEPF)

When the DUAL option has been specified, different depths for the
fracture blocks than for the matrix blocks can be entered. If not entered,
the depths will be the same as for the matrix blocks. 00

R2003.4 - Landmark 5-373

Definitions: 00
DEPF, ft (m) Depth to the top of each fracture block measured

MDEPF, ft (m) Depth to the center of each fracture block

measured from an arbitrary datum, positive
downward.
5.9 Porosity / Pore Volume (POR, PV)

Enter one of the following two arrays. 00

Definitions: 00
POR, fraction Porosity of each gridblock. If both net and gross

thickness are input, porosity should correspond
to the net thickness.
PV, rb (cm) Pore volume of each gridblock.
Example: 00
POR CON
0.3 00
5.10 Fracture Porosity / Pore Volume (PORF, PVF)

When the DUAL option has been specified the user must enter one of the
following two arrays. 00

Definitions: 00
PORF, fraction Fracture porosity of each gridblock. If both net

and gross thickness are input, porosity should
correspond to the net thickness.
PVF, rb (cm) Fracture pore volume of each gridblock.
5-374 Landmark - R2003.4

The PORF array must be used with the POR array. The PVF array must be
used with the PV array. 00
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-375

5.11 Permeability / Transmissibility
5.11.1 X (R) Direction (KX, KXF, TX, KR, KRF, TR)

If both net and gross thickness are input, permeability will be used with
net thickness (DZNET or DZBNET) to calculate transmissibility. Enter one
of the following arrays. 00

Omit if NX = 1 or NR = 1. (except with VIP-DUAL) 00
Definitions: 00
Rectangular Grid:
KX, md (md) Permeability controlling flow in the x direction,

applied to the gridblock center.
KXF, md (md) Permeability controlling flow in the x direction,
applied at the gridblock face. The value input
for block (i,j,k) is the permeability at the block
face between cells (i-1,j,k) and (i,j,k). For i = 1,
KXF is zero.
TX, rb-cp/day/psi The x-direction transmissibility of gridblock
(cm-cp/day/kPa) (i,j,k) is defined at the boundary between blocks
(i-1,j,k)
and (i,j,k) and controls flow between them. For i
= 1, TX is zero.
Radial Grid:
KR, md (md) Permeability controlling flow in the r direction,

applied to the radial gridblock center.
KRF, md (md) Permeability controlling flow in the r direction,
face between cells (i-1,j,k) and (i,j,k). For i = 1,
KRF is zero.
TR, rb-cp/day/psi The r-direction transmissibility of gridblock
(cm-cp/day/kPa) (i,j,k) is defined at the boundary between
blocks (i-1,j,k) and (i,j,k) and controls flow
between them. For i = 1, TR is zero.
5-376 Landmark - R2003.4

Example: 00
KXF ZVAR
10 20 25 00
5.11.2 Y (Theta) Direction (KY, KYF, TY, KTHETA, KTF, TTHETA)


Omit if NY = 1 or NTHETA = 1. (except with VIP-DUAL) 00
Definitions: 00
Rectangular Grid:
KY, md (md) Permeability controlling flow in the y direction,

applied to the gridblock center.
KYF, md (md) Permeability controlling flow in the y direction,
face between cells (i,j-1,k) and (i,j,k). For j = 1,
KYF is zero.
TY, The y direction transmissibility of gridblock
rb-cp/day/psi (i,j,k) is defined at the boundary between
(cm-cp/day/kPa) blocks (i,j-1,k) and (i,j,k) and controls flow
between them. For j = 1, TY is zero.
Radial Grid:
KTHETA, md (md) Permeability controlling flow in the theta

direction, applied to the radial gridblock center.
KTF, md (md) Permeability controlling flow in the theta
direction, applied at the gridblock face. The
value input for block (i,j,k) is the permeability
at the block face between cells (i,j-1,k) and (i,j,k).
For j = 1, KTF is zero.
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-377

TTHETA, The theta-direction transmissibility of gridblock

rb-cp/day/psi (i,j,k) is defined at the boundary between blocks
(cm-cp/day/kPa) (i,j-1,k) and (i,j,k) and controls flow between
them. For j = 1, TTHETA is zero.
5.11.3 Z Direction (KZ, KZF, TZ)

gross thickness (DZ or DZB) to calculate transmissibility. Enter one of the
following arrays. 00

Omit if NZ = 1. (except with VIP-DUAL) 00
Definitions: 00
KZ, md (md) Permeability controlling flow between the

layers, applied to the gridblock center.
KZF, md (md) Permeability controlling flow in the z direction,
face between cells (i,j,k-1) and (i,j,k). For k = 1,
KZF is zero.
TZ, The z-direction transmissibility of gridblock
rb-cp/day/psi (i,j,k) is defined at the boundary between
(cm-cp/day/kPa) blocks (i,j,k-1) and (i,j,k) and controls flow
between them. For k = 1, TZ is zero.
5.11.4 Diagonal (XY) Directions (TXYL, TXYR)

The TXYL and TXYR arrays may only be entered if the nine-point finite
difference operator option is in use (Section 2.2.6.5). 00
If the nine-point finite difference operator option is invoked (Section

2.2.6.5) and permeabilities are input, all transmissibilities in the xy plane
(x, y, and diagonal directions) are calculated using the method of Coats
and Modine (Reference 3). 00
The use of the nine-point option is subject to the following conditions: 00
5-378 Landmark - R2003.4

Cartesian grid system
No corner points
BLITZ solver (see Simulation Modules Manual)
NX > 1, NY > 1
The gridblock face permeability input option is ignored in the nine-point

transmissibility calculations; i.e., the input values are used as block
values. 00
Definitions: 00
TXYL, The left diagonal-direction transmissibility of

rb-cp/day/psi gridblock (i,j,k) is defined (at an imaginary
(cm-cp/day/kPa) boundary) between blocks (i-1,j-1,k) and (i,j,k)
and controls flow between them. For i=1 and
for j=1, TXYL is zero.
TXYR, The right diagonal-direction transmissibility of
rb-cp/day/psi gridblock (i,j,k) is defined (at an imaginary
(cm-cp/day/kPa) boundary) between blocks (i+1,j-1,k) and (i,j,k)
and controls flow between them. For i=NX and
for j=1, TXYR is zero.
5.12 Fracture Permeability / Transmissibility (VIP-DUAL)

When the DUAL option has been specified the user must enter one
keyword from each of the three following groups of keywords. Fracture
permeability is entered as an effective permeability, 00
k = kf * φf
where kf is the actual permeability of the fractures themselves and φf is the

fracture porosity. The effective permeability is that measured by a well test
in a fractured reservoir. (Reference 7) 00
5.12.1 X (R) Direction (KXFEFF, TXF, KRFEFF, TRF)

array option
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-379

Definitions: 00
Rectangular grid:
KXFEFF, md (md) Fracture effective permeability controlling flow

in the x direction, applied to the gridblock
center.
TXF, The x-direction fracture transmissibility of
rb-cp/day/psi gridblock (i,j,k) is defined at the boundary
(cm-cp/day/kPa) between blocks (i-1,j,k) and (i,j,k) and controls
flow between them. For i=1, TXF is zero.
Radial grid:
KRFEFF, md (md) Fracture effective permeability controlling flow

in the r direction, applied to the gridblock
center.
TRF, The r-direction fracture transmissibility of
(cm-cp/day/kPa) between blocks (i-1,j,k) and (i,j,k) and controls
flow between them. For i=1, TRF is zero.
5.12.2 Y (THETA) Direction (KYFEFF, TYF, KTFEFF, TTHETF)

array option
Definitions: 00
Rectangular grid:
KYFEFF, md (md) Fracture effective permeability controlling flow

in the y direction, applied to the gridblock
center.
TYF, The y-direction fracture transmissibility of
(cm-cp/day/kPa) between blocks (i,j-1,k) and (i,j,k) and controls
flow between them. For j=1, TYF is zero.
5-380 Landmark - R2003.4

Radial grid:
KTFEFF, md (md) Fracture effective permeability controlling flow

in the theta direction, applied to the gridblock
center.
TTHETF The theta-direction fracture transmissibility of
(cm-cp/day/kPa) between blocks (i,j-1,k) and (i,j,k) and controls
flow between them. For j=1, TTHETF is zero.
5.12.3 Z Direction (KZFEFF, TZF)

gross thickness (DZ or DZB) to calculate transmissibility. Enter one of the
following arrays. 00
array option
Definitions: 00
Rectangular grid:
KZFEFF, md (md) Fracture effective permeability controlling flow

in the z direction, applied to the gridblock
center.
TZF, The z-direction fracture transmissibility of
(cm-cp/day/kPa) between blocks (i,j,k-1) and (i,j,k) and controls
flow between them. For k=1, TZF is zero.
5.12.4 Diagonal (XY) Directions (TXYLF, TXYRF)
array option
The TXYLF and TXYRF arrays may only be entered if the nine-point finite
difference operator option is in use (Section 2.2.6.5). 00
If the nine-point finite difference operator option is invoked (Section

2.2.6.5) and fracture permeabilities are input, all fracture transmissibilities
in the xy plane (x, y, and diagonal directions) are calculated using the
method of Coats and Modine (Reference 3). 00
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-381

The use of the nine-point option is subject to the following conditions: 00
Cartesian grid system
No corner points
BLITZ solver (see Simulation Modules Manual)
NX > 1, NY > 1
Definitions: 00
TXYLF, The left diagonal-direction fracture

rb-cp/day/psi transmissibility of gridblock (i,j,k) is defined (at
(cm-cp/day/kPa) an imaginary boundary) between blocks (i-1,j-
1,k) and (i,j,k) and controls flow between them.
For i=1 and for j=1, TXYLF is zero.
TXYRF, The right diagonal-direction fracture
rb-cp/day/psi transmissibility of gridblock (i,j,k) is defined (at
(cm-cp/day/kPa) an imaginary boundary) between blocks (i+1,j-
1,k) and (i,j,k) and controls flow between them.
For i=NX and for j=1, TXYRF is zero.
5.13 Rock and Fluid Property Assignment

The ISAT and ISATI arrays may be entered with the directional relative
permeability option. See Section 1.5.2.9 for details. 00
5.13.1 Primary Saturation Table (ISAT)
ISAT option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
ISAT, integer Integer values that distinguish areas containing

rock types which require unique saturation-
dependent tables for inter-gridblock flow. Each
value in the ISAT array directly refers to a set of
relative permeability/capillary pressure table
input. Default sets the entire array to 1; i,e., either
only one set of relative permeability and capillary
pressure tables is input or only the first set is
used. A set of tables consists of a table of water
saturation functions (SWT) plus a table of gas
saturation functions (SGT). If the hysteresis
option has been selected, the ISAT array refers to
5-382 Landmark - R2003.4

drainage relative permeability/capillary pressure

tables. The initialization procedure always uses
the tables assigned by ISAT.
The ISAT array is required if more than one set of saturation-dependent

tables (relative permeabilities and capillary pressures) is input to describe
inter-gridblock flow (see Saturation Dependent Tables). 00
5.13.2 Imbibition Saturation Table for Hysteresis (ISATI)
ISATI option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
ISATI, integer Integer values that distinguish areas containing

rock types which require unique saturation-
dependent tables for inter-gridblock flow, for use
only when the hysteresis option has been
selected. The ISATI array refers to imbibition
relative permeability/capillary pressure tables.
Default sets the entire array to 1; i.e., either only
one set of relative permeability and capillary
pressure tables is input or only the first set is used
to describe inter-gridblock flow for the imbibition
process. A set of tables consists of a table of water
saturation functions (SWT) plus a table of gas
saturation functions (SGT).
The ISATI array is required if relative permeability or capillary pressure

hysteresis is selected and the user chooses to enter the imbibition curves
(see Saturation Dependent Tables). A value of ISATI equal to the value of
ISAT for a gridblock disables hysteresis for that gridblock. 00
5.13.3 Fracture Primary Saturation Table (ISATF)
ISATF option (amin amax nl)

The ISATF array is only required when the DUAL option is in use and the
user requires different numbered rock types in the fracture than the
matrix. In this case, both the ISAT and the ISATF arrays are entered. If the
ISATF array is omitted the rock type for the fractures defaults to the rock
type for the matrix. This does not, however, mean that by default the same
saturation tables are used for the fracture and matrix but just that if a
gridblock uses matrix saturation table 1 (SWT and SGT) it also uses
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-383

fracture saturation table 1 (SWTF and SGTF). 00
Definition: 00
ISATF, integer Definition as for the ISAT array. If omitted the

ISATF array defaults to the same values as in the
ISAT array.
5.13.4 Fracture Imbibition Saturation Table for Hysteresis (ISATIF)
ISATIF option (amin amax nl)

The ISATIF array is only required when the DUAL option is in use and the
user requires different numbered imbibition rock types in the fracture than
the matrix. In this case, both the ISATI and the ISATIF arrays are entered.
If the ISATIF array is omitted the rock type for the fractures defaults to the
rock type for the matrix. This does not, however, mean that by default the
same saturation tables are used for the fracture and matrix but just that if a
gridblock uses matrix saturation table 1 (SWT and SGT) it also uses
fracture saturation table 1 (SWTF and SGTF). 00
Definition: 00
ISATIF, integer Definition as for the ISATI array. If omitted the

ISATIF array defaults to the same values as in the
ISATI array.
5.14 Fluid Property Tables
5.14.1 PVT Property Table (IPVT)
IPVT option (amin amax nl)

The IPVT array is required if more than one set of PVT property tables is
input (see Section 4.5). At present the IPVT array is inactive in VIP-COMP
and VIP-THERM. It is recommended that the IPVT number should be
entered on the IEQUIL card instead of entering this array (Section 4.2.). 00
Definition: 00
IPVT, integer Integer values distinguishing areas with differing

PVT properties. Each value in the IPVT array
directly refers to a set of input PVT tables. Default
5-384 Landmark - R2003.4

sets the entire array to 1; i.e., only one set of PVT

tables is input. Only one value of IPVT can apply
within any one equilibrium region, as defined by
the IEQUIL array (Section 5.28).
5.14.2 Water Property Table (IPVTW)
IPVTW option (amin amax nl)

The IPVTW array is required if more than one set of water property tables
(PVTW, Section 4.11.1 or PVTWSAL, Section 4.11.2) is input. It is
recommended that the IPVTW number should be entered on the IEQUIL
card (Section 4.2) instead of entering this array. 00
Definition: 00
IPVTW, integer Integer values distinguishing areas with differing

water properties. Each value in the IPVTW array
directly refers to a set of input PVTW/PVTWSAL
tables. Default sets the entire array to 1; i.e., only
one set of water tables is input, or no water tables
are input. Only one value of IPVTW can apply
within any one equilibrium region, as defined by
the IEQUIL array (Section 5.28).
00
5.15 Output Regions (IREGION)

IREGION option (amin amax nl)

The output region information is required if more than one grouping of

output data is desired. 00
Definition: 00
IREGION, integer Integer values defining different regions for

output purposes. Gridblocks with the same
integer value are grouped together and
considered a single region for output of average
pressure, cumulative injected volumes,
cumulative produced volumes, net influx, and
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-385

current fluids in place in the Region Summary.

Default sets the entire array to 1.
The extra region (XREG) option may be used to assign gridblocks to more
than one output region. See Section 5.16. 00
Example: 00
C--------------------------------------------------------
C ARRAY DATA
C--------------------------------------------------------
ARRAYS
...................
IREGION ZVAR
1 2 3
MOD
35 37 2 2 1 1 =4 00
34 37 3 3 1 1 =4
34 37 4 4 1 1 =4 00
5.16 Extra Regions (XREG)

The XREG (extra regions) option is used to assign gridblocks to more than
one output region. This option only applies to the IREGION array. 00
The XREG cards must follow the IREGION array specification and any
MOD or VMOD cards that apply to it. These extra regions are identified
by an X next to the region number on the Initial Fluids in Place report in
VIP-CORE and the Region Summary reports in the simulation modules.
The totals printed on these reports do not include the calculated values of
the extra regions. 00
The following restrictions apply when using the XREG option: 00
■ A gridblock may be contained in at most 4 regions. That is, its original

output region and 3 extra regions.
■ The maximum number of original output regions is 99 and the

maximum number of extra regions is 99. For example, if there are 70
original output regions the maximum range of extra regions is 71-169.
This restriction does not apply if extra regions are not being assigned.
Only one title card containing the keyword XREG is required, but the data
cards may be repeated as necessary. 00
5-386 Landmark - R2003.4

XREG
i1 i2 j1 j2 k1 k2 (= v)
Definitions: 00
XREG Indicates that extra output regions are being

defined. 00
Gridblock locations are defined by indices I, J, K in reference to the

(x,y,z) or (r,θ,z) grid. Extra output regions are assigned to elements of
the IREGION array that fall in the portion of the grid defined by: 00
i1 ≤ I ≤ i2
j1 ≤ J ≤ j2
k1 ≤ K ≤ k2 00
v Region number assigned to the indicated portion

of the IREGION array. This value must be less
than or equal to 99 and greater than the largest
value in the IREGION array. The "=" sign must
precede the value.
If this value is not specified, then enough values

must be provided on the following data cards for
all blocks of the designated portion of the grid.
The number of values required is:
(k2 - k1 + 1) * (j2 - j1 +1) * (i2 - i1 +1)
Examples: 00
IREGION ZVAR
1 2 3 4 5
XREG
1 4 2 3 1 2 =6
1 4 2 3 3 5 =7
1 2 1 2 1 5 =8
1 2 3 4 1 5 =9 00
XREG
1 4 2 3 1 2
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 00
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-387

5.17 Output Regions (IREGF)
IREGF option (amin amax nl)

The IREGF array is only required when the DUAL option is in use and the
user requires different numbered output regions in the fracture than the
matrix. In this case, both the IREGION and the IREGF arrays are entered.
If the IREGF array is omitted, the output region for the fractures defaults
to the output region for the matrix. 00
Definition: 00
IREGF, integer Definition as for the IREGION array. If omitted,

the IREGF array defaults to the same values as in
the IREGION array.
The extra region (XREG) option may be used to assign fracture blocks to
more than one output region by using the XREG card after the IREGF
array. See Section 5.16. 00
5.18 Reservoir Temperature (TEMP) (VIP-COMP or VIP-

THERM)
The TEMP array may be used to define a fixed temperature distribution in
VIP-COMP or the initial temperature distribution in VIP-THERM. 00



a. For isothermal and thermal compositional models, Section 4.4.11.3

or 4.4.11.4.
5-388 Landmark - R2003.4


(4.4.11.4) is discouraged, since the areal temperature variation is
not accounted for in the calculation of equilibrium phase pressures
versus depth. See option 4 below for further discussion of this
problem.

gridblock fluid properties (only the pressure aray in the thermal dead-
oil case) as gridblock array data.
TEMP option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
TEMP, ˚F (˚C) Reservoir temperature in each gridblock. If not

entered and temperature was not specified in the
composition versus depth table (Sections 4.4.12.3,
4.4.12.4, 4.7.1, and 4.7.2), TRES is assumed.
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-389

5.19 Compaction Regions (ICMT)
ICMT option (amin amax nl)

The ICMT array is required if more than one set of COMPACTION tables
is input (see Section 4.12). 00
Definition: 00
ICMT, integer Integer values distinguishing areas with differing

compaction properties. Each value in the ICMT
array directly refers to a set of input
COMPACTION tables. Default sets the entire
array to 1; i.e., only one set of COMPACTION
tables is input.
The ICMT array may be entered only if the COMPACT card is entered in
the utility data (Section 2.2.7.10). 00
5.20 Fracture Compaction Regions (ICMTF)
ICMTF option (amin amax nl)

The ICMTF array is only required when the DUAL option is in use and the
compaction properties for the fracture are different from those for the
matrix. In this case, both the ICMT and the ICMTF arrays are entered. If
the ICMTF array is omitted, the compaction table used for each fracture
block will be the same as the table used for the corresponding matrix
block. 00
Definition: 00
ICMTF, integer Definition as for the ICMT array. If omitted, the

ICMTF array defaults to the values in the ICMT
array.
5.21 Water Induced Rock Compaction Regions (IWIRC)
IWIRC option (amin amax nl)

5-390 Landmark - R2003.4

The IWIRC array is required if more than one set of WATER INDUCED
ROCK COMPACTION tables are input (Section 4.13). 00
Definition: 00
IWIRC, integer Positive integer values distinguishing different

water induced rock compaction regions. Each
value in the IWIRC array directly refers to a set of
input water induced rock compaction tables
(Section 4.13). Default sets the entire array to 1.
5.22 Fracture Water Induced Rock Compaction

Regions(IWIRCF)
IWIRCF option (amin amax nl)

The IWIRCF array is only required when the DUAL option is in use and
the water induced rock compaction properties for the fracture are different
from those for the matrix. In this case, both the IWIRC and IWIRCF arrays
are entered. 00
Definition: 00
IWIRCF, integer Positive integer values distinguishing different

fracture water induced rock compaction regions.
Each value in the IWIRCF array directly refers to
a set of input water induced rock compaction
tables (Section 4.13). Default sets the array to
IWIRC.
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-391

5.23 Rock Compressibility (CR)
CR option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
CR, psi-1(kPa-1) Rock compressibility of each gridblock.
Rock compressibility can be given a value for each gridblock. Typically

rock compressibility can be expressed as a function of porosity. Values
specified by the CR card will replace the value specified by the DWB card. 00
5.24 Fracture Compressibility (CRF)
CRF option (amin amax nl)

The CRF array is only required when the DUAL option is in use and the
fracture compressibilities are different from the matrix compressibilities.
In this case, both the CR and the CRF arrays are entered. If the CRF array
is omitted, the fracture compressibilities will be set equal to the
corresponding matrix compressibilities. 00
Definition: 00
CRF, psi-1 (kPa-1) Fracture compressibility of each gridblock.
Fracture compressibility can be given a value for each gridblock. Typically

rock compressibility can be expressed as a function of porosity. Values
specified by the CRF card will replace those specified by the DWB card. 00
5.25 Transmissibility Regions (ITRAN)
ITRAN option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
ITRAN, integer Positive integer values distinguishing different

transmissibility regions. These values are used to
modify the inter/intra region transmissibility
using the MULTIR option (Section 1.7). Default
sets the entire array to 1.
5-392 Landmark - R2003.4

5.26 Fracture Transmissibility Regions (ITRANF)
ITRANF option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
ITRANF, integer Positive integer values distinguishing different

fracture transmissibility regions. These values are
used to modify the inter/intra region
transmissibility using the MULTIR option
(Section 1.7). Default sets the array to ITRAN.
5.27 Turbidite Reservoir Option (Not available in VIP-THERM)

The turbidite reservoir option models the sand-shale fluid (water)
exchange within any simulation gridblock that consists of multiple sand
and shale sublayers using an analytic, linear aquifer model. In this model,
all shale sublayers within each gridblock are assumed to have the same
thickness, and all sand sublayers also have the same thickness. The model
represents each half-shale-sublayer by a linear aquifer. The sand-shale
fluid exchange calculation follows the approach of Carter and Tracy
aquifer model. The detailed description of the turbidite reservoir option is
documented in the Technical Reference Manual. Notice that for the linear
aquifer model, the PD (tD) function is a universal function that is
independent of the aquifer size. This function is internally generated in
VIP-CORE. 00
For a turbidite gridblock, the shale sublayers should be considered non-

pay. Consequently, the net-to-gross ratio or the net thickness of the
gridblock must be specified, and the porosity, compressibility, and areal
permeabilities of the sand sublayers must be used. Also, an effective
vertical permeability must be specified to account for the existence of
shale sublayers. This effective vertical permeability is in general negligibly
small and should have little or no effect on the simulation results. 00
The turbidite reservoir option is compatible with both the IMPES and
IMPLICIT formulations in the simulation modules. It can be used in both
regular Cartesian and radial grid systems. The use of this option in a
corner point grid system is not recommended because of its irregular
geometry. The option should not be used in conjunction with the dual
porosity option and is not yet compatible with the water tracking option. 00
The turbidite reservoir option is automatically invoked by the SCLFCT

array input. This array specifies whether a given gridblock is to be treated
as a turbidite gridblock and the number of shale sublayers within each
turbidite gridblock. Two additional (TCTBD and BTBD) arrays must also
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-393

be entered to complete the description of the turbidite reservoir system.

The TCTBD array specifies the time constant for each gridblock, and the
BTBD array specifies the capacity of each linear aquifer (i.e., each half-
shale-sublayer within a gridblock). 00
5.27.1 Scaling Factor (SCLFCT)
SCLFCT option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
SCLFCT Number of linear aquifers in each gridblock. For a

gridblock with n sand and n shale sublayers,
SCLFCT should have a value of 2n. A value of 0
means that the gridblock will be treated as a
regular gridblock with no sand-shale fluid
exchange.
Any gridblock within the reservoir may be specified either as a regular

gridblock or a turbidite gridblock. Non-zero TCTBD and BTBD values
must be specified for all gridblocks with non-zero SCLFCT values. 00
Examples: 00
SCLFCT CON
0.
MOD
6 10 1 3 1 1 =6
1 5 1 2 2 2 = 10. 00
6 10 1 3 3 3 = 20. 00
5.27.2 Time Constant (TCTBD)
TCTBD option (amin amax nl)

Definitions: 00
TCTBD, day-1 Time constant used to convert time to

dimensionless time for turbidite gridblocks.
TCTBD = (4b * kz,shale) / (Ct,shale * φshale * µw * H2)
where
5-394 Landmark - R2003.4

b 0.006328 for conventional units; 8.527

x 10-5 for metric units.
kz,shale Vertical permeabilities in shale

sublayers, md (md).
Ct,shale Shale total compressibility, 1/psia

(1/kPa).
φshale Shale porosity, fraction.
µw Viscosity of water contained in shale,

cp (cp).
H Thickness of each shale sublayer, ft

(m).
The TCTBD array must be specified if the SCLFCT array is entered. Non-
zero TCTBD values must be entered for all gridblocks with non-zero
SCLFCT values. Gridblocks with zero SCLFCT values will be treated as
non-turbidite gridblocks without sand-shale fluid exchange, regardless of
their TCTBD values. 00
Examples: 00
TCTBD ZVAR
6.7645E-3 1.6911E-3 6.7645E-3 0. 00
5.27.3 Shale Capacity (BTBD)
BTBD option (amin amax nl)

Definitions: 00
BTBD Shale capacity, rb/psia (cm/kPa).

BTBD = (Ct,shale * φshale * A * H) / (2 * a1).
where
Ct,shale Shale total compressibility, 1/psia

(1/kPa).
φshale Shale porosity, fraction.
A Gridblock horizontal area, ft2 (m2).
H Thickness of each shale sublayer, ft

(m).
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-395

a1 5.6146 for conventional units; 1.0 for

metric units.
The BTBD array must be specified if the SCLFCT array is entered. Non-
zero BTBD values must be entered for all gridblocks with non-zero
SCLFCT values. Gridblocks with zero SCLFCT values will be treated as
non-turbidite gridblocks without sand-shale fluid exchange, regardless of
their BTBD values. 00
Examples: 00
BTBD ZVAR
3.3840E-3 6.7680E-3 3.3840E-3 0. 00
5.28 Equilibrium Regions (IEQUIL)
IEQUIL option (amin amax nl)

The IEQUIL array is required if more than one set of fluid contacts is input
(see Section 4.2). 00
Definition: 00
IEQUIL, integer Integer values defining distinct regions for

equilibrium purposes. Each region may have
different water-oil and gas-oil contacts. Each
value in the IEQUIL array directly refers to an
equilibrium region defined by an IEQUIL card in
the tabular data (Section 4.2). Default sets the
entire array to 1; i.e., only one set of contacts
input for equilibrium data. Only one type of oil,
as defined by the IPVT array (Section 5.14), may
be present in any one equilibrium region. On the
other hand, any number of equilibrium regions
may contain the same type of oil.
5-396 Landmark - R2003.4

5.29 Water Salinity (SAL)
SAL option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
SAL, user-defined Initial water salinity of each gridblock. Default

sets the salinity of each gridblock to the
maximum salinity value in the salinity table
(PVTWSAL) to which the gridblock is assigned.
The SAL array may be entered only if the PVTWSAL data has been
entered (Section 4.11.2). 00
5.30 User-Specified Initialization
5.30.1 Pressure and Saturation Overreads (P, SW, SG)

The gridblock pressure, gas saturation, and water saturation arrays may
be input to define the initial conditions. 00

Definitions: 00
P, psia (kPa) Pressure of each gridblock at the beginning of the

run (time = 0).
SW, fraction Average water saturation of each gridblock at the

beginning of the run (time = 0).
SG, fraction Average gas saturation of each gridblock at the

R2003.4 - Landmark 5-397

NOTE: 1. Saturation pressure may not be overread.
2. The program will automatically equilibrate the non-

specified initial conditions by adjusting the capillary
pressure in each block unless a NONEQ card is read in
the utility data (Section 2.2.8.1).
3. If both SW and SG are read, and SW + SG > 1.0 for any

gridblock, then the user must specify either KEEPSW or
KEEPSG in the utility data. KEEPSW will honor SW and
calculate SG = 1 - SW. KEEPSG will honor SG and
calculate SW = 1 - SG.
5.30.2 Gas Composition Overread (YI)

The YI array may only be read in a compositional problem; i.e., the
number of components is greater than 2. 00
The mole fraction for each component in the gas phase for each gridblock
may be input. The format of the array input is very similar to other array
data input. 00
YI cmp1 option (min max)

values
.
.
.
YI cmpnc option (min max)
values
.
.
Definitions: 00
YI Alpha label indicating the mole fraction of

component cmpi in the gas phase is being defined
for each gridblock at the beginning of the run
(time = 0).
cmpi Alphanumeric component name for component i.

Must be identical to one of the names included in
the COMPONENT data.
NOTE: If the mole fractions for any component are overread, then
the mole fractions must be overread for all components.
5-398 Landmark - R2003.4

5.30.3 Oil Composition Overread (XI)

The XI array may only be read in a compositional problem; i.e., the
The mole fraction for each component in the oil phase for each gridblock
may be input. The format of the array input is very similar to other array
data input. 00
XI cmp1 option (min max)

values
.
.
.
XI cmpnc option (min max)
values
.
.
Definitions: 00
XI Alpha label indicating the mole fraction of

component cmpi in the oil phase is being defined
for each gridblock at the beginning of the run
(time = 0).

the COMPONENT data.
5.31 User-Specified Fracture Initialization (VIP-DUAL)
5.31.1 Pressure and Saturation Overreads (PF, SWF, SGF)

The gridblock fracture pressure, fracture gas saturation, and fracture
water saturation arrays may be input to define the initial conditions
within the fracture. 00

R2003.4 - Landmark 5-399

Definitions: 00
PF, psia (kPa) Fracture pressure of each gridblock at the

SWF, fraction Average fracture water saturation of each

gridblock at the beginning of the run (time = 0).
SGF, fraction Average fracture gas saturation of each gridblock

at the beginning of the run (time = 0).
NOTE: 1. Fracture saturation pressure may not be overread.
2. The program will automatically equilibrate the non-

specified initial conditions by adjusting the capillary
pressure in each block unless a NONEQ card is read in
the utility data (Section 2.2.8.1).
Example: 00
PF CON
20 00
5.31.2 Gas Composition Overread (YIF)

The YIF array may only be read in a compositional problem; i.e., the
The mole fraction for each component in the fracture gas phase for each
gridblock may be input. The format of the array input is very similar to
other array data input. 00
YIF cmp1 option (min max)

values
.
.
.
YIF cmpnc option (min max)
values
.
.
Definitions: 00
YIF Alpha label indicating the mole fraction of

component cmpi in the fracture gas phase is
being defined for each gridblock at the beginning
of the run (time = 0).
5-400 Landmark - R2003.4


the COMPONENT data.
NOTE: If the mole fractions for any components are overread, then
Example: 00
YIF CO2 CON

0.2
YIF N2 CON
0.8 00
5.31.3 Oil Composition Overread (XIF)

The XIF array may only be read in a compositional problem; i.e., the
The mole fraction for each component in the fracture oil phase for each
gridblock may be input. The format of the array input is very similar to
other array data input. 00
XIF cmp1 option (min max)

values
.
.
.
XIF cmpnc option (min max)
values
.
.
Definitions: 00
XIF Alpha label indicating the mole fraction of

component cmpi in the fracture oil phase is being
defined for each gridblock at the beginning of the
run (time = 0).

the COMPONENT data.
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-401

5.32 Normalized Saturation-Dependent Functions

If the saturation-dependent functions for gridblocks are entered as generic
curves, the endpoints of the curves must be defined appropriately for each
gridblock. In these cases, the values of the connate water saturation, the
residual water saturation, the water saturation at residual oil, and the
maximum water saturation and/or the connate gas saturation, the
residual gas saturation, the gas saturation at residual oil, and the
maximum gas saturation are assigned to each gridblock. These values are
entered on a block-by-block basis in the SWL, SWR, SWRO, SWU, SGL,
SGR, SGRO, and SGU arrays. Also, the values of oil relative permeability
at connate water saturation and water (or gas) relative permeability at
residual oil saturation are assigned to each gridblock. These values are
entered on a block-by-block basis in the KROLW and KRWRO (or
KRGRO) arrays. In a GASWATER problem the values of gas relative
permeability at residual water saturation are entered in the KRGRW
array. 00
All of the above arrays may be entered with the directional relative
permeability option. See Section 1.5.2.9 for details. 00
All of the above arrays are duplicated for DUAL cases, with an "F"
appended to the array name (e.g., SWL becomes SWLF). 00
The user can select the two-point scaling of relative permeability table
endpoints, or the default three-point scaling (four-point for capillary
pressures), by use of the END2P option. The two-point scaling approach
was the only method available in VIP-EXECUTIVE Version 1.6R, and
earlier versions. In the two-point case, each curve is scaled over its entire
length (from residual/irreducible saturation to the saturation at which it
attains a maximum). In the three-point case, all curves in a table are scaled
together (retaining the relative kr and Pc characteristics of the curves). In
this case, which is the default scaling method, all endpoints serve to break
the table up into partitions, with scaling being done in each partition
independently. As an example, water-oil table relative permeabilities
would be scaled in two sections; from water saturations of Swr to Swro
and from Swro to 1. 00
If any saturation endpoint is not specified, rock data will be used. The
following consistency checks are performed for each gridblock: 00
SGL should not exceed 1-SWU.
SGU should not exceed 1-SWL.
SWL should not exceed SWR.
SGL should not exceed SGR.
SWRO should not exceed SWU.
SGRO should not exceed SGU.
5-402 Landmark - R2003.4

5.32.1 Water-Oil Normalized Saturations
5.32.1.1 Connate (Minimum) Water Saturation (SWL)
SWL option (amin amax nl)

Entered data values as required.
5.32.1.2 Residual Water Saturation (SWR)
SWR option (amin amax nl)

NOTE: If the SWR array is entered, the SWRO array must also be
entered.
5.32.1.3 Water Saturation at Residual Oil (SWRO)
SWRO option (amin amax nl)

NOTE: If the SWRO array is entered, the SWR array must also be
entered.
5.32.1.4 Maximum Water Saturation (SWU)
SWU option (amin amax nl)

5.32.1.5 Fracture Connate (Minimum) Water Saturation (SWLF)
SWLF option (amin amax nl)

R2003.4 - Landmark 5-403

NOTE: 1. The SWLF array is required only when the DUAL option
is in use and the user requires different values than
would be derived from the appropriate fracture
saturation tables (based on the ISATF array).
2. If one of the SWL or SWLF arrays is needed, both must be

entered.
5.32.1.6 Fracture Residual Water Saturation (SWRF)
SWRF option (amin amax nl)

NOTE: 1. The SWRF array is required only when the DUAL option
2. If one of the SWR or SWRF arrays is needed, both must

be entered.
3. If the SWRF array is entered, the SWROF array must also

be entered.
5.32.1.7 Fracture Water Saturation at Residual Oil (SWROF)
SWROF option (amin amax nl)

NOTE: 1. The SWROF array is required only when the DUAL

option is in use and the user requires different values
than would be derived from the appropriate fracture
2. If one of the SWRO or SWROF arrays is needed, both

must be entered.
3. If the SWROF array is entered, the SWRF array must also

be entered.
5-404 Landmark - R2003.4

5.32.1.8 Fracture Maximum Water Saturation (SWUF)
SWUF option (amin amax nl)

NOTE: 1. The SWUF array is required only when the DUAL option
2. If one of the SWU or SWUF arrays is needed, both must

be entered.
5.32.2 Gas-Oil Normalized Saturations
5.32.2.1 Connate (Minimum) Gas Saturation (SGL)
SGL option (amin amax nl)

5.32.2.2 Residual Gas Saturation (SGR)
SGR option (amin amax nl)

NOTE: If the SGR array is entered, the SGRO array must also be
entered.
5.32.2.3 Gas Saturation at Residual Oil (SGRO)
SGRO option (amin amax nl)

NOTE: If the SGRO array is entered, the SGR array must also be
entered.
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-405

5.32.2.4 Maximum gas saturation (SGU)
SGU option (amin amax nl)

5.32.2.5 Gas Saturation at Residual Water (SGRW)
SGRW option (amin amax nl)

NOTE: SGRW is used in the two-curve water relative permeability

option and the GASWATER option.
5.32.2.6 Fracture Connate (Minimum) Gas Saturation (SGLF)
SGLF option (amin amax nl)

NOTE: 1. The SGLF array is required only when the DUAL option
2. If one of the SGL or SGLF arrays is needed, both must be

entered.
5-406 Landmark - R2003.4

5.32.2.7 Fracture Residual Gas Saturation (SGRF)
SGRF option (amin amax nl)

NOTE: 1. The SGRF array is required only when the DUAL option
2. If one of the SGR or SGRF arrays is needed, both must be

entered.
3. If the SGRF array is entered, the SGROF array must also

be entered.
5.32.2.8 Fracture Gas Saturation at Residual Oil (SGROF)
SGROF option (amin amax nl)

NOTE: 1. The SGROF array is required only when the DUAL

2. If one of the SGRO or SGROF arrays is needed, both must

be entered.
3. If the SGROF array is entered, the SGRF array must also

be entered.
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-407

5.32.2.9 Fracture Maximum Gas Saturation (SGUF)
SGUF option (amin amax nl)

NOTE: 1. The SGUF array is required only when the DUAL option
2. If one of the SGU or SGUF arrays is needed, both must be

entered.
5.32.2.10 Fracture Gas Saturation at Residual Water (SGRWF)
SGRWF option (amin amax nl)

NOTE: 1. SGRUF is used in the two-curve water relative

permeability option.
2. The SGRWF array is required only when the DUAL

3. If one of the SGRW or SGRWF arrays is needed, both

must be entered.
5.32.3 Normalized Relative Permeability Endpoints
5.32.3.1 Kro at Connate Water Saturation (KROLW)
KROLW option (amin amax nl)

5.32.3.2 Krw at Residual Oil (KRWRO)
KRWRO option (amin amax nl)

5-408 Landmark - R2003.4

5.32.3.3 Krg at Residual Oil (KRGRO)
KRGRO option (amin amax nl)

5.32.3.4 Krg at Residual Water (KRGRW)
This array may only be entered in a GASWATER problem. 00
KRGRW option (amin amax nl)

5.32.3.5 Fracture Kro at Connate Water (KROLWF)
KROLWF option (amin amax nl)

NOTE: 1. The KROLWF array is required only when the DUAL

2. If one of the KROLW or KROLWF arrays is needed, both

must be entered.
5.32.3.6 Fracture Krw at Residual Oil (KRWROF)
KRWROF option (amin amax nl)

NOTE: 1. The KRWROF array is required only when the DUAL

2. If one of the KRWRO or KRWROF arrays is needed, both

must be entered.
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-409

5.32.3.7 Fracture Krg at Residual Oil (KRGROF)
KRGROF option (amin amax nl)

NOTE: 1. The KRGROF array is required only when the DUAL

2. If one of the KRGRO or KRGROF arrays is needed, both

must be entered.
5.32.3.8 Fracture Krg at Residual Water (KRGRWF)
This array may only be entered in a GASWATER problem. 00
KRGRWF option (amin amax nl)

NOTE: 1. The KRGRWF array is required only when the DUAL

2. If one of the KRGRW or KRGRWF arrays is needed, both

must be entered.
5.33 Vertical Equilibrium Fraction
5.33.1 Water-Oil VE (FVEWO)

The FVEWO array allows the degree of water-oil VE to vary in each block.
The values can vary from zero to one for each block, one signifying 100%
VE and zero signifying 100% rock values. That is, 00
krwtotal = (1 - FVEWO) krwrock + FVEWO krwVE . 00
FVEWO option (amin amax nl)

5-410 Landmark - R2003.4

Definition: 00
FVEWO, fraction Degree of water-oil VE in each gridblock. One

signifies 100% VE and zero signifies 100% rock
values.
NOTE: The FVEWO array may be entered only if the VEWO card is
entered in the utility data (Section 2.2.10.1).
5.33.2 Gas-Oil VE (FVEGO)

The FVEGO array allows the degree of gas-oil VE to vary in each block. It
is defined and used in the same sense as FVEWO. 00
FVEGO option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
FVEGO, fraction Degree of gas-oil VE in each gridblock. One

values.
NOTE: The FVEGO array may be entered only if the VEGO card is
entered in the utility data (Section 2.2.10.2).
5.34 Vertical Equilibrium Fraction (VIP-DUAL)

When the DUAL option is in use, if the FVEWO array has been specified
for the matrix blocks, then the FVEWOF array must be specified for the
fracture blocks. Similarly, if the FVEGO array has been specified, then so
must the FVEGOF array be specified. 00
5.34.1 Water-oil VE (FVEWOF)

The FVEWOF array allows the degree of water-oil VE to vary in each
fracture block. The values can vary from zero to one for each fracture
block, one signifying 100% VE and zero signifying 100% rock values. 00
FVEWOF option (amin amax nl)

R2003.4 - Landmark 5-411

Definition: 00
FVEWOF, fraction Degree of water-oil VE in each fracture block.

One signifies 100% VE and zero signifies 100%
rock values.
5.34.2 Gas-Oil VE (FVEGOF)

The FVEGOF array allows the degree of gas-oil VE to vary in each fracture
block. It is defined and used in the same sense as FVEWOF. 00
FVEGOF option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
FVEGOF, fraction Degree of gas-oil VE in each fracture block. One

values.
5.35 Matrix Fracture Exchange Transmissibility (VIP-DUAL)

The matrix fracture exchange transmissibility defines the exchange of
fluids between the matrix rock and fractures in each gridblock. The user
may enter data relating to the exchange term in one of the following ways: 00
5.35.1 Matrix Block Size (LX, LY, LZ)

The exchange term is calculated from the matrix block size as discussed in
Reference 7. 00

Definitions: 00
LX, ft (m) Matrix block size in the x direction.
LY, ft (m) Matrix block size in the y direction.
LZ, ft (m) Matrix block size in the z direction.
Example: 00
LX CON
100
5-412 Landmark - R2003.4

5.35.2 Exchange Shape Factor (SIGMA)
SIGMA option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
SIGMA, ft-2 (m-2) Exchange shape factor for gridblock (i,j,k).
5.35.3 Exchange Transmissibility (TEX)
TEX option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
TEX, rb-cp/day/ Matrix fracture exchange transmissibility.

psi
(cm-cp/day/kPa)
NOTE: 1. The permeability arrays KX (or KXF), KY (or KYF), KZ

(or KZF) must be entered to use either the matrix block
size option or the exchange shape factor option. Thus, if
the pore volume and transmissibility arrays have been
input, only the exchange transmissibility array TEX can
be specified.
2. The exchange transmissibility is defined as (for field

units):
TEX = .001127 kma σ ∆x ∆y ∆z, 00
where kma σ =  ---------- + ---------- + ---------- ( 1 – PORF )

KX KY KZ
 2 2 2
LX LY LZ
or is specified directly. The term kma is a harmonic

average of matrix and fracture permeabilities.
Example: 00
TEX CON
0.1
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-413

5.36 Exchange Saturation Tables for VIP-DUAL (ISATEM,

ISATEF)
The ISATEM and ISATEF arrays are required if a different set of
saturation-dependent tables (relative permeabilities and capillary
pressures) are used to describe the matrix fracture exchange than describe
inter-gridblock flow (Section 4.3). 00
Additionally, if VEWO or VEGO has been specified in the utility data

(Section 2.2.10), the matrix block height, LZ, is used to calculate the VE
pseudo capillary pressure for use in the exchange term. 00

Definition: 00
ISATEM, ISATEF, Integer values that distinguish areas containing

integer rock types which require unique saturation-
dependent tables for matrix fracture exchange.
Each value in the ISATEM array directly refers
to a set of matrix relative permeability/
capillary pressure tables input and each value
in the ISATEF array directly refers to a set of
fracture relative permeability/capillary
pressure tables input.
If omitted, the exchange term uses the same
relative permeability and capillary pressures as
used for the interblock flow.
5-414 Landmark - R2003.4

5.37 Matrix-Fracture Diffusion (VIP-DUAL)
5.37.1 Diffusion Exchange Shape Factor (SIGMAD)
SIGMAD option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
SIGMAD, ft-2 (m-2) Diffusion exchange shape factor sigma D for

gridblock (i,j,k). If SIGMAD is not specified and
the diffusion option is active (Section 2.2.13.3),
SIGMAD defaults to SIGMA (Section 5.35.2).
Example: 00
SIGMAD CON
0.8 00
5.37.2 Gas Diffusion Mass Transfer Coefficient (TDIFFG)
TDIFFG option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
TDIFFG, Gas diffusion mass transfer coefficient for

rb/D (rm3/D) gridblock (i,j,k).
5.37.3 Oil Diffusion Mass Transfer Coefficient (TDIFFO)
TDIFFO option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
TDIFFO, Oil diffusion mass transfer coefficient for

rb/D (rm3/D) gridblock (i,j,k).
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-415

5.38 Fluid Tracking (Not available in VIP-THERM)
5.38.1 Oil Tracked Fluid Number (OILTRF)
OILTRF option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
OILTRF Initial tracked fluid number assignment of the oil

in every gridblock.
For a transition block that contains a gas-oil contact, if a CONTACT card is

entered, the data on the CONTACT card supercedes the OILTRF value. 00
5.38.2 Gas Tracked Fluid Number (GASTRF)
GASTRF option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
GASTRF Initial tracked fluid number assignment of the gas

in every gridblock.
For a transition block that contains a gas-oil contact, if a CONTACT card is

entered, the data on the CONTACT card supercedes the GASTRF value. 00
5.38.3 Fractional Flow Exponent for Extraneous Water Tracking

(TKWEXP)
The TKWEXP array may optionally be input in either the VIP-CORE data
or with OVER/VOVER cards in the simulation modules, if the water
tracking option has been invoked. 00
TKWEXP option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
TKWEXP Exponent used in calculating the fractional flow

terms for the extraneous tracked water types. The
exponent determines preferential flow between
the insitu water and all other water types. The
5-416 Landmark - R2003.4

default is 1.0, which yields fractional flow as a

function of normalized tracked water type
saturation. A value greater than 1 increases the
preferential flow of insitu water, while a value
less than 1 reduces it.
5.39 Three and Four Component Miscible
5.39.1 Mixing Parameter for Effective Viscosity (OMGV)
OMGV option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
OMGV Mixing parameter for effective viscosity

calculation.
The OMGV array allows the user to input variable values for viscosity
mixing parameter in miscible option (invoked by the MIS card). This array
overrides the omegav value specified in the MIS card of the Initialization
Data section. The omegav value will be used if this card is omitted. 00
Example: 00
OMGV ZVAR
0.5 0.6 0.7 00
5.39.2 Mixing Parameter for Effective Density (OMGD)
OMGD option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
OMGD Mixing parameter for effective density

calculation.
The OMGD array allows the user to input variable values for density
mixing parameter in miscible option (invoked by the MIS card). This array
overrides the omegad value specified in the MIS card of the Initialization
Data section. The omegad value will be used if this card is omitted. 00
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-417

Example: 00
OMGD ZVAR
0.5 0.6 0.7 00
5.40 Time-Dependent Compressibility - Creep Option (Not

available in VIP-THERM)
The time-dependent compressibility (creep) option includes a time-
delayed compaction due to creep in addition to the standard
instantaneous compaction represented by the rock compressibility. In this
option, the time-dependent portion of the rate of pore volume change is
assumed to be proportional to the difference between the current strain
state and a prescribed equilibrium state. 00
To invoke the creep option, the following three arrays must be

specified. 00
5.40.1 Reservoir Rock Rate Constant (CREEPB)
CREEPB option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
CREEPB, day-1 Parameter B in the creep option. This is the

reservoir rock rate constant and is inversely
proportional to the characteristic time constant of
the material (time needed for the rock to creep
and reach its relaxed condition).
Example: 00
CREEPB ZVAR
6.169 1.227 3.000
5.40.2 Equilibrium State Total Rock Compressibility (CREEPC)
CREEPC option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
CREEPC, Parameter C∞ in the creep option. This is the total

psi-1 (kPa-1) rock compressibility at the equilibrium state.
5-418 Landmark - R2003.4

Example: 00
CREEPC CON
1.E-5
5.40.3 Creep Exponent (CREEPM)
CREEPM option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
CREEPM Parameter m in the creep option. This is the creep

exponent; i.e., the long-term reservoir
compressibility.
Example: 00
CREEPM ZVAR
17.1 15.65 16.3
5.41 Connection Transmissibility Modification

If flow transmissibilities, and thermal transmissibilities in VIP-THERM,
are not directly entered then they are calculated by VIP based on the
values of permeability, thermal conductivity, and gridblock dimension.
These transmissibility values are modified by the values of the
transmissibility multiplier arrays. The values of the transmissibility
multiplier arrays may be entered directly and/or modified by the MULT
option. The MULT option allows the user to modify transmissibilities in
the plus and minus directions, and to enter transmissibility multipliers for
non-standard connections separate from standard connections. MULT
cards can only be entered after all ARRAY data has been entered. 00
Transmissibilities and pore volumes can also be modified using OVER and
VOVER cards. Separate options are available in PRINT ARRAYS output or
in the initialization MAP file to report transmissibility multiplier values
before and after the effects of OVER/VOVER cards. 00
Transmissibilities are also modified when fault data is entered. If

transmissibility multiplier values are entered on fault cards then they will
supercede any values that were previously entered. These new values will
be reflected in PRINT ARRAYS output and in the initialization MAP file. 00
If transmissibility arrays are not entered then a default value of one is

used. 00
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-419

5.41.1 X Direction Transmissibility Multiplier (TMX)
TMX option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
TMX The x direction transmissibility multiplier for

gridblock (i,j,k) is defined at the boundary
between blocks (i-1,j,k) and (i,j,k) and controls
flow between them. For i = 1, TMX is zero.
NOTE: Omit if NX = 1.
The TMX values modify transmissibilities calculated for standard and

nonstandard connections. New values of this array which are specified in
the MULT option or on fault cards will be reflected in output generated by
PRINT ARRAYS and in the MAP file. The values of this array will not be
modified if transmissibilities are further modified by OVER or VOVER
cards. 00
5.41.2 Y Direction Transmissibility Multiplier (TMY)
TMY option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
TMY The y direction transmissibility multiplier for

between blocks (i,j-1,k) and (i,j,k) and controls
flow between them. For j = 1, TMY is zero.
NOTE: Omit if NY = 1.
The TMY values modify transmissibilities calculated for standard and

cards. 00
5-420 Landmark - R2003.4

5.41.3 Z Direction Transmissibility Multiplier (TMZ)
TMZ option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
TMZ The z direction transmissibility multiplier for

between blocks (i,j,k-1) and (i,j,k) and controls
flow between them. For k = 1, TMZ is zero.
NOTE: Omit if NZ = 1.
The TMZ values modify transmissibilities calculated for standard and

cards. 00
5.41.4 R Direction Transmissibility Multiplier (TMR)
TMR option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
TMR The r direction transmissibility multiplier for

flow between them. For i = 1, TMR is zero.
NOTE: Omit if NR = 1.
The TMR values modify transmissibilities calculated for standard and

cards. 00
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-421

5.41.5 Theta Direction Transmissibility Multiplier (TMTH)
TMTH option (amin amax nl)

Definitions: 00
TMTH The theta direction transmissibility multiplier for

between blocks (i,j-1,k) and (i,j,k) and controls
flow between them. For j = 1, TMTH is zero.
NOTE: Omit if NTHETA = 1.
The TMTH values modify transmissibilities calculated for standard and

cards. 00
5.41.6 Left Diagonal Direction Transmissibility Multiplier (TMXYL)
TMXYL option (amin amax nl)

Definition: 00
TMXYL The left diagonal-direction transmissibility

multiplier for gridblock (i,j,k) is defined at the
boundary between blocks (i-1,j-1,k) and (i,j,k) and
controls flow between them. For i=1 and for j = 1,
TMXYL is zero.
If the nine-point differencing operator is invoked (NINEPT Card) and

permeabilities are input, then the calculated values of TXYL are modified
by this array. The values of this array will not be modified if
transmissibilities are modified by OVER or VOVER cards. 00
5.41.7 Right Diagonal Direction Transmissibility Multiplier (TMXYR)
TMXYR option (amin amax nl)

5-422 Landmark - R2003.4

Definition: 00
TMXYR The right diagonal-direction transmissibility

boundary between blocks (i+1,j-1,k) and (i,j,k)
and controls flow between them. For i = NX and
for j = 1, TMXYR is zero.
If the nine-point differencing operator is invoked (NINEPT Card) and

permeabilities are input, then the calculated values of TXYR are modified
by this array. The values of this array will not be modified if
transmissibilities are modified by OVER or VOVER cards. 00
5.41.8 Fracture X Direction Transmissibility Multiplier (TMXF)
TMXF option (amin amax nl)

The TMXF array is only required when the DUAL option is in use and the
fracture transmissibility multipliers are different from the matrix
multipliers. In this case both the TMX and the TMXF arrays are entered. If
the TMXF array is omitted, the multipliers will be set equal to the
corresponding matrix multipliers. 00
Definition: 00
TMXF Definition as for the TMX array. If omitted, the

TMXF array defaults to the values in the TMX
array.
5.41.9 Fracture Y Direction Transmissibility Multiplier (TMYF)
TMYF option (amin amax nl)

The TMYF array is only required when the DUAL option is in use and the
multipliers. In this case both the TMY and the TMYF arrays are entered. If
the TMYF array is omitted, the multipliers will be set equal to the
Definition: 00
TMYF Definition as for the TMY array. If omitted, the

TMYF array defaults to the values in the TMY
array.
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-423

5.41.10 Fracture Z Direction Transmissibility Multiplier (TMZF)
TMZF option (amin amax nl)

The TMZF array is only required when the DUAL option is in use and the
multipliers. In this case both the TMZ and the TMZF arrays are entered. If
the TMZF array is omitted, the multipliers will be set equal to the
Definition: 00
TMZF Definition as for the TMZ array. If omitted, the

TMZF array defaults to the values in the TMZ
array.
5.41.11 Fracture R Direction Transmissibility Multiplier (TMRF)
TMRF option (amin amax nl)

The TMRF array is only required when the DUAL option is in use and the
multipliers. In this case both the TMR and the TMRF arrays are entered. If
the TMRF array is omitted, the multipliers will be set equal to the
Definition: 00
TMRF Definition as for the TMR array. If omitted, the

TMRF array defaults to the values in the TMR
array.
5.41.12 Fracture Theta Direction Tranmissibility Multiplier (TMTHF)
TMTHF option (amin amax nl)

The TMTHF array is only required when the DUAL option is in use and
the fracture transmissibility multipliers are different from the matrix
multipliers. In this case both the TMTH and the TMTHF arrays are
entered. If the TMTHF array is omitted, the multipliers will be set equal to
the corresponding matrix multipliers. 00
5-424 Landmark - R2003.4

Definition: 00
TMTHF Definition as for the TMTH array. If omitted, the

TMTHF array defaults to the values in the TMTH
array.
5.41.13 Fracture Left Diagonal Direction Transmissibility Multiplier

(TMXYLF)
TMXYLF option (amin amax nl)

The TMXYLF array is only required when the DUAL option is in use and
multipliers. In this case both the TMXYL and the TMXYLF arrays are
entered. If the TMXYLF array is omitted, the multipliers will be set equal
to the corresponding matrix multipliers. 00
Definition: 00
TMXYLF Definition as for the TMXYL array. If omitted, the

TMXYLF array defaults to the values in the
TMXYL array.
5.41.14 Fracture Right Diagonal Direction Transmissibility Multiplier

(TMXYRF)
TMXYRF option (amin amax nl)

The TMXYRF array is only required when the DUAL option is in use and
multipliers. In this case both the TMXYR and the TMXYRF arrays are
entered. If the TMXYRF array is omitted, the multipliers will be set equal
to the corresponding matrix multipliers. 00
Definition: 00
TMXYRF Definition as for the TMXYR array. If omitted, the

TMXYRF array defaults to the values in the
TMXYR array.
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-425

5.41.15 X Direction Thermal Transmissibility Multiplier (TTMX) (VIP-

THERM)
TTMX option (amin amax n1)

Definition: 00
TTMX The x direction thermal transmissibility

boundary between blocks (i-1,j,k) and (i,j,k) and
controls flow between them. For i = 1, TTMX is
zero.
NOTE: Omit if NX = 1.
The TTMX values modify thermal transmissibilities calculated for

standard and nonstandard connections. New values of this array which
are specified in the MULT option or on fault cards will be reflected in
output generated by PRINT ARRAYS and in the MAP file. The values of
this array will not be modified if thermal transmissibilities are further
modified by OVER or VOVER cards. 00
5.41.16 Y Direction Thermal Transmissibility Multiplier (TTMY) (VIP-

THERM)
TTMY option (amin amax n1)

Definition: 00
TTMY The y direction thermal transmissibility

boundary between blocks (i,j-1,k) and (i,j,k) and
controls flow between them. For j = 1, TTMY is
zero.
NOTE: Omit if NY = 1.
The TTMY values modify thermal transmissibilities calculated for

5-426 Landmark - R2003.4

5.41.17 Z Direction Thermal Transmissibility Multiplier (TTMZ) (VIP-

THERM)
TTMZ option (amin amax n1)

Definition: 00
TTMZ The z direction thermal transmissibility

boundary between blocks (i,j,k-1) and (i,j,k) and
controls flow between them. For k = 1, TTMZ is
zero.
NOTE: Omit if NZ = 1.
The TTMZ values modify thermal transmissibilities calculated for

5.41.18 R Direction Thermal Transmissibility Multiplier (TTMR) (VIP-

THERM)
TTMR option (amin amax n1)

Definition: 00
TTMR The r direction thermal transmissibility multiplier

for gridblock (i,j,k) is defined at the boundary
flow between them. For i = 1, TTMR is zero.
NOTE: Omit if NR = 1.
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-427

The TTMR values modify thermal transmissibilities calculated for

5.41.19 Theta Direction Thermal Transmissibility Multiplier (TTMTH)

(VIP-THERM)
TTMTH option (amin amax n1)

Definitions: 00
TTMTH The theta direction thermal transmissibility

boundary between blocks (i,j-1,k) and (i,j,k) and
controls flow between them. For j = 1, TTMTH is
zero.
NOTE: Omit if NTHETA = 1.
The TTMTH values modify thermal transmissibilities calculated for

00
5-428 Landmark - R2003.4

5.42 Function Input Option (FUNCTION)

The function input option can be applied in reservoir simulations to: 00
■ Calculate average values of rock property arrays in specified grid

blocks using information about their values in some reservoir
locations.
■ Represent some correlations between reservoir rock properties.
Functional dependencies can be represented in tabular or analytical forms.

If the tabular function option is applied, known values of output arrays at
given values of input arrays should be input as function table entries. In
this case, an interpolation procedure is applied for the determination of
the values of the output arrays in reservoir grid blocks. In the analytical
function option, the values of the output arrays in the grid blocks are
calculated as an analytical function of input array values. 00
Advanced multidimensional spline interpolation technique is used for the

tabular function representation. The order of the spline and the number of
the points of the function table, which are used for the interpolation, are
defined internally minimizing the interpolation error. In general, the
different number of the function table entries are used for the calculation
of the function values in different grid blocks. However, the user can
control the number of the function table entries which are used for the
interpolation and the spline order using the parameter m in the
FUNCTION card and the DRANGE card. 00
The entries of the function table can be input in arbitrary order. However,
they are internally sorted for each grid block in increasing order of a
distance between values of the input variables in the grid block and in the
function table. The first m entries of the sorted function table which satisfy
the constraints defined in the DRANGE card are used for the
interpolation. 00
The function procedure can be executed only for selected blocks. These
blocks are defined by the FUNCTION, BLOCKS, and/or RANGE INPUT
cards. 00
The optional ANALYT, BLOCKS, RANGE INPUT, RANGE OUTPUT,

DRANGE, and VOLAVR cards can be input in arbitrary order. 00
A numerical integration technique is applied in the VOLAVR procedure

for the calculation of the volume-averaged values of output variables. The
numbers of the quadrature points in the X, Y, and Z directions in corner
point geometry models can be input in the CORNER card. They are set to
three in rectangular geometry models. This procedure is not implemented
for radial geometry models. 00
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-429

Input or output variables in the function option can be integer arrays like
ISAT, ISATI, IREGION, IPVT, ICMT, and/or IEQUIL. They are internally
transformed in a real data type and, then, the standard function option is
applied. 00
Note that when IREGION is used as an input or output array, and extra
regions have been defined, the extra region values are not involved in the
FUNCTION calculations. For IREGION as input, only the original region
number is used in the function table lookup. For IREGION as output, only
the original region number is replaced; the extra region numbers are
retained. 00
Analytical functions can be applied using the ANALYT card. In this case,
the function table entries, DRANGE and VOLAVR cards are ignored. In
the ABS, EXP, EXP10, LOG, LOG10, SQRT, SIN, COS, GE, LE, POLYN
analytical functions, only the first input array is used. All other input
arrays are ignored. In the DIV, MULT, ADD, SUBT, MIN, MAX analytical
functions, the first two input arrays are used. All other input arrays are
ignored. If the number of the input arrays in the DIV, MULT, ADD, SUBT,
MIN, MAX analytical functions is equal to one, the second input array is
assumed to be equal to the first input array. 00
FUNCTION (reg_type) (m p1 p2 . . . pN)

(r1,r2,...,rL)
(ANALYT function_type (a0 a1 ... an))
(BLOCKS i1 i2 j1 j2 k1 k2)
(RANGE INPUT xmin1 xmax1 . . . xminN xmaxN)
(RANGE OUTPUT ymin1 ymax1 . . . yminK ymaxK)
(DRANGE dr1 dr2 . . . drN)
(VOLAVR)
inp_arr1...inp_arrN OUTPUT out_arr1...out_arrK
Function table entries as required.
Definitions: 00
FUNCTION The function input table is defined.
reg_type Type of regions in which function input option is

applied. One of the following: ISAT, ISATI,
IREGION, IEQUIL, ICMT, IPVT, ITRAN, IWIRC.
m Maximum number of the function table entries

which can be used for the interpolation. The
default value is the number of the entries in the

function table.
p1...pN Shifts of the first, second, ... , and N-th input arrays.
They are deducted from the values of the input
variables in the function table. The default values
are zero.
5-430 Landmark - R2003.4

r1,...,rL Region numbers. The function input option is

applied only in grid blocks which belong to one of
these regions.
ANALYT Analytical function option.
function_type Analytical function type. The following analytical

functions can be used:
POLYN is the polynomial of the n-th order. The

polynomial order n can be not larger than nine. The
value of the output array (y) in a grid block is
determined as y = ao xn + a1 xn-1+ . . . + an, where x
is the value of the first input array in the grid block;
ABS is the absolute value y = |x|;
EXP is the exponential function y = ex;
EXP10 is the exponential function y = 10x;
LOG is the natural logarithm y = ln|x|;
LOG10 is the common logarithm y = log10|x|;
SQRT is the square root ( y = x ); ;

SIN is the sine of degrees y = sin(x);
COS is the cosine of degrees y = cos(x);
GE is the step function
x, ifx greater than or equal to a 0

y =
a 1 , otherwise;
LE is the step function
x, if x is less than or equal to a 0

y =
a 1 , otherwise;
ADD is the sum of the values of the two input

arrays in a grid block y = x1 + x2;
SUBT is the difference of the values of the two input

arrays in a grid block y = x1 - x2;
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-431

DIV is the ratio of the values of the two input arrays

in a grid block
( x 1 ⁄ x 2 ) ,if x 2 is not equal tozero,

y = ,
x1 ;
MULT is the product of the values of the two input

arrays in a grid block y = x1 × x2;
MIN is the minimum of the values of the two input

arrays in a grid block y = min (x1,x2);
MAX is the maximum of the values of the two input

arrays in a grid block y = max (x1,x2);
a0,a1,...,an Coefficients of the polynomial or step function;
BLOCKS Range of blocks is defined. The function input

option is applied only in grid blocks from this
range.
i, j, k Gridblock locations are defined by indices i,j,k in

reference to the (x,y,z) or (r,theta,z) grid. The
function input option is applied to grid blocks that
fall in the portion of the grid defined by:
i1 ≤ I ≤ i 2,
j1 ≤ J ≤ j 2,
k1 ≤ K ≤ k2.
If the BLOCKS card is not specified, the default val-

ues are:
i1 = j1 = k1 = 1,
i2 = NX, j2 = NY, k2 = NZ.
RANGE INPUT Ranges of input variables are defined.
xmin,xmax Minimum and maximum values of the input

variables. The function input option is applied only
in grid blocks in which input variables xi belong to
the specified ranges:
xmini ≤ xi ≤ xmaxi, i=1, ..., N
If the RANGE INPUT card in not specified, the de-

fault values are:
xmin1 = xmin2 = . . . = xminN = -1.e+12,

xmax1 = xmax2 = , . . = xmaxN = 1.e+12.
5-432 Landmark - R2003.4

RANGE OUTPUT Ranges of output variables are defined.
ymin,ymax Minimum and maximum values of the output

variables. The output variable is set to the
maximum value if the interpolated value of the
variable is larger than the maximum value. The
output variable is set to the minimum value if the
interpolated value of the variable is smaller than the
minimum value.
If the RANGE OUTPUT card is not specified, the

default values are:
ymin1 = ymin2 = . . . = yminK = -1.e+12,

ymax1 = ymax2 = . . . = ymaxK = 1.e+12.
DRANGE Ranges of function table entries are defined.
dr1,...,drN Maximum distances from the input point. The j-th

entry of the function table (xj,1, xj,2,...,xj,N) is used
for the interpolation of the output variables at the
input point (x1, x2, ..., xN) only if the following
constraints are satisfied
|x1 - xj,1 | ≤ dr1,

|x2 - xj,2 | ≤ dr2,
....
|xN - xj,N | ≤ drN.
If the DRANGE card is not specified, the default val-

ues are:
dr1 = dr2 = . . . = drN = 1.e+12.
VOLAVR The volume-averaged procedure is applied. The

volume-averaged values of the output variables in
grid blocks are calculated. Only the XC, YC, and
MDEPTH arrays can be used as input variables in
the procedure. If the VOLAVR keyword is not
included the output variables are calculated at
block centers.
inp_arr Name of an input array (input variable). One of the

following array names can be used:
WORKA1, WORKA2, WORKA3

XC, YC, THETA, DX, DY, DZ, DZNET,
H, HNET, NETGRS, DXB, DYB, DZB, DZBNET,
MDEPTH, R, DR, DTHETA, ZCORNW, ZCORNE,
ZCORSW, ZBOT, ZBOTNW, ZBOTNE, ZBOTSW,
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-433

POR, KX, KY, KZ, KXF, KYF, KZF, KR, KTHETA,

KRF, KTF, CR,
TMX, TMY, TMZ, TMXYL, TMXYR, TMR, TMTH,

TMXF, TMYF, TMZF, TMXYLF, TMX YRF, TMRF,
TMTHF, KMULX, KMULY, KMULZ, KMULR,
KMULTH, KWHYS, KOHYS, CRD, CRR, PD, PR,
FR, PORMAX, PORMIN, CPR0, KTX0, KTY0,
KTZ0, KTR0, KTTH0, TXT0, TYT0, TZT0, TRT0,
TTHT0, ICPRTB, TTMX, TTMY, TTMZ, TTMR,
TTMTH
PV, TX, TR, TY, TTHETA, TZ, TXYR, TXYL,

ISAT, ISATI, IPVT, IPVTW,IREGION, IEQUIL,
ICMT, ITRAN, IWIRC, SW, SG, P, TEMP, FVEWO,
FVEGO,
SWL, SWR, SWRO, SWU, SGL, SGR, SGRO, SGU,
SGRW, KROLW, KRWRO, KRGRO,
ISATX+, ISATX-, ISATY+, ISATY-,

ISATZ+, ISATZ-, ISATA, ISATV,
ISTIX+, ISTIX-, ISTIY+, ISTIY-,

ISTIZ+, ISTIZ-, ISTIA, ISTIV,
SWLX+, SWLX-, SWLY+, SWLY-,

SWLZ+, SWLZ-, SWLA, SWLV,
SWRX+, SWRX-, SWRY+, SWRY-,

SWRZ+, SWRZ-, SWRA, SWRV,
SWROX+, SWROX-, SWROY+, SWROY-,

SWROZ+, SWROZ-, SWRA, SWROV,
SWUX+, SWUX-, SWUY+, SWUY-,

SWUZ+, SWUZ-, SWUA, SWUV,
SGLX+, SGLX-, SGLY+, SGLY-,

SGLZ+, SGLZ-, SGLA, SGLV,
SGRX+, SGRX-, SGRY+, SGRY-,

SGRZ+, SGRZ-, SGRA, SGRV,
SGROX+, SGROX-, SGROY+, SGROY-,

SGROZ+, SGROZ-, SGROA, SGROV,
SGUX+, SGUX-, SGUY+, SGUY-,

SGUZ+, SGUZ-, SGUA, SGUV,
SGRWX+, SGRWX-, SGRWY+, SGRWY-,
5-434 Landmark - R2003.4

SGRWZ+, SGRWZ-, SGRWA, SGRWV,
KOLWX+, KOLWX-, KOLWY+, KOLWY-,

KOLWZ+, KOLWZ-, KOLWA, KOLWV,
KWROX+, KWROX-, KWROY+, KWROY-,

KWROZ+, KWROZ-, KWROA, KWROV,
KGROX+, KGROX-, KGROY+, KGROY-,

KGROZ+, KGROZ-, KGROA, KGROV.
In addition, for VIP-DUAL , one of the following

array names can also be used.
NETGF, MDEPF, PORF, KXFEFF, KYFEFF,

KZFEFF, KRFEFF, KTFEFF, CRF, PVF, TXF, TYF,
TZF, TRF, TTHETF, TXYRF, TXYLF, TEX, LX, LY,
LZ,
TDIFFG, TDIFFO, SIGMA, SIGMAD,
ISATF, ISATFI, ISATEM, ISATEF, IREGF, ICMTF,
ITRANF, IWIRCF, SWF, SGF, PF, FVEWOF,
FVEGOF, SWLF, SWRF, SWROF, SWUF, SGLF,
SGRF, SGROF, SGUF, SGRWF, KROLWF,
KRWROF, KRGROF,
ISATFX+, ISATFX-, ISATFY+, ISATFY-,

ISATFZ+, ISATFZ-, ISATFA, ISATFV,
ISTIFX+, ISTIFX-, ISTIFY+, ISTIFY-,

ISTIFZ+, ISTIFZ-, ISTIFA, ISTIFV,
SWLFX+, SWLFX-, SWLFY+, SWLFY-,

SWLFZ+, SWLFZ-, SWLFA, SWLFV,
SWRFX+, SWRFX-, SWRFY+, SWRFY-,

SWRFZ+, SWRFZ-, SWRFA, SWRFV,
SWROFX+, SWROFX-, SWROFY+, SWROFY-,

SWROFZ+, SWROFZ-, SWROFA, SWROFV,
SWUFX+, SWUFX-, SWUFY+, SWUFY-,

SWUFZ+, SWUFZ-, SWUFA, SWUFV,
SGLFX+, SGLFX-, SGLFY+, SGLFY-,

SGLFZ+, SGLFZ-, SGLFA, SGLFV,
SGRFX+, SGRFX-, SGRFY+, SGRFY-,

SGRFZ+, SGRFZ-, SGRFA, SGRFV,
SGROFX+, SGROFX-, SGROFY+, SGROFY-,
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-435

SGROFZ+, SGROFZ-, SGROFA, SGROFV,
SGUFX+, SGUFX-, SGUFY+, SGUFY-,

SGUFZ+, SGUFZ-, SGUFA, SGUFV,
SGRWFX+, SGRWFX-, SGRWFY+, SGRWFY-,

SGRWFZ+, SGRWFZ-, SGRWFA, SGRWFV,
KOLWFX+, KOLWFX-, KOLWFY+, KOLWFY-,

KOLWFZ+, KOLWFZ-, KOLWFA, KOLWFV,
KWROFX+, KWROFX-, KWROFY+, KWROFY-,

KWROFZ+, KWROFZ-, KWROFA, KWROFV,
KGROFX+, KGROFX-, KGROFY+, KGROFY-,

KGROFZ+, KGROFZ-, KGROFA, KGROFV.
Several names can be included. The array names

XC, YC, and MDEPTH can be used to input the x-,
y-, and z- coordinates of points in rectangular and
corner point geometry models. The array names R,
THETA, and MDEPTH can be used to input
coordinates of points in radial geometry models.
WORKA1, WORKA2, WORKA3 are temporary

work arrays that can be read in or defined as
OUTPUT arrays.
OUTPUT This keyword separates the names of the input and

output arrays.
out_arr Name of an output array (output variable). One of

the following names can be used:
WORKA1, WORKA2, WORKA3

NETGRS, POR, KX, KY, KZ, KXF, KYF, KZF, KR,
KTHETA, KRF, KTF, CR,
PV, TX, TR, TY, TTHETA, TZ, TXYR, TXYL,
ISAT, ISATI, IPVT, IPVTW, IREGION, IEQUIL,
ICMT, ITRAN, IWIRC, SW, SG, P, TEMP, FVEWO,
FVEGO,
SWL, SWR, SWRO, SWU, SGL, SGR, SGRO, SGU,
SGRW, KROLW, KRWRO, KRGRO,
TMX, TMY, TMZ, TMXYL, TMXYR, TMR, TMTH,

TMXF, TMYF, TMZF, TMXYLF, TMX YRF, TMRF,
TMTHF, KMULX, KMULY, KMULZ, KMULR,
KMULTH, KWHYS, KOHYS, CRD, CRR, PD, PR,
FR, PORMAX, PORMIN, CPR0, KTX0, KTY0,
KTZ0, KTR0, KTTH0, TXT0, TYT0, TZT0, TRT0,
5-436 Landmark - R2003.4

TTHT0, ICPRTB, TTMX, TTMY, TTMZ, TTMR,

TTMTH
ISATX+, ISATX-, ISATY+, ISATY-,

ISATZ+, ISATZ-, ISATA, ISATV,
ISTIX+, ISTIX-, ISTIY+, ISTIY-,

ISTIZ+, ISTIZ-, ISTIA, ISTIV,
SWLX+, SWLX-, SWLY+, SWLY-,

SWLZ+, SWLZ-, SWLA, SWLV,
SWRX+, SWRX-, SWRY+, SWRY-,

SWRZ+, SWRZ-, SWRA, SWRV,
SWROX+, SWROX-, SWROY+, SWROY-,

SWROZ+, SWROZ-, SWRA, SWROV,
SWUX+, SWUX-, SWUY+, SWUY-,

SWUZ+, SWUZ-, SWUA, SWUV,
SGLX+, SGLX-, SGLY+, SGLY-,

SGLZ+, SGLZ-, SGLA, SGLV,
SGRX+, SGRX-, SGRY+, SGRY-,

SGRZ+, SGRZ-, SGRA, SGRV,
SGROX+, SGROX-, SGROY+, SGROY-,

SGROZ+, SGROZ-, SGROA, SGROV,
SGUX+, SGUX-, SGUY+, SGUY-,

SGUZ+, SGUZ-, SGUA, SGUV,
SGRWX+, SGRWX-, SGRWY+, SGRWY-,

SGRWZ+, SGRWZ-, SGRWA, SGRWV,
KOLWX+, KOLWX-, KOLWY+, KOLWY-,

KOLWZ+, KOLWZ-, KOLWA, KOLWV,
KWROX+, KWROX-, KWROY+, KWROY-,

KWROZ+, KWROZ-, KWROA, KWROV,
KGROX+, KGROX-, KGROY+, KGROY-,

KGROZ+, KGROZ-, KGROA, KGROV.
In addition, for VIP-DUAL , one of the following

array names can also be used.
NETGF, PORF, KXFEFF, KYFEFF, KZFEFF,

KRFEFF, KTFEFF, CRF, PVF, TXF, TYF, TZF, TRF,
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-437

TTHETF, TXYRF, TXYLF, TEX, LX, LY, LZ,

TDIFFG, TDIFFO, SIGMA, SIGMAD,
ISATF, ISATFI, ISATEM, ISATEF, IREGF, ICMTF,
ITRANF, IWIRCF, SWF, SGF, PF, FVEWOF,
FVEGOF, SWLF, SWRF, SWROF, SWUF, SGLF,
SGRF, SGROF, SGUF, SGRWF, KROLWF,
KRWROF, KRGROF,
ISATFX+, ISATFX-, ISATFY+, ISATFY-,
ISATFZ+, ISATFZ-, ISATFA, ISATFV,
ISTIFX+, ISTIFX-, ISTIFY+, ISTIFY-,

ISTIFZ+, ISTIFZ-, ISTIFA, ISTIFV,
SWLFX+, SWLFX-, SWLFY+, SWLFY-,

SWLFZ+, SWLFZ-, SWLFA, SWLFV,
SWRFX+, SWRFX-, SWRFY+, SWRFY-,

SWRFZ+, SWRFZ-, SWRFA, SWRFV,
SWROFX+, SWROFX-, SWROFY+, SWROFY-,

SWROFZ+, SWROFZ-, SWROFA, SWROFV,
SWUFX+, SWUFX-, SWUFY+, SWUFY-,

SWUFZ+, SWUFZ-, SWUFA, SWUFV,
SGLFX+, SGLFX-, SGLFY+, SGLFY-,

SGLFZ+, SGLFZ-, SGLFA, SGLFV,
SGRFX+, SGRFX-, SGRFY+, SGRFY-,

SGRFZ+, SGRFZ-, SGRFA, SGRFV,
SGROFX+, SGROFX-, SGROFY+, SGROFY-,

SGROFZ+, SGROFZ-, SGROFA, SGROFV,
SGUFX+, SGUFX-, SGUFY+, SGUFY-,

SGUFZ+, SGUFZ-, SGUFA, SGUFV,
SGRWFX+, SGRWFX-, SGRWFY+, SGRWFY-,

SGRWFZ+, SGRWFZ-, SGRWFA, SGRWFV,
KOLWFX+, KOLWFX-, KOLWFY+, KOLWFY-,

KOLWFZ+, KOLWFZ-, KOLWFA, KOLWFV,
KWROFX+, KWROFX-, KWROFY+, KWROFY-,

KWROFZ+, KWROFZ-, KWROFA, KWROFV,
KGROFX+, KGROFX-, KGROFY+, KGROFY-,

KGROFZ+, KGROFZ-, KGROFA, KGROFV.
5-438 Landmark - R2003.4

Several names can be included. The interpolation

procedure is executed for every output variable
independently.
WORKA1, WORKA2, WORKA3 are used to store

intermediate values for later use as an inp-arr for
subsquent FUNCTION operations.
Every function table entry should be input on one line. It should consist of
N values of the input variables and K correspondent values of the output
variable. The function table entries can be input in arbitrary order. 00
NOTE: 1. FUNCTION cards must appear after all array input and
before any MULT card or fault data. Several FUNCTION
cards can be included in the data set.
2. Note that when IREGION is used as an input or output

array, and extra regions have been defined, the extra
region values are not involved in the FUNCTION
calculations. For IREGION as input, only the original
region number is used in the function table lookup. For
IREGION as output, only the original region number is
replaced; the extra region numbers are retained.
Examples: 00
C Problem 1.
C Define the volume-averaged values of the permeability KX in
C Blocks (5,1,1)and (6,1,1) using its values in seven reservoir locations
FUNCTION
BLOCKS 5 6 1 1 1 1
VOLAVR
XC YC MDEPTH OUTPUT KX
4000 9000 8335 300
4210 9200 8335 304.455
4300 9300 8335 303.3
4400 9400 8335 304.4
4500 9600 8335 305.8
4600 9800 8335 306.6
5000 10000 8335 311
C 00
C Problem 2.
C Define the permeability KX as a function of the porosity POR
C and the critical water saturation SWR in grid blocks from the
C second and fourth output regions, in which the critical water
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-439

C saturation values
C are in the range [0.18,0.2].
C
FUNCTION IREGION
24
RANGE INPUT 0.18 0.2
SWR POR OUTPUT KX
0.1909 0.2 10.4767
0.1909 0.4 83.8135
0.1909 0.6 282.871
0.1909 0.8 670.508
C
C Problem 3.
C Define permeability KX as the following analytical function
C of porosity POR :
C KX = 10(17.06715 POR - 2.70903).
C Set permeability to zero, if its calculated value is less than one.
C
FUNCTION
ANALYT POLYN 17.06715 - 2.70903
POR OUTPUT KX
C
FUNCTION
ANALYT EXP10
KX OUTPUT KX
C
FUNCTION
ANALYT GE 1 0
KX OUTPUT KX 00
5.43 Reference Rock Specific Heat Capacity (CPR0) (VIP-

THERM)
Reference values of rock specific heat capacity correspond to values at
standard temperature. Actual values are calculated from the reference
values using the equation:
CPR = CPR0 (1 + DCPRDT (T - TS))
CPR0, Btu/FT3 ˚F
(KJ/M3˚C) Reference rock heat capacity of each gridblock.
5-440 Landmark - R2003.4

5.44 Reference Thermal Conductivity (VIP-THERM)

Reference values of thermal conductivity correspond to liquid-filled pore
volume. Actual values are calculated from the reference values using the
equation:
KT = KT0 (1 - DKDSG*SG)
where KT is thermal conductivity.
5.44.1 X(R) Direction

Omit if NX=1 or NR=1.
Rectangular Grid:
KTX0 Reference thermal conductivity in the x-direction,

applied to the gridblock center, Btu/D ft. ˚F(W/
M˚K).
Radial Grid:
KTR0 Reference thermal conductivity in the r direction

applied to the gridblock center, Btu/D ft ˚F (W/
M˚K).
5.44.2 Y(Theta) Direction

Omit if NY=1 or NTHETA=1
Enter one of the following arrays:
Rectangular Grid:
KTY0 Reference thermal conductivity in the y direction,

applied to the gridblock center, Btu/D ft. F (W/M
˚K).
Radial Grid:
KTTH0 Reference thermal conductivity in the theta

direction, applied to the gridblock center, Btu/D ft.
˚F (W/M ˚K).
5.44.3 Z Direction
Omit if NZ=1
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-441

Enter one of the following arrays:
KTZ0 Reference thermal conductivity in the z direction,

applied to the gridblock center, Btu/D ft. ˚F (W/M
˚K).
5.45 Water-Oil Hysteresis Arrays (VIP-THERM)
5.45.1 KWHYS Array

The KWHYS array is used to specify the value of Kwrev (Section 4.3.4).
Default is 1.0. A value of zero results in initialization to the krw imbibition
(water-wet) or drainage (oil-wet) curve. Values must lie between zero and
one.
KWHYS, fraction Value of Kwrev defined in Section 4.3.4.
5.45.2 KOHYS Array

The KOHYS array is used to specify the value of Korev (Section 4.3.4).
Default is 1.0.
KOHYS, fraction Value of Korev defined in Section 4.3.4.
5.46 Beattie et. al Fracture Model Arrays (VIP-THERM)

Scalar parameters specified in the PORDEF data (Section 4.18) may
optionally be specified as gridblock arrays.
PD, psia (kPa) Dilation pressure.
PR, psia (kPa) Recompaction pressure.
CRD, psia-1 (kPa-1)Dilant rock compressibility.
FR, fraction Permanent fraction of total dilation on

recompaction to P = 0.
The elastic rock compressibility (CR) may be specified as a gridblock array

as described in Section 5.23.
Permeability multipliers for the fracture model (Section 4.18.2.1, Reference

32) must be specified in each flow direction, including diagonal directions
if the NINEPT option is in use.
5-442 Landmark - R2003.4

Rectangular Grid:
KMULX X-direction permeability multiplier, applied to

transmissibility at i - 1/2.
KMULY Y-direction permeability multiplier, applied to

transmissibility at j - 1/2.
KMULZ Z-direction permeability multiplier, applied to

transmissibility at k - 1/2.
For NINEPT option:
KMLXYR +x, -y direction permeability multiplier, applied to

transmissibility at i + 1/2, j - 1/2.
KMLXYL -x, -y direction permeability multiplier, applied to

transmissibility at i - 1/2, j - 1/2.
Radial Grid:
KMULR R-direction permeability multiplier, applied to

transmissibility at i - 1/2.
KMULTH Thetha-direction permeability multiplier, applied to

transmissibility at j - 1/2.
KMULZ Z-direction permeability multiplier, applied to

transmissibility at k - 1/2.
5.47 Rock Heat Capacity Variations (ICPRTB) (VIP-THERM)

The ICPRTB array is required if more than one set of rock heat capacity
tables (Section 4.19) are to be used.
ICPRTB, integer Integer values that distinguish areas containing

rock types which require unique heat capacity
description. Each value in the ICPRTB array directly
refers to a rock heat capacity table input. Default
sets the entire array to 1.
R2003.4 - Landmark 5-443

5-444 Landmark - R2003.4

Chapter
6
00000Fault Data
6.1 Fault Option

Also see Section 2.2.9.2. 00
The VIP-CORE Fault option automatically allows a layer on one side of a

fault to flow into one or more different layers on the other side of a fault,
as illustrated in Figure 6-1, without additional "model layers".
Figure 6-1: Faulted Reservoir In Cross-Section
VIP-CORE models faulted reservoirs subject to the following restrictions

and guidelines:
1. The standard Fault option assumes that the faults occur at gridblock
faces and that the fault throw (depth difference along the fault) is
constant in the z direction. (That is, if a fault occurs at the interface
between blocks (I-1,J,1) and (I,J,1), then it also occurs, with the same
throw, at the interfaces between blocks (I-1,J,K) and (I,J,K) for all K,
NP1 ≤ K ≤ NP2. NP1 and NP2 default to 1 and NZ, respectively, and
may be altered using the LAYERS card.) By using the corner-point
option, it is possible to model a sloping fault by defining the blocks
along the fault to have sloping faces. In this case, the fault is still
"logically vertical" since blocks in any column of the grid remain
adjacent only to blocks in one of the four surrounding (North, South,
East, or West) columns.
R2003.4 - Landmark 6-445

Fault Data VIP-CORE REFERENCE MANUAL
2. Within a particular column of blocks, the displacement is uniform. The

amount of the shift can vary areally, and for sloping faults, the actual
shift along the fault face depends on the angle between the face and
the vertical for each block.
3. Permeabilities at gridblock centers must be specified. TX, TY, KXF, and

KYF are not valid input in the presence of faults.
4. When faults are modelled using a non-corner-point grid, VIP-CORE

sets DX=DXB, DY=DYB, and DZ=DZB.
5. When possible, specify uniform thicknesses for each layer.
6. Depths in non-corner-point grids must be correctly specified in the

DEPTH or MDEPTH array to reflect the presence of faults; i.e., the
simulator makes no automatic adjustments. Similarly, the entries in
the ZCORN array must be set to correctly give the depth of the
southeast corner of each block in each layer of grid points. The
simulator will automatically compute the ZCORNE, ZCORNW, and
ZCORSW arrays to reflect the faults.
7. In non-corner point grids fault connections will be correctly calculated

when gaps occur between layers (gridblock thicknesses less than
depth differences between gridblocks).
8. Specify the same fault displacement, fshift, as indicated by the depth

differences. Be sure to use the proper sign (negative or positive) for the
fault displacement variable found on the FX and FY cards.
9. When possible, use the "LAYER" option on the "DEPTH" card to

specify depths.
6.2 Start of Fault Data (FAULTS)

A FAULTS card must precede all of the fault description data.
FAULTS
(FNAME fname)
Definitions:

the group of blocks defined by the following FX, FY,
etc. data. A grid block will be assigned to a name
based on the last definition encountered. By default
no identifying name is assigned.

6-446 Landmark - R2003.4

VIP-CORE REFERENCE MANUAL Fault Data

NOTE: 1. FNAME identifiers can also be assigned using the OVER, and
VOVER keywords. A gridblock will be assigned based on the
last identifier encountered.
R2003.4 - Landmark 6-447

6.3 Standard Fault Data (FX, FR, FY, FTHETA, FXCORN,

FYCORN)
To describe a fault, the areal location, vertical displacement, and
modification of fault fluid flow transmissibility and fault heat conduction
(thermal) transmissibility (VIP-THERM only) must be specified. The FX
and FY cards may be used for this purpose for any grid. Additionally, the
FXCORN and FYCORN cards may be used for corner-point grids. The
layer connections are generated automatically. Omit the tmt data for VIP-
COMP or VIP-ENCORE.
FX
FR i j1 (-j2) fshift (*tm *tmt)
or
FY
FTHETA j i1 (-i2) fshift (*tm *tmt)
or
FXCORN i j1 (-j2)
fshift(j
1) fshift(j
1+1) ... fshift(j 2)
(tm(j1) tm(j1+1) ... tm(j2-1))
(tmt(j1) tmt(j1+1) ... tmt(j2-1))
or
FYCORN j i1 (-i2)
fshift(i1) fshift(i 1+1) ... fshift(i2)
(tm(i1) tm(i1+1) ... tm(i2-1))
(tmt(i1) tmt(i1+1) ... tmt(i2-1))
Definitions:
FX (FR), Alpha label indicating an x(r) direction fault is

FXCORN being described. An x(r) direction fault is defined
at the boundary between blocks (i-1,j,k) and
(i,j,k).
i Gridblock number describing an x(r) direction
fault. The fault is at the gridblock face between
blocks i-1 and i.
j1, j2 An FX/FR (FXCORN) fault begins at block
(point) J = j1 and extends through block (point) J
= j2. The "-" means up through and including j2.
There are no spaces between the sign and j2. If j2
is not entered, the default is j2 = j1 for FX/FR and
j2 = j1+1 for FXCORN.
FY(FTHETA), Alpha label indicating a y(theta) direction fault is
FYCORN being described. A y(theta) direction fault is
defined at the boundary between blocks (i,j-1,k)
and (i,j,k).
6-448 Landmark - R2003.4

j Gridblock number describing a y(theta) direction

fault. The fault is at the gridblock face between
blocks j-1 and j.
i1, i2 An FY/FTHETA (FYCORN) fault begins at block
(point) I = i1 and extends through block (point) I
= i2. The "-" means up through and including i2.
There are no spaces between the sign and i2. If i2
is not entered, the default is i2 = i1 for FY/
FTHETA and i2 = i1+1 for FYCORN.
fshift The amount of fault displacement, ft (m). A posi-
tive amount indicates a downward fault shift,
where I (J) is "deeper" than I-1 (J-1). (Should be
equal to the difference in depth or ZCORN values
entered.) For FXCORN (FYCORN) data, there
needs to be either one or j2-j1+1 (i2-i1+1) fshift
values. If only one is given, it is used along the
entire fault.
tm Multiplier of the flow transmissibility across the
fault. Applies to transmissibilities for all blocks
along the areal extent of the fault described on
the data card, over the entire vertical displace-
ment. For FX/FR (FY/FTHETA) data, there are
no spaces between the multiplier and tm, *tm.
The default is 1. For FXCORN (FYCORN) data,
the multiplier sign is not entered; the default is 1.
There needs to be either one or j2-j1 (i2-i1) tm val-
ues. If only one is given, it is used for all blocks
along the fault.
tmt Enter for VIP-THERM only. Multiplier of the
thermal transmissibility across the fault. Applies
to thermal tranmissibilities for all blocks along
the areal extent of the fault described on the data
card, over the entire vertical displacement. For
FX/FR (FY/FTHETA) data, there are no spaces
between the multiplier and tmt, *tmt. For FX/FR
(FY/FTHETA) data, if any multiplier (tm or tmt)
is specified, then both tm and tmt must be speci-
fied. The default is 1. For FXCORN (FYCORN)
data, the multiplier sign is not entered; the
default is 1. There needs to be either one or j2-j1
(i2-i1) tmt values. If only one is given, it is used
for all blocks along the fault. For FXCORN
(FYCORN) data, tmt is not required if tm is speci-
fied, but tm must be specified if tmt is to be spec-
ified.
R2003.4 - Landmark 6-449

Example: X (I) 00
/
/
/
/
//////// /
/
/////
/
/
/
FAULT
FX 3 1 -2 -20.1
FY 3 3 -4 20.1
FX 5 3 -15.5
FY 4 5 10. *1.5
FX 6 4 -5 -5 *2 00
or 00
FAULT
FXCORN 3 1 -3
-20.1
FYCORN 3 3 -5
20.1
FXCORN 5 3 -4
-15.5
FYCORN 4 5 -6
10 00
1.5
FXCORN 6 4 -6
-5
2 00
6-450 Landmark - R2003.4

6.4 Specification of Layers to Which a Shift Applies (LAYERS)

Fault cards FX, FY, FR and FTHETA specify a fault shift, with the shift
applying to all the layers. The LAYERS card can be specified to limit the
layers with the shift to NP1 and NP2, inclusive. This option can be used to
model some complex reservoir but cannot be used with FXCORN and
FYCORN cards.
LAYERS NP1 NP2
Definitions: 00
NP1 The first layer to which the shift applies. Standard

connections will be maintained between blocks in
layers 1 through NP1-1.
NP2 The last layer to which the shift applies. Standard

connections will be maintained between blocks in
layers NP2+1 through NZ.
Example 1: 00
FAULTS ! utility card

:
FAULTS ! after array data
FX 4 1 -1 20.0 *1.3
LAYERS 3 5
FX 7 1 -1 -20.0 *1.5
LAYERS 3 5
OVER TZ ! at the end of input
4 6 1 1 3 3 *0.0 00
Example 2: 00
FAULTS ! utility card

:
PRINT FAULTS ALL ! print fault connectivities and trans
:
FAULTS ! after array data
FX 6 1 -1 158.0
LAYERS 1 3
FX 8 1 -1 89.0
LAYERS 4 700
OVER TZ ! at the end of input

1 10 1 1 4 4 *0.0 00
R2003.4 - Landmark 6-451

6.5 Specification of a Conductive Fault (LEAKY) (Not available

in VIP-THERM)
Fault cards FX, FY, FR, FTHETA, FXCORN, and FYCORN specify a fault
shift. The LEAKY card specifies that the fault described by the preceding
fault card is a conductive fault. This card must immediately follow the
fault card and the LAYERS card (if applicable).
LEAKY ileaky
Definitions:
LEAKY Keyword indicating that the fault described in the

preceding fault card and the LAYERS card is a
conductive fault.
ileaky The input conductive fault number. Any number

of interconnecting faults may be assigned to the
same conductive fault. The user must ensure that
the faults assigned to the same conductive fault
are interconnected. The program does not check
the interconnectivity.
Example:
C Conductive fault #1
FX 3 1 -2 -20
LEAKY 1
FY 3 3 -4 20.
LEAKY 1
FX 5 3 -15.
LEAKY 1
FY 4 5 10.
LEAKY 1
C Non-Conductive fault
FX 10 2 -5 -10.
C Conductive-fault #2
FY 8 3 -8 10.
LAYERS
LEAKY 2
NOTE: For faults identified as conductive (leaky), fault connections will

not be generated. These faults are assumed to be infinitely
conductive with negligible storage.
6-452 Landmark - R2003.4

6.6 Arbitrary Gridblock Connections
6.6.1 Non-Corner-Point Connections (FLTXC, FLTRC, FLTYC, FLTTC)

When using the standard Fault option it is possible to specify connections
between gridblocks by using the FLTXC (FLTRC) card for x(r) direction
faults and the FLTYC (FLTTC) card for y(theta) direction faults. These
cards may also be used to modify the transmissibility between two blocks
connected as a result of a fault specified with an FX (FR) or FY (FTHETA)
card. The tt values are specified for VIP-THERM only. Do not enter for
VIP-COMP or VIP-ENCORE.
FLTXC ( TRNS0 )
FLTRC ( TRNS0 )
i j k1 k2 t tt
(repeat as necessary)
or
FLTYC ( TRNS0 )
FLTTC ( TRNS0 )
i j k1 k2 t tt
Definitions:
FLTXC (FLTRC) Alpha label indicating an x(r) direction fault is

being described.
FLTYC (FLTTC) Alpha label indicating a y(theta) direction fault is
being described.
TRNS0 Alpha label indicating that the TX and TXT0
arrays (for FLTXC/FLTRC) or the TY and TYT0
arrays (for FLTYC/FLTTC) are to be zeroed for
all gridblocks in the column defined by (i,j).
i The x(r) direction index. For an x(r) direction
fault, the fault is at the gridblock face between
blocks i-1 and i. For y(theta) direction faults, the
x(r) direction index for both blocks is i.
j The y(theta) direction index. For a y(theta) direc-
tion fault, the fault is at the gridblock face
between blocks j-1 and j. For x(r) direction faults,
the y(theta) direction index for both blocks is j.
k1 The z direction index of the gridblock on the
"right" of the fault. The indices of this gridblock
are (i, j, k1).
R2003.4 - Landmark 6-453

k2 The z direction index of the gridblock on the

"left" of the fault. The indices of this gridblock are
(i-1, j, k2) for x(r) direction faults and (i, j-1, k2) for
y(theta) direction faults.
t Transmissibility for the connection across the
fault. This replaces any other transmissibility
defined for the pair of blocks. Units for t are STB-
CP/PSI-DAT (STCM-CP/KPA-DAY).
tt Thermal transmissibility for the connection
across the fault. Enter only in VIP-THERM. This
replaces any other thermal transmissibility
defined for the pair of blocks. Units for tt are
BTU/DAY- ˚F (W/˚C).
NOTE: 1. If the same fault connection is described more than once, the last
transmissibility value specified will be used.
2. When this option is activated, a -1 is printed in the Fault Arrays

to indicate the gridblock has a fault connection defined with this
option. Also, a -1 is printed as the value for shared thickness in
the Fault Tables.
6.6.2 Arbitrary Gridblock Connections (FTRANS)

It is also possible to specify arbitrary connections between gridblocks by
using the FTRANS card. The data include the specifications of the two
blocks and the value to be used for the interblock transmissibility and a
value for the thermal transmissibility in VIP-THERM. FTRANS cards may
also be used to modify the transmissibility between two blocks connected
(1) as a result of a fault specified with an FX, FXCORN, FY, or FYCORN
card, (2) as a result of automatic fault generation due to data read for the
ZCORNE, ZCORNW, ZCORSW, and CORP arrays, or (3) as a result of the
automatic detection of pinchouts. The simulator will not permit FTRANS
cards to define or modify the connection between two blocks that would
ordinarily be connected in a standard unfaulted grid; the OVER and
VOVER cards can be used for this purpose. Do not enter tt values for VIP-
COMP or VIP-ENCORE.
FTRANS
( FNAME fname )
i1 j1 k1 i2 j2 k2 t (tt)
Definitions:
6-454 Landmark - R2003.4


the group of connections defined by the following
i1 j1 k1 etc. data. A connection will be assigned to
a name based on the last definition encountered. By
default no identifying name is assigned.

i1 X(R) direction index for the block on the "left"

of the fault.
j1 Y(Theta) direction index for the block on the
"left" of the fault.
k1 Z direction index for the block on the "left" of
the fault.
i2 X(R) direction index for the block on the "right"
of the fault.
j2 Y(Theta) direction index for the block on the
"right" of the fault.
k2 Z direction index for the block on the "right" of
the fault.
defined for the pair of blocks. Units for t are the
same as those for transmissibilities read for the
standard transmissibility arrays.
tt Thermal transmissibility for the connection
across the fault. Enter only in VIP-THERM.
This replaces any other thermal transmissibility
defined for the pair of blocks. Units for tt are
BTU/DAY- ˚F (W/˚C).
6.7 Arbitrary Gridblock Connections (VIP-DUAL)
6.7.1 Non-Corner-Point Connections for Fracture Blocks (FLTXCF,

FLTRCF, FLTYCF, FLTTCF)
When using the standard Fault option it is possible to specify connections
between fracture gridblocks by using the FLTXCF (FLTRCF) card for x(r)
direction faults and the FLTYCF (FLTTCF) card for y(theta) direction
faults. These cards may also be used to modify the transmissibility
R2003.4 - Landmark 6-455

between two fracture blocks connected as a result of a fault specified with

an FX (FR) or FY (FTHETA) card.
FLTXCF ( TRNS0 )
FLTRCF ( TRNS0 )
i j k1 k2 t
or
FLTYCF ( TRNS0 )
FLTTCF ( TRNS0 )
i j k1 k2 t
Definitions: 00
FLTXCF Alpha label indicating an x(r) direction fault is

(FLTRCF) being described.
FLTYCF Alpha label indicating a y(theta) direction fault
(FLTTCF) is being described.
TRNS0 Alpha label indicating that the TXF array (for
FLTXCF/FLTRCF) or the TYF array (for
FLTYCF/FLTTCF) is to be zeroed for all
gridblocks in the column defined by (i,j).
i The x(r) direction index. For an x(r) direction
fault, the fault is at the fracture gridblock face
between blocks i-1 and i. For y(theta) direction
faults, the x(r) direction index for both fracture
blocks is i.
j The y(theta) direction index. For a y(theta)
direction fault, the fault is at the fracture
gridblock face between blocks j-1 and j. For x(r)
direction faults, the y(theta) direction index for
both fracture blocks is j.
k1 The z direction index of the fracture gridblock
on the "right" of the fault. The indices of this
gridblock are (i, j, k1).
k2 The z direction index of the fracture gridblock
on the "left" of the fault. The indices of this
gridblock are (i-1, j, k2) for x(r) direction faults
and (i, j-1, k2) for y(theta) direction faults.
6-456 Landmark - R2003.4


defined for the pair of fracture blocks. Units for
t are the same as those for transmissibilities
read for the standard transmissibility arrays.
NOTE: 1. If the same fault connection is described more than once, the
last transmissibility value specified will be used.
2. When this option is activated, a -1 is printed in the Fault Arrays

to indicate the fracture gridblock has a fault connection defined
with this option. Also, a -1 is printed as the value for shared
thickness in the Fault Tables.
6.7.2 Arbitrary Gridblock Connections for Fracture Blocks in VIP-DUAL

(FTRANF)
It is also possible to specify arbitrary connections between fracture
gridblocks by using the FTRANF card. The data include the specifications
of the two blocks and the value to be used for the interblock
transmissibility. FTRANF cards may also be used to modify the

transmissibility between two blocks connected (1) as a result of a fault
specified with an FX, FXCORN, FY, or FYCORN card, (2) as a result of
automatic fault generation due to data read for the ZCORNE, ZCORNW,
and ZCORSW arrays, or (3) as a result of the automatic detection of
pinchouts. The simulator will not permit FTRANF cards to define or
modify the connection between two blocks that would ordinarily be
connected in a standard unfaulted grid; the OVER and VOVER cards can
be used for this purpose.
FTRANF
( FNAME fname )
i1 j1 k1 i2 j2 k2 t
Definitions: 00

the group of connections defined by the following
i1 j1 k1 etc. data. A connection will be assigned to
a name based on the last definition encountered. By
default no identifying name is assigned.

R2003.4 - Landmark 6-457


i1 X(R) direction index for the fracture block on the

"left" of the fault.
j1 Y(Theta) direction index for the fracture block on

the "left" of the fault.
k1 Z direction index for the fracture block on the "left"

of the fault.
i2 X(R) direction index for the fracture block on the

j2 Y(Theta) direction index for the fracture block on

the "right" of the fault.
k2 Z direction index for the fracture block on the

t Transmissibility for the connection across the fault.

This replaces any other transmissibility defined for
the pair of fracture blocks. Units for t are the same
as those for transmissibilities read for the standard
fracture transmissibility arrays.
6.8 Automatic Fault Generation

The simulator will automatically generate faults if the corner-point option
is in use, if appropriate data is specified for the ZCORNE, ZCORNW, and
ZCORSW arrays. In this case the FX, FY, FXCORN, and FYCORN cards
will not cause the creation of new fault connections; they only serve to
associate transmissibility multipliers with faults defined implicitly from
the corner-point depth data. The FTRANS cards may still be used as
described in Section 6.6.
6.9 Automatic Pinchout Detection

For corner-point grids (defined using XCORN, YCORN, ... etc. or with the
LGR option) the simulator will automatically detect the presence of
pinched-out layers and generate non-zero transmissibility between the
layers above and below the pinched-out layer as appropriate. A gridblock
will be considered pinched-out if it has thickness less than the tolerance
specified on the PINCHOUT card. Multiple pinched-out layers are
permitted and will be handled appropriately. The PINCHOUT card (see
Section 2.2.9.1) may be used to turn on both the fault and corner-point
options in place of the FAULTS and CORNER cards in utility data.
6-458 Landmark - R2003.4

Chapter
7
00000Overread Options
7.1 Transmissibility / Pore Volume Modification Options

These cards must appear after all grid data input but before any REGION
data cards.
The transmissibility/pore volume arrays may be modified at

initialization. This is accomplished with OVER/VOVER cards. Any
number of OVER/VOVER cards can be used. The modification described
by each card is performed at the time the card is read; hence, these
changes are order-dependent. When using the corner point option with
automatically generated fault connections, transmissibility overreads can
be processed using the MULT keyword. As well as modifying the
interblock transmissibilities, these cards also modify the transmissibilities
across faults between blocks with modified transmissibilities, whereas the
OVER/VOVER cards will only modify normal interblock connection
transmissibilities. Care should be taken not to specify, for example, both
OVER TX cards and MULT cards with overlapping ranges as this will
result in normal interblock transmissibilities being modified twice. The
pore volume OVER/VOVER are applied after the TOLPV checks.
R2003.4 - Landmark 7-459

Overread Options VIP-CORE REFERENCE MANUAL
7.2 Override Modification (OVER)

These cards are order-dependent.
The OVER card is used to apply a constant arithmetic operation to a

portion of the grid system. Only one title card is required, but the data
cards may be repeated as necessary. The parentheses indicate optional
values. They are not part of the data. Array names are shown in
parentheses since any combination of the arrays can appear on the title
card. Do not use parentheses during input. The array names can appear in
any order. The order of #v’s on the data cards corresponds to the order of
the array names. Although several array names can appear on one OVER
card, it is generally less confusing to have "sets" of OVER cards, with each
set modifying only one array.
OVER array (array) (array) (array)

(FNAME fname)
i1 i2 j1 j2 k1 k2 #v (#v) (#v) (#v)
Arrays
TX TY TZ TR TTHETA TXYL TXYR PV
TXT0 TYT0 TZT0 TRT0 TTHT0 VB (VIP-THERM only)
Definitions:
OVER Indicates array changes are to be made using the

OVER option.
array One or more of the following array names.
PV The pore volume array is to be

altered.
TX (TR) The x(r) direction

transmissibilities are to be
altered.
TY (TTHETA) The y(theta) direction

altered.
TZ The z direction transmissibilities

are to be altered.
TXYL The (-x, -y) direction

altered.
7-460 Landmark - R2003.4

VIP-CORE REFERENCE MANUAL Overread Options
TXYR The (+x, -y) direction

altered.
In VIP-THERM only, one of the follow array names.
VB Total block volume is to be

altered. A value of zero indicates
an “inactive” cell through which
no flow of fluids or heat will
occur. A value of zero also causes
the pore volume to be set to zero.
The value of VB is not otherwise
used.
TXT0 (TRT0) The x(r)-direction thermal

transmissibilities are to altered.
TYT0 (TTHT0) The y(theta)-direction thermal

altered.
TZT0 The z-direction thermal

altered.

the array specified on the OVER card. The
assignment is only done if the array is a
transmissibility array. A grid block will be assigned
to a name based on the last definition encountered.
By default no identifying name is assigned.


(x,y,z) or (r,θ,z) grid. Modifications are applied to array elements lying
in the portion of the grid defined by:
i1 ≤ I ≤ i2
j1 ≤ J ≤ j2
k1 ≤ K ≤ k2
R2003.4 - Landmark 7-461


used:
+ add
- subtract
/ divide
* multiply
= equal
LE values larger than v will be set equal to v
GE values smaller than v will be set equal to v

value, #v. except when # is LE or GE.

the corresponding array by using the specified
operation.
NOTE: 1. The TXYL and TXYR arrays will be used only if the nine-point
option has been invoked (Section 2.2.6.5).
2. FNAME identifiers can also be assigned using other OVER and

VOVER keywords. A gridblock will be assigned based on the last
identifier encountered.
Examples:
OVER TZ
1 37 1 29 1 3 *0.
Example with multiple arrays
OVER TX TY TZ
12 56 18 *.1 *.1 *.05
7-462 Landmark - R2003.4

7.3 Override Modification for VIP-DUAL (OVER)

The following are additional keywords when the DUAL option is
invoked. Their use and effect is analogous to the normal use of the OVER
card.
OVER array (array) (array)

(FNAME fname)
i1 i2 j1 j2 k1 k2 #v (#v) (#v)
Arrays
TEX TXF TYF TZF TRF TTHETF TXYLF TXYRF

PVF TDIFFG TDIFFO
Definitions:
OVER Indicates array changes are to be made using the

OVER option.
array One or more of the following array names.
PVF The fracture pore volume array is

to be altered.
TXF (TRF) The x(r) direction fracture

altered.
TYF (TTHETF) The y(theta) direction fracture

altered.
TZF The z direction fracture

altered.
TXYLF The (-x,-y) direction fracture

altered.
TXYRF The (+x,-y) direction fracture

altered.
TEX The exchange transmissibilities

are to be altered.
TDIFFG The gas diffusion mass transfer

coefficients are to be altered.
R2003.4 - Landmark 7-463

TDIFFO The oil diffusion mass transfer

NOTE: 1. The TXYLF and TXYRF arrays will be used only if the nine-
point option has been invoked (Section 2.2.6.5).
2. The TDIFFG and TDIFFO arrays will be used only if the

diffusion option has been invoked (Section 2.2.13.3).

7.4 Value Override (VOVER)

The VOVER card modifies the specified array data with an individual
value for each changed gridblock. A minimum of 2 cards must follow the
VOVER card. The first contains the locations describing the gridblocks to
be changed. The second card contains the altered values for those
gridblocks. A new VOVER card and its corresponding data cards are read
for each different portion of the grid system being altered.
VOVER array
(FNAME fname)
i1 i2 j1 j2 k1 k2 (op)
values as necessary
Arrays
TX TY TZ TR TTHETA TXYL TXYR PV
TXT0 TYT0 TZT0 TRT0 TTHT0 VB (VIP-THERM only)
Definitions:
VOVER Indicates changes are to be made to the specified

array by replacing selected values.
array One of the following array names:
PV The pore volume array is to be

altered.
TX(TR) The x(r) direction

altered.
7-464 Landmark - R2003.4

TY (TTHETA) The y(theta) direction

altered.
TZ The z direction transmissibilities

are to be altered.
TXYL The (-x,-y) direction

altered.
TXYR The (+x,-y) direction

altered.
VB Total block volume is to be

altered. A value of zero indicates
an “inactive” cell through which
no flow of fluids or heat will
occur. A value of zero also causes
the pore volume to be set to zero.
The value of VB is not otherwise
used.
TXT0 (TRT0) The x(r)-direction thermal

transmissibilities are to altered.
TYT0 (TTHT0) The y(theta)-direction thermal

altered.
TZT0 The z-direction thermal

altered.

the array specified on the VOVER card. The
assignment is only done if the array is a
transmissibility array. A grid block will be assigned
to a name based on the last definition encountered.
By default no identifying name is assigned.


(x,y,z) or (r,θ,z) grid. Modifications will be applied to array elements
R2003.4 - Landmark 7-465

lying in the portion of the grid defined by:
i1 ≤ I ≤ i2
j1 ≤ J ≤ j2
k1 ≤ K ≤ k2
op is an optional keyword that defines the operation to apply to the

array. Any of the following keywords may be used:
ADD add
SUB subtract
DIV divide
MULT multiply
EQ equal (this is the default).
Enough values must be read to replace all array elements in the

designated portion of the grid. The number of values required is:
(k2 - k1 + 1) * (j2 - j1 + 1) * (i2 - i1 + 1).
The order of replacement is by x(r)-direction rows. All rows for the

first xy (rθ) plane are entered in order of increasing J index, followed
by the remaining planes in order of increasing K index.
NOTE: 1. Only one array can be changed with each VOVER card.
2. The TXYL and TXYR arrays will be used only if the nine-

Example:
VOVER TX
57 67 1 7 2 2 EQ
77*0.
7-466 Landmark - R2003.4

7.5 Value Override for VIP-DUAL (VOVER)

The following are additional keywords available when the DUAL option
is invoked. Their use and effect is analogous to the normal use of the
VOVER card.
VOVER array
(FNAME fname)
i1 i2 j1 j2 k1 k2 (op)
values as necessary
Arrays
TEX TXF TYF TZF TRF TTHETF TXYLF TXYRF
Definitions:
VOVER Indicates array changes are to be made using the

VOVER option.
array One of the following array names:
PVF The fracture pore volume array is

to be altered.
TXF (TRF) The x(r) direction fracture

altered.
TYF (TTHETF) The y(theta) direction fracture

altered.
TZF The z direction fracture

altered.
TXYLF The (-x,-y) direction fracture

altered.
TXYRF The (+x,-y) direction fracture

altered.
TEX The exchange transmissibilities

are to be altered.
TDIFFG The gas diffusion mass transfer

R2003.4 - Landmark 7-467

TDIFFO The oil diffusion mass transfer

NOTE: 1. Only one array can be changed with each VOVER card.
2. The TXYLF and TXYRF arrays will be used only if the nine-
3. The TDIFFG and TDIFFO arrays will be used only if the

diffusion option has been invoked (Section 2.2.13.3).

7-468 Landmark - R2003.4

Chapter
8
00000Grid Coarsening1
8.1 Grid Coarsening (COARSEN)

Grids can be coarsened by combining adjacent cells to form a coarse cell.
Flow between coarse cells is through nonstandard transmissibility
connections that are computed automatically. Well locations in VIP-EXEC
are specified with respect to the original fine grid dimensions.
COARSEN (gridname)
i1 i2 j1 j2 k1 k2 (nxc nyc nzc)
(X nx1 nx2 nx3 .........nxnxc )
(Y ny1 ny2 ny3 .........nynyc )
(Z nz1 nz2 nz3 .........nznzc )
( i1 i2 j1 j2 k1 k2 (nxc nyc nzc) )
.
.
.
( COARSEN (gridname) )
.
.
.
Definitions:
COARSEN Keyword for introducing the grid coarsening data.

These data need to follow the OVER/VOVER data
and precede the output region names (REGION)
data when such data are available.
gridname Name of grid being coarsened. Default is the root

grid.
i1,i2, j1,j2, k1, k2 Indices defining a portion of the grid to be

coarsened. This line may be repeated to coarsen
multiple portions of the grid.
nxc,nyc,nzc Number of coarse blocks formed in each coordinate

direction, from the portion of the grid defined by
i1,i2,j1,j2,k1,k2. Default is 1,1,1 i.e. one coarse cell is
created.
1. Not available in VIP-THERM.
R2003.4 - Landmark 8-469

Grid Coarsening VIP-CORE REFERENCE MANUAL
X,Y,Z Optional keywords that allow control of the

grouping of the fine grid blocks into coarse grid
blocks.
nx1,nx2,... Number of fine grid blocks in each corresponding

coarse grid block along the x direction.
ny1,ny2,... Number of fine grid blocks in each corresponding

coarse grid block along the y direction.
nz1,nz2,... Number of fine grid blocks in each corresponding

coarse grid block along the z direction.
NOTE: 1) When X,Y,Z data are not specified, then nxc,nyc,nzc need to be
integer fractions of (i2-i1+1),(j2-j1+1),(k2-k1+1) respectively.
2) When X,Y,Z data are specified,
nxc
∑ nxi = i2 – i1 + 1
i=1
nyc
∑ nyi = j2 – j1 + 1
i=1
nzc
∑ nzi = k2 – k1 + 1
i=1
3) Coarsening at parent-child LGR interfaces is not allowed.
Example:
COARSEN
2 3 1 1 1 3 1 1 3
4 5 1 2 1 3 1 1 3
1 7 6 10 1 3 2 2 3
X 3 4
Y 3 2
11 20 11 20 1 3 5 5 3
8-470 Landmark - R2003.4

VIP-CORE REFERENCE MANUAL Grid Coarsening
COARSEN REFINE1
2 3 1 1 1 3 1 1 3
4 5 1 2 1 3 1 1 3
1 7 6 10 1 3 2 2 3
X 3 4
Y 3 2
11 20 11 20 1 3 5 5 3
R2003.4 - Landmark 8-471

Grid Coarsening VIP-CORE REFERENCE MANUAL
8-472 Landmark - R2003.4

Chapter
9
00000Region Data
Any output region data must follow all grid and fault data and any
OVER/VOVER cards.
9.1 Assign Output Region Names (REGION)

REGION cards permit the user to assign region names to output regions
defined by the IREGION (and/or IREGF) array (Section 5.15). One
REGION card is input for each region name assignment.
REGION ireg1 regnam1

. . .
. . .
. . .
REGION iregn regnamn
Definitions:
iregi Region number defined in the IREGION (and/or

IREGF) data.
regnami Region name for region number iregi. The first

character in the name must be alphanumeric. Only
the first six (6) characters of the name are used.
Default is blanks.
All REGION cards must precede any REGSEP or REGDTM da1ta.
Example:
REGION 1 SAG
REGION 2 SHUB
REGION 3 SAD
REGION 4 WESAG
REGION 5 WESHUB
REGION 6 WESAD
R2003.4 - Landmark 9-473

Region Data VIP-CORE REFERENCE MANUAL
9.2 Assign Output Regions Separator Batteries (REGSEP)

The REGSEP card is used to assign separator batteries to output regions
for surface volume calculations. If more than one PVT type is specified,
and/or more than one separator battery is input, then a REGSEP card is
required. Only one REGSEP card is allowed.
REGSEP ibat1 . . . ibatnreg
Definitions:
ibati Separator battery number for output region number

i. Alternatives include the battery number of a
separator input in the separator data (Section 4.9), a
value of -npvt which accesses a default separator,
and a value of 0:
 nbat ( input battery )


ibat i =  – npvt ( default separator )

 0
A value of 0 will result in the default value -1 being

used for surface volume calculations in VIP-CORE,
and no surface volumes will be reported for that
region in the region report in the simulation
modules.
nreg Maximum output region number defined in the

IREGION/XREG data.
NOTE: 1. The REGSEP card must follow the REGION cards and must
precede any REGDTM data.
2. Continuation cards may be used to specify all the battery

numbers. Do not specify the REGSEP keyword on these
continuation cards.
3. If a REGSEP card is not entered, the entire REGSEP array is

initialized to 1 if separator battery 1 is defined or to -1 (default
separator) if separator battery 1 is not defined.
9-474 Landmark - R2003.4

VIP-CORE REFERENCE MANUAL Region Data
9.3 Specify Datum Depth Each Output Region (REGDTM)

The REGDTM card permits the user to specify the datum depth to be used
for each output region in the calculation of the datum pressure in the
region summary. Only one REGDTM card is allowed.
dtm 1 dt m nreg
REGDTM . . .
X X
Definitions:
dtmi Datum depth for output region i to use in the

calculation of datum pressure, ft (m). The default is
the datum depth specified for equilibrium region 1
(Section 4.2).
X Alpha label indicating the default value of the

datum depth specified for equilibrium region 1
(Section 4.2) will be used for the output region
whose place is occupied by the label.
nreg Maximum output region number defined in the

IREGION/XREG data.
NOTE: 1. The REGDTM card must follow any REGION or REGSEP

cards.
2. Continuation cards may be used to specify all the datum depth

values. Do not specify the REGDTM keyword on these
continuation cards.
Example:
A problem with four output regions will use the default datum for
regions 2 and 3.
REGDTM 5673.3 X X 5684.6
R2003.4 - Landmark 9-475

Region Data VIP-CORE REFERENCE MANUAL
9-476 Landmark - R2003.4

Chapter
10
00000Grid Boundary Flux 1
10.1 Introduction
In VIP, boundary flux is handled by including source/sink terms in the
interblock flow equations for edge blocks. The outer boundaries of the
grid are normally treated as sealing barriers to flow. Two specific
boundary flux cases are considered: 1) use of an aquifer influence function
to represent a surrounding body of water, and 2) inclusion of flux from a
course grid simulation run as the boundary conditions for a fine grid
model.
10.2 Analytical Aquifer

In the descriptions that follow, reference is made to "aquifers" that supply
fluid to the grid. The model calculates fluid influx by the Carter-Tracy
method or the Fetkovich method. A comprehensive discussion of aquifer
treatments is given in Frick and Taylor (Reference 8).
The influx option is subject to the following restrictions and guidelines:
1. A gridblock can receive fluid from only one influx region.
2. Within the data for an influx region, a gridblock can be referenced

more than once. The data assigned to each gridblock is cumulative;
therefore, the influx data are order dependent.
3. Influx data should not refer to zero pore volume blocks. Such a
reference is a fatal error for data entry when using the VALUE option.
If the WINDOW option is used in the influx description, the zero pore
volume blocks are ignored, depending on the sinf option used.
4. To use the XCALC, YCALC, and ZCALC options, the DX, DY, DZ,
XCORN...or CORP, KX, KY, and KZ arrays must be entered in the
array data (Section 4.2).
1. Not available in VIP-THERM.
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-477

Grid Boundary Flux VIP-CORE REFERENCE MANUAL
10.2.1 Carter-Tracy Aquifer Influx (INFLUX)

The Carter-Tracy (Reference 9) method provides good approximations to
the Van Everdingen and Hurst (Reference 17) analytical solutions for
influx. The title and data cards must appear in the order shown.
INFLUX ninf (ncttrw)

WTR CT
NBINF BINF TC (LINFAC) (PAQI DAQI)
nbinf binf tc (linfac) (paqi daqi)
IINF JINF KINF SINF (ALL)
(GRID name)
iinf jinf kinf sinf
(repeat as required)
(VALUE)
(WINDOW
i1 i2 j1 j2 k1 k2 sinf)
(ENDAQ)
 TD PD 
 
 td pd 
Definitions:
INFLUX Indicates that the data being read are influx data.
ninf The identifying number of the "aquifer" being

described.
ncttrw Optional index to the tracked water type to be used

for this influx source.
WTR Indicates water is the fluid entering the grid.
CT Carter-Tracy Method is to be used.
The titles on the third card must appear as shown.
nbinf The total number of gridblocks receiving fluid from

this "aquifer". The value of nbinf need only be
estimated if an "ENDAQ" is included in the
gridblock cards.
binf The parameter B1 as defined by Carter and Tracy,

rb/psia (cm/kPa).
2
2π φ c t hr e s
binf = ------------------------------
α1
10-478 Landmark - R2003.4

VIP-CORE REFERENCE MANUAL Grid Boundary Flux
where
φ = Average porosity of the "aquifer"

expressed as a fraction.
ct = Total compressibility of the fluid and

rock in the "aquifer", 1/psia (1/kPa).
h = Net thickness of the "aquifer", ft (m).
re = Radius to the perimeter of the

reservoir, ft (m). (The boundary
between the reservoir and the
"aquifer".)
s = Fraction of a circle that the boundary

aquifer completes.
α1 = 5.6146 for conventional units. 1.0 for

metric units.
tc The value used to convert time to dimensionless

time, 1/day.
α2 k
tc = --------------------2-
ct φ µ d
where
α2 = 0.006328 for conventional units;

8.527x10-5 for metric units.
k = Average permeability of the

"aquifer", md (md).
µ = Average viscosity of the fluid

contained in the "aquifer", cp (cp).
d = re as described above for radial

"aquifers". Length of the "aquifer", ft
(m) for linear "aquifers".
linfac A linear multiplier applied to the water influx. This

can be used to adjust the strength of the aquifer
without the need to change the parameters. Default
is 1.
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-479

paqi Initial aquifier pressure, psia (kPa), at the reference

depth, daqi.
daqi Reference depth, ft (m), for the initial aquifer

pressure, paqi.
The titles on the fifth card must appear as shown. The optional fifth
keyword controls possible connections to non-aquifer gridblocks
ALL Connect all specified blocks to aquifer. Default

skips blocks that are above the water-oil contact.
The number of data cards following the fifth card must equal nbinf,
unless an "ENDAQ" card is given.
iinf x(r) direction index of a gridblock attached to this

"aquifer".
jinf y(theta) direction index of a gridblock attached to

this "aquifer".
kinf z direction index of a gridblock attached to this

"aquifer".
sinf Scale factor used to allocate the total "aquifer"

influx/efflux among the gridblocks attached to the
"aquifer". These are normalized within the
program, so values have only relative meaning.
They will usually reflect the cross-sectional area
times the permeability of the gridblock faces
attached to the "aquifer".
sinf may be any of the following: 00
=n The scale factor is set to "n".

+n The scale factor is increased by "n".
n The scale factor is increased by "n".
-n The scale factor is decreased by "n".
*n The scale factor is multiplied by "n".
/n The scale factor is divided by "n". 00
XCALC The scale factor is calculated in the

x(r) direction. 00
YCALC The scale factor is calculated in the

y(theta) direction. 00
ZCALC The scale factor is calculated in the z

direction. 00
For the WINDOW option, there are six additional

options which enable the user to easily assign an
10-480 Landmark - R2003.4

aquifer to an irregular grid boundary. Starting on

the specified face of the window and moving
inward, the aquifer is attached to the first active
gridblock encountered within the window. The
options are:
I- Aquifer connects to the i- faces

I+ Aquifer connects to the i+ faces
J- Aquifer connects to the j- faces
J+ Aquifer connects to the j+ faces
K- Aquifer connects to the k- faces
K+ Aquifer connects to the k+ faces
The following keywords may also appear in these Data Cards: 00
GRID Data applies to a particular grid. 00
name Name of the grid. Default is ROOT. 00
VALUE Puts the reading of these Data Cards into VALUE

mode, ends WINDOW mode. Reads data cards of
the form iinf, jinf, kinf, and sinf.
WINDOW Puts the reading of these Data Cards into WINDOW

mode, ends VALUE mode.
In this mode, data must be entered as follows: 00
i1 i2 j1 j2 k1 k2 sinf 00
The range specified is the same as that given by the

MOD card (Section 1.5.4.1).
ENDAQ Indicates the end of the influx data cards.

(optional) 00
NOTE: If TD, PD data are not supplied, an infinite radial aquifer will be
assumed, and the corresponding tables for an infinite radial aquifer
will be used by default.
The titles, TD and PD, on this card must appear as shown. 00
The first data card must have both td and pd equal to zero. Enough
values should be entered to extend to dimensionless times beyond the
time to be simulated or until a linear extrapolation of the last two
values will provide satisfactory results. 00
td Dimensionless time.
(td = tc * t)
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-481

pd Dimensionless pressure. See Reference 9 for a

discussion and tables of values.
Examples: 00
A 10x15x6 grid system is modeled with a bottom water aquifer. 00
For the bottom water aquifer: 00
INFLUX 1
WTR CT
...
IINF JINF KINF SINF
WINDOW
1 10 1 15 6 6 ZCALC 00
To modify a few blocks: 00
9 10 14 15 6 6 *2
10 10 15 15 6 6 *2 00
The modifications to block (10,15,6) result in a cumulative multiplier of 4.
To set some values to zero: 00
1 2 1 2 6 6 =0
VALUE
1 3 6 =0
3 1 6 =0
ENDAQ
TD PD
... 00
To attach another aquifer to the right flank of the reservoir: 00
INFLUX 2
WTR CT
... 00
IINF JINF KINF SINF

WINDOW
5 10 1 15 1 5 I+ 00
The final VIP-CORE input data stream is: 00
INFLUX 1
WTR CT
NBINF BINF TC
(enter values) 00
IINF JINF KINF SINF

WINDOW
10-482 Landmark - R2003.4

1 10 01 15 6 6 ZCALC
9 10 14 15 6 6 *2
10 10 15 15 6 6 *2
1 02 01 02 6 6 =0
VALUE
1 3 6 =0
3 01 6 =0
ENDAQ
TD PD
(enter td pd values) 00
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-483

10.2.2 Fetkovich Aquifer Influx (INFLUX)

The Fetkovich method (Reference 32) utilizes the pseudo steady-state
aquifer productivity index and an aquifer material balance to represent
the system. The title and data cards must appear in the order shown.

WTR FET
NBINF PI ]AWIP [ (PAQI DAQI)
VWAQ CT
nbinf pi ]awip
vwaq ct
[ (paqi daqi)
IINF JINF KINF SINF (ALL)

(GRID name)
iinf jinf kinf sinf
(VALUE)
(WINDOW
i1 i2 j1 j2 k1 k2 sinf)
(ENDAQ)
Definitions:
INFLUX Indicates that the data being read are influx data.
ninf The identifying number of the "aquifer" being

described.
ncttrw Optional index to the tracked water type to be used

for this influx source.
WTR Indicates water is the fluid entering the grid.
FET Fetkovich method is to be used.
The titles on the third card must appear as shown.
nbinf The total number of gridblocks receiving fluid from

this "aquifer". The value of nbinf need only be
estimated if an "ENDAQ" is included in the
gridblock cards.
10-484 Landmark - R2003.4

pi Aquifer productivity index, rb/day/psi(m3/day/

kPa). (Total influx rate per day per unit pressure
difference.)
7.08 ⋅ k ⋅ h
pi = -------------------------------------, for radial flow
re
µ  ln  ---- – α 3
  r o 
α4 ⋅ k ⋅ b ⋅ h
pi = ----------------------------, for linear flow
µd
where
k = Average permeability of the

"aquifer", md (md).
h = Net thickness of the "aquifer", ft (m).
ro = Radius to the perimeter of the

reservoir, ft (m). (The boundary
"aquifer.")
re = Radius to the perimeter of the

aquifer, ft (m).
α3 = 0.75 for no-flow outer boundary; 0

for constant pressure outer
boundary.
α4 = 3.381 for no-flow outer boundary;

1.127 for constant pressure outer
boundary.
b = Width of the linear aquifer, ft (m).
µ = Average viscosity of the fluid

contained in the "aquifer", cp (cp).
d = re as described above for radial

"aquifers." Length of the "aquifer", ft
(m) for linear "aquifers."
awip Initial volume of encroachable water in the aquifer,

rb (cm) awip = ct wi pi.
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-485

where
ct = Total compressibility of the fluid and

rock in the "aquifer", 1/psia (1/kPa).
wi = Initial aquifer volume of water in

place, rb(cm).
pi = Initial aquifer pressure at the

hydrocarbon/water contact, or at the
specified reference depth, if entered,
psia (kPa).
vwaq Initial aquifer volume of water in place, rb (cm). (wi

as defined as above.)
ct Total compressibility of the fluid and rock in the

"aquifer", 1/psia (1/kPa).
paqi Initial aquifier pressure, psia (kPa), at the reference

depth, daqi.
daqi Reference depth, ft (m), for the initial aquifer

pressure, paqi.
The titles on the fifth card must appear as shown. The optional fifth
keyword controls possible connections to non-aquifer gridblocks
ALL Connect all specified blocks to aquifer. Default

skips blocks that are above the water-oil contact.
The number of data cards following the fifth card must equal nbinf,
unless an "ENDAQ" card is given.
iinf x(r) direction index of a gridblock attached to this

"aquifer".
jinf y(theta) direction index of a gridblock attached to

this "aquifer".
kinf z direction index of a gridblock attached to this

"aquifer".
sinf Scale factor used to allocate the total "aquifer"

influx/efflux among the gridblocks attached to the
"aquifer". These are normalized within the
program, so values have only relative meaning.
They will usually reflect the cross-sectional area
times the permeability of the gridblock faces
attached to the "aquifer".
10-486 Landmark - R2003.4

sinf may be any of the following: 00
=n The scale factor is set to "n".

+n The scale factor is increased by "n".
n The scale factor is increased by "n".
-n The scale factor is decreased by "n".
*n The scale factor is multiplied by "n".
/n The scale factor is divided by "n". 00
XCALC The scale factor is calculated in the

x(r) direction. 00
YCALC The scale factor is calculated in the

y(theta) direction. 00
ZCALC The scale factor is calculated in the z

direction. 00
For the WINDOW option, there are six additional

options which enable the user to easily assign an
aquifer to an irregular grid boundary. Starting on
the specified face of the window and moving
inward, the aquifer is attached to the first active
gridblock encountered within the window. The
options are:
I- Aquifer connects to the i- faces

I+ Aquifer connects to the i+ faces
J- Aquifer connects to the j- faces
J+ Aquifer connects to the j+ faces
K- Aquifer connects to the k- faces
K+ Aquifer connects to the k+ faces
The following keywords may also appear in these Data Cards: 00
GRID Data applies to a particular grid. 00
name Name of the grid. Default is ROOT. 00
VALUE Puts the reading of these Data Cards into VALUE

mode, ends WINDOW mode. Reads data cards of
the form iinf, jinf, kinf, and sinf.
WINDOW Puts the reading of these Data Cards into WINDOW

mode, ends VALUE mode.
In this mode, data must be entered as follows: 00
i1 i2 j1 j2 k1 k2 sinf 00
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-487

The range specified is the same as that given by the

MOD card (Section 1.5.4.1).
ENDAQ Indicates the end of the influx data cards.

(optional) 00
10.3 Coarse Grid, Fine Grid Boundary Flux

VIP-EXECUTIVE provides the capability to define rectangular regions of
the reservoir grid for which boundary flux calculations will be performed
in the simulation module. The program may be run in OUTPUT mode so
that calculated boundary flux is reported in the output listing and
recorded in a disk file. Additionally, the program may be run in INPUT
mode where the boundary flux file (FORTRAN Unit 16) from an OUTPUT
mode run is used as input data to the program. In INPUT mode, the
boundary flux data is used in the same manner as sink or source
information. That is, the equivalent of a production/injection well is
defined internal to the program for each boundary block.
The combination of these two modes allows the user great flexibility in
developing a reservoir study. An initial program run in OUTPUT mode
for a large, coarsely gridded reservoir can provide boundary flux
information for a subset of the reservoir that is to be studied in greater
detail. The subsequent run of the finely gridded portion of the reservoir
uses the boundary flux information to include the effects of gridblocks in
the reservoir that are outside the area of detailed interest. The program
may also be used effectively in OUTPUT mode to determine the direction
and type of fluid flow across any gridblock boundary in the reservoir.
The frequency of flux output from the simulation module is controlled by

the WFLUX card.
10.3.1 Flux Across a Grid Perimeter (FLUX)

Input Mode: 00
FLUX nflux
INPUT
(MOBWT)
 ADJUST 
 
FINE
 FLXOIL 
(VEOFF)
(CFXOFF)
COARSE
NX NY NZ
nxc nyc nzc
I1 I2 J1 J2 K1 K2
10-488 Landmark - R2003.4

i1c i2c j1c j2c k1c k2c

(NOVEAD G or O or W)
(ic1 ic2 jc1 jc2 kc1 kc2)
(VEONLY G or O or W)
(VEAREA G or O or W)
(SEGAREA O or W)
FINE
I1 i1f(1) . . . i1f(nxx)
I2 i2f(1) . . . i2f(nxx)
J1 j1f(1) . . . j1f(nxx)
J2 j2f(1) . . . j2f(nxx)
K1 k1f(1) . . . k1f(nxx)
K2 k2f(1) . . . k2f(nxx)
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-489

Output Mode: 00
FLUX nflux
OUTPUT
(CUMFLUX)
(VEDIST)
  
 CMPFLX  
ON
  OFF 
i1 i2 j1 j2 k1 j2
Definitions: 00
nflux Identifying number of the boundary flux region

being described.
INPUT Alpha label indicating that the boundary flux

region being described is in INPUT mode. For a
boundary flux region in INPUT mode, boundary
flux data will be input from a disk file into the
simulation module.
MOBWT Alpha label indicating that boundary efflux should

be allocated to gridblocks based upon the product
of fluid mobility and gridblock cross-sectional area.
If MOBWT is not specified, efflux will be allocated
based only upon gridblock cross-sectional area.
ADJUST Alpha label indicating that efflux partitioning

should be done on the basis of fine block only.
When this option is used, any unavailable phase
efflux for the fine block is adjusted by equivalent
efflux of another phase from the same fine block. If
it is not possible to remove another phase, no
additional action is taken. If the ADJUST card is not
specified, no efflux partitioning is done. The
ADJUST keyword must be followed by either the
FINE or the FLXOIL keyword:
FINE Alpha label indicating that only two

changes of phase allocation are to be
performed - conversion of unavailable
gas phase efflux to oil phase and
conversion of unavailable oil phase
efflux to water phase.
FLXOIL Alpha label indicating that following the

above two conversions, the following
10-490 Landmark - R2003.4

two additional conversions are to be

performed - unavailable water phase to
oil phase and unavailable oil phase to
gas phase.
VEOFF Influx allocation in the INPUT mode is done using

the fully segregated (or vertical equilibrium)
assumption, if fluid contact values are available in
the flux file. However, the alpha label VEOFF can be
specified to use the fully dispersed option even if
contact values are available in the flux file. This card
is not required if the flux file does not contain fluid
contact data.
CFXOFF Component influx option is automatically invoked

in the INPUT mode if component influxes are
available in the flux file. However, CFXOFF can be
specified to use phase molar influxes and fine-grid
phase compositions for the calculation of
component influxes even if component influxes are
available in the flux file. This card is not required if
the flux file does not contain component influx data.
COARSE Alpha label indicating that data which follows this

card defines the grid correspondence for the coarse
grid model.
nxc Number of gridblocks in the x(r) direction for the

coarse grid model.
nyc Number of gridblocks in the y(theta) direction for

the coarse grid model.
nzc Number of gridblocks in the z direction for the

coarse grid model.
Gridblock locations are defined by indices I, J, and K in reference to the

(x,y,z) or (r,θ,z) grid. The current boundary flux region, nflux, contains all
gridblocks lying in the portion of the grid defined by:
i1c < I < i2c

j1c < J < j2c
k1c < K < k2c 00
NOVEAD Alpha label indicating that no VE influx allocation

should be done for the following set of coarse
blocks. In this case influx allocation is based on
cross-sectional area or the product of mobility and
cross-sectional area if the MOBWT option is being
used.
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-491

VEONLY Alpha label indicating that influx allocation for the

following set of coarse blocks should be based on
height of fluid contacts only.
VEAREA Alpha label indicating that influx allocation for the

following set of coarse blocks should be based on
the product of height of fluid contact and cross-
sectional area. This is the default for all coarse
blocks for all phases.
SEGAREA Alpha label indicating that the influx will be

allocated to all fine blocks (dispersed) below the
gas-oil contact for the appropriate phase (O or W)
for the following set of coarse blocks. In addition,
the influx allocation should be based on the product
of height of fluid contact and cross-sectional area.
Alpha label indicating the phase to which each of these options applies
G Influx allocation method applies to gas phase

influx. 00
O Influx allocation method applies to oil phase

influx. 00
W Influx allocation method applies to water phase

influx. 00
FINE Alpha label indicating that data which follows this

card defines the grid correspondence for the fine
grid model.
The next six cards define the correspondence of fine gridblocks to coarse
gridblocks. Each data card contains an alpha label followed by an
appropriate number of values, depending upon the direction indicated by
the label. If necessary, more than one card may be used to enter the values,
but the label should not be repeated on subsequent cards.
For these cards the following values are defined:
nxx = ic2 - ic1 + 1

nyy = jc2 - jc1 + 1
nzz = kc2 - kc1 + 1 00
I1 Alpha label indicating that the values on this card

define the beginning index of the fine gridblocks
contained in the flux region of the coarse model in
the x(r) direction between indices ic1 and ic2. A
total of nxx values must be entered on one or more
cards.
10-492 Landmark - R2003.4

I2 Alpha label indicating that the values on this card

define the last index of the fine gridblocks
the x(r) direction between indices ic1 and ic2. A
total of nxx values must be entered on one or more
cards.
J1 Alpha label indicating that the values on this card

the y(θ) direction between indices jc1 and jc2. A
total of nyy values must be entered on one or more
cards.
J2 Alpha label indicating that the values on this card

the y(θ) direction between indices jc1 and ic2. A
total of nyy values must be entered on one or more
cards.
K1 Alpha label indicating that the values on this card

the z direction between indices kc1 and kc2. A total
of nzz values must be entered on one or more cards.
K2 Alpha label indicating that the values on this card

the z direction between indices kc1 and kc2. A total
of nzz values must be entered on one or more cards.
nflux Identifying number of the boundary flux region

being described.
OUTPUT Alpha label indicating that the boundary flux

region being described is in OUTPUT mode. For a
boundary flux region in OUTPUT mode, a disk file
of boundary flux data will be created in the
simulation module.
CUMFLUX Alpha label indicating that cumulative flux values

are written to the flux file in the OUTPUT mode.
Flux rates are calculated from cumulative flux in the
INPUT mode. If the CUMFLUX card is not
specified, instantaneous flux rates are written to the
flux file.
VEDIST Alpha label indicating that the location of the gas-

oil contact and the oil-water contact in each coarse
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-493

block (determined using vertical equilibrium

approximation) is written to the flux file in the
OUTPUT mode. If the VEDIST card is not specified,
no contact information is written to the flux file.
CMPFLX Alpha label indicating whether component influxes

are written to the flux file in OUTPUT mode. The
label CMPFLX or CMPFLX ON indicates that
component molar fluxes as well as phase molar
fluxes are written to the flux file. The label CMPFLX
OFF indicates that only phase molar fluxes are
written to the flux file. If the CMPFLX card is not
specified, the default option is ON for Todd-
Longstaff miscible models and OFF for
compositional and black-oil models.
Gridblock locations are defined by indices I, J, and K in reference to the

(x,y,z) or (r,θ,z) grid. The current boundary flux region, nflux, contains all
gridblocks lying in the portion of the grid defined by:
i1 < I < i2
j1 < J < j2
k1 < K < k2. 00
The data given above are used to define a rectangular subregion of the
reservoir for which boundary flux calculations will be performed in the
simulation module. This data must appear in the order shown.
For each boundary flux region in INPUT mode in VIP-CORE, the

simulation module expects to input boundary flux data from a file
prepared from a program run in OUTPUT mode. The data given above are
used to define a correspondence between the reservoir grid and the
boundary flux regions from a previous run of the program in OUTPUT
mode. It is assumed in this treatment that each gridblock in the coarsely
gridded model contains an integral number of gridblocks in the finely
gridded model.
The component influx option (CMPFLX) writes the component molar

fluxes to the flux file (OUTPUT mode) and applies these fluxes to fine-
grids with net influxes (INPUT mode). Numerically, this option is more
rigorous than the phase influx option that uses phase molar influxes and
fine-grid phase compositions for the component influx calculation. The
CMPFLX option should be used if the influx compositions are expected to
be significantly different from the fine-grid phase compositions during the
fine-grid run.
10-494 Landmark - R2003.4

1 2 3 4 5 6
2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1
3
2
3
4 4
5
6
7
5 8
9
Fine Grid
6
Coarse Grid
Figure 10-1: Schematic Representation of Boundary Flux Feature
Examples: 00
The data given below completely describes the coarse and fine grid
models, assuming that boundary flux will be allocated based upon
fluid mobility. 00
For the coarse grid model: 00
FLUX 1
OUTPUT
CUMFLUX
VEDIST
CMPFLX ON
2 5 3 5 1 1 00
For the fine grid model: 00
FLUX 1
INPUT
R2003.4 - Landmark 10-495

MOBWT
ADJUST FINE
COARSE
NX NY NZ
6 8 1
l1 l2 J1 J2 K1 K2
2 5 3 5 1 1
NOVEAD O
2 5 3 5 1 1
VEAREA G
2 4 4 4 1 1
2 2 5 5 1 1
VEONLY W
3 5 5 5 1 1
SEGAREA O
3 5 5 5 1 1
FINE
I1 1 4 6 9
I2 3 5 8 10
J1 1 3 6
J2 2 5 9
K1 1
K2 1 00
10-496 Landmark - R2003.4

Chapter
11
00000Local Grid Refinement
11.1 Introduction
The LGR option is compatible with rectangular, radial and corner-point
coarse (ROOT) grids. Once a ROOT grid has been defined, it can be
refined and each refined grid can be further refined, with the exception
that if the refinement is a radial grid, then the radial grid cannot be further
refined. There is no limit to the number of grids or levels of refinements.
11.2 Grid Definition

The ROOT grid is first defined using one of the options described in
Section 2.2.3. The refinement grids are then defined using a nested data
structure as will be described below.
11.3 Grid Refinement (LGR)

The LGR keyword indicates that the grid is to be refined. This line is
followed by data defining the refinements. An ENDLGR keyword ends
the grid refinement data mode.
LGR (name)
grid refinement data
ENDLGR
Definitions: 00
LGR Start of the grid refinement data structure.
name Name of the coarse grid. Default is ROOT.
ENDLGR End of grid refinement data.
R2003.4 - Landmark 11-497

Local Grid Refinement VIP-CORE REFERENCE MANUAL
11.3.1 Grid Refinement Data

Grid refinements can be either cartesian or radial. Radial refinements are
constrained within either a row or column of a cartesian grid. Radial grid
refinements cannot be refined.
It is strongly recommended that all grid refinements are continued through all
communicating layers in the grid system, i.e., normally from layer 1 through NZ.
11.3.1.1 Cartesian Grid Refinement
The following specifies a cartesian refinement. The order of the data is

important.
CARTREF name
i1 i2 j1 j2 k1 k2
nx1 nx2 nx3 .........nx(i2-i1+1)
ny1 ny2 ny3 .........ny(j2-j1+1)
nz1 nz2 nz3 .........nz(k2-k1+1)
(OMIT io1 io2 jo1 jo2 ko1 ko2)
(INGRID in1 in2 jn1 jn2 kn1 kn2)
(CARTREF name) (RADXREF name) (RADYREF name) (RADZREF name)
nested refinement
(ENDREF)
ENDREF
Definitions:
CARTREF A cartesian grid is being defined.
name Name of grid being defined.
i1, i2, j1, j2, k1, k2 Indices defining the portion of the coarse grid to be
refined.
nx1, nx2, . . . Number of x direction fine gridblocks for each of

the corresponding coarse gridblocks.
ny1, ny2, . . . Number of y direction fine gridblocks for each of

nz1, nz2, . . . Number of z direction fine gridblocks for each of

11-498 Landmark - R2003.4

VIP-CORE REFERENCE MANUAL Local Grid Refinement
OMIT Range of coarse gridblocks to be removed from the

refinement grid. Can be repeated as needed.
io1, io2, jo1, . . . Indices defining the portion of the coarse grid to be
removed from the refinement.
i1 ≤ io1, io2 ≤ i2
j1 ≤ jo1, jo2 ≤ j2
k1 ≤ ko1, ko2 ≤ k2
INGRID Range of coarse gridblocks to be included in the

in1, in2, jn1, . . . Indices defining the portion of the coarse grid to be
included in the refinement.
i1 ≤ in1, in2 ≤ i2
j1 ≤ jn1, jn2 ≤ j2
k1 ≤ kn1, kn2 ≤ k2
ENDREF End of data defining a refined grid.
11.3.1.2 Radial Grid Refinement
The following specifies a radial refinement along the z axis of a coarse

grid. The order of the data is important.
RADZREF name
i j k1 k2
nr ntheta ri (RMIN rmin)
nz1 nz2 nz3 .........nz(k2-k1+1)
xw1 xw2 xw3 .........xw(k2-k1+2)
yw1 yw2 yw3 .........yw(k2-k1+2)
(OMIT i i j j ko1 ko2)
(INGRID i i j j kn1 kn2)
ENDREF
Definitions:
RADZREF Define a radial grid whose z axis is aligned with the

z axis of the coarse grid.
i, j, k1, k2 Indices defining the portion of the coarse grid to be

refined.
nr Number of refined gridblocks in the r direction.
ntheta Number of refined gridblocks in the theta direction.

Ntheta can be 1 or any integer multiple of 4.
R2003.4 - Landmark 11-499

ri Inner radius, ft(m). This is the distance from the

origin to the inner edge of the first gridblock. ri
must be greater than zero.
RMIN Alpha label.
rmin Minimum outer radius allowed for the inner most

ring of blocks. Default is zero or whatever is
specified by the global RMIN data (Section 11.12).

xw1, xw2, . . . X locations of the well intersections with the

boundaries of the coarse gridblocks (fractions). A
value of 0.5 means that the well (origin of radial
grid) is at the center of the coarse gridblock.
yw1, yw2, . . . Y locations of the well intersections with the


i, i, j, j, ko1, ko2 Indices defining the portion of the coarse grid to be

k1 ≤ ko1, ko2 ≤ k2

i, i, j, j, kn1, kn2 Indices defining the portion of the coarse grid to be

k1 ≤ kn1, kn2 ≤ k2
11-500 Landmark - R2003.4

The following specifies a radial refinement along the y axis of a coarse

RADYREF name
i j1 j2 k
nz1 nz2 nz3 .........nz(j2-j1+1)
xw1 xw2 xw3 .........xw(j2-j1+2)
zw1 zw2 zw3 .........zw(j2-j1+2)
(OMIT i i jo1 jo2 k k)
(INGRID i i jn1 jn2 k k)
ENDREF
Definitions:
RADYREF Define a radial grid whose z axis is aligned with the

y axis of the coarse grid.
i, j1, j2, k Indices defining the portion of the coarse grid to be

refined.

ri Inner radius ft(m). This is the distance from the

origin to the inner edge of the first grid lock. ri must
be greater than zero.
RMIN Alpha label.


xw1, xw2, . . . X locations of the well intersections with the

zw1, zw2, . . . Z locations of the well intersections with the

R2003.4 - Landmark 11-501


i, i, jo1, jo2, k, k Indices defining the portion of the coarse grid to be

j1 ≤ jo1, jo2 ≤ j2

i, i, jn1, jn2, k, k Indices defining the portion of the coarse grid to be

j1 ≤ jn1, jn2 ≤ j2
The following specifies a radial refinement along the x axis of a coarse

RADXREF name
i1 i2 j k
nz1 nz2 nz3 .........nz(i2-i1+1)
yw1 yw2 yw3 .........yw(i2-i1+2)
zw1 zw2 zw3 .........zw(i2-i1+2)
(OMIT io1 io2 j j k k)
(INGRID in1 in2 j j k k)
ENDREF
Definitions:
RADXREF Define a radial grid whose z axis is aligned with the

x axis of the coarse grid.
i1, i2, j, k Indices defining the portion of the coarse grid to be

refined.

ri Inner radius ft(m). This is the distance from the

origin to the inner edge of the first gridblock. ri
must be greater than zero.
RMIN Alpha label.
11-502 Landmark - R2003.4


nz1, nz2, . . . Number of z direction fine grid blocks for each of

yw1, yw2, . . . Y locations of the well intersections with the

zw1, zw2, . . . Z locations of the well intersections with the


io1, io2, j, j, k, k Indices defining the portion of the coarse grid to be

i1 ≤ io1, io2 ≤ i2
INGRID Range of coarse grid blocks to be included in the

in1, in2, j, j, k, k Indices defining the portion of the coarse grid to be

i1 ≤ in1, in2 ≤ i2
R2003.4 - Landmark 11-503

Example 1:
NX NY NZ NCOMP
5 5 1 2
LGR BASEGRID
CARTREF REF1
2 4 2 4 1 1
2 3 2
2 2 2
1
RADZREF RAD
3 3 1 1
3 4 .25
1
2*0.5
2*0.5
ENDREF
ENDREF
ENDLGR
11-504 Landmark - R2003.4

Example 2:
NX NY NZ NCOMP OR NX NY NZ NCOMP
5 5 1 2 5 5 1 2
LGR BASEGRID LGR BASEGRID
CARTREF REF1 CARTREF REF1
2 4 2 4 1 1 2 4 2 4 1 1
2 3 2 2 3 2
2 2 2 2 2 2
1 1
OMIT 4 4 3 3 1 1 OMIT 3 4 3 4 1 1
OMIT 3 4 4 4 1 1 INGRID 3 3 3 3 1 1
ENDREF ENDREF
ENDLGR ENDLGR
R2003.4 - Landmark 11-505

Example 3:
NX NY NZ NCOMP
5 5 1 2
LGR BASEGRID
CARTREF REF1
2 4 2 4 1 1
2 3 2
2 2 2
1
OMIT 2 4 2 4 1 1
INGRID 3 4 2 2 1 1
INGRID 2 3 3 3 1 1
INGRID 2 2 4 4 1 1
ENDREF
ENDLGR
11-506 Landmark - R2003.4

Example 4:
NX NY NZ NCOMP
5 5 1 2
LGR BASEGRID
CARTREF REF1
1 2 1 2 1 1
2*3
2*3
1
ENDREF
CARTREF REF2
4 5 4 5 1 1
2*3
2*3
1
ENDREF
ENDLGR
R2003.4 - Landmark 11-507

Example 5:
NX NY NZ NCOMP
5 5 1 2
LGR BASEGRID
CARTREF REF1
2 4 2 4 1 1
2 3 2
3*2
1
CARTREF REF2
2 3 3 4 1 1
3 2
4 2
1
ENDREF
ENDREF
ENDLGR
11-508 Landmark - R2003.4

11.4 Array Data

Array data is introduced grid by grid. All Array data must be together and
grid order is important. Array data for the ROOT grid is required. Array
data are propagated recursively to the children grids as soon as they are
read in. The propagation therefore restricts the order, and data for parent
grids need to precede those of its children. Any array data for any child
grid can be entered separately to replace the values generated by the
propagation process. Permeability arrays at gridblock faces are not
allowed with the LGR option.
Arrays (name)
Definitions:
Arrays Start of array data for grid (name).
name Name of grid for which the following array data

applies. Default is ROOT.
11.5 Array Data Propagation

The data for the following arrays apply to gridblock faces and are
propagated only to the appropriate fine gridblock faces.
TMX, TMR, TMXF, TMRF

TMY, TMTH, TMYF, TMTHF
TMZ, TMZF
TMXYL, TMXYLF, TMXYR, TMXYRF
Transmissibility multipliers (MULT) Section 1.6
11.6 Array Input Option

Array data of children grids (that has been assigned through propagation)
can be modified using the MOD or VMOD options, Section 1.5.4. The
NONE option for a child array indicates that no data will be input and any
MOD or VMOD options will apply to the inherited data. The modified
data is then propagated to the grid’s children.
Example:
ARRAYS
POR CON
0.3
.
.
.
ARRAYS CHILD1
POR NONE
VMOD
R2003.4 - Landmark 11-509

2 4 2 3 1 1 EQ
0.25 0.26 2*0.27 0.29 0.3
11.7 Saturation and Relative Permeability Endpoint Arrays

Endpoint arrays can be assigned to children grids without having
assigned any values to their parent’s grid. Any unassigned gridblocks or
any assigned negative values will be reset to the rock data.
11.8 Grid Geometry

Any of the options previously available for defining a single grid with the
exception of the bedding plane geometry DXB, DYB, etc. can be used to
describe the ROOT grid. The LGR option requires eight (x, y, z)
coordinates for each gridblock: these will be calculated internally. An
additional data input option (CORP ARRAY Section 11.9) allows the input
of the eight corner points directly. The corner points of children grids are
either input using the CORP ARRAY data or are calculated internally from
the coordinates of the parent gridblocks. The corner point calculation uses
the normalized DX, DY, DZ arrays of children blocks to determine
gridblock spacing. Absence of DX, DY, DZ array data (default) will
produce a uniform spacing of children blocks within their parent block.
11.9 Corner Point Data (CORP)

The CORP array consists of eight (x, y, z) coordinate values for each
gridblock. The size of the CORP array is therefore 24 times the number of
gridblocks in a grid. The (x, y) values of CORP data for different children
grids need not all be relative to the same origin. Each child grid is rotated
and translated in a horizontal plane so as to align with its corresponding
parent grid. However, the z (depth) values of different CORP arrays are
required to be relative to the same reference and consistent with other
depth values used elsewhere in the input data.
CORP (EIGHT)
11-510 Landmark - R2003.4

Definitions:
CORP, ft(m) (x, y, z) coordinate values. 24*NX*NY*NZ data

values are required. The default order is (x1, y1, z1),
(x2, y2, z2), (x3, y3, z3) ............. (x8, y8, z8)
i x
j 2
1
y
z
4 3
k
5 6
8 7
EIGHT Alternative order of CORP data.
(x1, x2, x4, x3, x5, x6, x8, x7),

(y1, y2, y4, y3, y5, y6, y8, y7),
(z1, z2, z4, z3, z5, z6, z8, z7)
11.9.1 Modify by a Constant (MODX,MODY,MODZ)

The MODX, MODY, MODZ options are used to apply constant arithmetic
operations to a portion of the x,y, and z data entered with the CORP
keyword. All eight corner point values of each gridblock included in the
portion of the grid specified will be modified. The MODX, MODY, and
MODZ data need to immediately follow the CORP data. Multiple data
cards may follow a MODX, MODY, or MODZ keyword.
MODX
MODY
MODZ
i1 i2 j1 j2 k1 k2 #v
Definitions: 00
MODX Indicates that changes are to be made to the x

coordinate values.
MODY Indicates that changes are to be made to the y

coordinate values.
R2003.4 - Landmark 11-511

MODZ Indicates that changes are to be made to the z

coordinate values.
Gridblock locations are defined by indices i, j, k in reference to the (x,y,z)

or (r,θ,z) grid. Modifications are applied to x, y or z coordinate elements
that fall in the portion of the grid defined by:
i1 ≤ I ≤ i2
j1 ≤ J ≤ j2
k1 ≤ K ≤ k2
# An operator that describes how the coordinate

values are to be modified. Any of the following
symbols may be used:
+ add
- subtract
/ divide
* multiply
= equal

value, #v.

the x,y,z coordinate arrays, according to the
specified operation.
Example: CORP
INCLUDE grid.inc
MODZ
1 10 1 10 1 3 *3.048
11-512 Landmark - R2003.4

11.10 Handedness of Coordinates (RIGHTHANDED)

The coordinate system used internally and drawn in Section 11.9 is left-
handed. Corner-point data systems that are right-handed must be
identified by use of the keyword RIGHTHANDED as part of the utility
data. If not identified, right-handed systems will calculate negative pore
volumes. CORP array data read for ROOT and children grids must be
either all left-handed or all right-handed.
RIGHTHANDED
Definitions:
RIGHTHANDED CORP array data are right-handed.

i x
2
j 1
y
z
4 3
k
5 6
8 7
R2003.4 - Landmark 11-513

11.11 Transmissibility Calculations
11.11.1 Harmonic Integration (HARTRAN)
HARTRAN (iquad jquad kquad)
Definitions:
HARTRAN Transmissibilities are calculated using a harmonic

integration of the space defined by the block
corners. This is the default.
iquad, jquad, kquad Number of quadrature points in the x, y, and z

directions, respectively, used by the integration.
The integration is performed from the centroid
of the block to each of the six faces separately,
and iquad, jquad, kquad are used for each of
the six directions. This results in six half
transmissibilities for each gridblock. Default is
(3, 3, 3).
1 ≤ iquad, jquad, kquad ≤ 3
11.11.2 No Integration (NEWTRAN)
NEWTRAN
Definitions:
NEWTRAN Transmissibilities are calculated by considering

paths from the gridblock centroid to each of the six
face centroids. The normals of each of the face areas
with the corresponding paths are then used in the
calculations.
11.11.3 Rectangular or Radial ROOT Grid (BLOCKTR)

ROOT grids that are defined with DX, DY, DZ or DR, DTHETA, DZ
options are converted to corner-point grids internally. When LGR/
ENDLGR is entered, either alone or with the data defining LGR’s, the
block corner points are used in the calculations of pore volumes and
transmissibilities (Sections 11.11.1 and 11.11.2). Depending on the
structure of the reservoir the calculations using corner-point values can be
substantially different than calculations made using the array data
directly. An option to use the array data directly for the ROOT grid is
provided here.
11-514 Landmark - R2003.4

NOTE: The corner point method is more consistent geometrically.
BLOCKTR
Definitions:
BLOCKTR Use DX, DY, DZ or DR, DTHETA, DZ directly to

calculate pore volumes and transmissibilities of
ROOT grids.
11.12 Minimum Radius of Radial Refinements (RMIN)
RMIN rmin
Definitions:

ring of blocks. This is applied globally to all radial
refinements, but can be set on a grid by grid basis
while specifying the LGR data (Section 11.3.1.2).
Default is 0.0.
11.13 Connection Transmissibility Modification (MULT)
[STD ]
MULT array [NONSTD] [MINUS] [operator]
[ALL ] [PLUS ]
(GRID name)
i1 i2 j1 j2 k1 k2 val
Definitions: 00
GRID Data applies to a particular grid.
name Name of the grid. Default is ROOT.
See Section 1.6 for additional definitions.
NOTE: Values are propagated to children grids at the appropriate grid

block faces only.
R2003.4 - Landmark 11-515

11.14 Function Input Option (FUNCTION)
FUNCTION ..................
(GRID name)
..
..
..
..
Definitions:
name Name of the grid. Default is all grids.
NOTE: GRID is required with the BLOCK option.
11.15 Arbitrary Grid-block Connections (FTRANS)
FTRANS
(GRID name1 (name2))
i1 j1 k1 i2 j2 k2 t (tt)
Definitions:
name1 Name of grid1. Default is ROOT.
name2 Name of grid2. Default is name1.
See Section 6.6.2 for additional definitions.
11.16 Override Modification (OVER)
OVER array (array) (array) (array)

(GRID name)
i1 i2 j1 j2 k1 k2 #v (#v) (#v) (#v)
11-516 Landmark - R2003.4

Definitions:
NOTE: Operations only apply to the specified grid, i.e., no propagation.
11.17 Value Override (VOVER)
VOVER array
(GRID name)
i1 i2 j1 j2 k1 k2 (op)
values as necessary
Definitions:
11.18 Half-Transmissibility Override (TOVER)

The TOVER card allows the user to input half-transmissibilties in the same
format as the VOVER card.
The TOVER cards must follow the array data and precede any FTRANS,
OVER and VOVER cards.
TOVER array
(GRID name)
i1 i2 j1 j2 k1 k2 (op)
Definitions:
array One of the following array names. The + means the

face in the positive direction, while - means the face
in the negative direction.
R2003.4 - Landmark 11-517

TX+, TX-, TY+, TY-, TZ+, TZ-, TR+, TR-, TTHETA+,

TTHETA-
TXF+, TXF-, TYF+, TYF-, TZF+, TZF-, TRF+, TRF-,

TTHETF+, TTHETF-
11.19 Pinchout Gridblock Connections (PINCHGRID)

Pinchout connections are generated automatically as described in Sections
2.2.9 and 6.9. The PINCHOUT card is used to specify the tolerances tolnet
and tolth. By default gridblocks having a net thickness less than or equal
to tolnet will be considered inactive (zero pore volume) only if the parent
gridblock is also inactive. The PINCHGRID card allows for the application
of the tolnet tolerance to gridblocks within a grid independent of their
parent.
PINCHGRID gridname1 (gridname2) ... (gridnamei)
Definitions:
PINCHGRID Alpha label indicating that the following named

grids will be tested against tolnet independently of
their parent grid.
gridname Names of grids to be tested. If this list only contains

the keyword ALL, then all grid refinements will be
tested.
11-518 Landmark - R2003.4

11.20 Pore Volume Cuttoff (TOLPV)

The TOLPV card is used to specify the pore volume cutoff tolerance, tolpv
on a grid-by-grid basis. Gridblocks with a pore volume less than tolpv
will be considered inactive (zero pore volume). For the DUAL porosity
option, if the sum of both matrix and fracture pore volumes is less than
tolpv, then both matrix and facture pore volumes will be set to zero.
Otherwise, the pore volume test is only applied to the matrix blocks.
OVER/VOVER of pore volumes are applied after this check.
TOLPV (gridname1) (gridname2) ... (gridnamei) tolpv
Definitions:
TOLPV Alpha label indicating that the following named

grids will be assigned tolpv as the pore volume
cutoff.
gridname Names of grids to be assigned tolpv. If this list only

contains the keyword ALL, or no grid names are
provided, then all grid refinements will be assigned
tolpv.
tolpv Pore volume cutoff tolerance, rb (cm). Default for

grids not specified is the value specified by the
CORTOL card, Section 2.2.12.2.
R2003.4 - Landmark 11-519

11-520 Landmark - R2003.4

Chapter
12
00000Tracer Option1
12.1 Introduction
This is a short description of a set of tools which have been developed to
improve and expand the simulation capabilities in the analysis and
interpretation of tracer tests and in the design and performance analysis of
waterflood projects. The tools are built around the particle tracking
method which allows accurate simulation of tracer flow associated with
convection and physical dispersion. The method is nearly numerical
dispersion free and allows accurate simulation of tracer flow in field scale
simulation. The algorithm is implemented in VIP-EXECUTIVE and allows
simulation of tracer flow within the framework of three-dimensional,
multi-phase, non-steady state reservoir simulation. In addition to accurate
simulation of tracer flow the software allows: (1) tracking of water fronts
in waterflood operations; (2) construction of three-dimensional flow
trajectories and streamlines of velocity field; (3) calculation of the areal
sweep; (4) visualization and animation of tracer flow.
12.2 New Input Data for Initialization Module VIP-CORE

There is one new card in the initialization data set of VIP-CORE, as well as
additional aquifer INFLUX data.
12.2.1 Activate Tracer Option (TRACER)

The tracer option is activated by the input of the TRACER card.
TRACER
The card notifies the simulator that later in the run the tracer option may
be used. As a result, VIP-CORE generates some grid related information
required by the tracer option. This information is passed to the simulation
module through the restart record.
1. Available as a separately licensed option. Not available in VIP-THERM.
R2003.4 - Landmark 12-521

Tracer Option VIP-CORE REFERENCE MANUAL
12.2.2 Additional INFLUX Data (INFLUX)

When the tracer option is activated, the aquifer description data requires
one additional parameter, SIDE, to be defined. It follows the SINF
parameter in the aquifer description data. The side parameter is needed to
include the effect of the aquifer influx on the water velocity at the
boundary.

WTR CT
NBINF BINF TC (LINFAC)
nbinf binf tc (linfac)
IINF JINF KINF SINF SIDE
iinf jinf kinf sinf side
[VALUE]
[WINDOW
i1 i2 j1 j2 k1 k2 sinf side]
(ENDAQ)
TD PD
td pd
Definition:
side A parameter which indicates the boundary grid

block side attached to the aquifer. The parameter
may take any of the following numerical values:
1 x- side of the grid block

2 x+ side of the grid block
3 y- side of the grid block
4 y+ side of the grid block
5 z- side of the grid block
6 z+ side of the grid block
12-522 Landmark - R2003.4

Chapter
13
Heat Loss Data (VIP-THERM)
13.1 Introduction
Heat loss data must appear at the end of the initialization data.
Heat loss calculations may be performed in one of three ways:
1. Include the over-underburden in the reservoir grid.
2. Method of Vinsome and Westerveld.
3. Method of Coats, George, Chu, and Marcum.
13.2 Gridding of Over/Underburden

The energy balance equation may be solved in the over/underburden by
including these areas in the reservoir grid. These "burden" gridblocks
must be input with zero permeabilities and non-zero total volumes. Using
this method, one dimensional problems become two dimensional and two
dimensional problems may become three dimensional. At least five
gridblocks in the direction of heat loss is recommended. The sum of the
dimensions of these gridblocks in the direction of heat loss should be at
least 150 feet. This method requires the greatest amount of computer time
of the three.
13.3 Method of Vinsome and Westerveld (Reference 10)

This simple method is based on an assumed form of the temperature
profile in the over/underburden and requires the least amount of
computer time of the three methods.
Title Card: HTLOSS VW
The remaining data are given in Section 13.5.
Definitions:
HTLOSS Alpha label indication that the data being read are
heat loss data.
R2003.4 - Landmark 13-523

Heat Loss Data (VIP-THERM) VIP-CORE REFERENCE MANUAL
VW Alpha label indicating that the method of Vinsome

and Westerveld will be used for heat loss
calculations.
13.4 Method of Coats, George, Chu, and Marcum (Reference 40)

This method uses the principle of superposition to couple a series of one-
dimensional finite difference solutions of the energy balance in the over/
underburden with the reservoir temperature in the boundary gridblocks.
Since the over/underburden gridblocks are not included in the more
complicated system of equations solved in the reservoir, the computer
time required for this method is substantially reduced over the method of
gridding of the over/underburden and falls in between the computer time
required for the other two methods.
By default, the number of over/underburden gridblocks in the finite

difference grid is 5, with thicknesses in the direction of heat loss of 2, 4, 10,
50 and 100 feet (increasing with increasing distance from the reservoir).
These dimensions may be changed by the user as indicated below.
Title Card: HTLOSS

Data Card: (NZOB nzob)
Data Card: (DZOB dzob1 dzob2 . . . dzobnzob)
The remaining data are given in Section 13.5.
Definitions:
HTLOSS Alpha label indicating that the data being read are
heat loss data.
NZOB Alpha label indicating that the next entry on this

line is the number of over/underburden gridblocks
in the direction of heat loss. (Optional)
nzob The number of over/underburden gridblocks in the

direction of heat loss. (Optional)
DZOB Alpha label indicating that the next nzob entries on

this line are the over/underburden gridblock
dimensions in the direction of heat loss. (Optional)
dzob The over/underburden gridblock dimensions in the

direction of heat loss in order of increasing distance
for the reservoir, ft(m). (Optional)
13-524 Landmark - R2003.4

VIP-CORE REFERENCE MANUAL Heat Loss Data (VIP-THERM)
13.5 Heat Loss Data Specification

Rock property and geometric data for the methods described in Sections
13.3 and 13.4 are described here. Required data include the rock heat
capacity and thermal conductivity in the direction of heat loss and
definition of the surfaces from which heat is lost.
Two options for definition of heat loss surfaces are available. In the
“Specified Index Option” (Section 13.5.1), each gridblock face through
which heat loss is to occur is specified by giving the gridblock indices
(i,j,k) and a direction flag (except for radial grids for which heat loss is
allowed only in the z-direction). In the “Automatic Index Option” (Section
13.5.2), a single heat capacity and thermal conductivity are given for the
bordering rock along each reservoir boundary (indicated by a direction
flag). The program automatically assigns heat loss to the outermost active
(non-zero total volume) gridblock face on the specified boundary.
13.5.1 Specified Index Option
Title Card: I J K CPR KTR (DIRCN)(AMULT)

Data Cards: i j k cpr ktr (dircn)(amult)
Definitions:
I Alpha label indicating that the entry appearing in

this location on the following data card(s) is the i-
index of the boundary gridblock.
J Alpha label indicating that the entry appearing in

this location on the following data card(s) is the j-
K Alpha label indicating that the entry appearing in

this location on the following data card(s) is the k-
CPR Alpha label indicating that the entry appearing in

this location on the following data card(s) is the
rock specific heat capacity in the direction of heat
loss.
KTR Alpha label indicating that the entry appearing in

rock thermal conductivity in the direction of heat
loss.
R2003.4 - Landmark 13-525

DIRCN Alpha label indicating that the entry appearing in

direction of heat loss. Used only for rectangular
grids. For radial grids, heat loss calculations are
allowed only in the z direction.
AMULT Alpha label indicating that the entry appearing in

this location on the following data card(s) is the area
multiplier.
i Value of i-index for boundary gridblock. May be

specified as a range: i1 -i2.
j Value of j-index for boundary gridblock. May be

specified as a range: j1 -j2.
k Value of k-index for boundary gridblock. May be

specified as a range: k1 -k2.
cpr Value of specific rock heat capacity in direction of

heat loss, Btu/FT3 ˚F (KJ/M3 ˚C).
ktr Value of rock thermal conductivity in direction of

heat loss, Btu/D ft. ˚F (W/m˚C).
dircn Alpha label indicating direction of heat loss. Must

be either X, Y, or Z for rectangular grids. Do not
enter for radial grids (heat loss calculations are
allowed only in the z direction). Must be either XP,
YP, ZP, XN, YN, or ZN for corner-point grids, where
the P and N denote positive and negative heat loss
directions.
amult Area multiplier, optional. Default is 1.0.
13.5.2 Automatic Index Option

Title Card (2) and Data Cards (2) are optional data to allow area
multipliers to be specified for individual gridblock faces.
Title Card (1): AUTO CPR KTR DIRCN (AMULT)

Data Card (1): cpr ktr dircn (amult)
Title Card (2): (I J K DIRCN AMULT)
Data Card (2): (i j k dircn amult)
13-526 Landmark - R2003.4

VIP-CORE REFERENCE MANUAL Heat Loss Data (VIP-THERM)
Definitions:
CPR Alpha label indicating that the entry appearing in

rock specific heat capacity in the direction of heat
loss.
KTR Alpha label indicating that the entry appearing in

rock thermal conductivity in the direction of heat
loss.
DIRCN Alpha label indicating that the entry appearing in

direction of heat loss. Used only for rectangular
grids. For radial grids, heat loss calculations are
allowed only in the z direction.
AMULT Alpha label indicating that the entry appearing in

this location on the following data card(s) is the area
multiplier.
cpr Value of specific rock heat capacity in direction of

heat loss, Btu/FT3 ˚F (KJ/M3 ˚C).
ktr Value of rock thermal conductivity in direction of

heat loss, Btu/D ft. ˚F (W/m˚C).
dircn Alpha label indicating the reservoir boundary from

which heat loss is to occur. Must be one of the
following:
XN (y-z plane at x=O)

XP (y-z plane at x=L)
YN (x-z plane at y=O)
YP (x-z plane at y=W)
ZN (x-y plane at z=O)
ZP (x-y plane at z=H)
ALL (all bounding planes, ZN and ZP
only for radial systems)
ALL is not allowed on type 2 Data Cards.
amult Area multiplier, option. Default is 1.0.
I Alpha label indicating that the entry appearing in

this location on the following data card(s) is the i-
J Alpha label indicating that the entry appearing in

this location on the following data card(s) is the j-
R2003.4 - Landmark 13-527

K Alpha label indicating that the entry appearing in

this location on the following data card(s) is the k-
i Value of i-index for boundary gridblock. May be

specified as a range: i1 -i2.
j Value of j-index for boundary gridblock. May be

specified as a range: j1 -j2.
k Value of k-index for boundary gridblock. May be

specified as a range: k1 -k2.
13-528 Landmark - R2003.4

Chapter
14
00000Parallel Computing
14.1 Automatic Grid Decomposition
14.1.1 Introduction
Any cartesian grid defined with the LGR option can be automatically
decomposed into subdomains for the purpose of running on a network of
CPU’s (parallel computing).
The new subdomains are automatically identified by gridnames D1 D2 D3

... D9999999, with increasing numerals according to the convention of x-
direction first followed by y-direction then z-direction. Any name already
used for an existing LGR grid will be skipped over. Local refinements
within a decomposed grid will be moved into the new subdomains as
long as each refinement is contained entirely within any one of the
subdomains; otherwise the decomposition is not allowed. Decomposition
of nested grids is allowed.
A radial ROOT grid with no periodic boundary conditions (no FLOW360)

is considered like a cartesian grid for the context of this section. This
section documents the data necessary for specifying the domain
decompositions.
14.1.2 Domain Decomposition of Cartesian Grids (DECOMP)

The DECOMP/ENDDEC data must follow the LGR data. If no LGR’s are
defined, then the data must follow the grid dimensions data (Section 2.2.3)
in which case the LGR option is turned on automatically and the ROOT
grid could be decomposed.
DECOMP
gridname1 (KEEP) ndx ndy ndz
(X npx1 npx2 npx3 ... npxndx)
(Y npy1 npy2 npy3 ... npyndy)
(Z npz1 npz2 npz3 ... npzndz)
(gridname2 (KEEP) ndx ndy ndz)
.
.
.
ENDDEC
R2003.4 - Landmark 14-529

Parallel Computing VIP-CORE REFERENCE MANUAL
Definitions:
DECOMP Keyword for introducing grid decomposition

data.
gridnamei Name of grid to be decomposed.
NOTE: Nested grids make decomposition dependent on grid order. It is

recommended to specify the most refined grids first.
KEEP Keyword that will result in the new grids to be 1

by 1 by 1 refinements on top of the original
decomposed grid. The KEEP option increases the
size of the model since storage for the original
grid is also required. The default is for the new
grids to replace the original grid and thus the
new grids will be at the same (LGR) level as the
original grid.
ndx,ndy,ndz Number of domains in the x, y, z directions.
X,Y,Z Optional keywords that allows control of the size

of each new sub domain.
npx1,npx2,... Number of x direction parent grid blocks in each

new domain.
NOTE: If the KEEP option is used then the decomposed grid itself will be
the parent of the new grids. Otherwise the parent of the
decomposed grid will also be the parent of the new grids.
npy1,npy2,... Number of y direction parent grid blocks in each

new domain. See note following the definition for
npx.
npz1,npz2,... Number of z direction parent grid blocks in each

new domain. See note following the definition for
npx.
ENDDEC End of grid decomposition data.
14-530 Landmark - R2003.4

VIP-CORE REFERENCE MANUAL Parallel Computing
ndx
NOTE: ∑ npxi = NXP
i=1
ndy
∑ npyi = NYP
i=1
ndz
∑ npzi = NZP
i=1
Where NXP, NYP, NZP are:
1) The x,y,z direction dimensions of the decomposed

grid (NX, NY, NZ) when the KEEP option is used.
or
2) The x,y,z direction dimensions of the portion of the

parent grid that contains the decomposed grid
when the KEEP option is not used.
R2003.4 - Landmark 14-531

Example 1 (Default subdomain size):

NX NY NZ NCOMP
10 10 3 2
DECOMPOSE
ROOT 2 2 1
ENDDECOMPOSE
I
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ROOT 10
J
1
2
D1 D2
3
7
D3 D4
8
10
14-532 Landmark - R2003.4

VIP-CORE REFERENCE MANUAL Parallel Computing
Example 2 (Specify subdomain size in x-direction):

NX NY NZ NCOMP
10 10 3 2
DECOMPOSE
ROOT 2 2 1
x 4 6
ENDDECOMPOSE
I
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ROOT 10
J
1
2
D1 D2
3
7
D3 D4
8
10
R2003.4 - Landmark 14-533

Example 3 (Specify subdomain size in x and y-directions, with a nested

grid):
NX NY NZ NCOMP
10 10 3 2
LGR
CARTREF D3
3 4 3 4 1 3
4*2 3*1
ENDREF
ENDLGR
DECOMPOSE
ROOT 2 2 1
X 4 6
Y 4 6
ENDDECOMPOSE
I
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ROOT 10
J
1
D1
2
D2
3 D3
7
D4 D5
8
10
14-534 Landmark - R2003.4

Chapter
A
References
1. Stone, H.L., ’Probability Model for Estimating Three-phase Relative
Permeability’, Trans. SPE of AIME, 249, pp. 214-218 (1970).
2. Stone, H.L., ’Estimation of Three-Phase Relative Permeability and

Residual Oil Data’, J. Can. Pet. Technol., Vol. 12, pp. 53-61 (1973).
3. Coats, K.H. and Modine, A.D., ’A Consistent Method for Calculating

Transmissibilities in Nine-Point Difference Equations’, SPE paper
12248 presented at the Reservoir Simulation Symposium in San
Francisco, California, Nov, 15-18, 1983.
4. Sonnier, F. and Chaumet, P., ’A Fully Implicit Three-Dimensional

Model in Curvilinear Coordinates’, Trans. Soc. Pet Engr., Vol. 257, pp.
361-370 (1974).
5. Carlson, F.M., ’Simulation of Relative Permeability Hysteresis to the

Nonwetting Phase’, SPE paper 10157, presented at 56th Annual Fall
Technical Conference, San Antonio, 1981.
6. Land, C.S., ’Calculation of Imbibition Relative Permeability for 2- and

3-Phase Flow from Rock Properties’, Soc. Pet. Engr. J., Vol 243, (June
1968).
7. Gilman, J.R. and Kazemi, H., ’Improvements in Simulation of

Naturally Fractured Reservoirs’, SPEJ, August, 1983, pp. 695-707.
8. Frick, T.C. and Taylor, R.W., Petroleum Production Handbook, Vol. II,
Chap. 35, Society of Petroleum Engineering (AIME), Dallas, Texas
(1962).
9. Carter, R.D. and Tracy, G.W., ’An Improved Method for Calculating
Water Influx’, Trans. AIME, Vol. 219, pp. 415-417 (1960).
10. Beggs, H. Dale, Gas Production Operations, OGCI Publications, pp.

103-104 (1984).
11. Peaceman, D.W., ’Interpretation of Well-Block Pressures in Numerical

Reservoir Simulation’, Soc. Pet. Engr. J., pp. 183-194- (June, 1978).
12. Jain, A.K., ’An Accurate Explicit Equation for Friction Factor’, J.
Hydraulics Div. ASCE, Vol 2, No. Hy5 (May, 1976).
R2003.4 - Landmark A-535

References VIP-CORE REFERENCE MANUAL
13. Wallis, J.R., ’Incomplete Gaussian Elimination as a reconditioning for

Generalized Conjugate Gradient Acceleration’, SPE paper 12265
presented at the Seventh SPE Symposium on Numerical Simulation,
San Francisco (1983).
14. Wallis, J.R., Kendall, R.P., and Little, T.E., ’Constrained Residual
Acceleration of Conjugate Residual Methods’, SPE paper 13536
presented at the Eighth SPE Symposium on Reservoir Simulation,
Dallas (1985).
15. Jhaveri, B.S. and Youngren, G.K., ’Three-Parameter Modification of the

Peng-Robinson Equation of State To Improve Volumetric Predictions’,
SPE Reservoir Engineering, pp. 133-140 August 1988.
16. Killough, J.E., ’Reservoir Simulation with History-Dependent

Saturation Functions’, SPE paper 5106 presented at the SPE-AIME 49th
Annual Fall Meeting, Houston, Texas, Oct. 6-9, 1974.
17. van Everdingen, A. F. and Hurst, W., ‘The Application of the Laplace
Transformation to Flow Problems in Reservoirs’, Trans., AIME (1949)
186, 305-324.
18. Warren, J.E., and Root, P.J., ‘The Behariam of Naturally Fractured
Reservoirs’, Soc. Pet. Engr. J., pp. 245-255 (September, 1963).
19. Thomas, L.K., Dixon, T.N., and Pierson, R.G., ‘Fractured Reservoir
Simulation’, Soc. Pet. Engr. J., pp. 42-54 (February, 1983).
20. Coats, K.H., ‘Simulation of Gas Condensate Reservoir Performance’,

SPE paper 10512 presented at the Sixth SPE Symposium on Reservoir
Simulation, New Orleans (1982).
21. Wallis, J.R., Foster, J.A., and Kendall, R.P., ‘A New Parallel Iterative
Linear Solution Method for Large Scale Reservoir Simulation’, SPE
paper 21209 presented at the Eleventh SPE Symposium on Reservoir
Simulation, Anaheim (1991).
22. Peng, D.Y., and Robinson, D.B., ‘A New Two-Constant Equation of

State’, I. and E.C. Fundamentals (1976) 15, No. 1 pp. 59-64.
23. Redich, O., and Kwong, J.N.S., ‘On the Thermodynamics of Solutions.
V. - An Equation of State. Fugacities of Gaseous Solutions’, Chemical
Review (1949) Vol. 44, pp.52-63.
24. Soave, G., ‘Equilibrium Constants from a Modified Redlich-Kwong

Equation of State’, Chemical Engineering Science (1972) Vol. 27 pp.
1197-1203.
25. Baker, L.E., ‘Three Phase Relative Permeability Correlation’, SPE/DOE

paper 17369 presented at the 1988 SPE/DOE Enhanced Oil Recovery
Symposium, Tulsa, April 17-20.
A-536 Landmark - R2003.4

VIP-CORE REFERENCE MANUAL References
26. Penelous, A., Rauzy, E., and Freze, R., ‘A Consistent Correction for
Redlich-Kwong-Soave Volumes’, Fluid Phase Equilibrium (1982) Vol.
8, pp. 7-23.
27. Jhaveri, B.S. and Youngren, G.K., ‘Three-Parameter Modification of the

Peng-Robinson Equation of State to Improve Volumetric Predictions’,
SPE Res. Eng. (August 1986) pp. 1033-1040.
28. Pedersen, K.S., et al, ‘Vicosity of Crude Oil’, Chem. Eng. Sci., 39, (1984)
pp. 1011-1016.
29. Coats, K.H., “Implicit Compositional Simulation of Single-Porosity

and Dual-Porosity Reservoirs”, SPE 18427, Presented at the SPE
Symposium on Reservor Simulation in Houston, Texas, Feb. 1989.
30. Zudkevitch, David and Joffe, Joseph: “Correction and Prediction of

Vapor-Liquid Equilibria with the Redlich-Kwong Equation of State,”
AIChE Jour. (Jan. 1970) 16, No. 1, pp. 112-119.
31. Joffe, J., Schroeder, G.M. and Zudkevich, D., “Vapor-Liquid Equilibria
with the Relich-Kwong Equation of State,” (3) AIChE Jour. (1970) 16,
pp. 496-498.
32. Beattie, C.I., Boberg, T.C., and McNab, G.S., “Reservoir Simulation of
Cyclic Steam Stimulation in the Cold Lake Oil Sands,” SPE 18752
presented at the SPE-AIME, 1989, California Regional Meetings.
33. Passut, C.A., and Danner, R.P., I & EC Process Design and
Development, 11, 543 (1972).
34. Hwang, P.K. and Daubert, T.E., I & EC Process Design and
Development, 13, 193 (1974).
35. Edminster, W.D. and Lee, B.I., Applied Hydrocarbon

Thermodynamics, Vol. 1, second edition, Gulf Publishing Co., 1984.
36. Kesler, M.G. and Lee, B.I., Hydrocarbon Processing, 55 (3), 153, 1976.
37. Whitson, C.H., “Characterizing Hydrocarbon Plus Fractions,” Soc. Pet.

Engr. J., August 1983, pp. 683-694.
38. Lohrenz, J., Bray, B.G., and Clark, C.R., “Calculating Viscosities of
Reservoir Fluids from their Compositions,” SPE Reprint Series No. 15,
Phase Behavior, 1981, pp. 224-229.
39. Settari, A. and Ito, Y., “Coupling of a Fracture Mechanics Model and a
Thermal Reservoir Simulator for Tar Sands,” Jounal of Canadian
Petroleum Technolgy, V.31, No.9, November 1992, pp. 20-27.
40. Coats, K.H., George, W.D., Chu, C., and Marcum, B.E., "Three
Dimensional Simulation of Steamflooding," SPE 4500 presented at the
R2003.4 - Landmark A-537

References VIP-CORE REFERENCE MANUAL
SPE-AIME 48th Annual Meeting, Las Vegas, Nevada, Sept. 30-Oct. 4,

1973.
41. Robinson, D.B., Peng D., and Chung, Y., “The Development of the
Peng-Robinson Equation of State and it’s Application to Phase
Equilibrium in a System Containing Methanol,” Fluid Phase Equilibra
(1985), Vol. 24, pp. 25-41.
42. Fetkovich, M.J., “A Simplified Approach to Water Influx Calculations -

Finite Aquifer Systems,“ Trans., SPE of AIME (1971), pp. 814-828.
A-538 Landmark - R2003.4

Index
000000Keyword Index
A
A 4-212
ACENTRIC 4-192
ADJUST FINE 10-488
ALL 3-126, 3-127, 3-131, 3-132, 3-133, 3-140
ALPHA 2-116, 2-117
AMULT 13-526
API 4-147, 4-246
APIRO 4-280
ARRAYS 5-357
AUTO 13-526
B
B 4-212
BDGTAB 4-270
BETAG 4-322
BG 4-239, 4-251, 4-259, 4-264, 4-266, 4-270
BGTAB 4-249
BINF 10-478, 10-484, 12-522
BLACKOIL 2-84
BLOCKTR 11-515
BO 4-239, 4-246, 4-251, 4-259, 4-264, 4-266, 4-270
BODTAB 4-264
BOETAB 4-251
BOF 4-303, 4-306
BOFAC 4-239, 4-246, 4-251, 4-259, 4-280
BOGTAB 4-266
BOOTAB 4-259
BOSEP 4-306
BOSTG 4-303
BOTAB 4-239, 4-246, 4-259, 4-264, 4-266, 4-270
BOTINT 2-104
BPTAB 4-151, 4-152
BTBD 5-395
BWI 2-78, 4-310, 4-311
R2003.4 - Landmark Keyword-539

C
C 1-13
CARTREF 11-498
CDPKRH 2-116
CMP 4-330
CMT 4-312, 4-313
CO2TAB 4-232
COARSEN 8-469
COATS 2-111
COEFFICIENTS 4-331
COIL 4-216, 4-291
COMP 4-192, 4-211, 4-215, 4-219, 4-220, 4-278, 4-300, 4-308, 4-337, 4-340
COMPACT 2-93
COMPONENTS 4-191, 4-278
COMPOSITION 4-224, 4-226
COMPSAT 4-280
CON 1-19
CONTACT 2-114
COPY 1-33
CORCHK 2-110
CORNER 2-108
CORP 11-510
CORTOL 2-108
COURSE 10-488
CPG0 4-218
CPG1 4-218
CPG2 4-218
CPG3 4-218
CPO0 4-218
CPO1 4-218
CPOIL 4-291
CPR 13-525, 13-526
CPR0 5-440
CPRTAB 4-348
CR 2-78, 2-79, 5-392
CREEP 2-118
CREEPB 5-418
CREEPC 5-418
CREEPM 5-419
CRF 5-392
CRINIT 2-105
CROSS 2-82
CSORM 2-86
CT 10-478, 10-484, 12-522
CTEOIL 4-216, 4-291
CUMFLUX 10-490
CW 2-78, 4-310, 4-311
Keyword-540 Landmark - R2003.4

D
DATE 2-53, 1-12
DCPRDT 2-79
DEACTIVATE 2-97
DECOMP 14-529
DELTA 4-333
DENO COMP 4-216
DEPF 5-374
DEPTH 1-28, 4-147, 4-148, 4-149, 4-151, 4-152, 4-153, 4-154, 4-224, 4-226, 4-288, 4-291, 5-368
DGOG 4-321
DIAGONAL 2-71, 2-73
DIFEXPTEST 4-337, 4-340
DIFF 2-112
DIM 2-49
DIP 1-28
DIRCN 13-525, 13-526
DJK 4-196
DJKSEP 4-202, 4-297
DKTDSG 2-79
DLIQ 4-300, 4-308
DOB 4-246
DOR 4-246
DOSTD 4-216, 4-291
DOTAB 4-288
DP 4-239, 4-246, 4-251, 4-259, 4-280
DR 5-358
DRELPM 2-100
DRO 4-280
DRSDT 2-106
DRYGAS 2-106
DTHETA 5-361
DUAL 2-111
DWB 2-78, 2-79, 4-310
DX 5-358
DXB 5-358
DY 5-361
DYB 5-361
DZ 5-363
DZB 5-363
DZBCOR 5-364
DZBNET 5-366
DZCORN 5-364
DZNET 5-365
DZOB 13-524
DZVCOR 5-365

E
EACT 4-351
EG 4-182
EIGHTH 2-71
END 2-53
END2P 2-87
ENDDEC 14-529
ENDEOS 4-205
ENDINC 1-14
ENDKV 4-279
ENDLGR 11-497
ENDREF 11-498, 11-499, 11-501, 11-502
ENDSEP 4-297
ENDVIS 4-228
ENTHALPY COMP 4-218
EOD 4-188
EOG 4-182
EOI 4-188
EOS 4-189
EOSINT 4-327
EOSSEP 4-199
EOW 4-182
EW 4-182
EWD 4-188
EWI 4-188
EXCEPT 3-126, 3-127, 3-131, 3-133, 3-140
F
FAULTS 2-98, 6-446
FINE 10-489
FLASH 2-104
FLOW360 2-98
FLOWS 2-120
FLTRC 6-453
FLTRCF 6-456
FLTTCF 6-456
FLTXC 6-453
FLTXCF 6-456
FLTYCF 6-456
FLUX 10-488, 10-490
FLXOIL 10-488
FORM 2-59, 2-60
FOURTH 2-73
FRZPCG 2-94
FRZPCW 2-93
FTRANF 6-457
FTRANS 6-454, 11-516

FUNCTION 5-430, 11-516

FVEGO 5-411
FVEGOF 5-412
FVEWO 5-410
FVEWOF 5-411, 5-412
G
GASCM 4-335, 4-343
GASFRAC 4-337, 4-340, 4-343
GASMF 4-223
GASPLANT 4-230
GASRM 4-175
GASRMT 4-175
GASTRF 5-416
GASWATER 2-83
GBC 2-94
GIBBS 2-102
GOC 4-151
GOR 4-303, 4-306
GR 4-239, 4-246, 4-249, 4-288, 4-291, 4-303
GRID 11-515, 11-516, 11-517
GWC 4-148
H
HARTRAN 11-514
HCPVTAB 2-82
HOTAB 4-288
HR 4-351
HSTAR 4-199
HTLOSS 13-523
HVAP 4-218
HYDBETA 4-323
HYDFRAC 2-118
HYSWO 4-188
I
I 13-525
ICMT 1-44, 1-45, 5-390, 5-392
ICMTF 5-390, 5-391, 5-393
IEQUIL 4-147, 4-148, 4-149, 4-151, 5-396, 5-397
IFT 2-102
IINF 10-478, 10-484, 12-522
INCLUDE 1-13
INFLUX 10-478, 10-484, 12-522

INGRID 11-498, 11-499, 11-501, 11-502

INIT 2-49
INPUT 10-488
inter/intra region transmissibility multiplier 1-44
INTSAT 2-94
INTSW 2-111
IPVT 5-384, 5-385
IPVTW 4-310
ipvtw 4-310
IREGF 5-388
IREGION 5-385
ISAT 5-382
ISATEF 5-414
ISATEM 5-414
ISATF 5-383
ISATI 5-383
ISATIF 5-384
ITNMAX 4-332
ITRAN 5-392
ITRANF 5-393
IWIRC 5-390
IWIRCF 5-391
J
J 13-525
JFUNC 2-92
JINF 10-478, 10-484, 12-522
K
K 13-525
KEEPSG 5-398
KEEPSW 5-398
KEYCMP 4-230
KINF 10-478, 10-484, 12-522
KOHYS 5-442
KR 5-376
KRF 5-376
KRFEFF 5-380
KRG 4-163, 4-169, 4-173, 4-175, 4-180
KRGMAX 4-175
KRGRO 4-182, 4-183, 5-409
KRGROF 5-410
KRGRW 5-409
KRGRWF 5-410
KROCW 4-182, 4-183
KROG 4-163, 4-169, 4-173, 4-180

KROINT 2-89
KROLW 5-408
KROLWF 5-409
KROW 4-158, 4-168, 4-171, 4-179
KRW 4-158, 4-168, 4-171, 4-179
KRWG 4-163, 4-167, 4-170, 4-173
KRWRO 4-182, 4-183, 5-408
KRWROF 5-409
KT 5-441
KTF 5-377
KTFEFF 5-381
KTHETA 5-377
KTR 13-525, 13-526
KTR0 5-441
KTTH0 5-441
KTX0 5-441
KTY0 5-441
KTZ0 5-442
KV 4-280
KVALUES 4-278, 4-300, 4-308
KVCOR 4-219
KVTAB 4-280
KVTBS 4-220
KWHYS 5-442
KX 5-376
KXF 5-376
KXFEFF 5-380
KY 5-377
KYF 5-377
KYFEFF 5-380
KZ 5-378
KZF 5-378
KZFEFF 5-381
L
LAB 2-82
LAYER 1-26
LAYERS 6-451
LBC 4-212, 4-215
LDEST 4-294, 4-300, 4-308
LEAKY 6-452
LFRAC 4-294, 4-300, 4-308
LGR 11-497
LINE 2-108
LINFAC 12-522
LIST 1-15
LNVAL 1-33
LNXVAR 1-31
LNYVAR 1-32

LNZVAR 1-32
LX 5-412
LY 5-412
LZ 5-412
M
MAP 2-53, 2-60
MAPX 2-59
MAPY 2-59
MAPZ 2-59
MDEPF 5-374
MDEPTH 5-368
METRIC 2-81
MIS 2-116
MISP 4-318, 4-319
MISPTB 4-318, 4-319
MOBILE 2-94
MOBWT 10-488
MOD 1-35, 11-511
MODLYR 1-36
MULCONTEST 4-343
MULT 1-29, 1-41, 11-515
MULTFL 1-45
MULTIR 1-44
MW 4-192, 4-212, 4-278
MWL 4-308
MWOIL 4-288, 4-291
MWS 4-320
N
NAMES 2-113
NAMESW 2-115
NBINF 10-478, 10-484, 12-522
NCOL 1-16
NCOMP 2-65, 2-66
NCV 2-65, 2-66, 4-219
NETGF 5-366
NETGRS 5-366
NEWTRAN 2-108, 11-514
NFLASH 4-343
NGASFR 4-337, 4-340, 4-343
NINEPT 2-85
NKEY 4-230
NLINES 1-16
NOCHK 2-103
NOCOATS 2-111

NOINIT 2-96
NOLIST 1-15
NONE 3-126, 3-127, 3-131, 3-132, 3-133, 3-140
NONEQ 2-94
NOPRINT 2-111
NOROOT 2-96
NOSKIP 1-15
NOVDB 2-60
NOVDBPACK 2-60
NOVEAD 10-489
NOX 2-110
NOY 2-110
NP 4-288
NPRES 4-337, 4-340, 4-343
NPVUPD 2-95
NR 2-66
NTHETA 2-66
NX 2-65, 10-488
NY 2-65, 10-488
NZ 2-65, 10-488
NZOB 13-524
O
OILCM 4-335, 4-343
OILMF 4-223
OILPROPS 4-291
OILTABLES 4-288
OILTRF 5-416
OMEGAA 4-192
OMEGAB 4-192
OMEGAS 4-296
OMGD 5-417
OMGV 5-417
OMIT 11-498, 11-499, 11-501, 11-502
ORDER 4-351
OUTPUT 4-334, 10-490
OVER 11-516
P
P 4-220, 4-288, 4-303, 4-310, 4-311, 4-312, 4-313, 4-321, 5-397
PATTERN 2-71, 2-73, 2-75, 2-76
PBASEW 4-310
PC 4-192
PCGO 4-163, 4-169, 4-173, 4-180
PCGO1 4-182
PCGO2 4-182

PCGO3 4-182
PCGO4 4-182
PCGOC 4-151
PCGOS 4-163, 4-173
PCGW 4-163, 4-173
PCGWC 4-148
PCHOR 4-192
PCHYSG 2-90
PCHYSW 2-89
PCWO 4-158, 4-168, 4-171, 4-179
PCWO1 4-182
PCWO2 4-182
PCWO3 4-182
PCWO4 4-182
PCWOC 4-147, 4-149, 4-151
PCWOS 4-158, 4-171
PD 10-478, 10-484, 12-522
PF 5-400
PHASE 4-351
PINCHGRID 11-518
PINCHOUT 2-97
PINIT 4-147, 4-148, 4-149, 4-151
PLNTRY 4-230
PMAX 4-329
PMIN 4-330
POLYMER 2-119
POR 2-111, 5-374
PORDEF 4-347
PORF 5-374
PRES 4-337, 4-340, 4-343
PRINT 2-111, 3-131
PRINT ALL 3-125
PRINT ARRAYS 3-126
PRINT COEFS 3-127
PRINT COMP 3-131
PRINT CORNER 3-131
PRINT EQUIL 3-132
PRINT FAULTS 3-132
PRINT INFLUX 3-133
PRINT INIT 3-134
PRINT NONE 3-125
PRINT SEPARATOR 3-139
PRINT TABLES 3-140, 3-141, 3-143
PROPERTIES 4-192, 4-278
PRSTAB 3-141
PS 2-78, 2-79
PSAT 4-147, 4-149, 4-151, 4-152, 4-224, 4-226, 4-239, 4-246, 4-249, 4-251, 4-259, 4-264, 4-266,
4-270, 4-280, 4-337, 4-340, 4-343
PSATF 4-303, 4-306
PSEUDO 2-111
PSTAB 4-153
PV 5-374

PVEXP 2-81
PVF 5-374
PVLINEAR 2-81
PVMULT 4-310, 4-311, 4-312, 4-313
PVTTAB 2-103
PVTTABLE 4-294, 4-300, 4-303, 4-306
PVTW 4-310
PVTWSAL 4-311
R
R 5-358
RADXREF 11-498, 11-502
RADYREF 11-498, 11-501
RADZREF 11-498, 11-499
REACTION 4-351
REGDTM 9-475
REGION 9-473
REGNZ 2-82
REGSEP 9-474
REVERSE 2-93
RI 2-66
RIGHTHANDED 11-513
RMIN 11-515
RPCNO 2-121
RPHYSG 2-91
RPHYSO 2-91
RPHYST 2-92
RS 4-239, 4-246, 4-251, 4-259, 4-264, 4-266, 4-270
RSF 4-288, 4-291
RSM 2-124
RSTAB 4-153
RVAR 1-20
RVTAB 4-154
S
SALINT 4-311
salint 4-311
SATTAB 2-103
SCLFCT 5-394
SDFUNC 4-182
SEBOUND 2-85
SEGAREA 10-489
SEPARATOR 4-294, 4-300, 4-308
SEPTEST 4-303
SG 4-163, 4-167, 4-169, 4-170, 4-173, 4-175, 4-180, 5-397
SGC 4-182

SGF 5-400
SGL 5-405
SGLF 5-406
SGR 4-183, 5-405
SGRF 5-407
SGRM 4-175
SGRO 4-182, 4-183, 5-405
SGROF 5-407
SGRW 5-406
SGRWF 5-408
SGT 4-163, 4-173, 4-180
SGTF 4-169
SGTR 4-173, 4-175
SGU 5-406
SGUF 5-408
SGWT 4-167
SGWTF 4-170
SIDE 12-522
SIGMA 5-413
SIGMAD 5-415
SIGR 4-321
SIGT 4-321
SINF 10-478, 10-484, 12-522
SIXTH 2-76
SKIP 1-15
SLVTAB 4-317
SORG 4-182, 4-183
SORW 4-182, 4-183
SOTR 4-171
STAGE 4-294, 4-300, 4-308
STKZDN 4-201
STONE1 2-87, 2-88
STONE2 2-87, 2-88
SW 4-158, 4-168, 4-171, 4-179, 5-397
SWAPMF 2-111
SWC 4-182, 4-183
SWELLTEST 4-335
SWF 5-400
SWINIT 4-313
SWIR 4-182, 4-183
SWL 5-403
SWLF 5-403
SWMNI 4-158, 4-168, 4-171
SWR 5-403
SWRF 5-404
SWRO 4-182, 4-183, 5-403
SWROF 5-404
SWT 4-158, 4-171, 4-179
SWT nswt 4-171
SWTF 4-168
SWU 5-403
SWUF 5-405

T
T 4-211, 4-215, 4-224, 4-288, 4-291, 4-303
TABLES 4-145
TAMULT 4-310, 4-311, 4-312, 4-313
TB 4-218
TC 4-192, 10-478, 12-522
TCTBD 5-394
TD 10-478, 10-484, 12-522
TDIFFG 5-415
TDIFFO 5-415
TEMP 4-183, 4-220, 4-337, 4-340, 4-343, 5-389
TEMPERATURE 4-329
TENDPT 4-183
TEX 5-413
THCNTR 2-96
THERMAL 2-119
THVAR 1-21
TITLE1 2-52
TITLE2 2-52
TITLE3 2-52
TKWEXP 5-416
TMR 5-421
TMRF 5-424
TMTH 5-422
TMTHF 5-424
TMX 5-420
TMXF 5-423
TMXYL 5-422
TMXYLF 5-425
TMXYR 5-422
TMXYRF 5-425
TMY 5-420
TMYF 5-423
TMZ 5-421
TMZF 5-424
TOLPV 11-519
TOVER 11-517
TR 5-376
TRACER 12-521
TRACK 2-113
TRACKW 2-115
TRES 2-78, 2-79
TRF 5-380
TS 2-78, 2-79
TTAB 4-288, 4-291
TTHETA 5-378
TTHETF 5-381
TTMR 5-427
TTMTH 5-428

TTMX 5-426
TTMY 5-426
TTMZ 5-427
TVMULT 4-310, 4-311, 4-312, 4-313
TWELFTH 2-75
TWOPT 2-84
TX 5-376
TXF 5-380
TXYL 5-379
TXYLF 5-382
TXYR 5-379
TXYRF 5-382
TY 5-377
TYF 5-380
TZF 5-381
V
VAITS 2-95
VALUE 1-23
VDEST 4-294, 4-300, 4-308
VEAREA 10-489
VEDIST 10-490
VEGO 2-100
VEITS 2-101
VELCTY 2-121
VEOFF 10-488
VEONLY 10-489
VEWO 2-99
VFRAC 4-294, 4-300, 4-308
VG 4-239, 4-249, 4-280
VISCOSITY 4-291
VISGAS 4-215
VISGAS PEDERSON 4-213
VISK 4-198, 4-209, 4-213, 4-228
VISKJ 4-209, 4-213, 4-228
VISOIL 4-211, 4-212, 4-291
VISOIL PEDERSON 4-198, 4-209
VISPE 4-228
VMOD 1-39
VO 4-239, 4-246, 4-251, 4-259, 4-264, 4-266, 4-270, 4-280
VOFAC 4-239, 4-246, 4-251, 4-259, 4-280
VOLUME 4-351
VOMIN 4-210, 4-212, 4-288, 4-291
VOTAB 4-288
VOVER 7-467, 11-517
VSHFT 4-192
VSHFTS 4-297
VW 2-78, 4-310, 4-311, 13-523
VWP 4-310, 4-311

W
WATEROIL 2-83
WATIDEAL 2-120
WBSIM 2-67
WIRCT 4-313
WOC 4-149, 4-151
WTR 10-478, 10-484, 12-522
WTRO 4-246
X
X1 4-280
XCORN 5-359
XI 5-399
XIF 5-401
XREG 5-387
XVAR 1-20
Y
YCORN 5-361
YI 5-398
YIF 5-400
YVAR 1-21
Z
Z 4-224
ZBOT 5-371
ZBOTNE 5-371
ZBOTNW 5-372
ZBOTSW 5-372
ZC 4-192
ZCORN 5-369
ZCORNE 5-369
ZCORNW 5-370
ZCORSW 5-370
ZG 4-239, 4-251, 4-259, 4-264, 4-280
ZLNCOR 5-373
ZO 4-280
ZRO 4-280
ZVAR 1-22


Index
000000Subject Index
A
accelerated successive substitution 2-104
aquifers
fluid influx 10-477
number in each gridblock 5-394
areal sweep 12-521
arithmetic operations
applying to a grid 7-460
applying to a grid (VIP-DUAL) 7-463
array data
arithmetic operations on 1-35, 11-511
automatic generation 1-25
constant value 1-19
define new from previous 1-29
directional variation 1-20
directional variation (X,r) 1-20
directional variation (Y,theta) 1-21
directional variation (Z) 1-22
faults 6-448
fracture model 5-442
full array input 1-23
general format 1-17
gridblock depths 1-26
in grid refinements 11-509
modifying 1-34
options for input 1-16
printing by cross-section 2-82
printing coefficients 3-127
printing corner points 3-131
printing of 3-125
printing of input 3-126
replication of depths 1-33
see also grid data
selective replacement 1-39
suppress checking 2-103
transmissibility 1-42
R2003.4 - Landmark Subject-555

values by layer 1-33

variation in X direction by layer 1-31
variation in Y direction by layer 1-32
variation in Z direction by layer 1-32
writing to map file 2-53
writing to SIMOUT 2-60
average values
how calculated 5-429
Aziz and Govier correlation 2-67
B
Beattie fracture model 5-442
Beattie, Boberg, and McNab 4-346, 4-348
Beggs and Brill correlation 2-67
bibliography A-535
binary interaction coefficient 4-196
for surface separator 4-297
of separators 4-202
of various compounds 4-207
black-oil
laboratory data 4-236
surface separation data with PVT data 4-298
black-oil option 2-84
black-oil reservoirs
how simulated 1-1
boundary flux 10-477
defining regions 10-488
bulk volume tables 2-82
C
capillary gravity equilibrium 2-101
capillary pressure
endpoint scaling 2-87
hold steady 2-93
hysteresis 4-157
Leverett-J calculation 2-92
matrix pseudo 2-111
near-critical 2-102
capillary pressures
how described 4-180
Carter-Tracy method
for estimating acquifer influx 10-478, 10-484
Subject-556 Landmark - R2003.4

Cartesian grids
how specified 2-65
refinement of 11-498
Chemical Reactions 4-349
CO2 solubility 4-232
Coats, George, Chu, and Marcum 13-524
coefficients
binary interaction 4-196
Coefficients of Interpolation Function 4-331
columns
to be scanned in input 1-16
comments
entering as full lines 1-13
entering inline 1-13
compaction option 2-93
compaction regions 1-44, 1-45, 5-390, 5-391, 5-392, 5-393
compaction tables 4-312
components
naming 4-191
properties data for 4-205
composition
overreads,fracture gas 5-400
overreads,fracture oil 5-401
overreads,gas 5-398
overreads,oils 5-399
variation with area 4-226
variation with depth 4-224
compositional model
definition of 1-3
compositional simulator
overview 1-1
compressibility
creep option (time-dependent) 5-418
for each gridblock 5-392
time dependent 2-118
conductive faults
how specified 6-452
connection transmissibility
modification of 5-419
connection transmissibility modification 1-41
constant equilibrium region
gas 4-223
oil 4-223
coordinate system
handedness 11-513
correlations

using function input option 5-429

creep 2-118
creep option 2-118
critical properties
of pure compounds 4-205
cylindrical grids 2-65
how specified 2-66
D
Darcy vertical flow coefficients 2-67
data
formatting requirements 1-12
how organized 1-7
initialization utility 2-49
repeated values 1-12
sample input 1-9
data checking
of corner-point data 2-109
date
how to specify 2-53
datum depth
for output regions 9-475
printing for regions 3-139
dead oil model
definition of 1-3
deck layout 1-7
defaults
how specified 2-49
density
correlation of 4-201
mixing parameter 5-417
dependency
functional 5-429
depth
arithmetic operations on 1-36
effect on composition 4-224
of gridblocks 1-27
replication of 1-33
descriptive information 2-52
diagonal grids 2-69
diffusivity
of oil and gas phase 2-112
dimensions
how specified for model 2-49

directional relative permeability 1-29

drainage
secondary 4-176
drainage saturation 4-157
dual porosity/permeability option 2-110
dual-permeability 1-2
dual-porosity 1-2
Dunns and Ross correlation 2-67
E
echo print
how to activate 1-15
endpoint arrays 11-510
endpoints
temperature variations in 4-183
energy balance equation
how solved 13-523
energy minimization 2-102
enthalpy
how calculated for components 4-217
ideal gas state 4-198
enthalpy coefficients
Passut-Danner 4-208
equation of state interpolation 4-324
equilibration
super-critical 2-105
equilibrium
capillary gravity 2-101
vertical 2-99
vertical equilib. fraction 5-410
vertical equilib. fraction (VIP-DUAL) 5-411
equilibrium data
printing 3-132
equilibrium initialization
of water/gas saturation 4-151
equilibrium regions 5-396
for gas-water option 4-149
for three-phase 4-147
how initialized 4-145
exchange saturation tables
for VIP-DUAL 5-414
external files
how to include 1-14
extra regions

for assigning gridblocks 5-386
F
fault data
arbitrary gridblock connections 6-453
arbitrary gridblock connections (VIP-DUAL) 6-455
how input 6-448
overview 6-445
printing of 3-132
fault modeling 2-98
fault shift
how applied 6-451
faults
automatic generation of 6-458
conductive 6-452
connection from corner-point data 2-108
five-spot pattern
how specified 2-71
flash calculation 2-104
flow
complete 360 flow 2-98
flow rate arrays
writing to spreadsheet 2-120
flow trajectories 12-521
fluid composition
initial 4-222
fluid properties
constants 2-78
general requirements for 1-6
fluid tracking 2-113, 5-416
flux
at boundaries 10-477
FORTRAN units 1-7
fracture
porosity/pore volume 5-374
fracture blocks
depth 5-373
fracture compaction regions 5-390
fracture compressibility 5-392
fracture modeling 4-345
fracture option 2-118
fracture pressure
overreads 5-399
fracture saturation

overreads 5-399
fracture transmissibility regions 5-393
fracture water induced rock compaction regions 5-391
fractured reservoirs
how modeled 1-2
fractures
hydraulic fracture option 4-323
permeability of 5-379
transfer to, from matrix 4-321
fracturing
effect on porosity 4-346
free field format
explained 1-11
function input option 5-429
functional dependencies 5-429
G
gas composition
constant equilibrium region 4-223
gas hysteresis 4-173
gas phase relative permeability hysteresis 2-91
gas phase viscosity
how modeled 4-213
gas plant
input data for 4-230
gas relative permeability hysteresis 4-173
gas remobilization 4-175
gas-oil capillary pressure hysteresis 2-90
gas-oil drainage 4-322
gas-oil normalized saturations 5-405
gas-oil saturation
for fracture 4-169
gas-oil saturation tables 4-163
gas-water option 2-83, 4-163
geological descriptions
data requirements for 1-6
Gibbs energy minimization 2-102
grid data
arrays of 5-355
see also array data
grid patterns
how setup 2-68
grids
360 flow 2-98

arithmetic operations on 7-460

arithmetic operations on (VIP-DUAL) 7-463
boundary flux 10-477
Cartesian 2-65
coarsen 8-469
compaction regions 1-44, 1-45, 5-390, 5-391, 5-392, 5-393
compressibility, per gridblock 5-392
corner point X 5-359
corner point Y 5-361
cylindrical 2-66
data checking 2-109
depth to corner points 5-368
dimensions of 5-358
directional relative permeability 1-29
extra regions 5-386
fault data 6-448
faulting in 2-98
fracture blocks 2-118
fracture imbibition saturation table 5-384
fracture primary saturation table 5-383
general modeling requirements 1-4
geometry of 2-65
gridblock center initialization 2-94
gridblock depth 1-26
how calculated 1-27
gridblock transmissibility 1-42
gros stratum thickness, depth corner point 5-365
gross stratum thickness 5-363
gross stratum thickness, corner point 5-364
gross thickness 5-363
gross thickness, corner point 5-364
imbibition saturation table 5-383
net stratum thickness, non corner point 5-366
net thickness, non corner point 5-365
non corner point
depth to center of gridblock 5-368
depth to top of gridblock 5-368
non-corner point Y/theta 5-361
number of linear acquifers 5-394
output regions 5-385
override values in grid refinement 11-517
pinchout connections 11-518
pinchout modeling 2-97
porosity/pore volume 5-374
primary saturation table 5-382
radial 2-66

rectangular 2-65
refinement, minimum radius 11-515
rock properties 5-382
root 11-514
saturation-dependent functions 5-402
temperature dependency 5-388
thermal conductivity 5-441
thickness 2-96
thickness ratio 5-366, 5-367
value override 7-464
value override (VIP-DUAL) 7-467
Griffith, Lau, Hon, and Pearson correlation 2-67
H
Hagedorn and Brown correlation 2-67
harmonic integration 2-107
heat capacity
of rock 4-348
variations 5-443
heat loss
data specification 13-525
heterogeneous reservoirs
how modeled 1-2
homogeneous reservoirs
gridding 2-68
hydraulic fracture option 2-118, 4-323
hydrocarbon pore volume table 2-82
hydrocarbons
tracked 2-113
hysteresis
gas 4-173
gas phase relative permeability 2-91
gas relative permeability 4-173
gas-oil capillary pressure 2-90
how specified 4-185
oil 4-171
oil phase relative permeability 2-91
tolerances 2-92
water-oil capillary pressure 2-89

I
ideal gas state enthalpy 4-198
imbibition relative permeability 4-157
imbibition saturation 4-157
immiscible flow
how modeled 1-2
include files
how to specify 1-14
influx data
printing of 3-133
influx option 10-477
initial composition 4-222
initial reservoir temperature
how specified 2-79
initialization
nonequilibrium 2-94
initialization arrays
printing 3-134
initialization data
date 2-53
defaults 2-49
first card 2-49
last card 2-53
title 2-52
what it includes 2-47
initialization module
explanation of 1-1
initialization region reports 2-82
input data
array options 1-16
columns to be scanned 1-16
continued lines 1-16
formatting 1-12
how organized 1-7
repeated values 1-12
skipping lines 1-15
input/output
diagram of 1-8
interations
maximum allowable 2-104
interfacial tension 2-102

K
kPa 1-5
k-values
equilibrium, function of pressure 4-277
example of input 4-286
L
laboratory data
for black-oil 4-236
laboratory units 2-82
Leverett J-function 2-92
line continuation
in input data 1-16
lines per page
how to specify 1-16
local grid refinement (LGR) 11-497
Lohrenz-Bray-Clark correlation 4-209, 4-215
M
map file
how written 2-53
matrix fracture exchange transmissibility 5-412
matrix pseudo capillary pressure 2-111
matrix-fracture diffusion
for VIP-DUAL 5-415
matrix-fracture transfer 4-321
metric units 2-81
miscibility
transition zones 2-117
miscibility pressure 2-117
miscible data
pressure table 4-318
solvent molecular weight 4-320
solvent PVT properties 4-317
miscible flood data 4-315
miscible option 2-116
mobility weighting 2-84
mole fraction
weighting 2-84

multiple reservoirs
in same model 4-145
multipliers
for transmissibility 5-419
N
named fault/region transmissibility multiplier 1-45
near-critical fluid properties 2-102
Newton-Raphson method 2-104
nine-point finite difference approximation 2-85
nine-spot pattern
how specified 2-71
non-Darcy flow behavior 4-323
nonequilibrium initialization 2-94
numbers
how entered 1-12
O
off-band connections 2-97
oil composition
constant equilibrium region 4-223
oil density
how computed 4-215
oil hysteresis 4-171
oil phase relative permeability hysteresis 2-91
oil phase viscosity
how modeled 4-209
oil-vapor phase behavior 2-119
OMEGA data
for surface separation 4-296
Orkiszewski correlation 2-67
output regions
assign separator batteries to 9-474
assigning names to 9-473
for multiple groups of output data 5-385
for VIP-DUAL 5-388
specify datum depth 9-475
overreads
fracture gas composition 5-400
fracture oil composition 5-401
fracture pressure and saturation 5-399
gas composition 5-398

oil composition 5-399

option overview 7-459
pressure and saturation 5-397
P
parallel computing 14-529
Passut-Danner ideal gas state enthalpy coefficients 4-208
patterns
in grids 2-68
Pedersen viscosity correlation 4-228
Pederson correlation 4-209
Peng-Robinson equation of state 4-188, 4-199
permeability
normalized relative endpoints 5-408
of fractures 5-379
relative 1-29
X/R direction 5-376
Y/theta direction 5-377
Z direction 5-378
permeability behavior
how modelled 4-348
phase equilibrium
calculation of 2-102
phase stability test 2-102
pinchouts
automatic detection of 6-458
nonstandard connections for 2-97
warning messages 3-132
polymer flooded reservoirs
how modeled 1-3
polymer injection 2-119
pore volume
modification options 7-459
pore volume calculation 2-107
pore volume table
for hydrocarbons 2-82
porosity
dual 2-110
porosity deformation model 4-346
pressure
overreads 5-397
pressure table
for miscible data 4-318
printing

all none 3-125

by cross-sections 2-82
control options summarized 3-125
corner-point data 3-131
echo print 1-15
equilibrium data 3-132
fault data 3-132
individual data groups 3-126
influx data 3-133
initialization arrays 3-134
initialization region reports 2-82
input arrays 3-126
lines per page 1-16
of coefficient arrays 3-127
PVT properties 3-131
properties
of components 4-205
pseudo components 2-103
pseudo-relative permeability
vertical equilibrium 4-179
PVT interpolation 2-103
PVT properties
black-oil laboratory data 4-236
equation of state 4-200
equation of state for 4-188
for black oil 4-234
gas-water option 4-249
how correlated (dead oil) 4-290
how input (dead oil) 4-287
input multiple tables 5-384, 5-385
mixing rules 4-192
non-EOS 4-208
printing of 3-131
printing of tables 3-139, 3-141, 3-143
solvent 4-317
R
radial grids 2-65
flow in 2-98
how specified 2-66
Redlich-Kwong equation of state 4-188, 4-199
refinement
of grids 11-497

region names
printing of 3-139
region reports
for initialization 2-82
regions
see output regions, extra regions
relative permeability
from two-phase saturation table 4-155
hysteresis 4-157
hysteresis tolerance 2-92
hysteresis, gas phase 2-91
hysteresis, oil phase 2-91
near-critical 2-102
of water, gas-dependent 4-167
of water, gas-dependent, for fracture 4-170
saturation weighted interpolation 2-89
scaling of endpoints 2-87
two-phase 4-180
using Stone method 2-87
repeated values
how entered 1-12
restart record
defined/how written 1-7
rock characteristics
data requirements for 1-6
rock heat capacity 4-348
rock properties
assignment of 5-382
root grid 11-514
run date 2-53
run title 2-52
S
sand-shale fluid exchange 5-393
saturation
equilibrium initialization 4-151
for fracture (gas-oil) 4-169
for fracture (water-oil) 4-168
gas-oil 4-163
gas-oil, normalized 5-405
initialization 2-95
overreads 5-397
printing of tables 3-139, 3-141, 3-143
water-oil 4-158

water-oil, normalized 5-403

Saturation pressure
saturation pressure
constant by region 4-147
for VIP-ENCORE 4-151, 4-152
printing of 3-132
saturation pressures
gas-water option 4-148, 4-149
saturation table
fracture imbibition, for grids 5-384
fracture primary, for grids 5-383
imbibition, for grids 5-383
primary, for grids 5-382
saturation-dependent functions 4-179
for gridblocks 5-402
secondary drainage 4-176
segregated flow 4-160, 4-166, 4-179
separator battery assignments
printing of 3-139
separator data
printing of 3-139
separator facilities
binary interaction coefficient 4-297
black-oil data input 4-305
data for (VIP-COMP) 4-294
default k-values/compressibility 4-299
equation of state data 4-294
k-value input 4-299
k-value table/PVT data 4-306
OMEGA data 4-296
test data input 4-303
separator facitilies
volume shift factor 4-297
separators
binary interaction coefficient of 4-202
seven-spot pattern
1/6 of, how specified 2-76
how specified 2-74
shale capacity
for turbidite models 5-395
SIMOUT map file
how written 2-60
SIMTECH method 4-348

skip data
how to specify 1-15
Soave-Redlich-Kwong equation of state 4-188, 4-199
solubility
of CO2 4-232
solvent molecular weight 4-320
specific heat capacity
spreadsheet file
writing to 2-120
Standing-Katz density correlation 4-201
Stone method 2-87
Stone Model 4-155
streamlines of velocity 12-521
summary records
how written 1-7
super-critical equilibration 2-105
surface tension
ratio tables for 4-321
T
temperature
dependency 5-388
initial
how specified 2-79
temperature-dependent endpoints 4-183
thermal conductivity
how specified 5-441
thickness
use in calculating block properties 2-96
Thomas, Dixon, and Pierson 1-2
three-phase reservoir simulator
overview 1-2
time
conversion constant for turbidite models 5-394
title
of run 2-52
Todd and Longstaff option 4-315
tracer tests
analysis of 12-521
tracking
of fluids 2-113, 5-416
of hydrocarbons 2-113

of water 2-115
water types 2-115
transition block oil 2-114
transmissibility
diagonal 5-378
for local grid refinements 11-514
matrix fracture exchange 5-412
modification for connection 5-419
modification options 7-459
multipliers 1-42
override in grid refinement 11-517
use of permeability to calculate 5-376
transmissibility calculation 2-107
Transmissibility Regions 5-392
transmissibility regions 5-392
trapezoidal grids 2-65
trapped hydrocarbon saturation 4-157
turbidite reservoir option 5-393
two phase gas-water option 2-83
two phase water-oil option 2-83
two-phase relative permeability
how described 4-180
two-point scaling 2-87
two-point upstream component mole fraction weighting 2-84
two-point upstream mobility weighting 2-84
U
units
laboratory 2-82
metric 2-81
type allowed/conventions 1-5
utility data 2-49
V
Van Everdingen and Hurst analytical solution
for aquifer influx 10-478
vapor phase
behavior of 2-120
vdb 2-53
vdb file
how written 2-53
velocity dependent relative permeability 2-121

vertical equilibrium 2-99

vertical equilibrium fraction 5-410
for VIP-DUAL 5-411
vertical flow coefficients 2-67
Vinsome and Westerveld 13-523
VIP- ENCORE
surface separation/black oil PVT 4-298
VIP-COMP
formulations allowed 1-5
overview of 1-1
surface separation data 4-294
VIP-CORE
data overview 1-1
features shared by other models 1-4
VIP-DUAL
arbitrary fault connections 6-455
arithmetic operations on grids 7-463
exchange saturation tables 5-414
fracture compaction regions 5-390
fracture compressibility 5-392
fracture imbibition saturation table 5-384
fracture porosity/pore volume 5-374
fracture primary saturation table 5-383
how activated 2-110
matrix-fracture diffusion 5-415
output regions 5-388
overview 1-2
value override in grids 7-467
vertical equilibrium fraction 5-411
VIP-ENCORE
formulations allowed 1-5
initial fluid composition 4-286
k-value input example 4-286
k-value tables 4-277
overview 1-2
saturation pressures for 4-151, 4-152
VIP-POLYMER
how activated 2-119
overview 1-3
VIP-THERM
overview 1-3
viscosity
calculations 2-116
mixing parameter 5-417
Pederson correlation 4-228
volume shift factor

for surface separators 4-297
W
Warren and Root theory 1-2, 2-110
water induced rock compaction 4-313
water induced rock compaction regions 5-390
water tracking 2-115
waterflood projects
design and analysis 12-521
water-oil capillary pressure hysteresis 2-89
water-oil hysteresis
how specified 4-185
water-oil normalized saturations 5-403
water-oil option 2-83
water-oil saturation 4-158
for fracture 4-168
wellbore simulation 2-65, 2-67
wells
Z
Zudkevitch- Joffe-Redlich-Kwong equation of state 4-188
Zudkevitch-Joffe equation of state 4-199

Vip Core

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Vip Core

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Vip Core

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

VIP-CORE

Part No. 159681 R2003.4

Landmark Graphics Corporation

R2003.4 - Landmark iii

1.5.1.4 Read Array Data from a VDB File (VDB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

2.2.1.3 Descriptive Run Information (TITLEn) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52

2.2.13.1 Dual-Porosity/Permeability Option (DUAL) . . . . . . . 2-110

R2003.4 - Landmark vii

3.4.1 Print Rescaled Saturation Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-141

viii Landmark - R2003.4

4.4.8 Standing-Katz Density Coefficients (STKZDN) (VIP-COMP) . . 4-201

4.7 Dead Oil PVT Property Data (VIP-THERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-287

4.17.10 Automatic Generation of Composition Entries of EOS

5.7 Depth - Corner Point Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-368

xii Landmark - R2003.4

5.23 Rock Compressibility (CR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-392

R2003.4 - Landmark xiii

5.32.3.2 Krw at Residual Oil (KRWRO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-408

xiv Landmark - R2003.4

5.41.7 Right Diagonal Direction Transmissibility Multiplier

6.6 Arbitrary Gridblock Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-453

xvi Landmark - R2003.4

R2003.4 - Landmark xvii

xviii Landmark - R2003.4

000000About This Manual

The primary purpose of this Reference Manual is to document the input

VIP-ENCORE®: Multi-component Black-Oil Model

VIP-COMP®: Equation-of-State Compositional Model

VIP-DUAL®: Dual-Porosity, Dual-Permeability Model

VIP-POLYMER™: Polymer Flooding Model

VIP-THERM™ Thermal Compositional or Dead Oil Model

These modules work together to provide total flexibility in reservoir

R2003.4 - Landmark xix

■ Chapter 1 is an overview of the data required for VIP-CORE; it also

Data Formatting Conventions

DATE day mo yr.

More complex formats may include parentheses to indicate optional

array1 (array2 ...)

PRINT ARRAYS ALL

For a complete discussion of data formatting, see Section 1.5.

■ VIP-EXECUTIVE Reference Manual.

■ VIP-EXECUTIVE Technical Reference Manual.

R2003.4 - Landmark xxi

xxii Landmark - R2003.4

The documentation for entering the initialization data for VIP-COMP,

1.1.1 VIP-COMP Overview

R2003.4 - Landmark 1-1

nonhydrocarbon components. In addition, special techniques are

1.1.2 VIP-ENCORE Overview

VIP-ENCORE is able to treat water-oil or gas-water two-phase problems

1.1.3 VIP-DUAL Overview

NOTE: VIP-DUAL is available as a separately licensed option.

The VIP-DUAL option simulates the performance of reservoirs which are

VIP-DUAL must be used in conjunction with either VIP-ENCORE or VIP-

1-2 Landmark - R2003.4

1.1.4 VIP-POLYMER Overview

NOTE: VIP-POLYMER is available as a separately licensed option.

The VIP-POLYMER option simulates the performance of polymer flooded

Other polymer dependent properties are: polymer adsorption,

1.1.5 VIP-THERM Overview

Method 2: 10 312.5 215 16.5